Document Centre C450/C360/C250 User Guide

Document Centre C450/C360/C250 User Guide
Document Centre C450/C360/C250
User Guide
Microsoft, MS-DOS, Windows, Windows NT, Microsoft Network, and Windows Server are
either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Novell, NetWare, IntranetWare and NDS are
registered trademarks of Novell, Inc. in the United States and other countries.
Adobe, Acrobat, PostScript, PostScript3, and PostScript Logo are
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Apple, AppleTalk, EtherTalk, LocalTalk, Macintosh, MacOS and TrueType are
trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
HP, HPGL, HPGL/2, and HP-UX are registered trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Corporation.
All product/brand names are trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective holders.
Loss of Data on the Hard Disk Drive
Saved data may be lost if hard disk of the machine breaks down due to external shocks or if the power is
accidentally cut off in a manner not following the methods listed in manuals or other documentations. Fuji Xerox
is not responsible for such data loss and any consequence caused by such data loss.
Damage related to computer virus
Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due to infection of computer virus.
Important
(1) This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual may not be copied or
modified in whole or part, without the written consent of the publisher.
(2) Parts of this manual are subject to change without prior notice.
(3) We welcome any comments on ambiguities, errors, omissions, or missing pages.
(4) Never attempt any procedure on the machine that is not specifically described in this manual. Unauthorized
operation can cause faults or accidents. Fuji Xerox is not liable for any problems resulting from unauthorized
operation of the equipment.
An export of this product is strictly controlled in accordance with Laws concerning Foreign Exchange and Foreign
Trade of Japan and/or the export control regulations of the United States.
Xerox, The Document Company and Ethernet are registered trademarks.
DocuWorks and CentreWare are trademarks.
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
1
Before Using the Machine ...................................................................................... 13
Preface ...................................................................................................................... 14
Related Information Sources ..................................................................................... 15
Guides Supplied.................................................................................................... 15
Using This Guide ....................................................................................................... 16
Prerequisite Knowledge ........................................................................................ 16
Organization of this Guide .................................................................................... 16
Conventions .......................................................................................................... 18
Safety Notes .............................................................................................................. 19
WARNING - Electrical Safety Information............................................................. 20
Laser Safety Information....................................................................................... 20
Operational Safety Information ............................................................................. 21
Maintenance Information ...................................................................................... 22
Ozone Safety Information ..................................................................................... 22
For Consumables.................................................................................................. 22
Radio Frequency Emissions ................................................................................. 22
Product Safety Certification .................................................................................. 23
The Objectives of the International Energy Star Program ......................................... 24
2 Sided Feature (for models with the 2 sided feature installed)............................ 24
Power saving feature (Lower Power mode/Sleep mode)...................................... 24
About License............................................................................................................ 25
OpenSSL .............................................................................................................. 25
SSLeay ................................................................................................................. 26
Heimdal................................................................................................................. 27
JPEG Code ........................................................................................................... 27
Illegal Copies and Printouts....................................................................................... 28
2
Product Overview .................................................................................................... 29
Machine Components................................................................................................ 30
Main Body ............................................................................................................. 30
Power On / Off........................................................................................................... 36
Powering On ......................................................................................................... 36
Powering Off ......................................................................................................... 36
About the Circuit Breaker .......................................................................................... 38
Power Saver Mode .................................................................................................... 39
Changing the Power Saver Mode Change Interval............................................... 39
Exiting the Power Saver Mode.............................................................................. 41
Control Panel............................................................................................................. 42
Customizing of the Control Panel ......................................................................... 44
1
3
Copy ..........................................................................................................................45
Copying Procedure.....................................................................................................46
Step 1 Loading Documents ...................................................................................46
Step 2 Selecting Features .....................................................................................48
Step 3 Entering the Quantity..................................................................................49
Step 4 Starting the Copy Job.................................................................................49
Step 5 Confirming the Copy Job in the Job Status ................................................50
Stopping the Copy Job ...............................................................................................51
Basic Copying ............................................................................................................52
Reduce/Enlarge (Making Enlarged/Reduced Copies) ...........................................52
Paper Supply (Selecting the Paper to Use for Copying)........................................55
Output Color (Selecting the Color to Copy) ...........................................................57
Copy Position/Margin Shift (Shifting the Image Copy Position).............................59
Border Erase (Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows in the document) .................59
Copy Density (Adjusting the Copy Density)...........................................................60
Image Quality .............................................................................................................61
Image Quality Presets (Selecting Image Quality) ..................................................61
Original Type (Selecting the Image Quality Type for the Document) ....................62
Lighten/Darken /Contrast (Adjusting the Copy Density and Contrast)...................63
Sharpness/Color Saturation (Adjusting the Sharpness and Color Saturation of
Images)..................................................................................................................64
Auto Exposure (Erasing the Background Color of Documents) ............................64
Color Balance (Adjusting Color Balance) ..............................................................65
Color Shift (Adjusting Color Tone) .........................................................................65
Scan Options..............................................................................................................66
2 Sided (Making 2 sided Copies)...........................................................................66
Bound Originals (Copying Facing Pages onto Separate Sheets)..........................67
2 Sided Book Copy (Making 2 Sided Copies of Facing Pages).............................68
Original Size (Specifying the Scan Size for the Document)...................................69
Mixed Size Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents Simultaneously) ........70
Border Erase (Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows of the Document).................71
Copy Position/Margin Shift (Shifting the Image Copy Position).............................71
Image Rotation (Making Copies with the Image Rotated Vertically or
Horizontally)...........................................................................................................73
Mirror Image/Negative Image (Making Reversed Copies of Images)....................74
Original Orientation (Specify the Orientation of Loaded Documents)....................75
Output Format ............................................................................................................76
Copy Output/Stapling (Specifying Copy Output/Stapling for Output) ....................76
Booklet Creation (Creating a Booklet) ...................................................................77
Covers (Attaching a Cover to Copies) ...................................................................79
Transparency Separators (Inserting Blank Sheets between Transparencies) ......80
Multiple-Up (Copying Multiple Sheets onto One Sheet) ........................................81
Poster (Making Enlarged Copies Spread over Multiple Sheets) ...........................82
Repeat Image (Making Multiple Copies on One Sheet) ........................................83
Annotation (Adding Stamp/Date/Page Number to Copies)....................................83
2
Table of Contents
Set Numbering (Printing Control Number on the Background)............................. 87
Double Copy (Making Several Copies of the Same Image on one Sheet of
Paper) ................................................................................................................... 90
Job Assembly ............................................................................................................ 91
Build Job (Making Copies of Documents with Different Settings in a Single
Operation) ............................................................................................................. 91
Sample Set (Checking the Finished Output of the Copy) ..................................... 93
Document > 50 sheets (Adding Originals) ............................................................ 93
Delete Outside/Delete Inside (Deleting Outside/Inside of the Selected Area
when Copying) ...................................................................................................... 94
4
Fax ............................................................................................................................ 97
Fax Procedure ........................................................................................................... 98
Step 1 Loading Documents................................................................................... 98
Step 2 Selecting Features................................................................................... 100
Step 3 Specifying the Destination ....................................................................... 101
Step 4 Starting the Fax Job ................................................................................ 102
Step 5 Confirming the Fax Job in the Job Status................................................ 103
Stopping the Fax ..................................................................................................... 104
About Internet Fax ................................................................................................... 105
Outline of Internet Fax ........................................................................................ 105
Differences between iFax and Regular Fax Features......................................... 107
Receiving and Sending iFax ............................................................................... 108
Useful Features................................................................................................... 109
Basic Features......................................................................................................... 113
iFax/Fax (Selecting iFax/Fax) ............................................................................. 113
Next Destination (Sending Faxes to Multiple Recipients) ................................... 113
Specifying Destination Using the Address Book................................................. 114
Speed Dialing (Entering Numbers Using Address Number) ............................... 115
Specifying Destination Using One Touch Buttons .............................................. 115
Specifying Destination Using the Keyboard Screen ........................................... 116
Entering Specific Symbols .................................................................................. 116
2 Sided Originals (Transmitting 2 Sided Documents) ......................................... 117
Original Type (Selecting the Image Quality Type for the Document).................. 118
Resolution (Specify the Scanning Resolution).................................................... 118
Image Quality .......................................................................................................... 120
Original Type (Selecting the Original Type) ........................................................ 120
Density Level (Adjusting Density Level).............................................................. 120
Scan Options ........................................................................................................... 121
2 Sided Originals (Transmitting 2 Sided Originals) ............................................. 121
Bound Originals (Transmitting Facing Pages on Separate Sheets) ................... 121
Scan Size (Specifying the Scan Size for the Original) ........................................ 122
Mixed Size Originals (Scanning Different Size Originals Simultaneously).......... 122
Reduce/Enlarge (Specifying the Scan Ratio for the Original) ............................. 123
3
Send Options............................................................................................................124
Communication Mode (Selecting a Communication Mode).................................124
Priority Send/Delayed Start (Setting Send Priority/Specifying Send Time) .........126
Send Header (Adding Your Name and Phone Number to Faxes).......................127
Cover Note (Transmitting Documents With a Cover Page) .................................127
iFax Comment (Inserting Comments in Body Text).............................................128
Transmission Report/Read Status (Printing Transmission Report/Receiving
Fax Transmission Result Mail) ............................................................................129
Recipient Print Sets (Printing Multiple Copies at the Remote Machine)..............130
Remote Mailbox (Using Remote Mailbox) ...........................................................131
F Code (Using F Code Transmission) .................................................................132
iFax Profile (Specifying iFax Profiles) ..................................................................134
On-hook/Others........................................................................................................136
Polling (Retrieving Documents from Remote Machines) .....................................136
Storing for Polling (Allowing Remote Machines to Retrieve Documents from
Your Machine) .....................................................................................................137
On-hook (Confirming Remote Machine Response Prior to Transmission)..........139
Broadcast .................................................................................................................140
Broadcast Send (Transmitting to Multiple Recipients).........................................140
Relay Broadcast (Transmitting Documents Through a Relay Station) ................140
Remote Relay Broadcast (Performing Relay Broadcast to Remote Locations) ..143
About Models Available for Relay Broadcast Send .............................................147
About Receiving Faxes ............................................................................................149
Switching between Auto Receive and Manual Receive.......................................149
Using Auto Receive .............................................................................................149
Using Manual Receive.........................................................................................150
About Facsimile Information Services ......................................................................151
Using the Receiver ..............................................................................................151
When Not Using a Receiver ................................................................................152
5
Scan.........................................................................................................................153
Scanning Procedure.................................................................................................154
Step 1 Loading Documents .................................................................................154
Step 2 Selecting Features ...................................................................................156
Step 3 Starting the Scan Job ...............................................................................157
Step 4 Confirming the Scan Job in the Job Status ..............................................158
Step 5 Saving the Scanned Data.........................................................................159
Stopping the Scan Job .............................................................................................160
E-mail .......................................................................................................................161
Address Book ......................................................................................................161
Keyboard .............................................................................................................162
Add Sender..........................................................................................................163
Delete ..................................................................................................................163
Change Settings ..................................................................................................163
Detailed Settings..................................................................................................163
4
Table of Contents
Scan to Mailbox ....................................................................................................... 165
Document List ..................................................................................................... 165
Job Templates ......................................................................................................... 166
Scan to FTP/SMB.................................................................................................... 167
Transferring Protocol .......................................................................................... 167
Address Book...................................................................................................... 167
Detailed Settings................................................................................................. 168
Delete.................................................................................................................. 168
Keyboard............................................................................................................. 169
Specifying a Forwarding Destination .................................................................. 169
Basic Scanning........................................................................................................ 170
Output Color (Selecting the Scanning Color)...................................................... 170
2 Sided Originals (Scans Both Sides of the Document) ..................................... 171
Original Type (Select the Document Type)......................................................... 172
File Format (Select the Scanned Data Type)...................................................... 172
Image Quality .......................................................................................................... 174
Photograph Scanning (Scanning a Color Photograph)....................................... 174
Lighten/Darken/Contrast (Adjusting Scan Density and Contrast) ....................... 175
Sharpness (Adjusting Document Sharpness) ..................................................... 175
Auto Exposure (Erasing the Background Color of Documents).......................... 175
Background Suppression (Suppressing the Document Background)................. 176
Color Space (Specifying Color Space) ............................................................... 176
Scan Options ........................................................................................................... 177
Scan Resolution (Specifying a Scanning Resolution)......................................... 177
2 Sided Originals (Scanning Both Sides of the Document) ................................ 177
Bound Originals (Scanning Facing Pages onto Separate Sheets) ..................... 178
Scan Size (Specifying a Scanning Size)............................................................. 179
Mixed Size Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents Simultaneously)...... 179
Border Erase (Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows in the Document) .............. 180
Reduce/Enlarge (Specifying a Scanning Ratio).................................................. 181
Output Format ......................................................................................................... 182
Image Compression (Specifying an Image Compression Ratio When
Scanning)............................................................................................................ 182
Read Status (MDN)............................................................................................. 183
Split Send (Sending in Sections) ........................................................................ 183
Document Name (Specifying a Filename to Save to) ......................................... 183
Login Name......................................................................................................... 184
Password ............................................................................................................ 184
Meta Data ........................................................................................................... 184
6
Check Mailbox ....................................................................................................... 185
Check Mailbox Procedure ....................................................................................... 186
Step 1 Opening the [Check Mailbox] Screen ...................................................... 186
Step 2 Selecting the Mailbox .............................................................................. 186
Step 3 Checking/Selecting Mailbox Documents ................................................. 186
5
Step 4 Checking Mailbox Documents..................................................................187
Selecting a Mailbox ..................................................................................................188
Checking/Selecting Mailbox Documents ..................................................................189
Printing/Deleting Documents in Mailbox...................................................................190
Configuring/Starting Job Flow ..................................................................................191
Creating a Job Flow.............................................................................................191
About Job Flow Restrictions ................................................................................195
7
Job Flow Sheets .....................................................................................................197
Job Flow Procedure .................................................................................................198
Step 1 Opening the [Job Flow Sheets] Screen....................................................198
Step 2 Selecting a Job Flow ................................................................................198
Step 3 Confirming/Changing a Job Flow .............................................................198
Step 4 Starting a Job Flow...................................................................................199
Job Flow List ............................................................................................................200
Job Flow Sheet Filtering ......................................................................................200
Confirming/Changing Job Flow ................................................................................201
8
Stored Programming..............................................................................................203
Stored Programming Overview ................................................................................204
Registering/Deleting/Renaming Stored Programming .............................................205
Registering Stored Programming ........................................................................205
Deleting Stored Programming .............................................................................206
Naming/Renaming Stored Programming.............................................................206
Recalling Stored Programming ................................................................................207
9
Computer Operations ............................................................................................209
Overview of Features ...............................................................................................210
Print Driver...........................................................................................................210
Network Scanner Utility 2 ....................................................................................211
CentreWare Internet Services .............................................................................212
Printing .....................................................................................................................215
E-mail Print...............................................................................................................216
Setup ...................................................................................................................216
Sending E-mails...................................................................................................216
Importing Scanned Data...........................................................................................217
Importing from a TWAIN Compatible Application ................................................217
Importing from Mailbox Viewer 2 .........................................................................219
Importing using CentreWare Internet Services....................................................221
Sending a Fax ..........................................................................................................223
Registering a Destination.....................................................................................223
10 Paper and Other Media ..........................................................................................225
Paper Types .............................................................................................................226
6
Table of Contents
Paper Type ......................................................................................................... 226
Loading Paper ......................................................................................................... 232
Loading Paper in Trays 1 to 4............................................................................. 232
Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass) ...................................................................... 233
Changing the Size of Paper in Trays....................................................................... 235
Changing Paper Settings......................................................................................... 237
11 Setups..................................................................................................................... 239
System Settings Procedure ..................................................................................... 240
Step 1 Entering System Administration Mode .................................................... 240
Step 2 Entering the System Administrator UserID and Password ...................... 240
Step 3 Selecting the Operation Mode from the System Administrator Menu...... 240
Step 4 Selecting an Item from the [System Settings] Screen ............................. 241
Step 5 Setting the Feature .................................................................................. 242
Step 6 Exiting System Administration Mode ....................................................... 242
System Settings Menu List ...................................................................................... 243
Entering Text ........................................................................................................... 252
Common Settings .................................................................................................... 253
Machine Clock/Timers ........................................................................................ 253
Audio Tones........................................................................................................ 256
Screen Defaults .................................................................................................. 258
Paper Tray Attributes .......................................................................................... 259
Set Numbering .................................................................................................... 263
Image Quality Adjustment................................................................................... 264
Reports ............................................................................................................... 266
Maintenance ....................................................................................................... 268
Other Settings ..................................................................................................... 269
Copy Mode Settings ................................................................................................ 275
Basic Copying Tab.............................................................................................. 275
Copy Defaults ..................................................................................................... 277
Copy Control ....................................................................................................... 281
Original Size Defaults ......................................................................................... 284
Reduce/Enlarge Presets ..................................................................................... 284
Custom Colors .................................................................................................... 285
Network Settings ..................................................................................................... 286
Port Settings ....................................................................................................... 286
Protocol Settings................................................................................................. 287
Machine E-mail Address/Host Name .................................................................. 287
POP3 Server Settings......................................................................................... 287
SMTP Server Settings ........................................................................................ 287
Domain Settings.................................................................................................. 287
Remote Authentication Server ............................................................................ 288
PKI (Public Key) Settings.................................................................................... 289
Other Settings ..................................................................................................... 289
7
Print Mode Settings ..................................................................................................290
Allocate Memory ..................................................................................................290
Other Settings......................................................................................................292
Scan Mode Settings .................................................................................................295
Basic Scanning Tab.............................................................................................295
Scan Defaults ......................................................................................................296
Scan-to-FTP/SMB Defaults .................................................................................298
Scan Size Defaults ..............................................................................................298
Output Size Defaults............................................................................................299
Reduce/Enlarge Presets......................................................................................299
Other Settings......................................................................................................300
Fax Mode Settings ...................................................................................................302
Screen Defaults ...................................................................................................302
Fax Defaults.........................................................................................................303
Fax Control ..........................................................................................................304
File Destination / Output Destination ...................................................................307
Reduce/Enlarge Presets......................................................................................308
Scan Size Defaults ..............................................................................................309
Local Terminal Information ..................................................................................309
iFax Control .........................................................................................................311
E-mail/iFax Settings .................................................................................................314
E-mail Defaults ....................................................................................................314
Address Search (Directory Service) ....................................................................315
Other Settings......................................................................................................318
Mailbox/Stored Document Settings ..........................................................................320
Mailbox Settings ..................................................................................................320
Stored Document Settings...................................................................................321
Setup Menu ..............................................................................................................323
Mailbox ................................................................................................................323
Job Flow Sheets ..................................................................................................326
Content Check .....................................................................................................333
Address Book ......................................................................................................334
Group Send .........................................................................................................340
Comments ...........................................................................................................341
Paper Type ..........................................................................................................341
System Administrator Settings .................................................................................342
System Administrator Login ID ............................................................................342
System Administrator Password .........................................................................343
Maximum Login Attempts ....................................................................................343
Login Setup/Auditron Administration ........................................................................344
Create/Check User Accounts ..............................................................................344
Reset User Accounts ...........................................................................................347
System Administrator Copy Meter .......................................................................348
User Details Setup...............................................................................................348
8
Table of Contents
Charge Print Settings.......................................................................................... 350
Fax Billing Data................................................................................................... 351
Password Entry from Control Panel.................................................................... 351
Login Setup/Auditron Mode ................................................................................ 351
12 Job Status .............................................................................................................. 355
Job Status Overview................................................................................................ 356
Checking Executing/Pending Jobs .......................................................................... 357
Checking Completed Jobs....................................................................................... 358
Printing and Deleting Stored Documents ................................................................ 359
Charge Print........................................................................................................ 359
Secure Print ........................................................................................................ 360
Sample Print ....................................................................................................... 362
Delayed Print ...................................................................................................... 363
Public Mailboxes ................................................................................................. 364
Preferentially Printing Pending Print Jobs ............................................................... 365
Handling Error Terminations.................................................................................... 366
13 Machine Status ...................................................................................................... 367
Overview of Machine Status.................................................................................... 368
Machine Status........................................................................................................ 369
Machine Information ........................................................................................... 369
Paper Tray .......................................................................................................... 370
Overwrite Hard Disk............................................................................................ 371
Print Mode........................................................................................................... 371
Fax Receiving Mode ........................................................................................... 373
Billing Meter/Print Report......................................................................................... 374
Billing Meter ........................................................................................................ 374
User Account Billing Meter.................................................................................. 375
Print Report/List .................................................................................................. 376
Automatically Printed Reports/Lists .................................................................... 382
Consumables........................................................................................................... 384
Faults....................................................................................................................... 385
14 Authentication and Auditron Administration...................................................... 387
Overview of Authentication...................................................................................... 388
Users Controlled by Authentication..................................................................... 388
Types of Authentication ...................................................................................... 388
Features Controlled by Authentication................................................................ 389
Authentication for Job Flow Sheet and Mailbox ..................................................... 391
Job Flow Sheet Types ........................................................................................ 391
Types of Mailbox................................................................................................. 394
Linking Job Flow Sheet and Mailbox .................................................................. 397
Overview of Auditron Administration ....................................................................... 400
9
Authentication and Auditron Administration.........................................................400
Manageable Features and Services ....................................................................400
15 Maintenance............................................................................................................407
Replacing Consumables ..........................................................................................408
Replacing Toner Cartridges.................................................................................409
Replacing the Waste Toner Container [B] ...........................................................411
Replacing Drum Cartridges [A1], [A2], [A3], and [A4]..........................................413
Replacing the Staple Cartridge............................................................................416
Cleaning the Machine...............................................................................................419
Cleaning the Exterior ...........................................................................................419
Cleaning Internal Components (Raster Output Scanners) ..................................419
Cleaning the Document Cover and Document Glass ..........................................421
Cleaning the Film and Document Feeder Glass..................................................422
Cleaning the Document Feeder Rollers...............................................................423
Executing Auto Gradation Adjustment .....................................................................424
Printing a Report ......................................................................................................427
16 Problem Solving .....................................................................................................429
Troubleshooting........................................................................................................430
Machine Trouble.......................................................................................................432
Image Quality Problems ...........................................................................................437
Trouble during Copying ............................................................................................443
Unable to Copy ....................................................................................................443
The Copy Result is not What was Expected........................................................444
Trouble during Printing .............................................................................................448
Unable to Print .....................................................................................................448
The Printed Result is not what was Expected .....................................................449
Trouble during Fax ...................................................................................................451
Problems Sending ...............................................................................................451
Receiving Trouble................................................................................................453
Trouble during Scanning ..........................................................................................455
Unable to Scan with the Machine ........................................................................455
Unable to Import Scanned Document into Computer ..........................................456
Unable to Send the Scanned Document over the Network (FTP/SMB) ..............457
Problems with Sending E-mail.............................................................................457
Image not What was Expected ............................................................................458
Error Code................................................................................................................460
Other Errors .........................................................................................................474
Paper Jams ..............................................................................................................475
Paper Jams in Top Left Cover .............................................................................476
Paper Jams in Middle Left Cover.........................................................................477
Paper Jams in Lower Left Cover .........................................................................478
Paper Jams in Trays 1 to 4..................................................................................479
10
Table of Contents
Paper Jams in High Capacity Tray ..................................................................... 479
Paper Jams in Tray 5 (Bypass)........................................................................... 481
Paper Jams in the Duplex Module ...................................................................... 481
Paper Jams in the Finisher ................................................................................. 482
Document Jams....................................................................................................... 486
Stapler Faults .......................................................................................................... 488
17 Appendix ................................................................................................................ 491
Specifications .......................................................................................................... 492
Printable Area.......................................................................................................... 501
Standard Printing Area........................................................................................ 501
Extended Printing Area ....................................................................................... 501
Using PDF Direct Print ............................................................................................ 502
Setting Items for the PDF Direct Print Feature ................................................... 502
PCL Emulation......................................................................................................... 504
HP-GL2 Emulation................................................................................................... 507
HP-GL Settings List ............................................................................................ 507
Hard Clip Area .................................................................................................... 511
Printable Area ..................................................................................................... 512
Auto Layout......................................................................................................... 514
List of Options.......................................................................................................... 521
Cautions and Limitations ......................................................................................... 522
Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the Machine............................................. 522
Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the iFax Feature ...................................... 523
Using the Telephone ............................................................................................... 526
Placing a Call ...................................................................................................... 526
Simple Procedures .................................................................................................. 529
Fax Settings ........................................................................................................ 529
Scan Settings...................................................................................................... 531
Copy Settings...................................................................................................... 531
Common Function Settings................................................................................. 531
18 Glossary ................................................................................................................. 533
Glossary .................................................................................................................. 534
Index.............................................................................................................................. 539
11
1 Before Using the Machine
This chapter contains descriptions about how to use this document, as well as
cautions on using the product safely and legally.
z
Preface .......................................................................................................14
z
Related Information Sources ......................................................................15
z
Using This Guide ........................................................................................16
z
Safety Notes ...............................................................................................19
z
The Objectives of the International Energy Star Program ..........................24
z
About License .............................................................................................25
z
Illegal Copies and Printouts ........................................................................28
1 Before Using the Machine
Preface
Before Using the Machine
Thank you for selecting the Fuji Xerox Document Centre C450/C360/C250.
1
Since the machine is equipped with anti-counterfeit features, in some rare cases,
certain kinds of documents may be unable to copy.
This guide provides all the necessary copy/print/scan/fax operating procedures,
maintenance information like how to clear paper jams, daily care, setting various items,
and precautions.
Please read this guide thoroughly to obtain the best performance on this product. After
reading this guide, be sure to keep it handy for quick reference. It will be useful in case
you forget how to perform operations or if a problem occurs with the machine.
For instructions on configuring your network environment, refer to the Network
Administrator Guide. For information about optional accessories for the printer
functionality, also refer to the guide provided with each optional accessory.
In this manual, safety instructions are preceded by the symbol . Always read and
follow the instructions before performing the required procedures.
As a member of the International Energy Star Program, Fuji Xerox confirms
this product satisfies the requirements for International Energy Star Program
standards.
Fuji Xerox shares the global concern about environmental conservation and has
integrated that concern in its business activities–from research and development to
disposal. We have implemented a number of programs to lessen the burden on the
environment. For example, we have totally eliminated ozone-depleting
chlorofluorocarbons from our manufacturing facilities.
We are committed to leadership in the conservation of resources by reusing and
recycling post-consumer waste material such as paper, cartridges, and parts from our
customer's copiers and printers. Along with our efforts to make environmental values
a part of the Fuji Xerox culture, Document Centre C450/C360/C250 adopts recycled
components that satisfy our strict quality standards.
Important Note:
This equipment will be inoperable when main power fails.
14
Related Information Sources
Related Information Sources
Guides Supplied
We provide the following guides for optimum usage of the machine.
Included Manuals
Several manuals are included with this product. They are referred to as accompanying
manuals.
These accompanying manuals include descriptions on configurations and operation of
the product.
The below manuals are included with the machine.
„User Guide (This Document)
This guide describes all the necessary steps for copy/print/scan/fax, clearing paper
jams, daily care, setting the various items and safety information.
„Network Administrator Guide
This document is aimed toward network administrators, as a guide to setting up the
network environment.
„Quick Reference Guide
Introduces the main features of the machine, as well as simple operating instructions.
„Manual (HTML)
A guide to installing print driver, configuring the printer environment, etc. This manual
is included in the CentreWare Utilities CD-ROM.
Guides for Optional Accessories
Optional accessories are also available for the machine. User Guides are provided with
the optional accessories exclusively for the Document Centre C450/C360/C250. These
User Guides are referred to as "guides for optional accessories". Guides for optional
accessories are provided in two forms, printed or as On-line Help.
Guides for optional accessories describe all the necessary steps for operating optional
accessories and installing software.
15
Before Using the Machine
This section describes the guides provided for the machine.
1
1 Before Using the Machine
Using This Guide
Before Using the Machine
This section describes the organization of this guide.
This guide has been produced for people who operate the Document Centre C450/
C360/C250 on a regular daily basis. When reading this guide, read the chapter that is
of particular relevance to the operation you are performing.
Prerequisite Knowledge
This guide assumes that the operator has a basic knowledge of the operating
environment of the personal computer in use, networking environments, and how to
operate a personal computer.
1
For information about the environment of the personal computer in use, basic
knowledge of networking environments, and how to operate a personal computer, refer
to the manuals provided with the personal computer, operating system, and network
system.
Organization of this Guide
This guide consists of the following chapters.
„1 Before Using the Machine
Describes how to use this document, as well as cautions on using the product safely
and legally.
„2 Product Overview
Describes basic information such as identifying the major components, how to switch
the machine on and off, how to use the touch screen, and how to set the power saver
feature.
„3 Copy
Describes the copy features available in the [Copy] screen.
„4 Fax
Describes the fax features available in the [Fax/Internet Fax] screen.
„5 Scan
Describes scan operations.
„6 Check Mailbox
Describes the mailbox and [Check Mailbox] screen.
„7 Job Flow Sheets
Describes operations using a job flow created by a remote system, as well as the [Job
Flow Sheets] screen.
„8 Stored Programming
Describes the stored programming feature.
16
Using This Guide
„9 Computer Operations
Describes operations performed from a computer, such as printing, importing scan and
sending a fax documents, as well as using CentreWare Internet Services.
Before Using the Machine
„10 Paper and Other Media
Describes the types of paper that can be used on the machine, precautions when
handling paper, and how to load paper in trays
„11 Setups
Describes how to use the system settings.
„12 Job Status
Describes the job status feature.
1
„13 Machine Status
Described the stored programming feature.
„14 Authentication and Auditron Administration
The machine comes equipped with an authorization feature for restricting use of the
machine, as well as administration features to monitor usage statuses.
A system administrator can use the procedure described in this section to change
parameters.
„15 Maintenance
Describes procedures for replacing consumables, cleaning the machine, auto
gradation adjustment, and printing reports/lists.
„16 Problem Solving
Describes troubles that may occur with the machine and their solutions.
„17 Appendix
Describes the specifications, printable area, emulation, optional accessories list,
cautions/restrictions, how to send and receive phone calls, and a list of simple
procedures.
„18 Glossary
A glossary of terms.
17
1 Before Using the Machine
Conventions
Before Using the Machine
z
In this document, "Computer" refers to a personal computer or workstation.
z
The following icons are used in this guide.
Important Indicates important information which you should read.
Note
z
The following conventions are used in this guide:
" "
:The cross-reference is within this manual.
" "
:Refers to names of features, and touch screen messages and input text.
[
1
Indicates additional information on operations or features.
]
:Refers to folders, files, applications, button or menu names displayed in
the touch screen, as well as the names of menus, commands, windows,
or dialog boxes displayed on the computer screen and their button and
menu names.
< > button:Indicates a hardware button on the control panel.
< > key :Indicates a key on the keyboard of the computer.
z
18
For radio buttons, the checked item is the selected item.
Safety Notes
Safety Notes
Your Fuji Xerox product and recommended supplies have been designed and tested
to meet strict safety requirements. These include safety agency approval, and
compliance to established environmental standards. Please read the following
instructions carefully before operating the product and refer to them as needed to
ensure the continued safe operation of your product.
The safety and environment testing and performance of this product have been verified
using Fuji Xerox materials only.
WARNING • Any unauthorized alteration, which may include the addition of new functions or connection
of external devices, may impact the product certification. Please contact your authorized
Service Provider for more information.
Warning Markings
All warning instructions marked on or supplied with the product should be followed.
Warning
This WARNING alerts users to areas of the product where there is
the possibility of personal injury.
Warning
This WARNING alerts users to areas of the product where there
are heated surfaces, which should not be touched.
Electrical Supply
This product shall be operated from the type of electrical supply indicated on the
product data plate label. If you are not sure that your electrical supply meets the
requirements, please consult your local power company for advice.
WARNING•This product must be connected to a protective earth circuit.
This product is supplied with a plug that has a protective earth pin. This plug
will fit only into an earthed electrical outlet. This is a safety feature. To avoid
risk of electric shock, contact your electrician to replace the electrical outlet if
you are unable to insert the plug into it. Never use an earthed adapter plug to connect
the product to an electrical outlet that lacks an earth connection terminal.
Operator Accessible Areas
This equipment has been designed to restrict operator access to safe areas only.
Operator access to hazardous areas is restricted with covers or guards, which would
require a tool to remove. Never remove these covers or guards.
Maintenance
Any operator product maintenance procedures will be described in the customer
documentation supplied with the product. Do not carry out any maintenance
procedures on this product which are not described in the customer documentation.
Cleaning Your Product
Before cleaning this product, unplug the product from the electrical outlet. Always use
materials specified for this product. The use of other materials may result in poor
performance and may create a hazardous situation. Do not use aerosol cleaners, they
may be explosive and flammable under certain circumstances.
19
Before Using the Machine
Read these safety notes carefully before using this product to make sure you operate
the equipment safely.
1
1 Before Using the Machine
WARNING - Electrical Safety Information
Before Using the Machine
1
z
Only use the power cord supplied with the equipment.
z
Plug the power cord directly into a grounded electrical outlet easily accessible. Do
not use an extension cord. If you do not know whether an outlet is grounded, consult
a qualified electrician.
z
This equipment is to be used on a branch circuit that has larger capacity than rated
ampere and voltage of the machine. See data plate on the rear panel for the rated
ampere and voltage of this equipment. If the machine needs to be moved to a
different location, contact a Fuji Xerox Service Representative or your authorized
local representative or service support organization.
z
Improper connection of the equipment-grounding conductor can result in an electric
shock.
z
Do not place this equipment where people might step on or trip over the power cord.
z
Do not place objects on the power cord.
z
Do not override or disable electrical or mechanical interlocks.
z
Do not obstruct the ventilation openings.
z
Never push objects of any kind into slots or openings on the equipment.
z
If any of the following conditions occur, switch off the power to the machine
immediately and disconnect the power cord from the electrical outlet. Call an
authorized local service representative to correct the problem.
- The equipment emits unusual noises or odors.
- The power cord is damaged or frayed.
- A wall panel circuit breaker, fuse, or other safety device has been tripped.
- Liquid has spilled into the equipment.
- The equipment is exposed to water.
- Any part of the equipment is damaged.
Disconnect Device
The power cable is the disconnect device for this equipment. It is attached to the back
of the machine as a plug-in device. To remove all electrical power from the equipment,
disconnect the power cable from the electrical outlet.
Laser Safety Information
CAUTION • Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein
may result in hazardous light exposure.
With specific regard to laser safety, the equipment complies with performance
standards for laser products set by government, national and international agencies as
a Class 1 laser product. It does not emit hazardous light, as the beam is totally enclosed
during all phases of customer operation and maintenance.
20
Safety Notes
Operational Safety Information
Do These:
z
Always connect equipment to a correctly grounded power outlet. If in doubt, have the
outlet checked by a qualified electrician.
z
This equipment must be connected to a protective earth circuit.
z
This equipment is supplied with a plug that has a protective earth pin. This plug will
fit only into an earthed electrical outlet. This is a safety feature. To avoid risk of
electric shock, contact your electrician to replace the electrical outlet if you are
unable to insert the plug into it. Never use a plug that lacks an earth connection
terminal to connect the product to an electrical outlet.
z
Always follow all warnings and instructions that are marked on or supplied with the
equipment.
z
Always exercise care when moving or relocating equipment. Please contact your
local Fuji Xerox Service Department, or your local support organization to arrange
relocation of the product to a location outside of your building.
z
Always locate the equipment in an area that has adequate ventilation, and space for
servicing. See installation instructions for minimum dimensions.
z
Always use materials and supplies specifically designed for your Fuji Xerox
equipment. Use of unsuitable materials may result in poor performance.
z
Always unplug this equipment from the electrical outlet before cleaning.
Do Not Do These:
z
Never use a plug that lacks an earth connection terminal to connect the product to
an electrical outlet.
z
Never attempt any maintenance procedures that are not specifically described in the
customer documentation.
z
This equipment should not be placed in a built-in unit unless proper ventilation is
provided. Please contact your authorized local dealer for further information.
z
Never remove covers or guards that are fastened with screws. There are no operator
serviceable areas within these covers.
z
Never locate the equipment near a radiator or any other heat source.
z
Never push objects of any kind into the ventilation openings.
z
Never override or “cheat” any of the electrical or mechanical interlock devices.
z
Never operate the equipment if you notice unusual noises or odors. Disconnect the
power cord from the electrical outlet and contact your local Fuji Xerox Service
Representative or Service Provider immediately.
21
Before Using the Machine
To ensure the continued safe operation of your Fuji Xerox equipment, follow these
safety guidelines at all times.
1
1 Before Using the Machine
Maintenance Information
Before Using the Machine
Do not attempt any maintenance procedures that are not specifically described in the
customer documentation supplied with the machine.
z
Do not use aerosol cleaners. The use of cleaners that are not approved may cause
poor performance of the equipment, and could create a dangerous condition.
z
Use supplies and cleaning materials only as directed in the customer documentation.
Keep all these materials out of the reach of children.
z
Do not remove covers or guards that are fastened with screws. There are no parts
behind these covers that you can maintain or service.
z
Do not perform any maintenance procedures unless you have been trained to do
them by an authorized local dealer or unless a procedure is specifically described in
the customer documentation.
1
Ozone Safety Information
This product will produce ozone during normal operation. The ozone produced is
heavier than air and is dependent on copy volume. Adhering to the correct
environmental conditions as specified in the installation instructions will ensure that the
concentration levels meet safe limits.
For Consumables
Store all consumables in accordance with the instructions given on the package or
container.
z
Keep all consumables away from the reach of children.
z
Never throw toner, toner cartridges or toner containers into an open flame.
z
Never use a vacuum cleaner when you clean spilled toner. It can cause explosion as
the toner fills the vacuum cleaner and gets sparks. Use a broom or a wet cloth.
Radio Frequency Emissions
United States, Canada, Europe, Australia/New Zealand
Note
• This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class A digital
device, pursuant to International Standards. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a
commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the customer documentation, may
cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a
residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user is required to
correct the interference at their own expense.
Changes and modifications to this equipment not specifically approved by Xerox/Fuji
Xerox may void the user’s authority to operate this equipment.
22
Safety Notes
Product Safety Certification
This product is certified by the following Agency using the Safety standards listed.
Standard
NEMKO
IEC60950-1 Edition 1 (2001)
Before Using the Machine
Agency
This product was manufactured under a registered ISO9001 Quality system.
1
23
1 Before Using the Machine
The Objectives of the International Energy Star Program
Before Using the Machine
1
To protect the global environment and conserve energy resources, the International
Energy Star Program encourages the following product features. Fuji Xerox confirms
Document Centre C450/C360/C250 satisfies the requirements for this program.
2 Sided Feature (for models with the 2 sided feature installed)
To reduce the volume of copy paper used, the 2 sided copying feature is set as a
default for the machine. You can copy two 1 sided originals on both sides of a sheet of
paper. You can also make 1 sided copies. For information about this feature, refer to
"2 Sided (Making 2 sided Copies)" (P.66).
Power saving feature (Lower Power mode/Sleep mode)
This product has a power saving feature which switches the machine to the Low Power
mode automatically if the machine is on and not operated for a certain period of time.
By default, the fuser power automatically cuts when the printer is idle for more than 15
minutes. The printer is then in energy save mode.
This feature can be configured for a range of 1 to 240 minutes, in 1 minute increments.
For information about this feature, refer to "Power Saver Mode" (P.39).
24
About License
About License
Before Using the Machine
OpenSSL
Copyright (c)1998-2003 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the
following acknowledgment:
"This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the
OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"
4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse
or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission. For
written permission, please contact [email protected]
5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may
"OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL
Project.
6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment:
"This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the
OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT "AS IS'' AND ANY
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL
PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
([email protected]om). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson
([email protected]).
25
1
1 Before Using the Machine
SSLeay
Copyright (c)1995-1998 Eric Young ([email protected]). All rights reserved.
Before Using the Machine
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young ([email protected]).
The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following
conditions are aheared to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this
distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL
documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms
except that the holder is Tim Hudson ([email protected]).
1
Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not
to be removed.
If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author
of the parts of the library used.
This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation
(online or textual) provided with the package.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the
following acknowledgement:
"This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
([email protected])"
The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are
not cryptographic related :-)
4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps
directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement:
"This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected])"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG "AS IS"AND ANY EXPRESSED
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF
USE, DATA OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED
AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN
ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of
this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under
another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.]
26
About License
Heimdal
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
3. Neither the name of the Institute nor the names of its contributors may be used to
endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE INSTITUTE AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
INSTITUTE OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
JPEG Code
This printer's software uses a portion of the codes created by the Independent Software
Group.
27
Before Using the Machine
Copyright (c)2000 Kungliga Tekniska Högskolan (Royal Institute of Technology,
Stockholm, Sweden). All rights reserved.
1
1 Before Using the Machine
Illegal Copies and Printouts
Before Using the Machine
Copying or printing certain documents may be illegal in your country. Penalties of fines
or imprisonment may be imposed on those found guilty. The following are examples of
items that may be illegal to copy or print in your country.
1
z
Currency
z
Banknotes and checks
z
Bank and government bonds and securities
z
Passports and identification cards
z
Copyright material or trademarks without the consent of the owner
z
Postage stamps and other negotiable instruments
This list is not inclusive and no liability is assumed for either its completeness or
accuracy. In case of doubt, contact your legal counsel.
Notice:
This machine is provided with the recognition function to prevent the copying of
currency. Also, in case currency or securities are copied, the forgery tracing function
can identify a machine used for the copy.
Note that the recognition function prevents a limited range of illegal copies. Always put
your machine under careful charge to prevent illegal copies from being made.
28
2 Product Overview
This chapter describes basic operation about the machine, such as the names
of each component, switching on and off of the machine, and the operation of
the touch screen and power saving settings.
z
Machine Components.................................................................................30
z
Power On / Off ............................................................................................36
z
About the Circuit Breaker............................................................................38
z
Power Saver Mode .....................................................................................39
z
Control Panel ..............................................................................................42
2 Product Overview
Machine Components
This section describes the main components and their functions of the Document
Centre C450/C360/C250 (hereinafter called "the machine").
Main Body
Product Overview
„4 Tray Model
1
2
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
No.
Component
Function
1
Document cover
Holds the document down.
2
Document glass
Load documents here.
3
Control panel
It consists of operation buttons, LED indicators and a touch screen.
Refer to "Control Panel" (P.42).
4
Center output tray
(Output tray)
Copies and prints are delivered here facing down.
5
Paper stopper
Set upright for use when making copies or prints.
6
Power switch
Switches the power of the machine on/off.
7
Front cover
Open this cover to access the insides of the machine to replace
consumables.
8
Tray 1, 2, 3, 4
Load papers here for copying.
9
Tray 5 (Bypass)
Used for loading non-standard paper (thick-stock paper, and other special
media) that cannot be loaded in Trays 1 to 4.
10
Locking casters
Used for locking the wheels of the machine. Lock these casters after moving
the machine to its installation site.
30
Machine Components
„Left Side and Back
Product Overview
„Tandem Tray Model + Side Output Tray
2
20
*
No.
Component
The tandem tray model is available for the Document Centre C450 only.
Function
11
Top left cover
Push up the unlock lever to access the insides of the machine to clear
paper jams and replace consumables.
12
Duplex module cover
Open this cover to access the insides of the machine to clear paper
jams when the duplex module is installed.
13
Left center cover
Open this cover to access the insides of the machine to clear paper
jams.
14
Bottom left cover
Open this cover to access the insides of the machine to clear paper
jams.
15
RESET button
This button automatically turns the machine off when a current leakage
is detected.
16
Parallel interface connector Use this interface to connect to a computer using a centronics standard
interface cable.
17
10Base-T/100Base-TX
connector
Use to connect a network cable.
18
Fax interface connector
Use this interface to connect to the fax kit
31
2 Product Overview
No.
Component
Function
19
USB2.0 Interface
Connector (optional)
Use to connect a USB cable.
20
Side output tray
Copies and prints are delivered here facing up.
The side output tray is an optional accessory.
„Internal Components
Product Overview
21
22
26
2
23
24
25
No.
Component
Function
21
Stopper
Fastens the handle in place.
22
Toner cartridges
Four toner (image forming powder) cartridges are provided, Black (K),
Cyan (C), Magenta (M) and Yellow (Y).
23
Handle
Unlock stopper and press this down when replacing the drum cartridges.
24
Drum cartridges
(A1, A2, A3, A4)
A drum cartridge comprises of photosensitive elements.
Drum cartridges are arranged in order A1, A2, A3 and A4 from the left
as you face the main body.
25
Toner collection bottle
cover
Toner collection bottles (B) for collecting used toner are located on the
other side of this cover. Open this cover to access the insides of the
machine to replace the toner collection bottles.
26
Fuser (E)
Fuses the printed image on the paper by fusing the toner. Do not touch
this unit as it is extremely hot.
32
Machine Components
„Duplex Automatic Document Feeder
1 2
4
3
5
6
7
Product Overview
8
2
No.
Component
Function
1
<Confirmation> indicator
This indicator lights to confirm that the document is loaded correctly.
2
Wheel
Turn this wheel to clear paper jams.
3
Left cover
Open this cover to access the insides of the machine to clear paper
jams.
4
Inner cover
Open this cover to access the insides of the machine to clear paper
jams.
5
Document guides
Use this guides to align the edges of the document.
6
Document feeder tray
Load documents here.
7
Document output tray
Receives scanned documents.
8
Document feeder glass
This part scans the document.
Note
• In text descriptions, the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder is abbreviated as "Document
Feeder".
33
2 Product Overview
„Telephone Line Connectors
Product Overview
2
1
5
4
2
3
No.
Name stamped on Name on the touch
the machine cover
screen
Function
1
OP.TEL
–
Use this interface to connect an external telephone
receiver fitted with an extra G3 kit (optional). Do not
connect to the TEL connector; external telephones
cannot be connected to the TEL connector.
2
TEL
–
Use this interface to connect an external telephone.
Do not use this interface for external telephones
when they are fitted with an extra G3 kit (optional).
3
LINE 1
Line 1
Connect to a public telephone network.
4
LINE 2
Line 2
Connect to a public telephone network.
5
LINE 4
Line 4
Connect to a public telephone network.
Note
• The fax function may not be available depending on the model. An optional package is
necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.
• OP.TEL, LINE 2, and LINE 4 are optional.
34
Machine Components
„Finisher B
1
2
7
Product Overview
3
4
5
6
No.
Component
2
Function
1
<Finisher top cover> button When a paper jam occurs, press this button. This opens the finisher top
cover so that you can clear the paper jam.
2
Finisher tray
Stapled paper is delivered to this tray.
3
Front cover
Open this cover to replace staples and clear staple jams.
4
Staple cartridge
This cartridge contains staples. Remove this cartridge to replace staples
and clear staple jams.
5
Stand
This stand connects the finisher section to the main body.
6
Finisher interface top cover Open this cover to access the insides of the machine to clear paper
jams. Before opening this cover, be sure to move the finisher to the
right.
7
Center tray exit cover
Note
Open this cover to access the insides of the machine to clear paper
jams.
• Finisher B is optional. In text descriptions, the finisher B is abbreviated as finisher.
35
2 Product Overview
Power On / Off
Switch on the power before operating the machine. The machine is ready for operation
within 45 seconds after the power is switched on. Turn the machine off at the end of
the day or when it is not in use for a long period of time. Also, use [Power Saving]
feature when not in use for a while to reduce the power consumption.
Important • Switching off the power of the machine may cause loss of data being processed.
For information about power saving feature, refer to "Power Saver Mode" (P.39).
Product Overview
Note
• If the power is off, all functions of the machine will stop. Do not turn off if the machine is used
all day for receiving faxes.
Powering On
The procedure for turning on the power is as follows.
1
2
Press the power switch to the <|>
position to turn the power on.
Note
• The "Please wait..." message
indicates that the machine is
warming up. The machine
cannot be used while it is
warming up. After about 45
seconds, the machine
becomes ready for use.
Note
• When the power does not
come on, check if the RESET
button is in a reset state
(button pressed in).
Powering Off
The procedure for turning the power off is as follows.
Important • Switching off the power of the machine may cause loss of data being processed.
1
Before turning the power off, make sure that all copy or print jobs have completely
finished. Also, make sure that the <Online> indicator and <Job in Memory> indicator
are not lit.
Important • Never turn the power off in the following instances:
- While data is being received
- While jobs are being printed.
- While jobs are being copied
- While a scan is being executed
- While jobs are being faxed
36
Power On / Off
2
Press the power switch to the <
side.
>
Important • Power off processing is
performed internally on the
machine for a while after the
power switch is turned off.
Therefore, do not unplug the
power cord from the power
outlet immediately after
turning the power switch off.
Product Overview
Note
• Before you turn the power
back on after turning it off, first
make sure that the touch
screen has gone out.
2
37
2 Product Overview
About the Circuit Breaker
The machine is provided with a
circuit breaker.
In the event of a current leakage,
the breaker will automatically cut off
the power circuit to prevent any
leakage or fire from occurring.
Power switch
RESET button
TEST button
Product Overview
The RESET button is normally in a
pressed-in state as shown in the
figure on the right. When the
machine is to be left unused for a
long period of time or is to be
moved, lightly press the TEST
button with the tip of a ball-pen or
other fine-tipped object to cancel
the pressed-in state of the RESET
button.
2
Once a month, check the breaker for correct operation. Also, make sure that it is
earthed. If not, the breaker cannot detect current leakage which can cause electric
shock.
If you notice any unusual conditions, contact our Customer Support Center.
Note
• The RESET button automatically turns the power off when current leakage is detected.
Normally, do not operate this button.
• Before you cancel the pressed-in state of the RESET button, first make sure that the power
switch is off.
For information about inspection of circuit breaker operations, refer to "Power saving feature (Lower
Power mode/Sleep mode)" (P.24).
38
Power Saver Mode
Power Saver Mode
The machine is installed with a Power Saver feature that will automatically cut off the
electricity to the machine if no copy or print data is received for a certain duration.
The Power Saver feature has two modes, a [Low Power mode] and [Sleep mode].
The machine enters the [Low Power mode] after the preset time has elapsed if the
machine is left unused for a fixed period of time.
The machine then enters the [Sleep mode] if a further preset time elapses.
(power consumption : 85W)
In this mode, the power to the control panel and fuser unit is lowered to save power.
The touch screen goes out, and the <Power Saver> button on the control panel lights.
To use the machine, press the <Power Saver> button. The <Power Saver> button goes
out to indicate that the Power Saver feature is canceled.
2
„Sleep Mode
(power consumption : 10W)
In this mode, the power is lowered more than in the Low Power mode.
The touch screen goes out, and the <Power Saver> button on the control panel lights.
To use the machine, press the <Power Saver> button. The <Power Saver> button goes
out to indicate that the Power Saver feature is canceled.
Changing the Power Saver Mode Change Interval
The procedure for setting the Power Saver feature is as follows.
To activate the Power Saver feature, set the Sleep Mode button to Enabled, and set
both the times until the activation of Low Power Mode and Sleep Mode.
Note
1
• The time to activation of Low Power Mode and Sleep Mode can each be specified in 1
minute increments, from 1 to 240 minutes.
Press the <Log In/Out> button.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
<Log In/Out>
button
C
2
Enter the UserID with the numeric
keypad, and select [Confirm]
Note
Product Overview
„Low Power Mode
• The default UserID value is
"11111". When using the
authentication manager
feature, a password is
required. The default
password value is "x-admin".
39
2 Product Overview
Product Overview
2
3
Select [System Settings].
4
Select [System Settings].
5
Select [Common Settings].
6
Select [Machine Clock/Timers].
7
Select [
8
Select [7. Auto Power Saver], and select [Confirm/Change].
9
Using [ ] [ ], configure a power
saver mode migration time from 1
to 240 minutes, in 1 minute
increments.
].
„From Last Selection to Low Power Mode
Set the time to move to the [Low Power Mode] after the last operation.
Note
• The default for [From Last Selection to Low Power Mode] is [15] minutes. The Low Power
Mode cannot be set to [Disabled].
„From Last Selection to Sleep Mode
Set the time to move to the [Sleep Mode] after the last operation.
Note
40
• The default for [From Last Selection to Sleep Mode] is [60] minutes. Configure the [From
Last Selection to Sleep Mode] time to be longer than the [From Last Selection to Low Power
Mode] time.
10
Press [Save].
11
Select [Close] repeatedly until the [System Settings/Registration] screen is displayed.
12
Select [Exit] to exit the System Administration mode.
Power Saver Mode
Exiting the Power Saver Mode
The following describes how to exit the Power Saver mode.
The Power Saver mode is exited in the following instances:
By pressing the <Power Saver> button
z
Receiving Print Data
z
Select [Apply New Settings] or [Refresh] in CentreWare Internet Services
Press the <Power Saver> button.
<Power Saver>
button
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
C
Product Overview
1
z
2
41
2 Product Overview
Control Panel
The following describes the names and functions of components on the control panel.
2
1
34
5
6
7
8
9
Product Overview
001
002
003
016
017
018
004
005
006
019
020
021
1
2
3
007
008
009
022
023
024
4
5
6
11
010
011
012
025
026
027
7
8
9
12
013
014
015
028
029
030
0
#
10
13
C
2
20
21
No.
Component
19 18
17 16 15 14
Function
1
Brightness dial
Adjusts the brightness of the touch screen. Use this dial to adjust the
brightness of touch screen when it is too dark to read.
2
Touch screen
This touch screen displays messages required for operation and buttons
for various features. You can directly touch the touch screen to instruct
operations in screens and set features.
3
<Online> indicator
This indicator lights when data is being received from a client.
4
<Job in Memory> indicator
This indicator lights when data is stored in the machine's memory.
You can check stored documents in the [Stored Documents List]. For more
information, refer to "Stored Documents List" (P.376).
42
5
<Job Status>
Pressing this button allows you to confirm or cancel currently executing
or completed jobs, or to confirm or print saved documents.
In text descriptions, this button is indicated as the <Job Status> button.
6
<Review>
Press this button to open the Review screen. In this screen, you can
check a list of the status of copy, fax, and scan features whose settings
have changed from the defaults. You can also check the destination
information for sending faxes and e-mail.
In text descriptions, this button is indicated as the <Review> button.
7
<Machine Status>
Pressing this button allows you to confirm the machine status and
meters, check the state of consumables, and print reports.
In text descriptions, this button is indicated as the <Machine Status>
button.
8
<Log In/Out>
When this button is pressed, the UserID input screen is displayed for
System Administration mode or Login Setup/Auditron Administration.
In text descriptions, this button is indicated as the <Log In/Out> button.
9
<Power Saver>
If the machine is not operated for a while, the machine's power
consumption is lowered to enter the Power Saver mode. In the Power
Saver mode, this button is lit. To cancel the Power Saver mode, press
this button again.
In text descriptions, this button is indicated as the <Power Saver>
button.
Control Panel
No.
Component
Function
<Clear All>
Returns the statuses of all displayed services to their default values.
The machine will be reset to this state after it is turned on.
In text descriptions, this button is indicated as the <Clear All> button.
11
<Interrupt>
Select this button to temporarily stop a continuous copy job or printing to
give another job higher priority. During an interrupt, the Interrupt
indicator is lit. Pressing the Interrupt button again cancels the interrupt
and the previous operation is resumed.
In text descriptions, this button is indicated as the <Interrupt> button.
12
<Stop>
Press this button to stop the current copy job or communications.
In text descriptions, this button is indicated as the <Stop> button.
13
<Start>
Press this button to start copying or scanning.
In text descriptions, this button is indicated as the <Start> button.
14
Numeric keypad
Press these buttons to enter the number of copies, passwords and other
numerical values.
In text descriptions, these buttons are indicated as the "numeric
keypad".
15
<Speed Dial>
Used to specify a destination phone number for fax or e-mail.
In text descriptions, this button is indicated as the <Speed Dial>.
16
<C> (Clear)
Press this button if you have entered the wrong numerical value with the
numeric keypad.
In text descriptions, this button is indicated as the <C> button.
17
<Dial Pause>
Used to insert a pause into a destination number.
In text descriptions, this button is indicated as the <Dial Pause> button.
18
<Copy>
<Custom 2>
<Custom 3>
Used to call a custom feature.
<All Services>
Used to display the menu screen.
In text descriptions, this button is indicated as the <All Services> button.
19
For information about registering a feature with a button, refer to "Screen
Defaults" (P.258).
You can change the features that appear in the menu. For more information,
refer to "Screen Defaults" (P.258).
20
One touch button panels
The one touch button panels.
You can leaf through panels to display 001 to 030, 031 to 060, 061 to
070.
M01 to M20 are reserved for job memory. These correspond to
registered jobs 01 to 20.
21
One touch buttons
Specify a recipient with one touch. Registered preset recipient numbers
001 to 070 are supported.
43
Product Overview
10
2
2 Product Overview
Customizing of the Control Panel
You can customize the <Custom> buttons and items on the [Menu] screen.
Assigning a Feature to Custom Buttons
By assigning a feature to Custom buttons (<Copy>, <Custom 2>, and <Custom 3>),
you can switch to that feature without returning to the [Menu] screen.
The factory default settings for these buttons are, "Copy" for the 1st button, and none
for the 2nd and 3rd buttons.
Product Overview
For about procedure to assign features, refer to "Screen Defaults" (P.258).
Attach the labels included in this product when you have changed the assignment. If
you have used a feature for which no label is provided, use a blank label and write down
the feature using a permanent marker and attach it to the appropriate Custom button.
Customizing the [Menu] Screen
You can customize the types of features and the location of buttons on the [Menu]
screen.
The following shows the factory default settings.
2
For about procedure to assign features, refer to "Screen Defaults" (P.258).
Note
44
• When the feature is not available the button will not be displayed. Also, if the feature is
unavailable due to hardware problems, the button will be grayed out.
z
Copy
z
Fax/Internet Fax
z
E-mail
z
Scan to Mailbox
z
Network Scanning
z
Scan to FTP/SMB
z
Check Mailbox
z
Stored Programming
z
Job Flow Sheets
z
Language
z
Setup Menu
z
Print Mode
z
Fax Receiving Mode
z
Activity Report
z
Auto Gradation Adjustment
3 Copy
This chapter describes the [Copy] screen and copy features.
z
Copying Procedure .....................................................................................46
z
Stopping the Copy Job ...............................................................................51
z
Basic Copying.............................................................................................52
z
Image Quality..............................................................................................61
z
Scan Options ..............................................................................................66
z
Output Format.............................................................................................76
z
Job Assembly .............................................................................................91
3 Copy
Copying Procedure
This section describes the basic copy operations. The following shows the copying
procedure and reference sections.
Step 1 Loading Documents .........................................................................................................46
Step 2 Selecting Features ............................................................................................................48
Step 3 Entering the Quantity.......................................................................................................49
Step 4 Starting the Copy Job.......................................................................................................49
Step 5 Confirming the Copy Job in the Job Status .....................................................................50
Step 1 Loading Documents
There are two methods of loading documents.
„Document Feeder
Copy
3
z
Single sheet
z
Multiple sheets
„Document Glass
z
Single sheet
z
Bound documents, such as books
Document Feeder
The document feeder supports single sheet and multiple sheet documents, with sizes
ranging from 148.6 × 210mm (A5, A5 ) to a maximum of 297 × 432mm
(A3, 11 × 17 inches).
The document feeder can auto-detect only documents of standard sizes. For nonstandard size documents, input the size in the [Original Size] field.
The document feeder can accept the following number of sheets.
Document type (weight)
Lightweight paper (38-49 g/m2)
2
Number of
sheets
75 sheets
Plain paper (50-81g/m )
75 sheets
Heavyweight paper (81-128g/m2)
50 sheets
For information about entering a custom size, refer to "Original Size (Specifying the Scan Size for the
Document)" (P.69).
For information about copying documents of mixed size, refer to "Mixed Size Originals (Scanning
Different Size Documents Simultaneously)" (P.70).
Important • Place folded or creased documents on the document glass to avoid paper jams.
• 2 sided scanning of lightweight paper (38-48 g/m2) is not supported.
46
Copying Procedure
1
Remove any clips and staples
before loading the document.
2
In the center of the document
feeder, set the document with the
side to be copied (top side if 2
sided document) facing upwards.
Note
3
• The <Confirmation> indicator
lights when the document is
loaded correctly.
Adjust the movable document
guides to just touch the edge of the
document stack.
Copy
3
Document Glass
On the document glass, you can place a single sheet, or a book or other similar
document, up to 297 × 432 mm (A3, 11 × 17 inches).
On the document glass, only standard size documents can be detected automatically.
For non-standard size documents, enter a custom size in [Original Size].
For information about entering a custom size, refer to "Original Size (Specifying the Scan Size for the
Document)" (P.69).
1
Open the document cover.
2
Place the document face down,
and align it against the top left
corner of the document glass.
3
Close the document cover.
Note
• When a standard size
document is placed on the
document glass, the size of
the document is displayed in
the message area.
47
3 Copy
Step 2 Selecting Features
You can select the features from the [Copy] tab.
Note
• The features displayed depend on the configuration of the machine.
• To use the Login Setup feature or Auditron Administration feature, you need a UserID and
Password, or just a UserID. For information about UserIDs and Passwords, contact the
System Administrator.
1
Press the <All Services> button.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
C
Copy
2
Select [Copy].
3
If the previous settings remain,
press the <Clear All> button.
<All Services>
button
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
<Clear All>
button
C
4
Select the features to set from each
tab as necessary.
For information about each of these features, refer to the following sections.
"Basic Copying" (P.52)
"Image Quality" (P.61)
"Scan Options" (P.66)
"Output Format" (P.76)
"Job Assembly" (P.91)
48
Copying Procedure
Step 3 Entering the Quantity
You can enter up to 999 for the number of copies.
1
Enter the number of copies using
the numeric keypad. The number
of copies entered appears on the
upper right of the touch screen.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
Numeric keypad
C
2
If you enter an incorrect value,
press the <C> button and enter the
correct value.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
Copy
1
<C> button
C
3
Step 4 Starting the Copy Job
1
Press the <Start> button.
Important • When using the document
feeder, do not hold the
document while it is being fed
into the machine.
Note
• If a problem occurs, an error
message appears on the
touch screen. Solve the
problem in accordance with
the message.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
<Start> button
C
• You can set the next job during copying.
„If You Have More Documents
If you have another document, select the [Next Original] on the touch screen while the
current document is being scanned. You can scan multiple documents for later output.
1
Select [Next Original] while
scanning is in progress.
Note
• When using the document feeder, load the next document after the machine has finished
scanning the first document.
• When the above screen is displayed and no operation is performed during a certain period
of time, the machine automatically assumes that there are no more documents and clears
the settings. For information about how to set the automatic clear time, refer to "Auto Clear"
(P.255).
49
3 Copy
2
Load the next document.
3
Press the <Start> button.
If you have more documents, load the next document and press the <Start> button.
4
When all documents have been
scanned, select [Last Original].
Copy
3
Step 5 Confirming the Copy Job in the Job Status
1
Press the <Job Status> button.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
C
2
Confirm the job status.
Note
50
• Select [ ] to display the
previous screen and select
[ ] to display the next screen.
<Job Status>
button
Stopping the Copy Job
Stopping the Copy Job
To cancel copying, follow the procedure below.
1
Select [Stop] on the touch screen
or press the <Stop> button on the
control panel.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
<Stop> button
C
Copy
2
Select [Stop].
3
If the screen of step 1 does not
appear, press the <Job Status>
button.
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
<Job Status>
button
C
4
Select the job to cancel, and then
select [Stop].
51
3 Copy
Basic Copying
You can set the basic features on the [Basic Copying] screen. The following shows the
reference section for each feature.
Reduce/Enlarge (Making Enlarged/Reduced Copies) ................................................................52
Paper Supply (Selecting the Paper to Use for Copying).............................................................55
Output Color (Selecting the Color to Copy) ...............................................................................57
Copy Position/Margin Shift (Shifting the Image Copy Position) ...............................................59
Border Erase (Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows in the document) .......................................59
Copy Density (Adjusting the Copy Density) ..............................................................................60
Copy
1
On the [All Services] screen, select
[Copy].
2
Select features on the [Basic
Copying] screen that appears first.
3
Reduce/Enlarge (Making Enlarged/Reduced Copies)
You can select a ratio to make enlarged or reduced copies.
1
Select the copy ratio.
„100%
Copies are made at the same size as the original.
„Auto%
The copy ratio is automatically set based on the original size and paper sizes, and the
document is copied to fit in the selected paper.
Note
• If you select [Auto%], specify a value other than [Auto] for [Paper Supply].
„Ratio (3rd to 4th Buttons)
Select from preset ratios.
You can change the indicated ratios. For information about the setting procedures, refer to "Reduce/
Enlarge - 3rd Button" (P.277) and "Reduce/Enlarge - 4th Button" (P.277).
„[More...]
Display the [Reduce/Enlarge] screen.
Refer to "When [Preset %] is Selected", "When [Variable %] is Selected", "When
[Independent X-Y%] is Selected", and "When [Calculator %] is Selected".
52
Basic Copying
When [Preset %] is Selected
You can select from preset standard copy ratios.
1
Select [Preset %].
2
Select the copy ratio.
„100%
Copies are made at the same size as the original.
„Auto%
The copy ratio is automatically set based upon the original size and paper sizes, and
the document is copied to fit in the selected paper.
Note
• If you select [Auto%], specify a value other than [Auto] for [Paper Supply].
Copy
„Presets (Seven Types)
Select from seven preset copy ratios.
You can change the indicated ratios. For information about the setting procedures, refer to "Reduce/
Enlarge Presets" (P.284).
3
„Copy All (Full Screen)
To prevent image loss at the edge of the original, the document is reduced to just below
100% when it is copied. If this option is selected, a check mark is added.
When [Variable %] is Selected
You can enter any ratio for copying. Set the ratio within the range from 25 to 400% in
1% increments.
1
Select [Variable %].
2
Specify the ratio with the numeric
keypad or [ ] and [ ].
Note
• If you enter an incorrect value,
select [C].
When [Independent X-Y%] is selected
You can specify different height and width ratios to scale the height and width
independently.
1
Select [Independent X-Y%].
2
To specify the height and width
ratios, use [ ] and [ ].
„Auto
Copies are made with the height and width ratios set automatically to match the paper
size. If this option is selected, a check mark is added.
53
3 Copy
„Auto (Copy All)
The height and width ratios are set automatically to match the paper size and the
document is copied at a slightly reduced size to prevent image loss at the edge of the
original. If this option is selected, a check mark is added.
„X (width) Y (height)
Set the height and width ratios within the range from 25 to 400% in 1% increments.
„XY
You can simultaneously change the numerical values of the height and width by the
same amount.
When [Calculator %] is Selected
You can specify a different size for the height and width.
Copy
If you specify both the original document size and the copy size, the copy ratios for the
height and width are calculated automatically according to the sizes that you entered.
The calculation results are indicated by copy ratios within the range from 25 to 400%.
3
1
Select [Calculator %].
2
Enter the value for the original
document width in [Original Size] of
[X] (width) using the numeric
keypad, and select [Next].
3
Enter the value for the copy size
width in [Copy Size] of [X] (width)
using the numeric keypad, and
select [Next].
4
In the same way, enter the original document height value and copy size height value
in the [Original Size] and [Copy Size] of [Y] (height), and select [Next].
Note
• To change the copy ratios you have entered, select [Next], move [
numerical values again.
], and enter the
„X (width) Y (height)
The automatically calculated ratio is displayed depending on the values entered in
[Original Size] and [Copy Size].
„Original Size
Set the height and width of the original document size from 1 to 999 mm in 1 mm
increments.
„Copy Size
Set the height and width of the copy size from 1 to 999 mm in 1 mm increments.
54
Basic Copying
Paper Supply (Selecting the Paper to Use for Copying)
You can select the tray loaded with the copy paper you wish to use.
1
Select the paper tray.
„Auto
Based on the original document size and set ratios, the machine automatically selects
the tray loaded with the appropriate paper and makes copies.
Note
• If you select [Auto], specify a value other than [Auto %] for [Reduce/Enlarge].
„Trays (2nd to 4th Buttons)
„[More…]
The [Paper Supply] screen is displayed.
[Paper Supply] Screen
You can select a paper tray that does not appear on the [Basic Copying] screen.
1
Select [More...].
2
Select the paper tray.
„Auto
Based on the original document size and set ratios, the machine automatically selects
the tray loaded with the appropriate paper and makes copies.
„Trays 1 to 4
You can select paper from four different trays.
„Bypass...
The [Tray 5 (Bypass)] screen is displayed.
55
Copy
Select from preset paper trays.
You can change the paper trays to display. For information about the setting procedures, refer to "Paper
Supply - 2nd Button" (P.276), "Paper Supply - 3rd Button" (P.276), and "Paper Supply - 4th Button"
(P.276).
3
3 Copy
[Tray 5 (Bypass)] Screen
If you want to make copies on paper that cannot be loaded in Trays 1 to 4, use Tray 5
(bypass).
1
Select [More...].
2
Select the paper type.
Note
• Select [ ] to display the
previous screen and select
[ ] to display the next screen.
„Paper Size
Select from [Auto Size Detect], [Standard Size], and [Non-standard Size].
When [Auto Size Detect] is selected, the paper size is identified automatically.
Note
„Paper Type
Copy
3
• [Auto Size Detect] can only detect standard sizes.
Select the paper type.
When [Standard Size] is Selected
Select the paper size from standard sizes and select the paper type.
Note
• When copying on [SRA3 ], select a paper type other than [Side 2 Paper], [Transparency],
[Lightweight], and [Labels].
1
Select [Standard Size].
2
Select the paper size and paper
type.
Note
• Select [ ] to display the
previous screen and select
[ ] to display the next screen.
When [Non-standard Size] is Selected
Set the width (X) within the range from 100 to 483 mm and the height (Y) within the
range from 100 to 305 mm in increments of 1 mm.
1
Select [Non-standard Size].
2
Enter the paper size using [
[ ], [ ], and [ ].
3
Select the paper type.
Note
],
• Select [ ] to display the
previous screen and select
[ ] to display the next screen.
Important • Copying may not be performed correctly when the X (horizontal) direction of a non-standard
size paper is less than 140 mm.
• When copying both sides on a non-standard size paper, specify the size within the range
from 148 to 432 mm for the X (horizontal) direction and from 140 to 297 mm for the Y
(vertical) direction.
56
Basic Copying
Output Color (Selecting the Color to Copy)
You can set the output color to use when copying.
Note
1
• If output color restrictions have been set, there are restrictions on which colors are available
for copying. For information about output color restrictions, refer to "Account Limit" (P.345).
Select the output color from
[Output Color].
„Auto
The machine automatically determines the color of the original document and makes
copies in full color if the original document is color and in a single color (black) if the
original document is black-and-white.
Copies are made in full color using all the four colors of toner: yellow, magenta, cyan,
and black.
„Black
The machine makes copies in black and white regardless of the colors in the original
document.
„Dual-Red/Black
The machine makes copies of color documents in two preset colors.
You can change the colors to display. For information about the setting procedures, refer to "Dual Target Color (Target Area)" (P.278) and "Dual - Target Color (Non-target Area)" (P.278).
„[More…...]
Display the [Output Color] screen.
[Output Color] Screen
You can copy in full color, dual color, and single color.
1
Select [More...].
2
Select the desired output color type
for copying.
„Auto
The machine automatically determines the color of the original document and makes
copies in full color if the original document is color and in a single color (black) if the
document is black-and-white.
„Full Color
Copies are made in full color using all the four colors of toner: yellow, magenta, cyan,
and black.
57
Copy
„Full Color
3
3 Copy
„Black
The machine makes copies in black and white regardless of the colors in the original
document.
„Dual Color
The document is separated into specified source colors and unspecified colors and
then copied in the specified dual colors. If you select [Dual Color], you can set the
following items.
z
Source Color
The [Source Color] screen is displayed.
z
Target Color (Target Area)
The [Target Color (Target Area)] screen is displayed.
z
Target Color (Non-target Area)
The [Target Color (Non-target Area)] screen is displayed.
Copy
„Single color
3
The [Color Selection] screen is displayed.
[Source Color] Screen
Select the color to scan (extract) from the document.
1
Select [Dual Color].
2
Select [Source Color].
3
Select [Other than Black] or [Color
Selection].
4
If you selected [Color Selection],
select the color to scan.
„Other than Black
Colors other than black are scanned.
„Color Selection
From six fixed colors, you can specify one color or multiple colors to scan.
[Target Color (Target Area)] Screen
You can change the color that was extracted by [Source Color] to one of the seven fixed
colors or six custom colors. From the displayed [Target Color (Target Area)] screen,
select one color.
For information about how to set custom colors, refer to "Custom Colors" (P.285).
58
1
Select [Dual Color].
2
Select [Target Color (Target Area)].
3
Select a color.
Basic Copying
[Target Color (Non-target Area)] Screen
You can change a color that was not extracted to one of the seven fixed colors or six
custom colors. From the displayed [Target Color (Non-target Area)] screen, select one
color.
For information about how to set custom colors, refer to "Custom Colors" (P.285).
1
Select [Dual Color].
2
Select [Target Color (Non-target
Area)].
3
Select a color.
[Output Color] Screen
The machine makes copies in the single specified color regardless of the colors in the
document.
For information about how to set custom colors, refer to "Custom Colors" (P.285).
1
Select [Single Color].
2
Select [Color Selection].
3
Select a color.
Copy
You can select a color from six fixed colors and six custom colors. From the displayed
[Color Selection] screen, select one color.
3
Copy Position/Margin Shift (Shifting the Image Copy Position)
Copies can be made with the document image position shifted to the left, right, top, or
bottom of the paper or with the document center shifted to the center of the paper.
This feature is the same as [Margin Shift] of the [Scan Options] screen. For more information, refer to
"Copy Position/Margin Shift (Shifting the Image Copy Position)" (P.59).
Border Erase (Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows in the document)
When you make copies with the document cover open or make copies from a book,
black shadows sometimes appear along the edges and center margin of the paper. If
this happens, you can make copies with the shadows erased.
This feature is the same as [Border Erase] of the [Scan Options] screen. For more information, refer to
"Border Erase (Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows in the document)" (P.59).
59
3 Copy
Copy Density (Adjusting the Copy Density)
You can adjust the copy density to one of seven levels. Copying is darker when you
move [ ] to the left and lighter when you move it to the right.
Note
1
Copy
3
60
• [Copy Density] of the [Basic Copying] screen and [Copy Density] of [Lighten / Darken /
Contrast] of the [Image Quality] screen are the same.
Adjust the density using [
[ ].
] and
Image Quality
Image Quality
On the [Image Quality] screen, you can configure the document image quality features.
The following shows the reference section for each feature.
Image Quality Presets (Selecting Image Quality) ...................................................................... 61
Original Type (Selecting the Image Quality Type for the Document) ...................................... 62
Lighten/Darken /Contrast (Adjusting the Copy Density and Contrast) ..................................... 63
Sharpness/Color Saturation (Adjusting the Sharpness and Color Saturation of Images) .......... 64
Auto Exposure (Erasing the Background Color of Documents)................................................ 64
Color Balance (Adjusting Color Balance) ................................................................................. 65
Color Shift (Adjusting Color Tone) ........................................................................................... 65
On the [All Services] screen, select
[Copy].
2
Select the [Image Quality] tab and
then select a feature on the [Image
Quality] screen that appears.
Copy
1
3
If color reproducibility is poor, perform
auto gradation adjustment. For information about auto gradation adjustment, refer to "Executing Auto
Gradation Adjustment" (P.424).
Image Quality Presets (Selecting Image Quality)
If you select an image quality of Image Quality Preset, the [Auto Exposure], [Lighten /
Darken / Contrast], [Sharpness/Color Saturation], [Color Shift], and [Color Balance]
settings are automatically adjusted and copies are made at a quality that matches the
images.
Note
• If the settings of other image quality preset features are changed after selecting an image
quality in [Image Quality Preset], the Image Quality Presets setting will return to its default
(state of nothing being selected).
1
Select [Image Quality Presets].
2
Select the image quality
„Normal
Copies are made with the [Auto Exposure], [Lighten / Darken / Contrast], [Sharpness/
Color Saturation], [Color Shift], and [Color Balance] settings at their defaults.
„Lively
The color saturation is raised to reproduce images that appear fresher and livelier.
61
3 Copy
„Bright
Reproduces images that have a brighter appearance with enhanced contrast. Select
this item to make copies of documents such as posters that are intended to attract
people's attention.
„Warm
Reproduces colors that have a slightly low density as brighter and warmer colors with
more dominant red in them. Select this item when, for example, you wish skin to appear
pinker or subdued warm colors to have more warmth.
„Cool
Reproduces blue colors that appear even clearer. Select this item, for example to make
water or sky bluer or to reproduce subdued cold colors more clearly.
„Background Suppression
This setting prevents images on the other side from being reproduced in the copy.
Copy
„Auto Contrast
3
This setting sharpens the image by adjusting the brightness and hue of the original.
Original Type (Selecting the Image Quality Type for the Document)
When making copies of photographs, text and other documents, you can make copies
at the image quality corresponding to each type of document. Copies of the document
can be reproduced at a more faithful image quality by selecting the document type that
matches the document.
1
Select [Original Type].
2
Select the type of image quality.
„Auto
This item sets [Output Color] of the [Basic Copying] screen according to the document
type preset in the System Administration mode.
For information about the auto setting of [Original Type], refer to "Copy Defaults" (P.277).
„Text & Photo
Select this item when making copies of documents that contain both text and photos.
The machine automatically distinguishes the text and photo areas and sets the
appropriate image quality for each area of the document. For photo areas, specify the
photo type from [Halftone], [Photograph], and [Color Copies].
z
Halftone
Select this item for photo areas when the document is printed matter such as a
pamphlet.
z
Photograph
Select this item when photos have been pasted on document. This prevents the copy
from being reproduced bluish.
62
Image Quality
z
Color Copies
Select this item for documents that are copies or prints made on a color copier such
as the Document Centre C450/C360/C250. This prevents colors from being
reproduced faint.
„Text
Select this item to make sharp copies of text. Sharp copies of graphs, illustrations, etc.
are also made in this mode.
z
Printed/Inked Text
Select this item for printed documents, inked text documents, etc.
z
Pencil Text
Select this item for pencil text documents.
z
Lightweight original
Select this item for lightweight (38 to 49 g/m2) documents.
• Whether [Lightweight original] is displayed depends on the specifications. For information
about the display method, refer to "Original Type - Lightweight Originals" (P.282).
„Photo
3
Select this item for making copies of photos. In the same way as for Text & Photo,
specify the photo type from [Halftone], [Photograph] and [Color Copies].
„Map
Select this item for making copies of documents that have text on colored backgrounds
such as maps.
Lighten/Darken /Contrast (Adjusting the Copy Density and Contrast)
You can adjust the copy density and contrast.
Note
• [Lighten/Darken] of [Lighten/Darken /Contrast] and [Lighten/Darken] of [Basic Copying] are
the same.
• If [Lighten/Darken] or [Contrast] is selected when Image Quality Preset is set, the Image
Quality Preset setting values are cleared.
1
Select [Lighten/Darken/Contrast].
2
Use [ ] and [
settings.
Copy
Note
] to adjust the
„Lighten/Darken
You can select from seven copy density levels between [Lighter] and [Darker].
The copy color density increases the nearer the level is to [Darker] and the copy color
density decreases the nearer the level is to [Lighter].
„Contrast
You can select from five contrast levels between [Lower] and [Higher].
The nearer the level is to [Higher], the greater the difference between light parts and
dark parts as light parts become lighter and dark parts become darker. The nearer the
level is to [Lower], the less the difference between light parts and dark parts.
63
3 Copy
Sharpness/Color Saturation (Adjusting the Sharpness and Color
Saturation of Images)
You can adjust the sharpness and color saturation.
Note
• If [Sharpness] or [Color Saturation] is selected when Image Quality Preset is set, the Image
Quality Preset setting values are cleared.
1
Select [Sharpness/Color
Saturation].
2
Use [ ] and [
settings.
] to adjust the
„Sharpness
You can select from five sharpness levels between [Softer] and [Sharper].
Copy
The nearer the level is to [Sharper], the sharper the contours of images. The nearer the
level is to [Softer], the softer the contours of images.
„Color Saturation
3
You can select from five color saturation levels between [Lower] and [Higher].
The brightness of color in documents increases the nearer the level is to [Higher] and
the brightness of color in documents decreases the nearer the level is to [Lower].
Auto Exposure (Erasing the Background Color of Documents)
When copies are made with [Black] of Output Color selected, the background color of
documents such as newspapers and colored paper documents is erased.
When making copies with [Full Color], [Dual Colors], or [Single Color] of Output Color
selected, the background of white documents is erased.
Note
• When [Document Type] is set to [Photo], the [Auto Exposure] feature does not work.
1
Select [Auto Exposure].
2
Select [Off] or [On].
„Off
The background color of the document is included during copying.
„On
The background color of the document is excluded during copying.
64
Image Quality
Color Balance (Adjusting Color Balance)
The strength of the four colors (yellow, magenta, cyan, and black) can be adjusted in
seven levels for each of their low, medium, and high density ranges.
Note
• If [Color Balance] is selected when Image Quality Preset is set, the Image Quality Preset
setting values are cleared.
1
Select [Color Balance].
2
Select the button for the color you
want to adjust.
3
Use [ ] and [ ] to adjust the color
balance for each density.
„Low Density
Use this item to adjust the strength of the low density.
Copy
„Medium Density
Use this item to adjust the strength of the medium density.
„High Density
3
Use this item to adjust the strength of the high density.
Color Shift (Adjusting Color Tone)
The tone of color documents can be adjusted to make subtle changes to the overall
tone of the document. You can adjust the tone two levels at a time by moving the bar
to the left or right.
The bottom bar of the [Color Shift] screen indicates the tone of the document and the
upper bar indicates the tone after adjustment. If you press a color shift button, you can
move the lower bar to change the overall tone of the document to the tone of the upper
bar.
For example, if Y (yellow) on the lower bar is moved to the left towards R (red) on the
upper bar, the yellow in fruit becomes reddish to give an apple a riper-looking tone. This
changes all colors. For example, R (red) becomes more M (magenta) and G (green)
becomes more Y (yellow).
If Y (yellow) on the lower bar is moved to the right towards G (green) on the upper bar,
the yellow in fruit becomes greener. This changes all colors. For example, M (magenta)
becomes more R (red) and R (red) becomes more Y (yellow).
Note
• Confirm that [Full Color] is selected in [Output Color] of the [Basic Copying] screen. Tone
adjustment is not possible when Output Color is set to [Black].
• If [Color Shift] is selected when Image Quality Preset is set, the Image Quality Preset setting
values are cleared.
1
Select [Color Shift].
2
Select the color shift buttons.
65
3 Copy
Scan Options
On the [Scan Options] screen, you can configure features for scanning documents.
The following shows the reference section for each feature.
2 Sided (Making 2 sided Copies)................................................................................................66
Bound Originals (Copying Facing Pages onto Separate Sheets) ................................................67
2 Sided Book Copy (Making 2 Sided Copies of Facing Pages) .................................................68
Original Size (Specifying the Scan Size for the Document).......................................................69
Mixed Size Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents Simultaneously) ...........................70
Border Erase (Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows of the Document) ......................................71
Copy Position/Margin Shift (Shifting the Image Copy Position) ...............................................71
Image Rotation (Making Copies with the Image Rotated Vertically or Horizontally)...............73
Mirror Image/Negative Image (Making Reversed Copies of Images) .......................................74
Original Orientation (Specify the Orientation of Loaded Documents).......................................75
Copy
1
On the [All Services] screen, select
[Copy].
3
2
Select the [Scan Options] tab and
then select a feature on the [Scan
Options] screen that appears.
2 Sided (Making 2 sided Copies)
Copies of 1 sided and 2 sided documents can be made on one side or both sides.
Important • Confirm that the orientation of the document and the [Original Orientation] setting of the
[Scan Options] screen are the same.
Note
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
1
Select [2 Sided].
2
Select any item.
„1 J 1 Sided
Makes a copy of a 1 sided document on one side of the paper.
„1 J 2 Sided
Makes a copy of a 1 sided document on both sides of the paper.
„2 J 2 Sided
Makes a copy of a 2 sided document on both sides of the paper.
66
Scan Options
„1 J 2 Sided
Makes a copy of a 2 sided document on both sides of the paper.
„Originals
z
Head to Head
Select this item when the first and second sides of the document are of the same
orientation.
z
Head to Toe
Select this item when the first and second sides of the document are of the opposite
orientation.
This appears when [2 J 2 Sided] or [2 J 1 Sided] is selected.
„Copies
z
Head to Head
z
Head to Toe
Select this item when you want the orientation of the first and second sides of the
copy to be the opposite of that of the document.
This appears when [1 J 2 Sided] or [2 J 2 Sided] is selected.
Bound Originals (Copying Facing Pages onto Separate Sheets)
The Bound documents feature allows you to copy facing pages of a document onto
separate sheets of paper in page order. This feature is useful if you need to make
separate copies from facing pages of bound documents such as a booklet.
Important • You cannot use the document feeder with this feature.
• A document of non-standard size or undetectable size may not be divided exactly into two.
1
Select [Bound Originals].
2
Select the document.
3
Select the page to copy.
„Off
The document is not copied as a bound document.
„Left Page then Right
Copies are made from the left page of facing pages in a document starting from the left
page.
„Right Page then Left
Copies are made from the right page of facing pages in a document starting from the
right page.
„Top Page then Bottom
Copies are made from the top page of facing pages in a document starting from the top
page.
67
Copy
Select this item when you want the orientation of the first and second sides of the
copy to be the same as that of the document.
3
3 Copy
„Both Pages
Copies are made of both pages in page order.
„Left Page Only
Copies are made of the left page only. You can select this item when [Left Page then
Right] or [Right Page then Left] is selected.
„Right Page Only
Copies are made of the right page only. You can select this item when [Left Page then
Right] or [Right Page then Left] is selected.
„Top Page Only
Copies are made of the top page only. You can select this item when [Top Page then
Bottom] is selected.
„Bottom Page Only
Copy
Copies are made of the bottom page only. You can select this item when [Top Page
then Bottom] is selected.
„Center Erase
3
Erases the shadow from the center section. You can set the width for Center Erase in
the range from 0 to 50 mm in increments of 1 mm.
2 Sided Book Copy (Making 2 Sided Copies of Facing Pages)
You can assign pages when making copies of facing pages in a bound document so
that pages face each other in the same way as the document. A blank sheet is inserted
automatically as the first page. You can also specify the start page and the end page
from the left and right facing pages.
Note
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
• Non-standard sized documents will not be separated into two accurately.
1
Select [2 Sided Book Copy].
2
Select the document.
Note
• Confirm the orientation of the
loaded document.
„Off
The document is not copied as a 2 sided book copy.
„Left Page then Right
Copies are made of both pages from the left page of facing pages in a document
starting from the left page.
„Right Page then Left
Copies are made of both pages from the right page of facing pages in a document
starting from the right page.
„Top Page then Bottom
Copies are made of both pages from the top page of facing pages in a document
starting from the top page.
68
Scan Options
„Start Page & End Page
Displays the [2 Sided Book Copy - Start Page & End Page] screen.
„Center Erase
Erases the shadow from the center section of the document. You can set the width for
Center Erase in the range from 0 to 50 mm in increments of 1 mm.
[2 Sided Book Copy - Start Page & End Page] Screen
You can set the copy start page and end page.
1
Select [Start Page & End Page].
2
Set the start page and end page.
„Start Page
Copy
Select the copy start page from the following items.
z
[Left Page]/[Right Page]
You can select these items when [Left Page then Right] or [Right Page then Left] is
selected.
z
[Top Page]/[Bottom Page]
You can select these items when [Top Page then Bottom] is selected.
„End Page
Select the copy end page from the following items.
z
[Left Page]/[Right Page]
You can select these items when [Left Page then Right] or [Right Page then Left] is
selected.
z
[Top Page]/[Bottom Page]
You can select these items when [Top Page then Bottom] is selected.
Original Size (Specifying the Scan Size for the Document)
You can set the scan size for the document.
Specify the size of the document when scanning non-standard size documents or when
making copies at a size different from that of the currently loaded document.
1
Select [Original Size].
2
Select the size of the document.
If you select a non-standard size,
specify values for the X and Y
directions.
„Auto Size Detect
Scan sizes are detected automatically.
Note
• If the document size cannot be detected, a screen to input the document size appears.
69
3
3 Copy
„Standard size
Select from eleven preset sizes.
You can change the indicated document sizes. For information about the setting procedure, refer to
"Original Size Defaults" (P.284).
„Free
Enter the desired scan size when scanning non-standard size documents or when
making copies at a size different from that of the currently loaded document. The size
can be specified in 1 mm increments within the range from 15 to 432 mm for the width
(X) on the document glass and within the range from 15 to 297 mm for the height (Y)
on the document glass. The scale on the outside of the document glass is a useful
reference for specifying the document size.
Mixed Size Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents
Simultaneously)
Copy
You can simultaneously scan different size documents onto paper that matches the
respective sizes of the documents. You can also specify the size of the paper to make
copies on so that copies are made on the same size of paper.
3
Important • Confirm that the orientation of the document and the [Original Orientation] setting of the
[Scan Options] screen are the same.
• Be sure to load A5 documents vertically.
• When loading a B5 size document with A3 or A4 size documents in a vertical direction, place
the B5 document also in a vertical direction.
Note
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
• [Original Orientation] is set in reference to the direction set for the first page of the document.
Load the rest of the document from the second page onwards in the same direction as that
of the first page of the document.
1
Select [Mixed Size Originals].
2
Select [Off] or [On].
„Off
Select this item when all documents are of the same size.
„On
When documents of different sizes are copied, the machine automatically detects the
size of each document.
70
Scan Options
Border Erase (Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows of the Document)
When you make copies with the document cover open or make copies from a book,
black shadows sometimes appear along the edges and center margin of the paper. If
this happens, you can make copies with the shadows erased.
Important • Confirm that the orientation of the document and the [Original Orientation] setting of the
[Scan Options] screen are the same.
Note
• When making 2 sided copies, the same border erase amount is set for the top and bottom
sides.
• When Reduce/Enlarge is set, the border erase amount is also enlarged or reduced
proportionately to the copy ratio.
For information about the areas that can actually be printed, refer to "Printable Area" (P.501).
Select [Border Erase].
2
Select [Variable Erase].
3
Use [ ] and [ ] to set the width to
erase for each of the top, bottom,
left, right, and center.
Copy
1
3
„Normal
The border erase amount is set to 2 mm for the top, bottom, left, and right.
„Variable Erase
z
T/B erase
Shadows at the top and bottom of the document are erased. Edges at the top and
bottom are erased in accordance with the direction that the document was loaded.
You can set the border erase width within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm
increments.
z
L/R erase
Shadows on the left and right of the document are erased. Edges on the left and right
are erased in accordance with the direction that the document was loaded. You can
set the border erase width within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.
z
Center Erase
Shadows in the center of documents such as booklets or documents with facing
pages are erased. You can set the center erase width within the range from 0 to 50
mm in 1 mm increments.
Copy Position/Margin Shift (Shifting the Image Copy Position)
Copies can be made with the document image position shifted to the left, right, top, or
bottom of the paper or with the document center shifted to the center of the paper. You
can also make copies with a margin added to the top, bottom, left, or right. When
making 2 sided prints, you can set the shift positions for both Side 1 and Side 2.
Important • Confirm that the orientation of the document and the [Original Orientation] setting of the
[Scan Options] screen are the same.
Note
• When [Mixed Size Originals] is set, the position is shifted in reference to the position of the
image of the first sheet of the document.
• The image shift amount is set in accordance with the paper. Even if you set copies to be
enlarged or reduced in Reduce/Enlarge, the image shift amount is not affected.
71
3 Copy
1
Select [Margin Shift].
2
Select [Auto Center] or [Margin
Shift/Variable Shift].
„No Shift
Copies are made without the position of the document image being shifted.
„Auto Center
Copies are made so that the center of the document matches the center of the paper.
„Margin Shift/Variable Shift
You can set the margin amount. Set the shift amount within the range from 0 to 50 mm
in 1mm increments.
Copy
z
Side 1
Displays the [Margin Shift - Side 1] screen.
z
3
Side 2
Displays the [Margin Shift - Side 2] screen.
[Margin Shift - Side 1] Screen
You can set the copy position/margin shift of Side 1.
1
Select [Side 1].
2
Select any item.
„No Shift
Copies are made without the position of the document image being shifted.
„Auto Center
Copies are made so that the center of the document matches the center of the paper.
„Corner Shift
Copies are made with the document image shifted to the edges or corners of the paper.
You can select from eight shift directions.
„Variable Shift
Enter the margin values for copying. Set the top, bottom, left, and right values within
the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1mm increments.
72
Scan Options
[Margin Shift - Side 2] Screen
You can set the copy position/margin shift of Side 2.
1
Select [Side 2].
2
Select any item.
„No Shift
Copies are made without the position of the document image being shifted.
„Auto Center
Copies are made so that the center of the document matches the center of the paper.
„Corner Shift
„Variable Shift
Enter the margin values for copying. Set the top, bottom, left, and right values within
the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1mm increments.
„Independent Shift
You can make copies with settings different to those of Side 1.
„Mirror Shift
Select this item when you want the positioning of Side 2 to match the positioning of Side
1.
Image Rotation (Making Copies with the Image Rotated Vertically or
Horizontally)
If the orientation of the paper currently loaded in the tray differs from that of the
document that is loaded, the machine automatically rotates the document image to
make copies with the document and paper orientations matched. You can also select
where to use as a reference for image rotation if documents are of mixed orientations.
The image rotation feature can only be used to make copies to paper of A4 and 8.5 ×
11 inches or smaller.
1
Select [Image Rotation].
2
Select any item.
„Off
Copies of documents are made as they are, even if they are orientated differently.
„Always On
Copies are made with the document image automatically rotated so that the orientation
of the document matches that of the paper.
73
Copy
Copies are made with the document image shifted to the edges or corners of the paper.
You can select from eight shift directions.
3
3 Copy
„On during Auto
Copies are made with the document image automatically rotated so that the orientation
of the document matches that of the paper when [Auto %] of [Reduce/Enlarge] or [Auto]
of [Paper Supply] is selected.
„Rotation Direction
Displays the [Image Rotation - Rotation Direction] screen.
[Image Rotation - Rotation Direction] Screen
You can set the reference position for rotation.
1
Select [Rotation Direction].
2
Select a rotation reference position.
Copy
„Staple Position
When the finisher is installed, [Staple Position] is displayed.
If documents are of mixed orientations, images will be rotated to match the stapling
edge based on the staple feature settings.
3
„Portrait Original - Left Edge
If documents are of mixed orientations, images will be rotated so that the top edge of a
landscape document is aligned with the left edge of a portrait document.
„Portrait Original - Right Edge
If documents are of mixed orientations, the image will be rotated so that the top edge
of a landscape document is aligned with the right edge of a portrait document.
Mirror Image/Negative Image (Making Reversed Copies of Images)
Copies can be made with the left and right sides of the document image reversed or
the colors reversed in Output Color of the document image.
1
Select [Mirror Image/Negative
Image].
2
Select [On] for [Mirror Image] and
[Negative Image] as necessary.
„Mirror Image
z
Off
Mirror Image is not applied to copies.
z
On
Copies are made with the left and right sides of the document image reversed
symmetrically.
74
Scan Options
„Negative Image
z
Off
Negative Image is not applied to copies.
z
On
Copies are made with the colors reversed in the selected Output Color.
Note
• When Output Color is set to Black or Single Color, the density (contrast) is reversed for black
and white.
• When Output Color is set to Full Color, the complementary colors are reversed.
• When [Negative Image] and [Border Erase] are set simultaneously, the edge erase area
turns to white.
Original Orientation (Specify the Orientation of Loaded Documents)
In order to identify the top of the document, the orientation of the set document must
be configured.
• If the [Original Orientation] differs from the actual document orientation, then the machine
may mistakenly detect the head of the document.
1
Select [Original Orientation].
2
Select [Head to Top] or Head to
Left in accordance with the
orientation that the document is
loaded.
Copy
Note
3
„Head to Top
Select this item when placing the top of the document facing the inner side of the
document glass or document feeder.
„Head to Left
Select this item when placing the top of the document facing the left side of the
document glass or document feeder. Be sure to select [Head to Left] when the top of
the document is placed facing the left side (horizontal text).
75
3 Copy
Output Format
On the [Output Format] screen, you can configure features for scanning documents
The following shows the reference section for each feature.
Copy Output/Stapling (Specifying Copy Output/Stapling for Output) ......................................76
Booklet Creation (Creating a Booklet) .......................................................................................77
Covers (Attaching a Cover to Copies) ........................................................................................79
Transparency Separators (Inserting Blank Sheets between Transparencies)..............................80
Multiple-Up (Copying Multiple Sheets onto One Sheet) ...........................................................81
Poster (Making Enlarged Copies Spread over Multiple Sheets).................................................82
Repeat Image (Making Multiple Copies on One Sheet) .............................................................83
Annotation (Adding Stamp/Date/Page Number to Copies)........................................................83
Set Numbering (Printing Control Number on the Background) .................................................87
Double Copy (Making Several Copies of the Same Image on one Sheet of Paper)...................90
Copy
3
1
On the [All Services] screen, select
[Copy].
2
Select the [Output Format] tab and
then select a feature on the [Output
Format] screen that appears.
Copy Output/Stapling (Specifying Copy Output/Stapling for Output)
You can specify the copy output method. When Stapling is specified, each set of copies
can be stapled and then output. When the Offset Stacking Module is installed, the
output position of copies is offset alternately to distinguish each set of copies.
Note
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
1
Select [Copy Output/Stapling].
2
Select any item.
„Auto
Copies are output collated when Auto Document Feeder, 2 Sided Book Copy, [Blank
Separators + N Sets] or [No Separators + N Sets] of Transparencies, Booklet, Stapling,
Build Job, Sample Set, and [Document > 50 sheets] are set.
„Collated /Stapling
The machine can output sheets sorted into sets that are arranged in page order.
76
Output Format
„Uncollated
The machine can output the specified number of copies and sort sheets by page.
„Stapling
Displays the [Copy Output/Stapling] screen.
„Output Destination
Specifies the output destination. You can select from the following trays.
Note
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
z
Center Output Tray
z
Side Output Tray
z
Finisher Tray
You can set stapling. The number of pages that can be stapled is 2 to 50 (P paper and
J paper). Bond paper, plain paper, recycled paper, and custom paper 1 to 5 can be
stapled.
Important • Confirm that the orientation of the document and the [Original Orientation] setting of the
[Scan Options] screen are the same.
1
Select [Stapling].
2
Select the stapling position.
„None
Stapling is not performed.
„Staple Position
Select from five staple positions: One Staple, Top Left; Two Staples, Left; Two Staples,
Top; One Staple, Top Right; and Two Staples, Right.
Important • In the following cases, the staple direction appearing on the screen and the direction in
which staples are actually stapled differ.
When the document is placed in the direction it is read (top side up) and one staple was
stapled on the top left.
When the document is placed in the left direction (left side up) and one staple was stapled
on the top left.
Booklet Creation (Creating a Booklet)
The machine can copy pages laid out so as when multiple-page sheets are overlaid
and folded along the center (gutter), a booklet is created in page order. You can also
set the gutter and attach a cover when making booklets.
Important • Confirm that the orientation of the document and the [Original Orientation] setting of the
[Scan Options] screen are the same.
Note
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
• If the number of pages in the booklet is not a multiple of four, the remaining pages will be
output as blank pages.
77
Copy
[Copy Output/Stapling] Screen
3
3 Copy
1
Select [Booklet Creation].
2
Select [Left Bind/Top Bind] or
[Right Bind].
„Off
Booklet Creation is not applied to copies.
„Left Bind/Top Bind
Copies are made to enable left binding or top binding.
„Right Bind
Copies are made to enable right binding.
„Gutter
Copy
Displays the [Booklet Creation - Gutter] screen.
„Covers
3
Displays the [Booklet Creation - Covers] screen.
„Subsets
Displays the [Booklet Creation - Subsets] screen. This item can be selected when
[Cover] is set to [Off].
„Last Original as Back Cover
The last page of the original is used as the back cover of the booklet. Select the check
box to use the last page as the back cover. When using [Subsets] to separate booklets,
the cover will be made on the last page of the last subset.
Note
• Depending on the number of pages in the original, a blank sheet may be inserted before the last page.
[Booklet Creation - Gutter] Screen
You can set the gutter within the range from 0 to 50 mm in increments of 1 mm.
1
Use [ ] and [
value.
] to specify a gutter
[Booklet Creation - Covers] Screen
You can attach a cover to a booklet.
78
1
Select [Covers].
2
Select [Off] or [On].
3
If you selected [On], select [Off] or
[On] in [Printed Covers].
Output Format
„Printed Covers
z
Off
A blank sheet of paper is attached as the cover.
z
On
The document is copied to the cover from the first page. When you only want to copy
to the outside of the cover, insert a blank sheet of paper for the page that will become
the inside of the cover.
„Paper Tray Settings
Displays the [Booklet Creation - Covers - Paper Tray Settings] screen.
Select the tray to use from [Body Pages Tray] and [Covers Tray]. Select trays with
paper of the same size and orientation for the copy paper and the cover.
When [Bypass…] is selected, the [Tray 5 (Bypass)] screen appears. For more information, refer to
"[Tray 5 (Bypass)] Screen" (P.56).
When you have a large number of originals, the specified number of sheets can be
divided, folded in half, and overlaid to form a booklet. This feature can be set to from 1
to 50 pages in 1 page increments.
1
Select [On].
2
Set the number of copies using [
and [ ] or with the numeric
keypad.
]
Covers (Attaching a Cover to Copies)
You can make copies with a cover attached.
The front and back cover can be output before the first page of the document on a
different type of paper (e.g. colored paper or heavyweight paper).
Important • If a memory overflow occurs when making copies with a cover attached, the job needs to be
canceled according to the message that appears.
Note
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
• When making 2 sided copies, copies are made on both sides of the top cover/back cover in
accordance with the page order of the document.
1
Select [Covers].
2
Select [Front Cover] or [Front &
Back Covers].
3
Select whether or not to attach a
cover to the copy.
„No Covers
A cover is not attached.
79
Copy
[Booklet Creation -Subsets] screen
3
3 Copy
„Front Cover
Make copies with a cover output on a different type of paper before the first page of the
document. Also, if [On] of [Printed Covers] is selected, copies can be made from the
first page of the document on a different type of paper.
„Front & Back Covers
Outputs a cover on a different type of paper before the first page and after the last page
of the document. Also, if [On] of [Printed Covers] is selected, copies can be made on a
different type of paper for the cover on the first page and last page of the document.
„Printed Covers
z
Off
A blank sheet of paper is attached as the cover.
z
On
The document is copied to the cover from the first page. When you only want to copy
to the outside of the cover, insert a blank sheet of paper in the document.
Copy
„Paper Tray Settings
Displays the [Covers - Paper Tray Settings] screen.
3
Select the tray to use from [Body Pages Tray] and [Covers Tray]. Select trays with
paper of the same size and orientation for the copy paper and the cover.
When [Bypass…] is selected, the [Tray 5 (Bypass)] screen appears. For more information, refer to
"[Tray 5 (Bypass)] Screen" (P.56).
Transparency Separators (Inserting Blank Sheets between
Transparencies)
A blank sheet can be output inserted as a separator between copied transparencies.
At the same time, only the required number of copies for distribution is printed. When
loading transparencies in Tray 5 (bypass), make sure that the paper for the separators
(or for distribution) is loaded at the same orientation as that of the transparencies.
Important • Use V516 (Xerox film [no border]) transparency sheets. Using transparency sheets for color
(V556/V558 [with white boarder]) may cause a malfunction or paper jam.
Note
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
• When loading A4 size transparencies on Tray 5 (bypass), we recommend loading them
vertically.
1
Select [Transparency Separators].
2
Select any item.
„Off
Transparency separators are not used.
„Blank Separators
A blank sheet of paper is inserted as a separator each time a transparency is copied.
Only one set of copies can be made.
80
Output Format
„Blank Separators + N Sets
A blank sheet of paper is inserted as a separator each time a transparency is copied.
At the same time, only the required number of copies for distribution is printed.
„No Separators + N Sets
Copies are made on transparencies and only the required number of copies for
distribution is printed.
„Paper Tray Settings
Displays the [Transparency Separators - Paper Tray Settings] screen. Select each
paper tray to use.
When [Bypass…] is selected, the [Tray 5 (Bypass)] screen appears. For more information, refer to
"[Tray 5 (Bypass)] Screen" (P.56).
Multiple-Up (Copying Multiple Sheets onto One Sheet)
When you select [Multiple Up], [Auto %] of [Reduce/Enlarge] is selected automatically.
The machine automatically sets the copy ratio and makes copies of the images so that
they fit on the selected paper.
Important • Confirm that the orientation of the document and the [Original Orientation] setting of the
[Scan Options] screen are the same.
Note
• When anything other than [Auto%] is selected for [Reduce/Enlarge], image loss may occur
at edges depending on the image size of the document.
• When Border Erase is set, border erase is executed for each document copied to the whole
document.
• When margin shift is set, shift is executed on the whole document. For this reason, image
loss at the edge of the original may occur depending on the document image size of the
document.
• Select the other than [Auto] for the paper tray of [Paper Supply] on the [Basic Copying]
screen.
1
Select [Multiple-Up].
2
Select any item.
„1 Up
Multiple Up is not applied.
„2 Up
Two document sheets can be copied together onto a single sheet of paper.
„4 Up
Four document sheets can be copied together onto a single sheet of paper.
„8 Up
Eight document sheets can be copied together onto a single sheet of paper.
„Image Order
You can select the layout for copying the documents together.
81
Copy
When the machine is equipped with a document feeder, two, four, or six sheets of
documents can be copied together onto a single sheet of paper.
3
3 Copy
Poster (Making Enlarged Copies Spread over Multiple Sheets)
An enlarged copy of a document can be made spread over multiple sheets.
This feature allows you to create a large poster by pasting together the copies spread
over multiple sheets. Copied sheets are provided with a paste margin so that they can
be pasted together. This paste margin is fixed to 10 mm.
Important • Confirm that the orientation of the document and the [Original Orientation] setting of the
[Scan Options] screen are the same.
Note
• You can only make one set of copies for a poster.
1
Select [Poster].
2
Select [Output Size] or
[Enlargement %].
„Off
Copy
Poster is not applied to copies.
„Output Size
You can select from seven paper sizes.
3
„Paper Tray Settings
Displays the [Poster - Paper Tray Settings] screen. Select the paper tray to use.
When [Bypass…] is selected, the [Tray 5 (Bypass)] screen appears. For more information, refer to
"[Tray 5 (Bypass)] Screen" (P.56).
When [Enlargement %] is Selected
You can specify a different ratio for the height and width.
1
Select [Enlargement %].
2
Use [ ] and [ ] to specify the
height and width ratios.
„X (width) Y (height)
Set the height and width ratios within the range from 100 to 400% in 1% increments.
„Simultaneous
You can simultaneously change the numerical values of the height and width by the
same amount.
82
Output Format
Repeat Image (Making Multiple Copies on One Sheet)
A document image can be copied on one sheet of paper repeatedly for a specified
number of times.
When the copy ratio is set to Auto, the repeated copies of the image are reduced to fit
on the selected paper. You can also specify how the repeated copies of the image are
arranged.
Note
• When making repeat copies at the same size as the document image, specify a number of
repeats that will fit on the paper.
1
Select [Image Repeat].
2
Select [Auto] or [Variable Repeat].
„Off
Image Repeat is not applied.
Copy
„Auto Repeat
The machine automatically sets the number of copies according to the document size,
paper size, and copy ratio, and then repeatedly copies the document image onto the
paper.
Note
• Copies cannot be made when the document image is larger than the specified paper size.
„Variable Repeat
Specify the number of times to repeatedly copy the document image along each of the
long and short sides of the paper. You can specify from 1 to 23 repeats along the long
side (Y) and from 1 to 33 repeats along the short side (X).
„Image Layout
z
Even
Images are copied on the paper with the paper evenly divided up by the repeated
number of images.
z
Bias
The repeat images are copied to the paper consecutively.
Annotation (Adding Stamp/Date/Page Number to Copies)
You can add a stamp, date, and page number not included on the document to copy
paper when outputting copies.
You can select from already provided formats for the stamp type, date, page number,
and printing position.
Note
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
• The annotation image and character size is not changed even if you set the enlarge/reduce
setting.
• If a stamp, date, and page are specified at the same time, we recommend confirming that
none of the positions overlap before making copies.
• If [Multiple-Up] is set, the annotation is added to the combined image.
• If [Repeat Image] or [Booklet Creation] is set, the annotation is added to each individual
image.
83
3
3 Copy
1
Select [Annotation].
„Stamp
Displays the [Annotation - Stamp] screen.
„Date
Displays the [Annotation - Date] screen.
„Page Number
Displays the [Annotation - Page Number] screen.
Copy
[Annotation - Stamp] Screen
You can add the "CONFIDENTIAL", "Copy Prohibited", "URGENT", "IMPORTANT",
"Circulation", "Side 2 Recycled", "DRAFT", and "VOID" stamps to copies.
3
1
Select [Stamp].
2
Select [Off] or [On].
„Off
No stamp is added.
„On
A stamp is added.
„Text
Displays the [Annotation - Stamp - Text] screen.
You can select from eight character types for the stamp.
„Position
Displays the [Annotation - Stamp - Position] screen.
You can select from nine positions for the stamp.
„Print On…
Displays the [Annotation - Stamp - Print On] screen.
You can select the page(s) to print the stamp from [First Page Only] and [All Pages].
„Color
Displays the [Annotation - Stamp - Color] screen.
You can select from seven colors for the stamp.
Note
84
• If [Date] and [Page Number] are both set, specify [Black].
Output Format
[Annotation - Date] Screen
You can make copies with a date added. The printed date is the date and time that the
copy was made.
For information about the date display format, refer to "Offset Stacking (Center Output Tray)" (P.269).
1
Select [Date].
2
Select [Off] or [On].
„Off
No date is added.
„On
A date is added.
Copy
„Print On
Displays the [Annotation - Date - Print On] screen.
You can select the page(s) to print the date from [First Page Only] and [All Pages].
3
„Position
Displays the [Annotation - Date - Position] screen.
You can select from six positions for printing the date.
[Annotation - Page Number] Screen
You can add a page number to copies.
1
Select [Page Number].
2
Select [Off] or [On].
„Off
No page number is added.
„On
A page number is added.
„Style
Displays the [Annotation - Page Number - Style] screen.
„Position
Displays the [Annotation - Page Number - Position] screen.
You can select from six positions for the page number.
„Print On
Displays the [Annotation - Page Number - Print On] screen.
85
3 Copy
[Annotation - Page Number - Style] Screen
You can set the page number style.
1
Select [Style].
2
Select the page number style.
„1,2,3
A page number is added.
„-1-,-2-,-3A hyphen is added to the left and right of the page number. (Example: -1-)
Copy
„1/N,2/N,3/N
The total number of pages is added to the right side of the page number. (Example: 1/
50, 2/50)
If [1/N,2/N,3/N] is selected, you can select the following items.
3
z
Auto
The number of pages of the document is automatically counted as the total number
of pages.
z
Enter Number
You can specify the total number of pages within the range from 1 to 999.
„Page1, Page2, Page3
"Page" is added in front of the page number. (Example: Page1, Page2)
[Annotation - Page Number - Print On] Screen
You can specify the page(s) to add a page number.
1
Select [Print On].
„All Pages
A page number is added to all pages.
„Include Covers/Separators
Add a check to include a cover or separators.
„Start Number
Specify the start page for adding page numbers within the range from 1 to 999. To enter
the number with the numeric keypad, select [Enter Number Using Keypad] and then
enter the number.
86
Output Format
When [Enter First Page Number] is Selected
You can specify the start page for adding page numbers within the range from 1 to 999.
1
Select [Enter First Page Number].
2
Use [ ] and [ ] or select [Enter
Number using Keypad] and enter
the start page number.
Set Numbering (Printing Control Number on the Background)
You can lightly print a sequential control number on the background of each copy set.
For example, if you set "1" for the start number, "1" is printed on all page of the first
copy set and "2" is printed on all pages of the second set.
Note
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
1
Select [Set Numbering].
2
Select any item.
„Control Number
Displays the [Set Numbering - Control Number] screen.
„Text
Displays the [Set Numbering - Text] screen.
„User Account Number
Displays the [Set Numbering - User Account Number] screen.
„Date and Time
Displays the [Set Numbering - Date and Time] screen.
„Serial Number
Displays the [Set Numbering - Serial Number] screen.
„Text Effect
Displays the [Set Numbering - Text Effect] screen.
87
Copy
To prevent, for instance, the duplication of confidential documents for distribution at
conferences, you can use sequential numbering to associate distribution copies to
people.
3
3 Copy
[Set Numbering - Control Number] Screen
You can set a control number within the range from 1 to 999.
1
Select [Off] or [On].
2
If you selected [On], use [ ] and
[ ] or the numeric keypad to enter
the start number.
„Off
No control number is printed.
„On
A control number is printed. Enter the start number of the control number.
[Set Numbering - Text] Screen
Copy
Select the text to print on the copy.
3
1
Select [Off] or [On].
2
If you selected [On], select any
text.
„Off
No text is printed.
„On
Text is printed. You can select from three character types for the set numbering.
[Set Numbering - User Account Number] Screen
When using User Administration or Auditron Administration, a user account number is
printed.
1
Select [Off] or [On].
„Off
The user account number is not printed.
„On
The user account number is printed. However, nothing is printed if user authorization
has not taken place.
88
Output Format
[Set Numbering - Date and Time] Screen
You can print the date and time that copying started.
For information about the date display format, refer to "Offset Stacking (Center Output Tray)" (P.269).
1
Select [Off] or [On].
„Off
No date and time are printed.
„On
The date and time are printed.
[Set Numbering - Serial Number] Screen
Copy
The serial number of the machine is printed.
1
Select [Off] or [On].
3
„Off
No serial number is printed.
„On
The serial number is printed.
[Set Numbering - Text Effect] Screen
You can set the text effect. If you set a text effect and make a copy, text is embedded
in the background. The embedded text on the output copy is either printed in an
embossed or outline state.
1
Select [Off].
2
Select [Off], [Embossed], or
[Outline].
„ On
A text effect is applied.
„Embossed
The text on the background is printed so as it looks like it is embossed.
The characters of the text are printed in the pattern set for [Set Numbering Background Pattern] of [System Settings].
89
3 Copy
„Outline
The text on the background is printed in outline.
The background other than the outlined text is printed in the pattern set for [Set
Numbering - Background Pattern] of [System Settings].
For information about [Set Numbering - Background Pattern], refer to "Set Numbering - Background
Pattern" (P.264).
You can also set the color, character size, density, and other set numbering print settings in [System
Settings]. For information about other advanced settings, refer to "Other Settings" (P.269).
Double Copy (Making Several Copies of the Same Image on one Sheet of
Paper)
Repeatedly copies one original onto equally divided areas according to the specified
number of copies.
Note
Copy
3
• When anything other than [Auto%] is selected for [Reduce/Enlarge], image loss may occur
at edges depending on the image size of the document.ÅB
1
Select [Double Copy].
2
Select any item.
„Off
Double copy is not applied.
„2 images
2 images are repeatedly copied onto the same sheet of paper.
„4images
4 images are repeatedly copied onto the same sheet of paper.
„8 images
8 images are repeatedly copied onto the same sheet of paper.
90
Job Assembly
Job Assembly
On the [Job Assembly] screen, you can configure the Build Job features. The following
shows the reference section for features that can be configured on [Job Assembly].
Build Job (Making Copies of Documents with Different Settings in a Single Operation)........ 91
Sample Set (Checking the Finished Output of the Copy) .......................................................... 93
Document > 50 sheets (Adding Originals)................................................................................. 93
Delete Outside/Delete Inside (Deleting Outside/Inside of the Selected Area when Copying).. 94
1
On the [All Services] screen, select
[Copy].
2
Select the [Job Assembly] tab and
then select a feature on the [Job
Assembly] screen that appears.
Copy
Build Job (Making Copies of Documents with Different Settings in a
Single Operation)
3
This feature allows you to change and save settings individually for each document
page or stack and then to finally make copies of documents with different settings as
one job.
Note
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
1
Select [Build Job].
2
Select [Off] or [On].
„Off
Build Job is not applied.
„On
Build Job is applied.
[Copy Job] Screen
The following describes the screen that appears while Build Job is being executed.
„Chapter Division/Separators
Displays the [Build Job - Chapter Division/Separators] screen.
91
3 Copy
„Change Settings...
The Copy screen appears and you can change the settings for the loaded document.
After setting the features, press the <Start> button on the control panel to start
scanning of the document.
„Stop
The document data stored by the Build Job feature is cleared and the build job is
canceled.
Note
• The same operation is performed if you press the <C> button or <Clear All> button on the
control panel.
„Last Original
Select this to end scanning of documents. The build job starts.
„Next Original
Select this when you have another document. This is on when using the Build Job
feature.
Copy
„Start
3
Note
You can load the next document and configure the settings for the document.
• The same operation is performed if you press the <Start> button on the control panel.
[Build Job - Chapter Division/Separators] Screen
You can set the chapter division and separators.
„Off
The next stack of documents is copied after the previous stack.
„Chapter Division
The next stack of documents is copied from Side 1 of a new sheet of paper.
If [Chapter Division] is not selected and copying of the first loaded document ends on
Side 1, copying for the next document will begin on Side 2 of the last page of the first
document.
„Separators
Separators are inserted. Select the paper tray to use for the separators from
[Separators Tray].
92
Job Assembly
Sample Set (Checking the Finished Output of the Copy)
When making multiple sets of copies, you can make a proof set to check the finished
output and then print the remaining copies. After checking the output, select whether
to print the remaining copies or cancel. The number of sets to be copied can also be
changed. The sample is included in the total number of sets.
Note
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
1
Select [Sample Set].
2
Select [On].
„Off
Do not make a sample set.
„On
Document > 50 sheets (Adding Originals)
Use this feature if you have a stack of originals too large for the Document Feeder or
want to scan multiple originals on the Document Glass and copy them as one job.
The [Next Original] message that is usually displayed while scanning documents is
always selected in this mode. If the [Finishing] is set to [Auto], the output is
automatically sorted.
When all documents have been scanned, select [Last Original].
Note
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
1
Select [Document > 50 sheets].
2
Select [On].
„Off
[Document > 50 sheets] feature is turned off.
„On
[Document > 50 sheets] feature is turned on.
93
Copy
Make a sample set.
The machine pauses and displays a confirmation screen after a proof set is copied. To
output the remaining sets, select [Start]. To stop the job, select [Stop].
To change the number of sets, select [Change Quantity] and use the numeric keypad
to input the number of sets.
3
3 Copy
[Copy] screen
The [Copy] screen is displayed when copying begins.
„Stop
The document data stored by [Document > 50 sheets] feature is cleared and
[Document > 50 sheets] is canceled.
Note
• The same operation is performed if you press the <C> button or <Clear All> button on the
control panel.
„Last Original
Select this to end scanning of documents. [Document > 50 sheets] starts.
„Next Original
Select this when you have another document. This is on when using the [Document >
50 sheets] feature.
„Start
Copy
3
You can load the next document and configure the settings for the document.
Note
• The same operation is performed if you press the <Start> button on the control panel.
Delete Outside/Delete Inside (Deleting Outside/Inside of the Selected
Area when Copying)
Specify an area to delete everything outside or inside of when copying. Up to 3 areas
can be specified.
Note
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
1
Select [Delete Outside/Delete
Inside].
2
Select any item.
„Off
Turn off [Delete Outside / Delete Inside].
„Delete Outside
Delete outside of the selected area when copying.
„Delete
Delete inside of the selected area when copying.
„Area Settings
The [Delete Outside/ Delete Inside – Area X] screen is displayed. Select up to three
areas, from [Area 1] to [Area 3].
Note
94
• X represents the number of the area displayed.
Job Assembly
„Originals
For 2 sided originals, specify the side of the area you would like to delete outside of or
inside of.
z
Both Sides
The setting is applied to both sides of the document.
z
Side 1 Only
The setting is applied to only to Side 1 of the document.
z
Side 2 Only
The setting is applied to only to Side 2 of the document.
The [Delete Outside/Delete Inside – Area X] screen
Set the area to delete outside of or inside of. The upper right corner of the document is
the origin. The width is the x-axis and the height is the y-axis. The area to be used is
the rectangular area whose diagonal connects the points X1, Y1 and X2, Y2.
Note
• Set the coordinates with the upper right corner as the origin as though you were looking at
the document.
• When specifying multiple areas, the specified areas may overlap.
• When [Reduce/Enlarge] is enabled, the specified area will be reduced/enlarged accordingly.
• The setting can be changed from delete outside to delete inside without changing the
specified area.
1
Select [Area X].
Note
• X represents the number of
the area displayed.
2
Enter the value for X1 in [X1] using
the numeric keypad, and select
[Next].
3
Enter the value for Y1 in [Y1] using the numeric keypad, and select [Next].
4
Enter the value for X 2 in [X2] using the numeric keypad, and select [Next].
5
Enter the value for Y 1 in [Y1] using the numeric keypad, and select [Next].
Note
• To change the coordinates you have entered, select [Next], move
numerical values again.
, and enter the
• [X1],[Y1],[X2] and [Y2] for an area are all set to 0, this area becomes invalid. If no other area
is specified, the delete outside/inside function cannot be used.
„Clear Area X
Clear all the specified areas.
Note
• X represents the number of the area displayed.
„Next
moves to the next coordinate.
95
Copy
Set the coordinates within the range from 0 to 432 mm in 1 mm increments.
3
4 Fax
This chapter describes the [Fax/Internet Fax] screen and fax features.
Important • Some fax features are unavailable depending on the model. Optional accessories
are required to use these features. For more information, contact our Customer
Support Center.
z
Fax Procedure ............................................................................................98
z
Stopping the Fax.......................................................................................104
z
About Internet Fax ....................................................................................105
z
Basic Features..........................................................................................113
z
Image Quality............................................................................................120
z
Scan Options ............................................................................................121
z
Send Options ............................................................................................124
z
On-hook/Others ........................................................................................136
z
Broadcast..................................................................................................140
z
About Receiving Faxes.............................................................................149
z
About Facsimile Information Services ......................................................151
4 Fax
Fax Procedure
This section describes the basic fax operations. The following shows the fax flow and
reference sections.
Step 1 Loading Documents .........................................................................................................98
Step 2 Selecting Features ..........................................................................................................100
Step 3 Specifying the Destination.............................................................................................101
Step 4 Starting the Fax Job .......................................................................................................102
Step 5 Confirming the Fax Job in the Job Status ......................................................................103
Step 1 Loading Documents
There are two methods of loading documents.
„Document Feeder
z
Single sheet
z
Multiple sheets
Fax
„Document Glass
4
z
Single sheet
z
Bound documents, such as books
Document Feeder
The document feeder supports single sheet and multiple sheet documents, with sizes
ranging from 148.6 × 210mm (A5, A5 ) to a maximum of 297 × 600 mm (long) (A3, 11
× 17 inches).
The document feeder can only auto-detect documents of standard-size widths.
Note
• Size of document that can be detected vary depending on [Paper Size Settings] in the
System Administration mode. For information about [Paper Size Settings], refer to "Paper
Size Settings" (P.271).
The sizes on the left are converted into sizes shown on the right.
z
8-inch wide document J B5 width document
z
10-inch wide document J B4 width document
The document feeder can accept the following number of sheets.
Document type (weight)
Lightweight paper (38-49 g/m2)
2
Number of
sheets
75 sheets
Plain paper (50-81 g/m )
75 sheets
Heavyweight paper (81-128 g/m2)
50 sheets
For information about faxing mixed size documents, refer to "Mixed Size Originals (Scanning Different
Size Originals Simultaneously)" (P.122).
Important • Place folded or creased documents on the document glass to avoid paper jams.
• 2 sided scanning of lightweight paper (38-48 g/m2) is not supported.
98
Fax Procedure
1
Remove any paper clips and
staples before loading the
documents.
2
In the center of the document
feeder, set the document with the
surface to be faxed (top side if 2
sided document) facing upwards.
Note
3
• The <Confirmation> indicator
lights when the document is
loaded correctly.
Adjust the movable document
guides to just touch the edge of the
document stack.
Fax
Document Glass
The document glass accepts single-sheet or book form documents of sizes up to 297
× 432mm (A3, 11 × 17 inches).
The document glass can auto-detect only documents of standard sizes.
Note
• The sizes of documents that can be detected vary depending on [Paper Size Settings] in the
System Administration mode. For information about [Paper Size Settings], refer to "Paper
Size Settings" (P.271).
1
Open the document cover.
2
Place the document face down,
and align it against the top left
corner of the document glass.
3
Close the document cover.
Note
• When a standard size
document is placed on the
document glass, the size of
the document is displayed in
the message area.
99
4
4 Fax
Step 2 Selecting Features
You can select features from the [Fax/Internet Fax] screen.
Note
• The features displayed depend on the configuration of the machine.
• To use the [Login Setup] feature or [Auditron Administration] feature, you need a UserID and
Password, or just a UserID. For information about UserIDs and Passwords, contact our
Customer Support Center.
1
Press the <All Services> button.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
C
Select [Fax/Internet Fax].
3
If the previous settings remain,
press the <Clear All> button.
Fax
2
<All Services>
button
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
<Clear All>
button
C
4
Select the features to set from each
tab as necessary.
For information about each of these features, refer to the following sections.
"Basic Features" (P.113)
"Image Quality" (P.120)
"Scan Options" (P.121)
"Send Options" (P.124)
"On-hook/Others" (P.136)
100
Fax Procedure
Step 3 Specifying the Destination
You can specify the recipient using the Phone Number, Address Number, or Group
Number method. The following shows the support for each method.
Numeric Keypad
One Touch
buttons
Address Book

×
×
Specify 3 digits
(001 to 500)
Specify 2 digits + ∗
(nn0 to nn9).
You can specify
multiple recipients
Specify 3 digits
(001 to 070)
You can specify
multiple recipients
Specify from the List
tab,
You can specify
multiple recipients
# + 2 digits

×
Phone Number
Address Number
(Speed Dialing)
∗∗∗ (All address
numbers) can be set
Group Number
:
Input possible
×: Input not possible
• If the Address Book Extension Kit is installed, you can register up to 999 locations.
You can specify multiple recipients (Broadcast Send) using the above methods. You
can also use a combination of the methods.
If the same recipient was specified for several pending documents, you can send the
documents with a single phone call. This feature is referred to as Batch Send. Note that
you cannot use Batch Send with Broadcast Send, Relay Broadcast Send, Remote
Mailbox, and Delayed Start when prior to the specified time. Nor can transmissions to
a single recipient from separate departments be batch processed when there are
redialing, resending or delayed start jobs.
Important • Confirm the recipient before sending a fax.
For information about Broadcast Send, refer to "Broadcast Send (Transmitting to Multiple Recipients)"
(P.140).
This section describes specifying a recipient using the numeric keypad.
1
Enter the fax number using the
numeric keypad.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
Numeric keypad
C
2
To specify multiple recipients,
select [Next Recipient] on the touch
screen.
Note
• If you enter an incorrect value,
press the <C> button and
enter the correct value.
For information about specifying a fax number using the Address Book, refer to "Specifying Destination
Using the Address Book" (P.114).
101
Fax
Note
4
4 Fax
For information about specifying a fax number using speed dialing, refer to "Speed Dialing (Entering
Numbers Using Address Number)" (P.115).
For information about specifying a fax number using one touch buttons, refer to "Specifying Destination
Using One Touch Buttons" (P.115).
You can send an iFax. For information about iFax, refer to "About Internet Fax" (P.105).
Step 4 Starting the Fax Job
1
Press the <Start> button.
Important • When using the document
feeder, do not hold the
document while it is being fed
into the machine.
Note
• If a problem occurs, an error
message appears on the
touch screen. Solve the
problem in accordance with
the message.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
<Start> button
C
• You can set the next job during faxing.
Fax
„If You Have More Documents
If you have another document, select the [Next Original] on the touch screen while the
current document is being scanned. This allows you to transmit multiple documents as
one set of data.
4
1
Select [Next Original] while
scanning is in progress.
Note
• When using the document
feeder, load the next
document after the machine
has finished scanning the first
document.
• When the above screen is displayed and no operation is performed during a certain period
of time, the machine automatically assumes that there are no more
documents and clears the settings.
102
2
Load the next document.
3
Press the <Start> button.
If you still have more documents, load the next document and press the <Start>
button.
4
When all documents have been
scanned, select [Last Original].
Fax Procedure
Step 5 Confirming the Fax Job in the Job Status
1
Press the <Job Status> button.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
<Job Status>
button
C
2
Confirm the job status.
Note
• Select [ ] to display the
previous screen and select
[ ] to display the next
screen.
Fax
4
103
4 Fax
Stopping the Fax
To cancel faxing, follow the procedure below.
1
Select [Stop] on the screen or
press the <Stop> button on the
control panel.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
<Stop> button
C
Fax
2
Select [Stop].
3
If the screen of step 1 does not
appear, press the <Job Status>
button.
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
C
4
104
Select the job to cancel, and then
select [Stop].
<Job Status>
button
About Internet Fax
About Internet Fax
If you can use the fax features and the iFax Kit is installed, you can send and receive
data scanned by the machine as e-mail attachments via a corporate network and the
Internet. This differs from regular faxes in that you do not need to transmit data via a
telephone line.
For information about how to connect the machine to a network and set the network environment, refer
to the "Network Administrator Guide" and the manual on the CentreWare Utilities CD-ROM.
Note
• These features are not displayed on some models. Optional accessories are required to use
these features. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.
Outline of Internet Fax
The following describes the Internet Fax (hereafter referred to as iFax) features of the
machine.
Sending iFax
Important • The TIFF file profiles that can be processed differ depending on the iFax compatible
machine of the recipient. Before specifying a profile, confirm the profiles the iFax compatible
machine of the recipient can process.
For more information, refer to "Sending iFax" (P.105). For information about profiles, refer to "iFax
Profile (Specifying iFax Profiles)" (P.134).
Important • If an iFax transmission is directly sent to a computer, the document cannot be opened on the
computer in some cases. Use Scanner (Mail Transmission) when sending a document to a
computer.
Receiving iFax (Printing iFax)
The machine performs printing automatically when e-mail is received from an iFax
compatible machine. You do not need to perform a specific operation to receive e-mail.
Note
• The following TIFF file format and profiles can be handled when receiving e-mail.
File format: TIFF-FX (RFC2301) Profile: TIFF-S, TIFF-F, TIFF-J, and TIFF-C
• If an unsupported profile is received, the machine may not be able to print the file. Also, if a
TIFF-C profile is received, the file will be printed in black and white.
For more information, refer to "Receiving iFax (Printing iFax)" (P.105). For information about profiles,
refer to "iFax Profile (Specifying iFax Profiles)" (P.134).
Forwarding Documents Stored in the Mailbox
When the forwarding feature and a forwarding mail address are set on the mailbox, the
documents stored in the mailbox can be automatically forwarded. The document can
be forwarded to a specified computer and the user does not have to go to the fax
machine to pick the document up.
For more information, refer to "Forwarding Documents Stored in the Mailbox" (P.111).
105
Fax
iFax allows you to send documents scanned by the machine as TIFF file format e-mail
attachments to iFax compatible machines. This feature helps you to save on telephone
bills as the data is transmitted via an existing corporate Intranet and the Internet.
4
4 Fax
Sending an iFax to Normal Fax Machine via a Relay Station
By specifying mail addresses in a specified format, you can send faxes from the
machine on the network via an iFax compatible machine (fax gateway) to fax machines
that do not support the iFax feature.
When this feature is used, the fax is sent as an e-mail via the Internet to an iFax
compatible machine on a network. The fax is converted from an e-mail to a fax
document on the iFax compatible machine and forwarded to a specified fax machine.
When using this configuration, fax transmission costs can be reduced by locating the
fax gateway and fax machines within an area where the same local rate applies.
Important • This feature is available only when the e-mail reception method on the fax gateway is set to
SMTP.
For more information, refer to "Sending an iFax to Normal Fax Machine via a Relay Station" (P.106).
Other Features
„Registering Mail Addresses in the Address Book
If you register a recipient’s mail address in the Address Book, you do not need to enter
the mail address each time you send a fax to the recipient.
Note
• In the Address Book, you can also preset other settings such as the iFax profile and send
related settings when you set a mail address.
Fax
For information about Address Book registration, refer to "Address Book" (P.334).
„Using the Broadcast Send Feature
4
An iFax can be sent to multiple destinations by specifying multiple e-mail addresses for
its recipients. Also, you can mix normal fax recipients and iFax recipients to send a
broadcast transmission for fax and iFax.
For information about how to specify recipients, refer to "Step 3 Specifying the Destination" (P.101) and
"Specifying Destination Using the Address Book" (P.114).
Precautions When Sending iFax
The [Job Status] screen on the machine, the [Job History Report], and "Doc. Sent"
displayed on the [Transmission Report] indicate that the transmission to the SMTP
server configured on the machine has been successful. iFax transmission to the
recipient may not complete if there is a problem in the Internet. In such cases, there will
be no notifications to the machine. Therefore, it is recommended that you confirm by a
phone call when sending or receiving important information.
Note
• You can receive a transmission result e-mail if you set Read Status (MDN)/Send Status
(DSN) when transmitting. For more information, refer to "Transmission Report/Read Status
(Printing Transmission Report/Receiving Fax Transmission Result Mail)" (P.129).
Mail Server Restrictions
Large e-mail may not be sent or received depending on the system environment (e-mail
server restrictions, etc.). When setting the number of pages for sending split e-mail,
confirm the system environment of the sender and recipient, respectively.
If outgoing e-mail is split but the size of one page is too large, reduce the size by
changing the resolution or document type.
106
About Internet Fax
Features Unavailable for Sending iFax
The following features that are available for sending regular faxes are unavailable for
sending iFax.
Screen
Feature
Send Options
Communication Mode
Priority Send/Delayed Start
Send Header
Cover Note
Remote Mailbox
F Code
On-hook/Others
Note
Polling
• If you are using the fax gateway feature, you can set the communication mode and F code.
For information about the fax gateway feature, refer to "Sending an iFax to Normal Fax
Machine via a Relay Station" (P.106).
About TIFF File Format and Profiles
Fax
„When Specifying a Profile
The profiles that can be processed differ depending on the iFax compatible machine of
the recipient. Before specifying a profile, confirm the profiles the iFax compatible
machine of the recipient can process.
„If an Unsupported Profile is Specified
If an unsupported profile is received, the machine may not be able to print the file. If
printing is not possible, confirm the [Job History Report].
Note
• The following TIFF file format and profiles can be handled when receiving e-mail.
File format: TIFF-FX (RFC2301)
Profiles: TIFF-S, TIFF-F, TIFF-J, TIFF-C
• If an unsupported profile is received, the machine may not be able to print the file. Also, if a
TIFF-C profile is received, the file will be printed in black and white. For information about
profiles, refer to "iFax Profiles (Specifying iFax Profiles)" (P131).
Differences between iFax and Regular Fax Features
This section describes the differences between iFax and regular fax features.
Reduction in Communication Charges
As the iFax feature transmits data via an existing intranet and the Internet,
communication charges are less than for sending regular faxes. Also, communication
with regular fax machines that do not support the iFax feature is possible via a fax
gateway.
Faxes are sent as e-mail to an iFax compatible machine connected to the network via
the Internet. The iFax compatible machine (fax gateway) converts e-mail to fax
documents and forwards them to the specified fax machines. When using this
configuration, fax transmission costs can be reduced by locating the fax gateway and
fax machines within an area where the same local rate applies.
Important • The iFax compatible machine that received the e-mail forwards it as a fax document with an
e-mail header and attachment.
107
4
4 Fax
Receiving and Sending iFax
Sending iFax
Important • The [Job Status] screen on the machine, the [Activity Report], and "Doc. Sent" displayed on
the [Transmission Report] indicate that the transmission to the SMTP server configured on
the machine has been successful. iFax transmission to the recipient may not complete if
there is a problem in the Internet. In such cases, there will be no notifications to the machine.
The machine will not be notified when this problem occurs. When transmitting important
information, we recommend phoning the recipient to confirm that transmission was
successful.
• You cannot use the CC, BCC, Reply To features used with regular e-mail.
Note
Fax
4
• The machine converts documents to the TIFF format and then sends them as e-mail
attachments.
1
Display the [Fax/Internet Fax]
screen and select [iFax/Fax]
several times to display iFax in the
Recipient section.
2
Select [Keyboard].
3
Specify a recipient by entering up
to 128 characters with the
keyboard that appears in the touch
screen.
Important • Specifying a fax number results in an error and the data is not sent.
Note
• You can use Address Number, One Touch buttons, Group Number, or Address Book to
specify a mail address. For more information, refer to "Speed Dialing (Entering Numbers
Using Address Number)" (P.115), "Specifying Destination Using One Touch Buttons"
(P.115), and "Specifying Destination Using the Address Book" (P.114).
• If the hard disk of the machine becomes full during scanning of a document, a screen
appears to prompt you to select whether to send the job up to the stored pages or to cancel
the job. Choose one of the processes.
• If the hard disk of the machine becomes full during iFax transmission, the transmission is
canceled and the document data is deleted.
• If TIFF-J is specified for the profile, the computer may not be able to display the attached
TIFF file properly. In this case, specify the TIFF-S or TIFF-F profile.
• Data sent to an iFax compatible machine other than this model may not be able to be
printed. Before sending data, confirm the iFax feature of the machine that will receive the
data.
Receiving iFax (Printing iFax)
„Receiving iFax
When the machine receives e-mail from an iFax compatible machine, the received
document is printed automatically. You do not need to perform a specific operation to
receive e-mail.
The machine can also receive e-mail from mail addresses for which the mailbox is
specified such as "[email protected]".
Note
• If domains for receiving e-mail are restricted by CentreWare Internet Services, you will only
receive iFax from the permitted domains.
• You can confirm the domain setting status in the [Domain List]. For more information, refer
to "Domain List" (P.378).
108
About Internet Fax
For information about the mailbox, refer to "Mailbox" (P.323). For information about Job Flow Sheets,
refer to "Job Flow Sheets" (P.326).
„Printing Size
Basically, received iFax is printed at the same size as the document sent by the sender.
Note
• When [TIFF-S] is selected for the profile, the printing size will be A4.
When the loaded paper is not the same size as the sent document or when the paper
tray used for printing received documents is restricted, the receiving process will be the
same as that for regular faxes.
„About Receiving E-Mail
Each e-mail header and attachment (TIFF file) of received e-mail will be printed.
z
About Split Documents Sent by E-Mail
If a document scanned by the machine is split and sent according to the [Split Size
of Outgoing Mail] setting made with the CentreWare Internet Services, the
information indicating the split will be attached and each segment will be treated as
individual e-mail.
z
Attachments (TIFF Format)
z
When the Mailbox Number is Not Registered
4
If the specified mailbox is not registered, the received data is deleted. You can
confirm the cause of the problem in the [Job History Report].
z
Mailbox Operations
If the machine runs out of hard disk space while printing e-mail or storing e-mail to
the mailbox, the page being processed will be deleted at the point in time when the
machine runs out of hard disk space.
„Restricting Incoming E-Mail
The machine can be configured to receive e-mail from approved domains only. This
feature is known as the "Domain Filter". You can register up to 50 domains as approved
domains.
When e-mail is received, this feature confirms whether the e-mail is from an approved
domain. If it is not from an approved domain, the e-mail is rejected. You can confirm
the result in the [Job History Report]. If Mail Notice Service is set, the mail address,
number of rejections, and last rejection time for the sender of the rejected e-mail are
indicated.
For information about Domain Filter, refer to "Network Administrator Guide".
Useful Features
Using a Mail Address to Send iFax to the Mailbox
If you enter a specific mail address, you can send iFax to the mailbox of the machine from an
iFax compatible machine.
When iFax is received, the machine stores it in the mailbox specified for the mail
address and prints a [Mailbox Documents Report].
Note
Fax
If an unsupported attachment file is received, the file is deleted. You can confirm the
problem in the [Job History Report] and [Activity Report].
• This feature is only available if the mailbox can receive e-mail via SMTP.
• To use this feature, a mailbox that does not have a password set needs to be registered with
the machine that will receive the e-mail. For more information, refer to "Mailbox" (P.323).
109
4 Fax
1
Display the [Basic Features] screen
and select [iFax/Fax] several times
to display [iFax] in the recipient
section.
2
Select the profile for setting each
feature as necessary.
3
Enter the mail address for the machine that will receive the e-mail as shown below.
BOX123 @dcc450.fujixerox.com
BOX (fixed characters to indicate
mailbox) and mailbox number.
+ Domain name of the receiving
machine
Example
•Mailbox number123
(Enter the digits of the mailbox
number to match those of the recipient)
•Host name of the receiving machinedcc450
•Domain name of the receiving machinefujixerox.com
Note
• If the hard disk of the machine becomes full during scanning of a document, a screen
appears to prompt you to select whether to send the job up to the stored pages or to cancel
the job. Choose one of the processes.
Fax
4
@+Host name of the
receiving machine
• If the hard disk of the machine becomes full during iFax transmission, the transmission is
canceled and the document data is deleted.
Sending an iFax to a Normal Fax Machine via a Relay Station
If you specify mail addresses in a specific format, a machine on the network can use
the G3 mode to send faxes to regular fax machines that do not support the iFax feature.
This feature sends faxes as e-mail to iFax compatible machines (fax gateways) that are
connected to a network via the Internet. The fax is converted from an e-mail to a fax
document on the iFax compatible machine and forwarded to a specified fax machine.
When using this configuration, fax transmission costs can be reduced by locating the
fax gateway and fax machines within an area where the same local rate applies.
Important • This feature is available only when the e-mail reception method on the fax gateway is set to
SMTP.
Note
• The e-mail received by the fax gateway is deleted even if the fax was not correctly sent.
• The settings configured in [Communication Mode] of the [Send Options] screen apply to the
communication mode used between the fax gateway and the fax machine. The e-mail is
sent to a fax gateway in G3 Auto.
For information about the features of the machine, refer to "Differences between iFax and Regular Fax
Features" (P.107).
110
1
Display the [Basic Features] screen
and select [iFax/Fax] several times
to display [iFax] in the recipient
section.
2
Select the profile for setting each
feature as necessary.
About Internet Fax
3
Enter the mail address for the machine that will receive the e-mail as shown below.
FAX= 0312345678 /T33S= @dcc450. fujixerox.com
FAX=
(fixed characters)
Fax number of
the recipient
/T33S=
(fixed characters)
@ + Host name of
the machine that
converts and sends
the received E-mail
as a fax.
Domain
name
Example
• Fax number ................................................ 0312345678
• Host name of the receiving machine.......... dcc450
• Domain name of the receiving machine
fujixerox.com
Note
• If the hard disk of the machine becomes full during scanning of a document, a screen
appears to prompt you to select whether to send the job up to the stored pages or to cancel
the job. Choose one of the processes.
• If the hard disk of the machine becomes full during iFax transmission, the transmission is
canceled and the document data is deleted.
The following describes the feature to automatically forward fax documents stored in
the mailbox, as e-mail.
It is possible to use fax signal methods (proprietary communication procedures), F
Code method and DTMF method, to forward by mail faxes sent from mailbox and faxes
stored in the mailbox by the Box Selector feature.
For information about the mailbox forwarding settings and sending from the mailbox, using the Box
Selector to receive documents in the mailbox, and printing or deleting documents received in the
mailbox, refer to "Printing/Deleting Documents in Mailbox" (P.190).
„Forwarding iFax
The machine can receive faxes sent from the mailbox or automatically forward the
faxes, which are stored by the Box Selector feature in the mailbox, by e-mail to the
forwarding address specified for the mailbox.
As you can use the e-mail forwarding feature to forward received fax documents, you
do not have to go and collect them from the fax machine. Furthermore, you can save
paper by displaying the fax documents on a computer screen.
„How to Forward iFax
The following operations are required for using the forwarding feature.
z
Sending Faxes
Send faxes from the mailbox using the fax signal method (proprietary communication
procedure) F Code method or DTMF method.
For information about the transmission method, refer to "On-hook/Others" (P.136).
z
Forwarding Received Faxes in the Mailbox by iFax
Register the mail address as an Address Number entry in advance. Next, link a Job
Flow Sheet to the mailbox.
Important • Do not set the address of your machine as the forwarding address.
Note
• [Mailbox Number] and [Password] are required by the sender. Inform the sender of the
settings.
• You can register up to 100 locations.
111
Fax
Forwarding Documents Stored in the Mailbox
4
4 Fax
• If the JBIG compression format is used for the received fax image and the iFax profile set for
the forwarding address is TIFF-F, the compression format is converted to MH before
forwarding the fax image. Also, if the iFax profile is TIFF-S, the fax image is forwarded as is
without changing the size and resolution settings.
• If the hard disk in the machine becomes full while receiving an iFax, the reception is
cancelled and the partly received file is deleted.
• If there is a problem with the data during iFax forwarding, the forwarding is canceled and the
document is saved to the mailbox.
• If forwarding using SMTP fails, the document is stored in the mailbox.
• You can confirm the forwarding result in the [Job History Report].
For information about setting the mailbox forwarding feature, refer to "Job Flow Sheets" (P.326). For
information about the operation to use of the Box Selector feature to receive fax documents in the
mailbox, refer to "File Destination / Output Destination" (P.307).
Fax
4
112
Basic Features
Basic Features
[Basic Features] allows you to set basic fax features.
iFax/Fax (Selecting iFax/Fax).................................................................................................. 113
Next Destination (Sending Faxes to Multiple Recipients)....................................................... 113
Specifying Destination Using the Address Book..................................................................... 114
Speed Dialing (Entering Numbers Using Address Number) ................................................... 115
Specifying Destination Using One Touch Buttons .................................................................. 115
Specifying Destination Using the Keyboard Screen ................................................................ 116
Entering Specific Symbols ....................................................................................................... 116
2 Sided Originals (Transmitting 2 Sided Documents) ............................................................. 117
Original Type (Selecting the Image Quality Type for the Document) .................................... 118
1
Select [Fax/Internet Fax] on the [All
Services] screen.
2
Select features on the [Basic
Features] screen that appears first.
Fax
4
iFax/Fax (Selecting iFax/Fax)
You can switch between iFax and Fax as necessary.
1
Select [iFax/Fax].
Note
• [iFax] only appears when the
iFax Kit is installed in the
machine.
Next Destination (Sending Faxes to Multiple Recipients)
The Broadcast Send feature allows you to send the same document to multiple
recipients with a single operation. There is no need to repeat the same operation for
each recipient.
When an extra G3 Kit (optional) is installed, you can use the extra lines to make multiple
transmissions simultaneously with Broadcast Send.
If you specify Broadcast Send, the machine prints a [Broadcast/Multi-Poll Report] after
the Broadcast Send operation finishes.
Note
• The maximum number of recipients that you can specify at a time is as follows:
Using the numeric keypad: 50 locations Using Address Number: 500 locations Using the
numeric keypad in combination with Address Number: 549 locations
• When the Address Book Expansion Kit (optional) is installed, you can register up to 999
locations using Address Number and up to 1049 locations using the numeric keypad in
combination with Address Number.
• The numbers 001 to 070 of Address Number correspond to the One Touch buttons.
• When using Broadcast Send, [Cover Note] and [Remote Mailbox] are invalid even if they are
selected on the control panel. If you want to use [Cover Note] and [Remote Mailbox], set
them when registering each recipient in Address Number.
• You cannot specify [Transmission Report].
113
4 Fax
1
Select [Next Recipient] to specify
multiple recipients and then press
the <Start> button.
2
Select [Yes] on the confirmation
screen to start transmission.
Specifying Destination Using the Address Book
This section describes how to use the Address Book to specify recipients.
The Address Book shows the fax numbers registered to the Address Numbers.
For information about Address Book registration, refer to "Address Book" (P.334).
Select [Address Book] on the
[Basic Features] screen.
2
Select the tab in which you want to
search and search for a fax
number.
Note
Fax
4
1
• Repeat this step to specify multiple recipients.
Using the Address Book
Use speed dialing numbers (Address Numbers), recipient names, index, and group
dialing to search fax numbers.
In the System Administration mode, you can change the initial number of the Address Number. For
information about how to change the Address Number, refer to "Address Search (Directory Service)"
(P.315).
„Address List
This shows a list of all registered addresses.
Select [ ] to display the previous screen and select [ ] to display the next screen.
Select [Select to Enter Number] and enter a 3-digit Address Number (001 to 500) using
the numeric keypad to display the specified number at the top of the list.
Note
• If the Address Book Extension Kit is installed, you can register up to 999 locations.
„Index Search
This search looks for index characters specified when Address Numbers are
registered.
Click the [ABCDE], [FGHIJ], [KLMNO], [PQRST], [UV-Z] or [0-9] tab to specify index
characters on the screen that appears.
„Group Dial Number
Group dial number searches for pre-registered group numbers.
Select [ ] to display the previous screen and select [ ] to display the next screen.
For information about how to register group dial numbers, refer to "Group Send" (P.340).
114
Basic Features
Speed Dialing (Entering Numbers Using Address Number)
You can use Address Numbers to specify recipients. Register the Address Numbers for
speed dialing beforehand.
You can also use a wild card ("∗" character on the numeric keypad or [∗] on the
keyboard screen) to specify multiple recipients.
z
Enter the first two digits to specify an Address Number.
For example, enter "10∗" to specify 10 numbers from 100 to 109.
z
Specify all the Address Numbers.
Enter "∗∗∗" to specify all the Address Numbers.
Note
• When you specify Address Numbers, confirm that the corresponding fax numbers registered
in the machine are correct. For information about how to register Address Numbers, refer to
"Address Book" (P.334).
• You cannot specify two wildcard characters such as 1∗∗, ∗1∗, or ∗∗1.
• The maximum number of recipients that you can specify at one time is as follows:
Dialing with Address Number: 500 locations. Using the numeric keypad in combination with
Address Number: 549 locations
When the Address Book Expansion Kit (optional) is installed, you can register up to 999
locations using Address Number and up to 1049 locations using the numeric keypad in
combination with Address Number.
Fax
1
Press the <Speed Dial> button and
enter a 3-digit Address Number.
Repeat this procedure for each
additional recipient.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
4
<Speed Dial>
button
C
Specifying Destination Using One Touch Buttons
You can use the one touch buttons to specify recipients. One touch buttons correspond
to the numbers registered for the Address Numbers from 001 to 070. For example,
when the number you want to dial is registered to the Address Number 001, press the
one touch button 001.
For information about how to register Address Numbers, refer to "Address Book" (P.334).
Important • One touch buttons have sensors. The sensors recognize the Address Numbers from 001 to
030, 031 to 060, and 061 to 070. Press a one touch button after turning over the one-touch
panel and removing your hand from the panel. Do not touch a one touch button while you
are turning over the panel.
• Take care not to place an object or spill liquid on or near the one touch buttons.
1
Press a one touch button. Confirm
that the recipient (fax number)
specified with the one touch button
is displayed on the touch screen.
Note
• One touch buttons correspond
to the Address Numbers from
001 to 070.
• Repeat this step to specify
multiple recipients.
• Turn the one touch button
panels over to press the one
touch buttons for Address
Numbers 031 and above.
001
002
003
016
017
018
004
005
006
019
020
021
007
008
009
022
023
024
010
011
012
025
026
027
013
014
015
028
029
030
115
4 Fax
Specifying Destination Using the Keyboard Screen
When the G3 kit (optional) is installed, you can set the line (port) and send faxes.
1
Select [Keyboard] on the [Basic
Features] screen.
2
Enter "<", "port number", ">", and
"telephone number" with the
keyboard that appears on the touch
screen.
3
Press the <Start> button.
Note
• The port numbers are "1", line 2 (LINE 2 jack) J "2" and line 4 (LINE 4 jack) J "4".
• You can specify line 2 and 4 when an option is installed.
Entering Specific Symbols
When specifying a recipient, you can use the following features to enter specific
symbols from the touch screen.
Fax
Feature
Button
Action
Input method
Enter pause
- or pause
(-)
One pause is 3 seconds.
You can enter pauses of 6
seconds, 9 seconds, etc. by
additional button presses.
Press the Pause button.
(Example)
0-123...
0- -123...
Transmit
using a password
S
Use a password to prevent
transmission errors.
When a password has been
set, transmission will only
start if the password
matches the ID number on
the remote terminal.
1. Select the Keyboard
button in the Basic
Features screen to
display the keyboard.
2. Select the PQRST
button and the Shift
button.
3. Select the S button.
4
(Example)
0312345678S12345678
Transmit
DTMF signal
!
Use to transmit the DTMF
signal.
1. Select the Keyboard
button in the Basic
Features screen to
display the keyboard.
2. Select the Symbol
button.
3. Select !.
(Example)
0311123456!123#
Transmit PB
(from dial pulse to
tone)
Note
116
:
Switches the dial type from
pulse to tone when the Fax
service is used.
1. Select the Tone (:)
button on the On-hook
or Off-hook screen.
• When using the DTMF method, use specific symbols. For information about the DTMF
method, refer to "Broadcast" (P.140).
Basic Features
2 Sided Originals (Transmitting 2 Sided Documents)
This feature enables you to scan and then transmit both sides of a document
automatically.
Note
• This feature may not be displayed depending on the model of machine you are using. This
feature is optional. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.
• The 2 Sided Originals feature is canceled if the document glass is used while transmitting 2
sided documents.
• The [Send Header] is printed on the first line for each page of the merged documents.
• The data for the second side of a 2 sided document is rotated so that it has the same
orientation as that for the first side.
1
Select [1 Sided], [2 Sided (H to H)],
or [2 Sided (H to T)].
„1 Sided
Select this to transmit one sided documents.
Fax
„2 Sided (H to H)
Select this to transmit 2 sided documents (head to head).
4
„2 Sided (H to T)
Select this to transmit 2 sided documents (head to toe).
[2 Sided Originals] Screen
1
Select [Detailed Settings].
2
Select [1 Sided], [2 Sided], [2 Sided
(First Page 1 Sided)], or [Originals]
in accordance with the document to
be transmitted.
„2 Sided
Select this to use the 2 sided feature to transmit all pages.
„2 Sided (First Page 1 Sided)]
Select this when you do not want to transmit the second side of the first page.
When you select [2 Sided (First Page 1 Sided)], you must scan the entire document at
one time. Pressing the <Start> button and selecting [Next Original] on the touch screen
causes the first page of a document to be recognized as a cover page and the second
side of this page not to be scanned. Do not exceed the capacity of the document
feeder.
„Originals
[Head to Head] is used for documents in which the first and second sides of a page are
of the same orientation. [Head to Toe] is used for documents in which the first and
second sides of a page are of the opposite orientation.
117
4 Fax
Original Type (Selecting the Image Quality Type for the Document)
When transmitting photo images or a document that includes photo images, you can
select the appropriate image quality to transmit the document.
Specify the image quality in accordance with whether the document contains text,
photos, etc.
„Text
Select this when transmitting a document that contains only text.
„Text & Photo
Select this when transmitting a document that contains both text and photos. The
machine automatically distinguishes the text and photo areas and sets the appropriate
image quality for each area of the document.
Fax
„Photo
Select this when transmitting documents that contain only photos.
Note
4
• We recommend selecting same-scale scanning for documents that contain photos. Stripes,
etc. may appear in the photo image sections if a setting such as scanning at a reduced size
was specified.
Resolution (Specify the Scanning Resolution)
You can set the resolution for scanning documents.
„Standard
Select this when transmitting documents with easily legible text.
(Approx. 200 × 100 dpi/25.4 mm)
„Fine
Select this when transmitting documents with small text and/or detailed images.
(Approx. 200 × 200 dpi/25.4 mm)
„Superfine (400 dpi)
Select this when transmitting documents with extremely fine text and/or images.
(400 × 400 dpi/25.4 mm)
„Superfine (600 dpi)
Select this when transmitting documents with extremely fine text and/or images.
(600 × 600 dpi/25.4 mm)
118
Basic Features
Note
• The [Resolution] can be set individually for each Address Number. For information about
how to register Address Numbers, refer to "Address Book" (P.334).
• The machine scans a document at the specified resolution, but if the machine of the
recipient does not support the resolution, the machine automatically changes the resolution
to one supported by the other machine and there is a corresponding loss in quality.
• The higher the resolution, the lower the transmission speed. Usually, we recommend using
[Super-fine (400dpi)] or lower.
Fax
4
119
4 Fax
Image Quality
You can set the quality and density level of the document.
1
Select [Image Quality] on the [All
Services] screen.
2
Select the feature on the [Image
Quality] screen.
Original Type (Selecting the Original Type)
This procedure is the same as that for selecting the [Original Type] of [Basic Features].
For information about [Basic Features], refer to "Original Type (Selecting the Image
Quality Type for the Document)" (P.118).
Fax
Density Level (Adjusting Density Level)
4
Set the density level.
120
1
Select [Lighten/Darken] on the
[Image Quality] screen.
2
Use [ ] and [ ] to select from
seven density levels.
Scan Options
Scan Options
This section describes setting the scanning conditions of the fax document.
2 Sided Originals (Transmitting 2 Sided Originals)................................................................. 121
Bound Originals (Transmitting Facing Pages on Separate Sheets).......................................... 121
Scan Size (Specifying the Scan Size for the Original)............................................................. 122
Mixed Size Originals (Scanning Different Size Originals Simultaneously)............................ 122
Reduce/Enlarge (Specifying the Scan Ratio for the Original) ................................................. 123
Send Options ............................................................................................................................ 124
1
Select [Fax/Internet Fax] on the [All
Services] screen.
2
Select the [Scan Options] tab.
Fax
2 Sided Originals (Transmitting 2 Sided Originals)
This procedure is the same as that for selecting the [Original Type] of [Basic Features].
For information about [Basic Features], refer to "2 Sided Originals (Transmitting 2
Sided Documents)" (P.117).
Bound Originals (Transmitting Facing Pages on Separate Sheets)
You can transmit the left and right pages of a bound document on separate sheets.
Important • You cannot use the document feeder with this feature.
• A document of non-standard size or undetectable size may not be divided exactly into two.
1
Place the document on the
document glass and close the
document cover.
Place the left and right pages of the
document on the document glass.
2
Select [Bound Originals] on the
[Scan Options] screen.
3
Select the document type.
4
Select the pages to scan.
121
4
4 Fax
Scan Size (Specifying the Scan Size for the Original)
You can specify the scan size before sending a fax.
If you wish to scan at a size other than that of the loaded document, specify the scan
size.
When the scan size is specified, the document is scanned at the specified size
regardless of the actual size of the loaded document. The feature allows you to add a
margin to or delete excess space from the actual image that is transmitted.
Note
• The default values for buttons other than the [Auto Size Detect] button can be changed in
the System Administration mode. For information about how to change the default values,
refer to "Scan Size Defaults" (P.298).
• When the scan size cannot be detected automatically, a message prompting the scan size
to be input appears.
1
Select [Scan Size] on the [Scan
Options] screen.
2
Select the desired scan size.
„Auto Size Detect
Fax
Scan sizes are detected automatically. The machine can detect the following document
sizes.
4
Document feeder
Original sizes that can
be detected
automatically
B5 , B4, A5 , A4, A4 ,
A3, 8.5 × 11 inches
Document glass
B6, B6 , B5, B5 , B4, A6,
A5, A5 , A4, A4 , A3, 8.5
× 11 inches , 8.5× 13
inches, 8.5 × 14 inches
„Standard Size
You can select the document size from preset sizes.
Mixed Size Originals (Scanning Different Size Originals Simultaneously)
You can simultaneously scan different size documents at their respective sizes.
Important • You can only use this feature when documents are loaded in the document feeder.
• Originals may not be scanned correctly if the top-left corners are not aligned properly.
• Always load the A5-size documents vertically.
• When loading a B5 size document with A3 or A4 size documents in a vertical direction, place
the B5 document also in a vertical direction.
Note
• This feature may not be displayed depending on the model of machine you are using. This
feature is optional. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.
• Remove any paper clips or staples.
• The [Mixed Size Originals] default value can be changed in the System Administration
mode. For information about how to change the default value, refer to "Mixed Size Originals"
(P.303).
• Be sure to set [Scan Size] on the [Scan Options] screen to [Auto Size Detect] when using
mixed size documents.
• If the document size cannot be detected, a screen to input the document size appears.
122
Scan Options
1
Select [Scan Size] on the [Scan
Options] screen.
2
Confirm that [Auto Size Detect] is
selected and select [Save]. If [Auto
Select] is not set, select [Auto
Detect].
3
Select [Mixed Size Originals] on
the [Scan Options] screen.
4
Select [On].
Reduce/Enlarge (Specifying the Scan Ratio for the Original)
This feature enlarges or reduces a scanned document to a specified ratio prior to
transmission.
Important • Some machines may not be able to receive faxes at the specified ratio.
• Except for the [100%] button and the [Auto %] button, the scan ratios can be changed for the
[Preset %] buttons in the System Administration mode. For information about how to change
the default values, refer to "Reduce/Enlarge Presets" (P.308).
1
Select [Reduce/Enlarge] on the
[Scan Options] screen.
2
Specify the scan ratio.
Fax
Note
4
„ Preset %
Select from 9 types of preset ratios.
„Zoom
You can enter any ratio. You can specify a ratio within the range from 50 to 400% in
1% increments.
123
4 Fax
Send Options
This section describes setting the scanning conditions of the fax document.
Communication Mode (Selecting a Communication Mode) ....................................................124
Priority Send/Delayed Start (Setting Send Priority/Specifying Send Time) ............................126
Send Header (Adding Your Name and Phone Number to Faxes) ............................................127
Cover Note (Transmitting Documents With a Cover Page) .....................................................127
iFax Comment (Inserting Comments in Body Text) ................................................................128
Transmission Report/Read Status
(Printing Transmission Report/Receiving Fax Transmission Result Mail) ..............................129
Recipient Print Sets (Printing Multiple Copies at the Remote Machine) .................................130
Remote Mailbox (Using Remote Mailbox) ..............................................................................131
F Code (Using F Code Transmission).......................................................................................132
iFax Profile (Specifying iFax Profiles) .....................................................................................134
Fax
1
Select [Fax/Internet Fax] on the [All
Services] screen.
2
Select the [Send Options] tab.
4
Communication Mode (Selecting a Communication Mode)
You can select a communication mode based on the features of the remote machine.
G3 is the international standard for facsimile transmissions established by the ITU-T.
Important • When the Address Number, One Touch buttons, Group Dialing, or Address Book is used to
dial a fax number, the communications mode currently set to the address number is set and
cannot be changed.
Note
• The Communication Mode can be individually set for each Address Number. For information
about how to register Address Numbers, refer to "Address Book" (P.334).
• The Communication Mode default value can be changed in the System Administration
mode. For information about how to change the default value, refer to "Communication
Mode" (P.303).
1
124
Select [Communication Mode] on
the [Send Options] screen.
Send Options
„G3 Auto
Select this mode if the remote machine is G3 compatible. This mode is the one
normally selected.
In accordance with the reception capabilities of the remote machine, the machine
automatically switches modes in the following order of priority: G3 Unique ECM G3
Unique ITU-T G3 ECM ITU-T G3.
„F4800
Select this mode when transmitting over noisy or poor telephone lines, as can be the
case with overseas calls.
Also select this mode when transmitting over noisy or poor telephone lines
domestically.
„G4 Auto
Select this mode when relay broadcasting to iFax destinations.
Note
• [G4 Auto] is displayed on when an iFax kit is installed. This setting applies the transmission
speed between the fax gateway and destination fax for the iFax.
About F4800
You can communicate with faxes overseas via telephone company exchanges, etc.
• The international telephone networks are originally designed for voice communications.
Noise that does not really affect voice communications causes a problem with fax
communications. It may result in the deterioration of images quality, the inability to transmit a
fax, or even terminate the transmission. Regardless of whether transmission is successful,
you are charged for the call once the line is connected. For information about line trouble
and call charges, contact your telephone company.
• If you select [F4800], the transmission time may be longer because transmission is
performed at 4800 bps or less to ensure transmission is successful.
1
Select [Communication Mode] on
the [Send Options] screen.
2
Select [F4800] and [Close].
3
Enter the telephone company ID number, "0011", country code, area code, and
recipient fax number as shown below.
Telephone
company ID
Country
number
Area code Fax number of the
other party
Important • In some areas, you may need to enter a pause after the telephone company ID number.
125
Fax
Note
4
4 Fax
Priority Send/Delayed Start (Setting Send Priority/Specifying Send Time)
If you set the send priority, you can send faxes prior to stored documents or use the
polling feature.
You can specify the time to begin sending a fax. This feature is convenient for sending
faxes at nighttime when call charges are low.
Note
• This feature is unavailable for iFax.
• If the Priority Send feature is selected during transmission, the fax will be sent after the
current transmission ends.
• This feature can be set in combination with Delayed Start. If both features are set, Priority
Send is performed at the set time.
• In redial mode, the fax will be resent preferentially after the set redial interval.
• The Priority Send feature cannot be set separately for each recipient of Broadcast and multipolling jobs.
You can give priority to a pending job. For information about the operating procedure, refer to
"Checking Executing/Pending Jobs" (P.357).
Important • If a power failure occurs or the power is turned off when the Delayed Start feature is set, the
setting is cleared and transmission begins as soon as the power is turned on.
Note
• You can specify a time within 24 hours in 1 minute increments. You cannot specify a date.
• You can set Delayed Start separately for each Address Number. For information about how
to register Address Numbers, refer to "Address Book" (P.334).
Fax
• If Address Number or group dial numbers are dialed with the Broadcast Send feature, the
Delayed Start setting specified for each Address Number is invalid.
• If the fax cannot be sent at the specified time because, for example, the telephone line is
busy, it will be sent as soon as the line becomes available.
4
• Our customer engineers can change the Delayed Start default value.
1
Select [Priority Send/Delayed Start]
on the [Send Options] screen.
2
Select "On" of "Priority Send" to set
Priority Send and select "On" of
"Delayed Start" to set Delayed
Start.
For Delayed Start, select "Start
Time" and configure the hour and
minute settings on the next screen.
Important • If you press the <Start> button after the specified time elapses, the stored document will be
sent at the specified time the next day.
126
Send Options
Send Header (Adding Your Name and Phone Number to Faxes)
The Send Header feature adds the transmission start time, sender name, recipient
name, G3 ID, and number of pages to the transmitted document.
This enables the recipient to confirm when and from whom the fax was sent.
Important • The Send Header is printed at the top of the document, so an area of about three to five
millimeter may not be printed at the top of each page at the remote machine.
Note
• If the document is resent, "Resend" is printed at the left of the date and time indication.
• If this feature is set to On for Broadcast, the Send Header is attached for all recipients.
• The transmission start time is printed in the format set on the machine (12 or 24 hour clock).
For information about setting the time, refer to "Time" (P.254).
• For information about the sender name and G3 ID, refer to "Local Terminal Information"
(P.309).
• The recipient name is only added if it has not been registered for the Address Number.
• The Send Header default value can be changed in the System Administration mode. For
information about how to change the default value, refer to "Send Header" (P.303).
1
Select [Send Header] on the [Send
Options] screen.
2
Select [On].
Fax
4
Cover Note (Transmitting Documents With a Cover Page)
Cover Note is a feature for attaching a cover page to the document.
It includes the recipient name, comment, sender name, machine fax number, number
of pages, date and time, and note.
Note
• Cover Note can be individually set for each Address Number. For information about how to
register Address Numbers, refer to "Address Book" (P.334).
• When Send Header is set to On, the Send Header is not printed on the Cover Note.
• You cannot use the Cover Note feature if you specify Broadcast using the numeric keypad. If
necessary, register the Cover Note to the Address Number.
• The size and resolution of the Cover Note is based on the first page of the document.
• Comments must be entered beforehand. For information about how to register comments,
refer to "Comments" (P.341).
1
Select [Cover Note] on the [Send
Options] screen.
2
Select [On].
3
Select [Comment].
4
Select [Recipient’s Comment] to
add a recipient comment to the
cover note and select [Sender's
Comment] to add a sender
comment to the cover note.
5
Select [On].
6
Select a comment from [Comment].
127
4 Fax
About the Cover Note
„To
If the remote machine was specified with an Address Number, the recipient name
registered for the Address number is printed. This section is blank if a recipient name
has not been registered.
„Recipient’s Comment
The comment for the number specified with [No. Comment] is printed.
„From
The registered sender name is printed.
„Sender’s Comment
The comment for the number specified with [No. Comment] is printed.
„Fax Number
The registered fax number of the machine is printed. The G3 ID is printed for G3
transmission.
„Number of Pages
Fax
The number of pages is printed.
„Send Date and Time
4
The transmission start date and time is printed.
„Remarks
This section is printed when using Broadcast, Mailbox, Relay Broadcast Indication, and
Redial Mode.
iFax Comment (Inserting Comments in Body Text)
You can insert a pre-registered comment in the body text of e-mail. You can specify up
to two comments.
Note
128
• This feature may not be displayed depending on the model of machine you are using. This
feature is optional. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.
1
Display the [Basic Features] screen
and select [iFax/Fax] several times
to display [iFax] in the recipient
section.
2
Select [iFax Comment (Mail
Contents)] on the [Send Options]
screen.
3
Select [On].
4
Select [Comment 1] and then
select [On] on the next screen.
Send Options
5
Select [Comment].
Transmission Report/Read Status (Printing Transmission
Report/Receiving Fax Transmission Result Mail)
If you set the machine to print a Transmission Report, a report is printed when
transmission completes successfully.
Read Status is a feature to request the recipient to send e-mail to the sender to confirm
that the recipient received the iFax. There are two different types of confirmation: Read
Status (MDN) and Send Status (DSN).
You can receive e-mail to inform you of whether the e-mail was delivered to the
recipient if you select Read Status (MDN) or whether the e-mail was delivered to the email server of the recipient if you select Send Status (DSN). The confirmation e-mail
will be printed as soon as it is received.
• This feature may not be displayed depending on the model of machine you are using. This
feature is optional. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.
• You can only use the Read Status feature if the recipient's machine supports MDN. You can
only use the Send Status feature if the recipient's machine supports DSN. A Xerox customer
engineer will set the DSN feature.
• You can only use the Send Status (DSN) feature to check the delivery of e-mail to servers
that support this feature. Furthermore, if any of the e-mail servers along the transmission
route do not support DSN, the delivery of the e-mail is not confirmed but e-mail delivery is
performed as usual. Therefore, the result of the Send Status may differ from the actual
status.
• If you set [Transmission Report] to [On], [Transmission Report – Undelivered] is printed if the
transmission does not end successfully.
This section describes how to use the MDN feature. The procedure is the same as for
the DSN feature.
1
Display the [Basic Features] screen
and select [iFax/Fax] several times
to display [iFax] in the recipient
section.
Note
• If you are using an extension,
[iFax/Extension/Outside Line]
appears.
2
Select [Report/Read Status] on the
[Send Options] screen.
3
Select [On] in [Transmission
Report].
Select [On] in [Read Status
(MDN)].
129
Fax
Note
4
4 Fax
Recipient Print Sets (Printing Multiple Copies at the Remote Machine)
This feature allows you print multiple copies of the transmitted document at the remote
machine.
1
Select [Recipient Print Sets] on the
[Send Options] screen.
2
Select [Multiple Sets].
3
Use [ ] and [ ] or the numeric
keypad to specify the number of
print sets.
Note
• Specify a number within the range from 2 to 99 in increments of 1.
„Models Compatible with the Recipient Print Set Feature
Fax
4
130
z
DocumentCentre C400/320/240 series (with fax function)
z
DocuCentre Color 400/320/240 (with fax function)
z
DocuCentre 401/351/251 series (with fax function)
z
DocuCentre 400/350/250 series (with fax function)
z
DocumentCentre 400/350/250 series (with fax function)
z
DocumentCentre 285/235 series (with fax function)
z
DocuCentre 280/230 series (with fax function)
z
Able 3180
z
Able 1180 (with fax function)
z
Able 3405/3351/3350/3250 (with fax function)
z
Able 1405/1351/1350/1251/1250/1251 (with fax function)
z
Able 3321/3221
z
Able 1321 (with fax function)
z
Able 3300/1300 and Able 3010/3011/3015/3016
z
7030 Telecopier
z
Xerox 3010
z
Xerox 7033
z
DCS 20
z
Document Centre C450/C360/C250
z
DocuCentre Color f450/f360/f250/a450/a360/a250
Send Options
Remote Mailbox (Using Remote Mailbox)
Remote Mailbox is a feature for exchanging confidential documents that you do not
want others to see.
„Sending to Mailbox (Fax Signal Method)
This feature allows your machine to store a document in the recipient fax remote
mailbox to enable printing by the recipient machine. You need to confirm the remote
mailbox number of the recipient machine.
„Private Polling (Fax Signal Method)
You can retrieve a document stored in the recipient’s remote mailbox by sending
instructions from your machine. You need to confirm the remote mailbox number and
password.
Important • You cannot use polling to retrieve documents from multiple remote mailboxes
simultaneously.
The retrieved document is stored in the mailbox. When a document is received in the
mailbox, the <Job in Memory> indicator lights and a Mailbox Documents Report is
printed. The Mailbox Documents Report includes the mailbox number and name.
Note
• Mailbox reception using the DTMF method is possible, but the only signals that can be
received are numerals, ∗, and #.
• It may be possible to automatically print a document received in the mailbox depending on
the mailbox settings. For information about setting the mailbox, refer to "Mailbox" (P.323).
Fax
• Depending on the report print settings, the Mailbox Documents Report may not be printed
even if e-mail is received in the mailbox. For information about setting the report print
settings, refer to "Reports" (P.266).
4
For information about printing received documents, refer to "Printing/Deleting Documents in Mailbox"
(P.190).
„Sending to Mailbox (DTMF Method)
To use the DTMF method to send to a mailbox, you need to confirm the mailbox
number of the recipient machine.
Sending to Mailbox (Fax Signal Method)
1
Select [Remote Mailbox] on the
[Send Options] screen.
2
Select [On].
3
Enter the three-digit number of the
remote mailbox number using the
numeric keypad and select [Next].
4
If necessary, enter the password using the numeric keypad and select [Next].
If a password has not been set, you do not need to enter one. Select [Next] without
entering a password.
Private Polling (Fax Method)
1
Select [Polling] on the [On-hook/
Others] screen.
2
Select [On].
131
4 Fax
3
Select [Remote Mailbox] on the
[Send Options] screen.
4
Select [On].
5
Enter the three-digit number of the
remote mailbox number using the
numeric keypad and select [Next].
6
If necessary, enter the password using the numeric keypad and select [Next].
If a password has not been set, you do not need to enter one. Select [Next] without
entering a password.
Sending to Mailbox (DTMF Method)
1
Select [Keyboard] to display the keyboard on the touch screen and enter the following
format.
Telephone number of
remote machine
Note
Mailbox number of remote machine
\
Password for mailbox of remote machine
\
• Use the keyboard on the touch screen to enter symbols such as "!" and "∗." For information
about character input, refer to "Entering Text" (P.252).
Fax
• Enter the password if necessary.
• You can transmit to any machine that supports our DTMF method feature.
4
• The above dialing format can be registered in Address Number to enable sending to mailbox
using an Address Number. For information about Address Book registration, refer to
"Address Book" (P.334).
F Code (Using F Code Transmission)
F Code is the transmission procedure set by the Communications and Information
Network Association of Japan and is the T.30 (communication protocol) method for
using sub-addresses that was standardized by the ITU-T. The F Code feature enables
various features to be used with transmission among F Code-compatible machines
manufactured by different companies.
When using F Code transmission, use an F Code and password. The F Code, which is
also called a sub-address by other companies, must be registered (entered). Set the
password if necessary.
Note
• To use the F Code feature, you need to confirm the F Code of the recipient’s machine in
advance.
• You can set the F Code and password for each Address Number. For information about how
to register Address Numbers, refer to "Address Book" (P.334).
• You can use Relay Broadcast/Remote Relay Broadcast with F Code transmission. For
information about Relay Broadcast, refer to "Relay Broadcast (Transmitting Documents
Through a Relay Station)" (P.140). For information about Remote Relay Broadcast, refer to
"Remote Relay Broadcast (Performing Relay Broadcast to Remote Locations)" (P.143).
• We recommend using the fax signal method for sending to a mailbox or private polling when
the recipient is using the same model of machine.
You can use the following features with F Code transmission.
„Sending to Mailbox (F Code Method)
When the recipient's mailbox has been set, you can transmit to the mailbox from the
machine if you set the F Code (sub-address) and the password (if necessary).
Confirm the F Code (sub-address) and password of the recipient in advance.
132
Send Options
Example: When the machine is the recipient machine
F Code (sub-address)
: F0 (Display F Code transmission) and the mailbox
number of the machine.
Password (if necessary)
: Password of the remote mailbox of the machine.
„Private Polling (F Code Method)
When the recipient's mailbox has been set, you can perform private polling if you set
the F Code (sub-address) and the password (if necessary).
Confirm the F Code (sub-address) and the password in advance of using the machine
for private polling.
Furthermore, notify the recipient of the following information to perform private polling
for the machine.
F Code (sub-address)
: 0 (Display F Code transmission) and the storage
mailbox number of the machine.
Password (if necessary)
:
Password of the mailbox in which e-mail is stored.
The retrieved document is stored in the mailbox. When a document is received in the
mailbox, the <Job in Memory> indicator lights and a Mailbox Documents Report is
printed. The Mailbox Documents Report includes the mailbox number and name.
Furthermore, notify the recipient of the following information for using the F Code
method to receive e-mail from the mailbox.
F Code (sub-address)
: 0 (Display F Code transmission) and the storage
mailbox number.
Fax
Password (if necessary)
: Password of the mailbox in which e-mail is stored.
4
Note
• Mailbox reception using the DTMF method is possible, but the only signals that can be
received are numerals, ∗, and #.
• It may be possible to automatically print a document received in the mailbox depending on
the mailbox settings. For information about setting the mailbox, refer to "Mailbox" (P.323).
• Depending on the report print settings, the Mailbox Documents Report may not be printed
even if e-mail is received in the mailbox. For information about setting the report print
settings, refer to "Reports" (P.266).
For information about printing received documents, refer to "Printing/Deleting Documents in Mailbox"
(P.190).
Sending to Mailbox (F Code Method)
1
Select [F Code] on the [Send
Options] screen.
2
Select [On].
3
Enter the F Code with the numeric
keypad and select [Next].
Note
4
• You can enter up to 20 digits for the F Code.
If necessary, enter the password using the numeric keypad and select [Next].
Note
• You can enter up to 20 digits for the password.
133
4 Fax
Private Polling (F Code Method)
1
Select [F Code] on the [Send
Options] screen.
2
Select [On].
3
Enter the F Code with the numeric
keypad and select [Next].
Note
4
• You can enter up to 20 digits for the F Code.
If necessary, enter the password using the numeric keypad and select [Next].
Note
• You can enter up to 20 digits for the password.
5
Select [Save].
6
Select [Polling] on the [On-hook/
Others] screen.
7
Select [On].
Fax
iFax Profile (Specifying iFax Profiles)
A profile is specified to restrict attribute information such as image resolution and paper
size for transmissions between iFax compatible machines.
4
Note
• This feature may not be displayed depending on the model of machine you are using. This
feature is optional. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.
• The profiles that can be processed differ depending on the iFax compatible machine of the
recipient. Before specifying a profile, confirm the profiles the iFax compatible machine of the
recipient can process.
• If inconsistencies occur between the profile and the stored document size and resolution
combination, priority is given to the settings specified in the profile.
• If the profile differs for each recipient when using Relay Broadcast, the smallest size
becomes the maximum image size.
• You can set an iFax profile for each Address Number. For information about how to register
Address Numbers, refer to "Address Book" (P.334).
• The default values of [iFax Profile] can be changed in the System Administration mode. For
information about how to change the default values, refer to "iFax Profile" (P.304).
Select a profile from the following three types.
„TIFF-S
This is the standard specification for iFax. For documents that are larger than A4, the
size is reduced automatically to A4 for transmission.
134
z
Encoding method: MH
z
Stored Document Size: A4
z
Resolution: Standard, Fine
Send Options
„TIFF-F
Select this profile when you specify super-fine for the resolution or when you send A3
or B4 documents.
Encoding method: MMR
Stored Document Size: A4, B4, A3
Resolution: Standard, Fine, Super-fine (400 dpi), Super-fine (600 dpi)
Note
• If Super-fine (400 dpi) or Super-fine (600 dpi) is selected for [Resolution] on the [Basic
Features] screen, TIFF-S cannot be selected.
• When a fax is sent to a machine that does not support TIFF-F, the recipient machine will not
be able to display or print the images.
„TIFF-J
Select this profile for sending documents in JBIG.
z
Encoding method: JBIG
z
Stored Document Size: A4, B4, A3
z
Resolution: Standard, Fine, Super-fine (400 dpi), Super-fine (600 dpi)
Note
Display the [Basic Features] screen
and select [iFax/Fax] several times
to display [iFax] in the recipient
section.
2
Select [iFax Profile] on the [Send
Options] screen.
3
Select the profile.
Fax
1
• When a fax is sent to a machine that does not support TIFF-J, the recipient machine will not
be able to display or print the images.
4
135
4 Fax
On-hook/Others
This section describes setting polling and on-hook.
Polling (Retrieving Documents from Remote Machines)........................................................... 136
Storing for Polling (Allowing Remote Machines to Retrieve Documents from Your Machine)137
On-hook (Confirming Remote Machine Response Prior to Transmission)................................ 139
1
Select [Fax/Internet Fax] on the [All
Services] screen.
2
Select the [On-hook/Others] tab.
Polling (Retrieving Documents from Remote Machines)
Fax
Polling is a feature that allows your machine to retrieve a document stored on a remote
machine. You are charged for the transmission fee.
This feature is used for Facsimile Information Services.
For information about Facsimile Information Services, refer to "About Receiving Faxes" (P.149).
4
Note
• Depending on the remote machine, the Polling feature may be unavailable.
• When you specify polling in combination with [Delayed Start] on the [Send Options] screen,
you can retrieve a document at a specified time.
„Polling
You can retrieve a document stored on a remote machine by sending instructions from
your machine. You can retrieve documents from multiple machines. This process is
known as Multi-Polling.
„Private Polling (DTMF Method)
You can retrieve a document stored in the recipient’s remote mailbox by sending
instructions from your machine. A mailbox must be registered on the remote machine.
A document stored in the mailbox can be transmitted without others seeing it if a
password is set.
Important • You cannot use polling to retrieve documents from multiple remote mailboxes
simultaneously.
Polling
1
Select [Polling] on the [On-hook/
Others] screen.
2
Select [On].
Note
136
• To use Multi-Polling, specify
multiple recipients.
On-hook/Others
Private Polling (DTMF Method)
1
Display the [Basic Features]
screen. Select [Keyboard] to
display the keyboard on the touch
screen and enter the following
format.
Telephone number of
remote machine
Mailbox number of remote machine
2
Select [Polling] on the [On-hook/
Others] screen.
3
Select [On].
Note
Password for mailbox of remote machine
• Use the keyboard on the touch screen to enter symbols such as "!" and "∗." For information
about the character input, refer to "Entering Text" (P.252).
• Enter the password if necessary.
• This method is only available for transmission between machines of this model.
Fax
• The above dialing format can be registered in Address Number to enable private polling
using an Address Number. For information about Address Book registration, refer to
"Address Book" (P.334).
4
Storing for Polling (Allowing Remote Machines to Retrieve Documents
from Your Machine)
Storing for polling is to store a document on your machine so as a remote machine can
retrieve it from your machine. There are the following two storing for polling methods.
The machine can be set to automatically delete the documents for polling after transmission. For
information about the setting procedures, refer to "Doc for Polling - Auto Delete" (P.304).
„Store for Polling
Store documents to be sent, in response to instructions received from remote
machines, in the Public Mailbox of the machine.
„Store for Private Polling
Store documents to be sent, in response to instructions received from remote
machines, in the Private Mailbox of the machine. A Private Mailbox must be registered
on the machine. A document stored in the mailbox can be transmitted without others
seeing it if a password is set.
1
Select [Store for Polling] on the
[On-hook/Others] screen.
2
Select [Store for Polling].
137
4 Fax
Confirming/Printing/Deleting Documents Stored for Polling
You can confirm, print, and delete documents stored for polling.
1
Select [Store for Polling] on the
[On-hook/Others] screen.
2
Select [Store for Polling].
3
Select [Public Mailbox] of [Save in].
4
Select the document to print/delete.
Note
• Select [ ] to display the
previous screen and select
[ ] to display the next
screen.
• If you select [Select All], all
documents in the Public
Mailbox are selected. You can
select either one document or
all documents.
5
Fax
4
To print the document, select
[Print].
To delete the document, select [Delete]. Confirm the contents on the screen that
appears and select [Yes].
Store for Private Polling
1
Select [Store for Polling] on the
[On-hook/Others] screen.
2
Select [Store for Private Polling].
3
Select [Private Mailbox] of [Save
in].
4
Select the Private Mailbox to store
the polling documents.
Note
• Select [ ] to display the
previous screen and select
[ ] to display the next
screen. You can also directly
access a Mailbox by entering
a three-digit mailbox number
in [Go to] with the numeric
keypad.
• When a Private Mailbox that contains documents is selected, the number of documents is
indicated in [Number of Documents] on the bottom right of the screen.
• If a password input screen appears, enter the password and select [Confirm].
Confirming/Printing/Deleting Documents Stored for Private Polling
For information about how to confirm/print/delete document for private polling, refer to "Public
Mailboxes" (P.364).
Note
• You can set the machine to automatically print documents stored in Private Mailbox. For
information about the setting procedure, refer to "Mailbox" (P.323).
• CentreWare Internet Services allow you to manipulate documents stored in Private
Mailboxes on the machine from your computer. For information about CentreWare Internet
Services, refer to "CentreWare Internet Services" (P.212) and "Network Administrator
Guide."
138
On-hook/Others
On-hook (Confirming Remote Machine Response Prior to Transmission)
Use this feature when using Manual Send.
Manual Send is a transmission method that involves confirming the remote machine
response with an external telephone or when the machine is in an on-hook state prior
to beginning transmission.
We recommend setting the monitor volume to Loud when using this feature.
A Xerox customer engineer will set the Manual Send feature. For more information,
contact our Customer Support Center.
Note
• When an error occurs from the second page while sending multiple pages, the first page
may end abnormally.
The line monitor volume can be changed in the System Administration mode. For information about
how to change the default values, refer to "Line Monitor Volume" (P.257).
1
Pick up the telephone or select
[On-hook (Manual Send/Receive)]
on the [On-hook/Others] screen.
2
Select [Manual Send].
3
Select [Alphanumeric] or [Symbol].
Fax
4
Specify a recipient with the
keyboard screen.
4
5
If you hear the sound of a fax
machine, press the <Start> button.
6
If you used the telephone, replace it when the transmission ends.
Important • Be sure to replace the telephone properly. Otherwise, the line will remain in the busy state.
7
Select [Close] or [Exit (Line Cut)].
139
4 Fax
Broadcast
This section describes setting Broadcast Send and Relay Broadcast.
Broadcast Send (Transmitting to Multiple Recipients).............................................................140
Relay Broadcast (Transmitting Documents Through a Relay Station).....................................140
Remote Relay Broadcast (Performing Relay Broadcast to Remote Locations) .......................143
About Models Available for Relay Broadcast Send .................................................................147
Broadcast Send (Transmitting to Multiple Recipients)
The Broadcast Send feature allows you to transmit the same document to multiple
recipients with a single operation. There is no need to repeat the same operation for
each recipient.
When an extra G3 Kit (optional) is installed, you can use the extra lines to make multiple
transmissions simultaneously with Broadcast Send.
If you specify Broadcast Send, the machine prints a [Relay Broadcast Report/Multi-Poll
Report] after the Broadcast Send operation finishes.
Note
Fax
• The maximum number of recipients that you can specify at one time is as follows:
Using the numeric keypad: 50 locations; using Address Number: 500 locations; and using
the numeric keypad in combination with Address Number: 549 locations.
• The touch buttons correspond to Address Numbers 001-090.
4
• When using Broadcast Send, [Cover Note] and [Remote Mailbox] are invalid even if they are
selected on the control panel. If you want to use [Cover Note] and [Remote Mailbox], set
them when registering each recipient in Address Number.
• You cannot specify [Transmission Report].
1
Display the [Basic Features]
screen.
2
Select [Next Recipient] to specify
multiple recipients and then press
the <Start> button.
Select [Yes] on the confirmation
screen to start transmission.
Relay Broadcast (Transmitting Documents Through a Relay Station)
The Remote Relay Broadcast feature transmits documents to multiple recipients via
other fax machines (relay stations).
When a document is to be transmitted over a long distance to multiple recipients, it is
first transmitted to one relay station and from there to multiple recipients.
When you transmit documents over a long distance to many recipients, using Relay
Broadcast can save on call charges.
Furthermore, multiple Relay Broadcast operations can be performed simultaneously.
This is referred to as Multiple Relay Broadcast.
Note
• For information about which machines can be used as initiating stations and relay stations,
refer to "About Models Available for Relay Broadcast Send" (P.147).
There are three Relay Broadcast Send methods.
140
Broadcast
„Fax Signal Method
This method employs a Fuji Xerox proprietary communication procedure that is only for
use with specific machines that have the Relay Broadcast Send feature. The G3 mode
is available.
„DTMF Method
G3 fax machines that support Manual Send can make Relay Broadcasts for the
machine.
„F Code Method
This method can be used among machines that have the F Code and the Relay
Broadcast Send features. The G3 mode is available.
Before Using the Relay Broadcast Send Feature
Before using the Relay Broadcast Send feature, register the initiating stations and relay
stations in the Address Book.
For information about Address Book registration, refer to "Address Book" (P.334).
Where
Relay
station
Note
Fax Signal Method
Assign the relay station an Address Number (001 to 500) to set up the Relay
Broadcast Send feature.
z
Register the last two digits of the Address Number of the initiating station
(which is already registered at a relay station) as a relay station ID for the
Relay Broadcast Send operation.
z
Register the Address Numbers or group number of the relay recipients (which
are registered at a relay station) as broadcast recipients. The wildcard "∗" can
be used.
DTMF Method (G3)/F Code Method
z
There is no registration. The dialing format can be registered to an Address
Number.
Fax Signal Method
Assign the initiating station an Address Number from 001 to 099 and set
Relay Station Setup of the Address Number to [On].
z Assign the relay recipient an Address Number from 001 to 099. The relay
recipients can also be assigned group dial numbers from the initiating station.
DTMF Method (G3)/F Code Method
z Assign the initiating station either an Address Number from 001 to 500 (when
the specification method for the initiating station is 3 digits in F Code) or 001
to 099 (when the specification method for the initiating station is 2 digits in F
Code). Then, set Relay Station Setup of the Address Number to [On].
z
Assign the relay recipients an Address Number.
Assign the relay recipient either a relay station Address Number from 001 to
500 (when the specification method for the initiating station is 3 digits in F
Code) or 001 to 099 (when the specification method for the initiating station is 2
digits in F Code).
z
• The above describes using Relay Broadcast with the machine. When using a machine of a
different model as a relay station, check the F Code (sub-address) and password of the
target recipient machine.
141
Fax
Initiating
station
Contents
4
4 Fax
Fax Signal Method
1
Select an Address Number or group number to which a relay broadcast is registered
and press the <Start> button.
To perform Multiple Relay Broadcast, repeat this step.
DTMF Method
1
Select [Keyboard] to display the keyboard on the touch screen and enter the following
format.
Relay station
telephone
number
2
Password
Relay
station
ID
Address
Number
Address
Number
Select [Next Recipient] to perform Multiple Relay Broadcast.
Note
z
• You can specify up to 20 locations for relay recipients.
Password
A pre-registered two-digit number.
Note
Fax
z
• By default, no password is set. For setting a password, contact our Customer Support
Center. If a password has not been set, you do not need to enter one.
Relay station ID
The last two digits of the initiating station Address Number registered at the relay
station.
4
z
Address Number
An Address Number for the relay recipients registered at the relay station.
The wildcard "∗" can also be used.
Note
• The above dialing format can be registered in Address Number to enable dialing using an
Address Number. For information about Address Book registration, refer to "Address Book"
(P.334).
F Code Method
When the machine is an initiating station, you can perform Relay Broadcast Send if the
F Code that has been set for the relay station and the password (if necessary) are
registered on the machine.
When the machine is a relay station, you can perform Relay Broadcast Send if the F
Code that has been set for the initiating station and the password (if necessary) are
registered on the machine.
Important • When performing Relay Broadcast Send with the F Code method, you can use a password if
you set a receive password for the relay station.
Note
• When performing Relay Broadcast Send with machines of this model, we recommend using
the fax signal method.
• When using a machine of a different model as a relay station, confirm the F Code (subaddress) and password of the target recipient machine.
When using the machine as a relay station, the F Code that is transmitted to the
initiating station is as follows.
Relay Broadcast
Send
Print
directive
Relay
station ID
Up to 20 digits
142
Address
Number
Address
Number
Address
Number
....
Broadcast
„Relay Broadcast
Number of digits of the relay station ID:
1: For relay station IDs and Address Numbers that are 2 digits
2: For relay station IDs and Address Numbers that are 3 digits
„Print Command
Existence of printing at the relay station
1: Printing at the relay station
0: No printing at the relay station
„Relay Station ID
An Address Number for an initiating station registered at the relay station.
When the relay station ID is set, the initiating station is notified of the results of a Relay
Broadcast Send.
When the relay station ID is "00" or "000", the initiating station is not notified of the
results of a Relay Broadcast Send.
„Address Number
The Address Number assigned to the relay recipient.
Fax
The following shows an example of F Code that indicates printing at the relay station,
notifying the initiating station of the results, and performing Relay Broadcast Send to
relay recipients (200, 201, 202 and 203).
F Code Example: 21100200201202203
1
Select [F Code] on the [Send
Options] screen.
2
Select [On].
3
Enter the F Code with the numeric
keypad and select [Next].
You can enter up to 20 digits for the
F Code.
4
If necessary, enter the password using the numeric keypad and select [Next].
You can enter up to 20 digits for the password.
Remote Relay Broadcast (Performing Relay Broadcast to Remote
Locations)
The Remote Relay Broadcast feature combines two or more Relay Broadcast
operations.
This feature is more economical than Relay Broadcast in transmitting documents to
multiple remote machines.
Note
• Multiple Relay Broadcast can be performed from a secondary relay station.
• For information about which models of machines can be used as Remote Relay Broadcast
secondary relay stations and primary relay stations, refer to "About Models Available for
Relay Broadcast Send" (P.147).
There are three Relay Broadcast Send methods.
143
4
4 Fax
„Fax Signal Method
This method employs a Fuji Xerox proprietary communication procedure that is only for
use with specific machines that have the Relay Broadcast Send feature. The G3 mode
is available.
„DTMF Method
G3 fax machines that support Manual Send can make Remote Relay Broadcasts for
the machine.
„F Code Method
This method can be used among machines that have the F Code and the Relay
Broadcast Send features. The G3 mode is available.
Fax Signal Method
The following needs to be pre-registered for the Address Number of the initiating
stations and the relay stations.
For information about Address Book registration, refer to "Address Book" (P.334).
Where
Contents
Fax
Initiating
station
Assign the relay station an Address Number (001 to 500) to set up the Relay
Broadcast Send feature.
z
Register the last two digits of the Address Number of the initiating station
(which is already registered at a primary relay station) as a relay station ID.
z
Register the Address Numbers or group number of the secondary relay
stations (which are registered at a primary relay station) as broadcast
recipients.
Primary
relay
station
Assign the initiating station an Address Number from 001 to 099 and set Relay
Station Setup of the Address Number to [On].
Assign the secondary relay station an Address Number from 001 to 099.
z
As the relay station ID, assign the last two digits of the Address Number for
the primary relay station that is registered to the secondary relay station.
z
As the broadcast recipients, assign the Address Number for the relay
recipients that have been registered to the secondary relay station.
4
Secondary Assign the primary relay station the same Address Number as that of the
relay
initiating station registered at the primary relay station, and set Relay Station
station
Setup of the Address Number to On.
Assign the relay recipient an Address Number from 001 to 500.
Relay recipients of Address Number 100 or above can be registered to a group
and specified by Address Number.
1
144
Select an Address Number or group number to which a remote relay broadcast is
registered and press the <Start> button.
Broadcast
DTMF Method
The following needs to be pre-registered for the Address Number of the primary relay
station and the secondary relay station.
For information about Address Book registration, refer to "Address Book" (P.334).
Where
Contents
Primary
relay
station
Assign the initiating station an Address Number from 001 to 500 and set Relay
Station Setup of the Address Number to [On].
Assign the secondary relay station an Address Number from 001 to 500.
z
As the relay station ID, assign the last two digits of the Address Number for
the primary relay station that is registered to the secondary relay station.
z
As the broadcast recipients, assign the Address Number for the relay
recipients that have been registered to the secondary relay station.
Secondary Assign the primary relay station the same Address Number as that of the
relay
initiating station registered at the primary relay station, and set Relay Station
station
Setup of the Address Number to On.
Assign the relay recipient an Address Number from 001 to 500.
Note
Select [Keyboard] to display the keyboard on the touch screen and enter the following
format.
The 1st relay station
telephone number
2
Password
Relay
station ID
Address
Number
Select [Next Recipient] to perform Multiple Relay Broadcast.
„Password
A pre-registered two-digit number
Note
• By default, no password is set. For setting a password, contact our Customer Support
Center. If a password has not been set, you do not need to enter one.
„Relay Station ID
The last two digits of the initiating station Address Number registered at the primary
relay station.
„Address Number
The Address Number for the secondary relay station registered at the primary relay
station.
F Code Method
When using the machine as the initiating station for performing remote Relay Broadcast
Send, confirm the F Code and the password (if necessary) for the primary relay station.
When using the machine as the primary relay station for performing remote Relay
Broadcast Send, inform the initiating station of the F Code (sub-address) and the
password (if necessary) and confirm the F Code for the secondary relay station.
When using the machine as the secondary relay station for performing remote Relay
Broadcast Send, inform the primary relay station of the F Code and the password (if
necessary).
145
Fax
1
• This method is only available for transmission between machines of this model.
The dialing format can be registered in Address Number to enable dialing using an Address
Number. For information about Address Book registration, refer to "Address Book" (P.334).
4
4 Fax
It is necessary to assign the primary relay station and secondary relay station Address
Numbers in advance, as shown below.
Where
Primary
Relay
station
Contents
Assign the initiating station either an Address Number from 001 to 500 (when
the specification method for the initiating station is 3 digits in F Code) or 001 to
099 (when the specification method for the initiating station is 2 digits in F
Code). Then, set Relay Station Setup of the Address Number to [On].
Assign the secondary relay station either an Address Number from 001 to 500
(when the specification method for the initiating station is 3 digits in F Code) or
001 to 099 (when the specification method for the initiating station is 2 digits in
F Code).
z
As the relay station ID, assign the last two digits of the Address Number for
the primary relay station that is registered to the secondary relay station.
z
As the broadcast recipients, assign the Address Number for the relay
recipients that have been registered to the secondary relay station.
Fax
Secondary Assign the primary relay station the same Address Number as that of the
Relay
initiating station registered at the primary relay station, and set Relay Station
station
Setup of the Address Number to On.
Assign the relay recipients either an Address Number from 001 to 500 (when
the specification method for the initiating station is 3 digits in F Code) or 001 to
099 (when the specification method for the initiating station is 2 digits in F
Code).
Important • When using the F Code method for remote Relay Broadcast Send, the primary relay stations
and secondary relay stations must support our F Code method and be equipped with the
Relay Broadcast feature.
4
Note
• When performing Relay Broadcast Send with machines of this model, we recommend using
the fax signal method.
When using the machine as a relay station, the F Code that is transmitted to the
initiating station is as follows.
Relay Broadcast
Send
Print
directive
First relay
station ID
Address
Number
Address
Number
Address
Number
....
Up to 20 digits
„Relay Broadcast
Number of digits of primary relay station
1: For primary relay station IDs and Address Numbers that are 2 digits
2: For primary relay station IDs and Address Numbers that are 3 digits
„Print Command
Existence of printing at the primary relay station
1: Printing at the primary relay station
0: No printing at the primary relay station
„Primary Relay Station ID
The Address Number for the initiating station registered at the primary relay station.
When the primary relay station ID is set, the initiating station is notified of the results of
the remote Relay Broadcast Send.
When the relay station ID is "00" or "000", the initiating station is not notified of the
results of a remote Relay Broadcast Send.
146
Broadcast
„Address Number
The Address Number assigned to the secondary relay station
The operating procedure is the same as for Relay Broadcast Send.
About Models Available for Relay Broadcast Send
The following describes the models available for Relay Broadcast Send.
„Models Available for Use as the Relay Broadcast Initiating Station and Relay
Station
DocumentCentre C400/320/240 series (with fax function)
z
DocuCentre 401/351/251 series (with fax function)
z
DocuCentre 400/350/250 series (with fax function)
z
DocuCentre Color 400/320/240 series (with fax function)
z
DocumentCentre 400/350/250 series (with fax function)
z
DocumentCentre 285/235 series (with fax function)
z
DocuCentre 280/230 series (with fax function)
z
DocuColor 1250 (with document gate fax function) *
z
Able 3180
z
Able 1180 (with fax function)
z
Able 3405/3351/3350/3250
z
Able 1405/1351/1350/1251/1250 (with fax function)
z
Able 3321/3221
z
Able 1321 (with fax function)
z
Able 3300/1300 series
z
Able 3010/3011/3015/3016
z
7030 Telecopier
z
7033 Telecopier
z
780 Telecopier
z
Document Centre C450/C360/C250
z
DocuCentre Color f450/f360/f250/a450/a360/a250
Fax
z
4
*:These models cannot be used as relay stations.
„Models Available for Use as the Remote Relay Broadcast Primary Station and
Secondary Relay Station
z
DocumentCentre C400/320/240 series (with fax function)
z
DocuCentre Color 400/320/240 (with fax function)
z
DocuCentre 401/351/251 series (with fax function)
z
DocuCentre 400/350/250 series (with fax function)
z
DocumentCentre 400/350/250 series (with fax function)
z
DocumentCentre 285/235 series (with fax function)
147
4 Fax
z
DocuCentre 280/230 series (with fax function)
z
Able 3180
z
Able 1180 (with fax function)
z
Able 3405/3351/3350/3250 (with fax function)
z
Able 1405/1351/1350/1251/1250 (with fax function)
z
Able 3321/3221
z
Able 1321 (with fax function)
z
Able 3300/1300 series
z
DocumentCentre 220/230
z
Xerox 3010
z
Xerox 7033
z
DCS 20
z
Document Centre C450/C360/C250
z
DocuCentre Color f450/f360/f250/a450/a360/a250
Fax
„Models Available for Use as the Remote Relay Broadcast Secondary Relay
Station
4
148
z
Able 3010/3011/3015/3016
z
7030 Telecopier
z
7033 Telecopier
z
780 Telecopier
About Receiving Faxes
About Receiving Faxes
There are two reception modes: Auto Receive and Manual Receive.
In the Auto Receive mode, reception of a fax from a remote machine begins
automatically.
In the Manual Receive mode, reception of a fax from a remote machine is manual. This
mode is convenient for confirming the sender or using an external telephone to confirm
whether it is a fax before beginning reception.
The Fax Receiving Mode default value can be changed in the System Administration mode. For
information about how to change the default value, refer to "Fax Control" (P.304).
Switching between Auto Receive and Manual Receive
Press the <Machine Status> button.
2
Select [Fax Receiving Mode] on
the [Machine Status] screen.
3
Select [Manual Receive] or [Auto
Receive].
Fax
1
4
„Manual Receive
Reception of a fax from a remote machine is manual. This mode is convenient for
confirming the sender or using an external telephone to confirm whether it is a fax
before beginning reception.
„Auto Receive
Reception of a fax from a remote machine begins automatically.
Using Auto Receive
When the machine is in the Auto Receive mode, it automatically answers incoming
calls and receives documents.
Note
• You can set the length of time that the machine rings when there is an incoming call. While
the machine is ringing, you can pick up the telephone and then talk if the call is from a
telephone or receive the fax manually if the call is from a fax machine.
• The ring time (Auto Switch Time) can be changed in the System Administration mode. For
information about how to change the default value, refer to "Auto Switch Attempts" (P.305).
149
4 Fax
Using Manual Receive
If the fax reception mode is set to the Manual Receive when the machine rings to notify
of an incoming call, pick up an external telephone or select [On-hook] on the screen
that appears.
Note
1
• We recommend setting the monitor volume to Loud when using the On-hook feature. The
line monitor volume can be changed in the System Administration mode. For information
about how to change the default value, refer to "Line Monitor Volume" (P.257).
When the machine rings, the screen appears.
If there is a telephone, pick it up. If there is no telephone, select [On-hook] from the
[Receiving] screen.
2
Confirm whether the call is from a
telephone or a fax machine.
If the call is from a telephone, use
the telephone to talk.
If the call is from a fax machine, you
will hear the sound of a fax
machine.
Note
Fax
4
150
Beep!
• If [On-hook] was selected, you
will hear the sound from the
machine speaker. However,
you cannot talk to the other
party.
3
Press the <Start> button.
4
If you picked up the telephone, replace it when the online indicator on the control
panel lights up.
About Facsimile Information Services
About Facsimile Information Services
For information about subscriptions and advanced operating procedures, contact the
corresponding facsimile information service.
Using the Receiver
Pick up the telephone.
2
Select [On-hook (Manual Send/
Receive)] on the [On-hook/Others]
screen.
Fax
1
4
3
Select [Manual Receive].
4
Select [Alphanumeric] or [Symbol].
5
Specify the fax number of the
facsimile information service.
Important • Specify the fax number with
the numeric keypad, Address
Number, or One Touch
buttons. You cannot use the
Address Book.
Note
• When the line type is set to a pulse line, [Tone (:)] does not appear.
• When you are using a dial line, select [Tone (:)] if you want to send out touch-tones (for a
service requiring the use of a pulse line).
• Some types of services cannot be used even if you set the machine to send out touch-tones.
6
When the machine connects to the service, you will hear voice prompts. Follow the
voice prompts to enter the required numbers.
7
When input is finished, press the <Start> button.
Note
8
• The online indicator on the control panel lights and reception begins.
Replace the telephone.
Important • Be sure to replace the telephone properly. Otherwise, the line will remain in the busy state.
151
4 Fax
When Not Using a Receiver
1
Adjust the volume of the line monitor.
We recommend setting the volume to Loud so that it is easy to hear the voice
prompts.
2
Select [On-hook (Manual Send/
Receive)] on the [On-hook/Others]
screen.
3
Select [On-hook (Manual Send/
Receive)].
4
Select [Manual Receive].
5
Select [Alphanumeric] or [Symbol].
6
Specify the fax number of the facsimile information service.
To disconnect the line, select [Exit (Line Cut)].
Fax
Important • Specify the fax number with the numeric keypad, Address Number, or One Touch buttons.
You cannot use the Address Book.
4
Note
• When the line type is set to a pulse line, [Tone (:)] does not appear.
• When you are using a dial line, select [Tone (:)] if you want to send out touch-tones (for a
service requiring the use of a pulse line).
• Some types of services cannot be used even if you set the machine to send out touch-tones.
152
7
When the machine connects to the service, you will hear voice prompts. Follow the
voice prompts to enter the required numbers.
8
When input is finished, press the <Start> button.
5 Scan
This chapter describes the scan features provided by this product.
Important • Scan features are not available for some models. An optional package is necessary.
For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.
z
Scanning Procedure .................................................................................154
z
Stopping the Scan Job..............................................................................160
z
E-mail........................................................................................................161
z
Scan to Mailbox ........................................................................................165
z
Job Templates ..........................................................................................166
z
Scan to FTP/SMB .....................................................................................167
z
Basic Scanning .........................................................................................170
z
Image Quality............................................................................................174
z
Scan Options ............................................................................................177
z
Output Format...........................................................................................182
5 Scan
Scanning Procedure
This section describes basic scan operations. The following shows the scanning
procedure and reference sections.
Step 1 Loading Documents .......................................................................................................154
Step 2 Selecting Features ..........................................................................................................156
Step 3 Starting the Scan Job......................................................................................................157
Step 4 Confirming the Scan Job in the Job Status ....................................................................158
Step 5 Saving the Scanned Data ...............................................................................................159
Step 1 Loading Documents
There are two methods for loading documents:
„Document Feeder
z
Single sheet
z
Multiple sheets
„Document Glass
Scan
5
z
Single sheet
z
Bound documents, such as books
Document Feeder
The document feeder supports single sheet and multiple sheet documents, with sizes
ranging from 148.6 × 210mm (A5, A5 ) to a maximum of 297 × 432mm
(A3, 11 × 17 inches).
The document feeder can auto-detect only documents of standard sizes. For nonstandard size documents, enter the size in the [Scan Size] field.
The document feeder accept the following number of sheets.
Document Type (weight)
Lightweight paper (38-49g/m2)
2
Number of
sheets
75 sheets
Plain paper (50-81g/m )
75 sheets
Heavyweight paper (81-128g/m2)
50 sheets
For information about entering a custom size, refer to "Scan Size (Specifying a Scanning Size)" (P.179).
For information about scanning documents of mixed size, refer to "Mixed Size Originals (Scanning
Different Size Documents Simultaneously)" (P.179).
Important • Place folded or creased documents on the document glass to avoid paper jams.
• 2 sided scanning of lightweight paper documents (38-48g/m2) is not supported.
154
Scanning Procedure
1
Remove any paper clips and
staples before loading documents.
2
Set the document to be scanned
face up (front-side up for 2 sided
documents) in the document feeder
in the direction of the arrow.
Note
• Documents should normally
be set with [Head to Left].
When viewing scanned
documents on a computer, the
document is imported as
[Head to Top].
• The <Confirmation> indicator lights when the document is loaded correctly.
3
Adjust the movable document
guides to just touch the edge of the
document stack.
The document glass accepts single-sheet or book form documents of sizes up to 297
× 432mm (A3, 11 × 17 inches).
5
The document glass can auto-detect only documents of standard sizes. For nonstandard size documents, input the size in the [Scan Size] field.
For information about entering document sizes, refer to "Scan Size (Specifying a Scanning Size)"
(P.179).
1
Open the document cover.
2
Place the document face down,
and align it against the top left
corner of the document glass.
3
Close the document cover.
Scan
Document Glass
155
5 Scan
Step 2 Selecting Features
You can select features from the [Basic Scanning] tab.
From the [Menu] tab, you can select from 4 scan modes: E-mail, Scan to Mailbox, Job
Template, and Scan to FTP/SMB.
„E-mail
Scans a document and sends the scanned data as an e-mail attachment.
„Scan to Mailbox
Scans a document and saves the scanned data to the machine’s mailbox.
„Job Template
Scans a document after specifying the file (job template) set with scanning conditions,
information about the transfer destination server and other information.
„Scan to FTP/SMB
Scans a document and sends the scanned data to a network computer via the FTP or
SMB protocols.
For information about each of these modes, refer to the sections listed below.
E-mail........................................................................................................................................161
Scan
Scan to Mailbox ........................................................................................................................165
Job Templates ...........................................................................................................................166
Scan to FTP/SMB .....................................................................................................................167
5
Note
• Features displayed may vary depending on the model you are using.
• When using the Auditron mode, a UserID and password might be required. Ask the machine
administrator for the UserID and password.
• The machine’s network settings must be configured in order to use the scan features. For
information about network settings, refer to the Network Administrator Guide.
Below is an explanation of how to use the Scan to Mailbox feature.
1
Press the <All Services> button.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
C
2
156
Select [Scan to Mailbox].
<All Services>
button
Scanning Procedure
3
If the previous settings still remain,
press the <Clear All> button.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
<Clear All>
button
C
4
Specify the mailbox to save to.
5
If appropriate, select features to
configure from each tab.
For information about each of these features, refer to the sections listed below.
Scan
"Basic Scanning" (P.170)
"Image Quality" (P.174)
"Scan Options" (P.177)
5
"Output Format" (P.182)
Step 3 Starting the Scan Job
1
Press the <Start> button.
Important • If a document has been set in
the document feeder, do not
press the document while it is
being conveyed.
Note
• If a problem occurs, an error
message appears in the touch
screen. Solve the problem in
accordance with the message.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
<Start> button
C
• The following job
configurations can be
performed while scanning.
„If You Have More Documents
If you have more than one stack of documents to scan, select the [Next Original] button
on the touch screen while the current stack of documents is being scanned. This allows
you to scan several documents as one set of data.
Up to 999 pages can be stored.
Note
• If the number of document pages exceeds this maximum, then scanning stops. Follow the
displayed message, and either abort the operation, or save the scanned document data.
157
5 Scan
1
While documents are being
scanned, select [Next Original].
Note
• When using the document feeder, the machine waits for the next sets of documents after it
has finished scanning the first set.
• When no operation is performed in the above screen, the machine assumes there are no
more documents to scan and clears the settings.
Scan
2
Load the next document.
3
Press the <Start> button.
If you have more documents, load the next document and press the <Start> button.
4
When all documents have been
scanned, select [Last Original].
5
Step 4 Confirming the Scan Job in the Job Status
1
Press the <Job Status> button.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
C
2
Check job status.
Note
158
• Select [ ] button to display
the previous screen and
select [ ] button to display
the next screen.
<Job Status>
button
Scanning Procedure
Step 5 Saving the Scanned Data
When scanning to mailbox, you import the document that is stored on the machine’s
mailbox into your computer. Importing can be done in the following ways:
„Import from an Application
Use a network scan driver.
„Import Using Mailbox Viewer 2
You can import using Fuji Xerox’s application software, Mailbox Viewer 2.
„Import Using CentreWare Internet Services
Uses CentreWare Internet Services to import.
For information about each of these modes, refer to "Importing Scanned Data" (P.217).
Scan
5
159
5 Scan
Stopping the Scan Job
Follow the procedure below to cancel a scan.
1
Press either [Stop] on the touch
screen or the <Stop> button on the
Control Panel.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
<Stop> button
C
Select [Stop].
3
If the screen in procedure 1 does
not appear, press the <Job Status>
button.
Scan
2
5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
C
4
Select the job to cancel, and then
select [Stop].
Note
160
• When a scan is cancelled,
scan data already stored to
the mailbox is deleted.
Scanning of the current page
completes before the job is
cancelled.
<Job Status>
button
E-mail
E-mail
You can scan a document and send the scanned data as an e-mail attachment. For
information about initializing data, refer to below.
Address Book ........................................................................................................................... 161
Keyboard .................................................................................................................................. 162
Add Sender............................................................................................................................... 163
Delete ....................................................................................................................................... 163
Change Settings........................................................................................................................ 163
Detailed Settings ...................................................................................................................... 163
In addition, the [Mail Delivery Notification (MDN)] and [Split Send] features in the
[Output Format] screen are only available under the E-mail feature. For information
about initializing data, refer to below.
Read Status (MDN).................................................................................................................. 183
Split Send (Sending in Sections).............................................................................................. 183
1
Select [E-mail] from the [All
Services] screen.
Note
In the [Mail Recipient] Screen, choose a recipient from the address book, or enter one
with your keyboard.
Address Book
This describes entering a recipient using the Address Book. You can also enter a
recipient directly via the keyboard.
„Searching
1
Select [Address Book].
2
Once the Address Book screen
appears, choose either [Local
Search] or [Remote Search] as an
address book type.
Note
• The screen at right appears
when [Remote Search] is
selected for Address Book.
For information about directory services, refer to "Address Search (Directory Service)" (P.315).
3
Select the necessary fields, select [Enter/Change Keyword], and enter a keyword or
keywords.
„Recipient Name
Up to 18 characters are allowed. Example: John Smith
161
Scan
2
• If the [All Services] screen is
not shown, press the <All
Services> button.
5
5 Scan
„E-mail Address
Up to 128 characters are allowed.
Example: [email protected]
„Custom Items
This field is selected when you wish to search on items other than the above.
Note
• When searching on multiple keywords, search using the AND clause.
• Only 1 Custom Item can be selected.
4
Select [Search Now].
5
After searching completes, specify
the recipient from the displayed
screen, and select either [To], [CC],
or [BCC] for the recipient type.
Note
• The screen at right appears
when [Remote Search] is
selected for Address Book.
• Select [
] to display the previous screen and select [
] to display the next screen.
• Select [Name/E-mail Address], and select [Show Details] to bring up the [Details] screen.
For information about directory services, refer to "Address Search (Directory Service)" (P.315).
„Opening the Local Address List
Scan
5
1
Select [Address Book].
2
When the Address Book screen appears, select [Local Address List].
3
In the [Go to], use the numeric
keypad to enter a 3 digit Address
Number.
4
The specified number is displayed
at the top of the list. Specify the
recipient from the displayed
screen, and select either [To], [CC],
or [BCC] for the recipient type.
Note
• Select [
] to display the previous screen and select [
] to display the next screen.
• Select [Name/E-mail Address], and select [Show Details] to bring up the [Details] screen.
Important • You can not specify a recipient by Address Number, One Touch buttons, or Recipient Group
using numeric keypad.
• You can only use recipients configured for e-mail. Fax recipients, etc. are not available.
For information about configuring the Address Book, refer to "Address Book" (P.334).
Keyboard
Enter a recipient using the keyboard.
1
Select [Keyboard].
2
Use the keyboard shown in the
touch screen to specify a recipient
up to 128 characters.
For information about how to enter characters, refer to "Specifying Destination Using the Keyboard
Screen" (P.116) or "Entering Specific Symbols" (P.116) in [Basic Features].
162
E-mail
Add Sender
This is used to add a recipient address to [To], [CC], or [BCC].
1
Select [Add Sender].
2
Select the recipient type.
Delete
Deletes the recipient.
1
Select the [E-mail Address] to
delete.
2
Select [Delete].
Scan
Change Settings
You can confirm or change the recipient.
1
Select the [E-mail Address] to
confirm/change.
2
Select [Change Settings].
3
To change an address, use the
displayed keyboard to enter a new
value.
5
Detailed Settings
Configures the details of the e-mail to send.
1
Select the [E-mail Address] to configure, and select [Sender’s Details].
2
Select the field to configure, and
enter a value.
163
5 Scan
„From
Enter an e-mail address. Select [Address Book] and select from the Address Book, or
select [Keyboard] and enter a value using the keyboard.
You can specify a recipient in only 1 place. Up to 128 characters are allowed.
Note
• When using the Authentication feature, the e-mail address registered for the user
information is automatically set.
„E-mail Subject
Enter the Subject. When using Auto Configuration, the Subject is [Scan data from XXX]
(where XXX is the host name). Auto Configuration is the default setting. 128 characters
are allowed.
„Reply To
Set the e-mail address to reply to.
„File Name
Select [Keyboard] and enter a value using the keyboard.
„Clear Field
Deletes the From address.
„Enter Sender’s Address
Scan
Sets the [Reply To] address to the From address.
„Address Book
Enter an e-mail address from the Address Book.
5
„Keyboard
Use the Keyboard to enter an e-mail address.
164
Scan to Mailbox
Scan to Mailbox
You can scan documents on the machine and save the scanned data to the copier's
mailbox.
To use the Scanner to Mailbox feature, select [Scan to Mailbox].
1
Select [Scan to Mailbox] from the
[All Services] screen.
Note
2
• If the [All Services] screen is
not shown, press the <All
Services> button.
In the [Save in] screen, specify a mailbox to save the scanned data.
Note
• If a password is set for the mailbox, the password entry screen appears. Enter the password
and select [Confirm]. If you have forgotten the password, reconfigure the mailbox password
in System Administration mode.
„Mailbox
Select the mailbox to store the scanned data. Select the [ ] button to display the
previous screen and select the [ ] button to display the next screen.
„Go to
„Document List
5
Select a mailbox and press this button to check or delete documents stored within.
Document List
You can confirm or delete documents stored inside the mailbox.
1
Select [Document List].
2
Select the document to confirm or
delete.
Note
• If the scanned data is not
displayed, select [Refresh].
„No. of Docs
When a mailbox is selected, and it contains documents, the number of stored
documents is displayed.
„Select All
Selected when deleting or printing all documents in the mailbox.
„Print/Delete
Used to Print/Delete selected documents. You can also rename documents.
Note
Scan
Use the numeric keypad to enter a 3 digit mailbox number. That mailbox then appears
at the top of the list.
• Scanned documents cannot be printed.
165
5 Scan
Job Templates
Scans a document after specifying the file (job template) set with scanning conditions,
information about the transfer destination server and other information.
Job Templates are created using CentreWare Internet Services and CentreWare Scan
Service (optional). Scanned data is converted to TIFF or JPEG format, and
automatically sent to the server.
For information about CentreWare Internet Services, refer to Help.
For information about CentreWare Scan Services, refer to the CentreWare Scan Services Installation
Guide.
Note
1
• The Job Template created using CentreWare Internet Services includes "@" in its name.
Select [Network Scanning] from the
[All Services] screen.
Note
• If the [All Services] screen is
not shown, press the <All
Services> button.
• If a created Job Template is
not displayed, select
[Refresh].
2
Specify a Job Template.
Scan
„Job Template
Select a Job Template that is configured with the scan parameters you want. Select [
to display the previous screen and select [ ] to display the next screen.
5
]
„Go to
Entering a Job Template Number via the numeric keypad causes that Job Template to
appear at the top of the list.
„Template Description
You can display a description of the Job Template.
Template Description
You can display a description of the Job Template. However, a description only
appears if it has been set when the Job Template was created.
1
166
Select the Job Template, and
select [Job Template Description].
Scan to FTP/SMB
Scan to FTP/SMB
You can convert scanned data to TIFF, DocuWorks, or PDF formats, and then use the
FTP or SMB protocols to send the data to a computer on the network. For information
about initializing data, refer to below.
Transferring Protocol ............................................................................................................... 167
Address Book ........................................................................................................................... 167
Detailed Settings ...................................................................................................................... 168
Delete ....................................................................................................................................... 168
Keyboard .................................................................................................................................. 169
Specifying a Forwarding Destination....................................................................................... 169
Note
• Before scanning, a common folder for saving scanned data must be created on the
computer. If FTP protocol is to be used for forwarding, the FTP service must be set. For
information on the computer settings, refer to the documentation supplied with your
operating systems. For information on compatible operating systems, refer to "Scan Feature
Specifications" (P.497).
• This feature is not displayed for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
1
Select [Scan to FTP/SMB] from the
[All Services] screen.
2
• If the [All Services] screen is
not shown, press the <All
Services> button.
Scan
Note
• Fields displayed vary
depending on the selected
protocol.
5
Specify a Forward destination from the [Save in] screen.
Transferring Protocol
Select [Transfer Protocol], and in the next screen, select either [FTP], [SMB], or [SMB
(UNC Format)] as a forwarding protocol. For information about each protocol, refer to
"Specifying a Forwarding Destination" (P.169).
Address Book
You can select a server name, login name, etc. from the Address Book.
1
Select [Address Book].
2
Select an Address, and select
[Show Details].
167
5 Scan
3
In the screen that appears, check the [Recipient Name], [Server Name/IP Address],
[Login Name], [Password], etc.
Important • You can only use recipients configured for SMB or FTP. Fax recipients, etc. are not
available.
For information about configuring the Address Book, refer to "Address Book" (P.334).
Detailed Settings
Here you can rename files and configure processing for conflicting filenames.
1
Select [Detailed Settings].
2
When changing the [File Name],
select [File Name], select [Change
Settings], and then enter the new
File Name in the next screen. To
delete, select [Clear Field].
3
When changing the [File Name
Conflict], select [File Name
Conflict], select [Change Settings],
and then change the settings in the
next screen.
Scan
Note
5
• Up to 28 characters are
allowed for [File Name].
[File Name Conflict] Screen
„Cancel Job
If a file of the same name already exists in the forwarding destination, cancel the job
and do not save.
„Change Name and Save
If a file of the same name already exists in the forwarding destination, automatically
change the file name and save. This adds a number from 0001-9999 to the end of the
file name.
„Overwrite Name and Save
Replace the existing file with the new one and save.
Delete
You can delete each forwarding destination field.
1
168
Select the field to delete, and select
[Clear Field].
Scan to FTP/SMB
Keyboard
1
Select the field to change, and
select [Keyboard].
2
Use the keyboard shown in the
touch screen to enter a new value.
For information about how to enter
characters, refer to "Specifying
Destination Using the Keyboard Screen"
(P.116) or "Entering Specific Symbols"
(P.116) in [Basic Features].
Specifying a Forwarding Destination
Enter values for the fields appropriate to the selected protocol, and specify a forwarding
destination to save to.
1
Select the field to configure, and
select [Keyboard].
Note
Scan
2
• You can also choose [Address
Book] to enter a recipient from
the Address Book.
Enter values using the keyboard
shown.
Note
5
• Fields displayed vary depending on the selected protocol.
„Server
Displayed when either [FTP] or [SMB] is selected. Enter either the server name or
server IP address. Up to 64 characters are allowed.
Example Server Name: dccf450.fujixerox.com
(dccf450: Host Name, fujixerox.com: Domain Name)
„Shared Name
Displayed when [SMB] is selected. Enter the Shared Name. Up to 64 characters are
allowed.
„Save in:
Displayed when either [FTP] or [SMB] is selected. Enter a directory. Up to 128
characters are allowed.
„Save in
Displayed when [SMB (UNC Format)] is selected. Enter "\\Host Name\Shared
Name\Directory Name". Up to 260 characters are allowed.
„Login Name
Enter the login name for the computer you are forwarding to. 32 characters are allowed.
When forwarding using SMB, this field can be omitted if the recipient does not require it.
„Password
Enter the password for the login name. 32 characters are allowed.
Important • A maximum of 14 characters can be entered in the LAN Manager environment.
169
5 Scan
Basic Scanning
This screen is displayed in [E-mail], [Scan to Mailbox], [Network Scanning], and [Scan
to FTP/SMB]. The Basic Scan screen allows you to configure basic features. For more
information, refer to below.
Output Color (Selecting the Scanning Color) ...........................................................................170
2 Sided Originals (Scans Both Sides of the Document) ...........................................................171
Original Type (Select the Document Type)..............................................................................172
File Format (Select the Scanned Data Type) ............................................................................172
1
From the [All Services] screen,
select either [E-mail], [Scan to
Mailbox], [Network Scanning], or
[Scan to FTP/SMB].
2
Select the Basic Scanning tab.
Output Color (Selecting the Scanning Color)
You can set the output color for the documents to be scanned.
Scan
1
5
Select the output color from
[Output Color].
„Auto
The color of the document is determined automatically; the machine scans in full color
when the document is colored, otherwise scans in monochrome.
Note
• The features which can be set in the [Image Quality] screen when [Auto] is selected, are the
same as if [Full Color] is specified for the [Output Color] when a color document is loaded, or
the same as if [Black] is specified for the [Output Color] when a monochrome document is
loaded.
„Full Color
Choose to scan a color document.
„Grayscale
Scan a document in grayscale. Adds shades to monochrome, creating intermediate
tones that change gradually. Suited to documents containing gradations that cannot be
reproduced with monochrome (2-color).
„Black
Scan a document in monochrome 2 tone. You can select the document type in the
[Original Type].
170
Basic Scanning
2 Sided Originals (Scans Both Sides of the Document)
You can automatically scan both sides of a 2 sided document.
By setting the binding style, front/back information can also be included in the scanned
data.
Note
1
• This feature is not displayed for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
For [2 Sided Originals], select
either [1 Sided] or [2 Sided].
„1 Sided
Select to scan only 1 side of the document.
„2 Sided (H to H)
Selected when both sides of a 2 sided document are in the same position.
„2 Sided (H to T)
Selected when both sides of a 2 sided document are in opposite positions.
Scan
„More...
The [2 Sided Originals] screen is displayed.
5
[2 Sided Originals] Screen
Select when you wish to specify the document’s orientation and scan both sides.
1
Select either [1 Sided] or [2 Sided].
2
When [2 Sided] is selected, select
[Originals].
3
Select [Original Orientation].
„Originals
Displayed when [2 Sided] is selected in the Originals screen.
Select either [Head to Head] or [Head to Toe].
[Head to Head] means that both sides of a 2 sided document are in the same
orientation, while [Head to Toe] means that they are oriented oppositely.
„Originals Orientation
To scan using the document feeder, the orientation must be set to indicate the top of
the document.
Load the document in the [Head to Left] orientation when [File Format] is set to [TIFF/
JPEG Auto Select], [TIFF], or [JPEG]. When viewing scanned documents on a
computer, the document is displayed in the right orientation.
Note
• If the [Original Orientation] differs from the actual document orientation, then the machine
may mistakenly detect the head of the document.
171
5 Scan
„Head to Top
Select this when placing the top of the document facing the inner side of the document
glass or DADF.
„Head to Left
Select this when placing the top of the document facing the left side of the document
glass or DADF. When the document is placed or loaded to face the left side (text
horizontal), be sure to select [Head to Left].
Original Type (Select the Document Type)
When scanning a document from the [Basic Scanning] screen with [Output Color] set
to [Black], select the document type.
1
Select Original Type.
„Text & Photo
Scan
Select this item when scanning documents that contain both text and photos. This
setting automatically scans text and photo areas with the optimum document quality
per area.
5
„Text
Choose when you wish to scan text clearly.
„Photo
Choose to scan photos.
File Format (Select the Scanned Data Type)
Select the scanned data type
Important • Scan to Mailbox cannot be used with this feature.
1
Select the File Format.
„TIFF/JPEG Auto
Automatically selects JPEG or TIFF. The file format is determined for each page:
[JPEG] for full color and grayscale images, [TIFF] for monochrome.
„PDF
Saves as a PDF file.
172
Basic Scanning
„DocuWorks
Saves as a DocuWorks file.
„Multi-page TIFF
Saves multiple pages as 1 TIFF file.
„TIFF
1 Saves each page as a TIFF file.
„JPEG
Saves as a JPEG file. When either [Full Color] or [Grayscale] are selected for [Output
Color], you also configure the image compression method. You can also configure the
compression ratio with the [Image Compression] in the [Output Format] screen.
Scan
5
173
5 Scan
Image Quality
In the [Image Quality] screen under [E-mail], [Scan to Mailbox], [Network Scanning], or
[Scan to FTP/SMB], you can configure the image features. For more information, refer
to below.
Photograph Scanning (Scanning a Color Photograph) .............................................................174
Lighten/Darken/Contrast (Adjusting Scan Density and Contrast)............................................175
Sharpness (Adjusting Document Sharpness) ............................................................................175
Auto Exposure (Erasing the Background Color of Documents)...............................................175
Background Suppression (Suppressing the Document Background) .......................................176
Color Space (Specifying Color Space) .....................................................................................176
1
From the [Menu] screen, select
either [E-mail], [Scan to Mailbox],
[Network Scanning], or [Scan to
FTP/SMB].
2
Select the [Image Quality] tab, and
configure each feature.
Note
Scan
5
• [Color Space] is not available for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center. A setting must be made in the System
Administration mode to activate [Color Space]. For information about how to set features,
refer to "Color Space" (P.297).
Photograph Scanning (Scanning a Color Photograph)
Configured when scanning a color photograph.
Only enabled when [Output Color] is set to [Full Color] in the [Basic Scanning] screen.
Important • Only available for documents placed on the document glass. Cannot be used for documents
placed on the document feeder.
• When [Photograph Scanning] is selected, [Background Suppression] and [Auto Exposure]
are not available.
174
1
Select [Photograph Scanning].
2
Select [On].
Image Quality
Lighten/Darken/Contrast (Adjusting Scan Density and Contrast)
You can set the scan density for the documents to be scanned.
In addition, when [Output Color] is set to [Full Color] or [Grayscale] in the [Basic
Scanning] screen, you can also adjust contrast.
1
Select [Lighten / Darken /
Contrast].
2
Configure [Lighten / Darken].
3
Configure [Contrast].
„Lighten/Darken
You can select from among seven density levels between [Lighter] and [Darker]. Scan
density is darker the closer you get to [Darker], and lighter the closer you get to
[Lighter].
„Contrast
You can select from five levels between [Lower] and [Higher].
[Higher] contrasts increase the light/dark difference, meaning that light portions are
scanned as light, and dark portions are scanned as dark. [Lower] contrasts decrease
the difference between light and dark areas.
Scan
Sharpness (Adjusting Document Sharpness)
The contours of images can be made to look sharper or more blurred. Sharpness can
be set in five levels from [Softer] to [Sharper].
1
Select [Sharpness].
2
Sharpness can be set in five levels
from [Softer] to [Sharper].
Auto Exposure (Erasing the Background Color of Documents)
When a document is scanned in [Monochrome] or [Grayscale] for Output Color, scans
can be made with the background color of the document such as newspapers or
colored paper documents suppressed.
When Output Color is set to [Full Color], white backgrounds are suppressed.
1
Select [Auto Exposure].
2
Select [On] or [Off].
„Off
Document backgrounds are scanned with no filtering.
„On
Document background color is suppressed when scanned.
175
5
5 Scan
Background Suppression (Suppressing the Document Background)
When scanning a 2 sided document printed on both sides, you can suppress the image
on the reverse side.
Only enabled when [Output Color] is set to [Full Color] or [Grayscale] in the [Basic
Scanning] screen.
Important • This feature cannot be used with [Photograph Scanning].
1
Select [Background Suppression].
2
Select [On].
Color Space (Specifying Color Space)
You can specify color space for scans.
Important • Color Space is available when [Output Color] is set to [Full Color].
Note
Scan
5
• This feature is not available for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center. A setting must be made in the System
Administration mode to activate [Color Space]. For information about how to set features,
refer to "Color Space" (P.297).
1
Select [Color Space].
2
Select either [Standard Color Space] or [Device].
„Standard Color Space
Color space for scanned data conforms to sYCC.
„Device Color Space
Used to perform advanced color processing.
Note
• You can find profile data in the CentreWare Utilities CD-ROM.
• When [Device Color Space] is selected, the below image quality features are set to their
defaults.
Lighten / Darken, Sharpness, Background Suppression, Contrast, Auto Exposure
176
Scan Options
Scan Options
In the [Scanning Method] screen under [E-mail], [Scan to Mailbox], [Job Template], or
[Scan to FTP/SMB], you can configure the scanning method. For more information,
refer to below.
Scan Resolution (Specifying a Scanning Resolution).............................................................. 177
2 Sided Originals (Scans Both Sides of the Document)........................................................... 171
Bound Originals (Scanning Facing Pages onto Separate Sheets) ............................................ 178
Scan Size (Specifying a Scanning Size)................................................................................... 179
Mixed Size Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents Simultaneously) ........................ 179
Border Erase (Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows in the Document).................................... 180
Reduce/Enlarge (Specifying a Scanning Ratio) ....................................................................... 181
1
From the [All Services] screen,
select either [E-mail], [Scan to
Mailbox], [Network Scanning], or
[Scan to FTP/SMB].
2
Select the [Scan Options] tab, and
configure each feature.
Scan
5
Scan Resolution (Specifying a Scanning Resolution)
You can set the resolution for the documents to be scanned.
As the resolution increases, the scan becomes more detailed, but the data size also
increases. As the data size increases, scan and transfer times increase as well.
1
Select [Scan Resolution].
2
Select the resolution.
2 Sided Originals (Scanning Both Sides of the Document)
You can automatically scan both sides of a 2 sided document.
This feature is the same as [2 Sided Originals] in the [Image Quality] tab. For more information, refer to
"2 Sided Originals (Scans Both Sides of the Document)" (P.171).
177
5 Scan
Bound Originals (Scanning Facing Pages onto Separate Sheets)
The Bound Originals feature allows you to scan facing pages of a document onto
separate sheets of paper in page order.
This feature is useful if you need to make separate scans from facing pages of bound
originals such as a booklet.
Note
• When making copies using this feature, place the document on the document glass.
• Non-standard sized documents will not be separated into two accurately.
1
Select [Bound Originals].
2
Select the original type.
3
Select the page order.
4
Configure the Center Erase.
„Off
Do not scan bound originals.
„Left Page then Right
Scans are made from the left page of facing pages in a document starting from the left
page.
„Right Page then Left
Scan
Scans are made from the right page of facing pages in a document starting from the
right page.
5
„Top Page then Bottom
Scans are made from the top page of facing pages in a document starting from the top
page.
„Both Pages
Scan both pages in page order.
„Left Page Only
Scan the left page only in page order.
„Right Page Only
Scan the right page only in page order.
„Center Erase
Erase the center shadow. The center erase width can be set within the range 0 to 50
mm in 1 mm increments.
178
Scan Options
Scan Size (Specifying a Scanning Size)
You can set the size for the documents to be scanned.
Specify the scan size when scanning non-standard size documents or when making
scans at a size different from the size of the currently loaded document.
When a document size is specified, it is scanned at the specified size regardless of the
size of the loaded document.
1
Select [Scan Size].
2
Select a size.
„Auto Size Detect
Document sizes are automatically detected.
Document feeder
Document glass
Auto Detect is available B5, B5 , B4, A5 , A4,
A4 , A3, 8.5 × 11 inches,
Document size
8.5 × 11 inches , 8.5 × 14
B6, B6 , B5, B5 , B4, A6,
A5, A5 , A4, A4 , A3, 8.5
× 11 inches
inches, 11 × 17 inches
• When a document size cannot be detected automatically, a message prompting document
size entry appears.
Scan
Note
„Standard Size
5
Select a document size from a list of 11 pre-configured types.
Note
• Standard size defaults: A3 , A4 , A4
8.5 × 11" , Photo 2L , Photo L .
, A5
, B4
,B5
, 11 × 17"
, 8.5 × 11"
,
„Free
Set the size in the document glass X (horizontal) direction within the range 15 to 432
mm and in the Y (vertical) direction within the range 15 to 297 mm in 1 mm increments.
When entering a free size, we recommend using the scale on the outside of the
document glass to help you specify the document size.
Mixed Size Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents
Simultaneously)
When using the document feeder to scan, you can match the scan size to use for each
document.
Important • When selecting [Full Color] for [Output Color], and [2 Sided] for [2 Sided Originals], set the
[Scan Resolution] to a maximum of [400dpi].
• Always load the A5-size documents vertically.
• When loading a B5 size document with A3 or A4 size documents in a vertical direction, place
the B5 document also in a vertical direction.
Note
• This feature is not displayed for some models. This feature is optional. For more information,
contact our Customer Support Center.
• When setting the [Reduce/Enlarge] to [Auto %] and specifying an [Output Size], the scan is
performed with automatic reduce/enlarge to the specified size.
• When a document size cannot be detected automatically, a message prompting document
size entry appears.
179
5 Scan
1
Select [Mixed Size Originals].
2
Select [On] or [Off].
„Off
Select this when all documents are of the same size.
„On
When scanning documents of different sizes, the machine automatically detects the
size of each document.
Border Erase (Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows in the Document)
When you scan the document cover open or scan a book, black shadows sometimes
appear along the edges or center margin of the output scanned image. If this happens,
you can scan with the shadows erased.
Note
• When making 2 sided scans, the same border erase amount is set to the top and back sides.
• When Reduce/Enlarge is set, the border erase amount is also enlarged or reduced
proportionately to the copy ratio.
Scan
5
1
Select [Border Erase].
2
Select [Normal] or [Variable Erase].
3
When [Variable Erase] is selected,
enter each erase value.
4
Select [Original Orientation].
„Normal
The border erase amount is set to 2 mm for the top, bottom, left and right.
If you do not wish to perform border erase, set each [Variable Erase] value to [0mm].
„Variable Erase
You can erase only the amount necessary.
„T/B Erase
Shadows at the top and bottom of the document are erased. Edges on the top and
bottom are erased with respect to the direction that the document was loaded. The
border erase width can be set within the range 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.
„L/R Erase
Shadows on the left and right of the document are erased. Edges on the left and right
are erased with respect to the direction that the document was loaded. The border
erase width can be set within the range 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.
„Center Erase
Shadows in the center of documents such as booklets or documents with facing pages
are erased. The center erase width can be set within the range 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm
increments.
180
Scan Options
„Original Orientation
In order to identify the top of the document, the orientation of the set document must
be configured.
For more information, refer to "Originals Orientation" (P.171).
Reduce/Enlarge (Specifying a Scanning Ratio)
You can set the scanning ratio for the documents to be scanned.
1
Select [Reduce/Enlarge].
2
Select the desired scanning ratio.
„Preset %
Select from among 8 preset ratios.
„Variable %
You can scan by selecting a variable ratio. The ratio can be set in increments of 1%
within the range 25-400%.
Scan
„Auto %
Automatically sets the scanning ratio based on the document size and specified
[Output Size].
Note
• Default [Output Size] values when scanning with [Auto %] are: A3
B4 , B5 , 11 × 17"
, 8.5 × 11"
.
, A4
, A4
, A5
,
• White space remaining after scanning with [Auto %] is blank data.
181
5
5 Scan
Output Format
In the [Output Format] screen under [E-mail], [Scan to Mailbox], [Job Template], or
[Scan to FTP/SMB], you can configure the output format. For more information, refer to
below.
Image Compression (Specifying an Image Compression Ratio When Scanning)....................182
Read Status (MDN)...................................................................................................................183
Split Send (Sending in Sections)...............................................................................................183
Document Name (Specifying a Filename to Save to)...............................................................183
Login Name...............................................................................................................................184
Password ...................................................................................................................................184
Meta Data..................................................................................................................................184
1
From the [All Services] screen,
select either [E-mail], [Scan to
Mailbox], [Network Scanning], or
[Scan to FTP/SMB].
2
Select the [Output Format] tab.
Note
Scan
5
• Fields displayed vary depending on the selected feature. The screen at right is for the e-mail
feature.
Image Compression (Specifying an Image Compression Ratio When
Scanning)
When scanning a document from the [Basic Scan] screen with [Output Color] set to
[Full Color] or [Grayscale], select the image compression ratio.
1
Select [Image Compression].
2
Set the image compression ratio.
You can choose from among 5
levels of compression, including the
3 below.
„High
Image is saved with high compression. Image quality degrades, but file size decreases.
„Normal
Image is saved with standard compression. Results in a standard image quality and file
size.
„Low
Image is saved with low compression. Image quality improves, but file size increases.
182
Output Format
Read Status (MDN)
Under the e-mail feature, you can configure mail send results to tell you whether the
recipient has read the message. The recipient must support the MDN feature.
Note
• When multiple mails are sent using [Split Send], then Read Status is requested for each
mail.
• The return e-mail recipient is the [Reply To] address if the [Reply To] address is defined.
Otherwise, the return recipient is the [From] address.
1
Select [Read Status (MDN)] from
the Main screen.
2
Select [On].
Split Send (Sending in Sections)
This e-mail feature allows you to split a large attachment by pages, and send as
separate e-mails. You can also configure the machine not to split.
Note
• You can only use the Split Send feature when the [File Format] in the [Basic Scanning]
screen is set to [PDF], [DocuWorks], or [Multi-page TIFF].
Select [Split Send].
2
Select [Split by page].
Scan
1
5
Document Name (Specifying a Filename to Save to)
When using the [Scan to Mailbox] feature, you can specify the name of the file to save
to. Up to 28 characters are allowed.
1
Select [Document Name].
2
Enter a filename using the
keyboard shown.
Note
• When specifying a Job
Template, the filename is
taken from the template, and
cannot be changed.
183
5 Scan
Login Name
Use this feature to set the login name for the destination server of the scanned files.
Note
• The selection for this feature is displayed only when you have selected [Network Scanning].
1
Select [Login Name] on the [Output
Format] screen.
2
Perform the necessary operations.
3
Select [Save].
For information on keyboard entry, refer to
"Entering Text" (P.252).
Password
Use this feature to set the password for the destination server of the scanned files.
Note
• The selection for this feature is displayed only when you have selected [Network Scanning].
Scan
1
Select [Password] on the [Output
Format] screen.
2
Perform the necessary operations.
3
Select [Save].
For information on keyboard entry, refer to
"Entering Text" (P.252).
5
Meta Data
Use this feature to change the value of the Document Management Field (DMF) if it is
set up for the selected job template.
Note
184
• The selection for this feature is displayed only when you have selected [Network Scanning].
6 Check Mailbox
This chapter describes the mailbox and [Check Mailbox] screen.
Note
• The check mailbox feature is not available for some models. An optional package is
necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.
z
Check Mailbox Procedure.........................................................................186
z
Selecting a Mailbox...................................................................................188
z
Checking/Selecting Mailbox Documents ..................................................189
z
Printing/Deleting Documents in Mailbox ...................................................190
z
Configuring/Starting Job Flow...................................................................191
6 Check Mailbox
Check Mailbox Procedure
Check mailbox procedure steps and their references are listed below.
Step 1 Opening the [Check Mailbox] Screen............................................................................186
Step 2 Selecting the Mailbox ....................................................................................................186
Step 3 Checking/Selecting Mailbox Documents ......................................................................186
Step 4 Checking Mailbox Documents ......................................................................................187
Step 1 Opening the [Check Mailbox] Screen
Follow the procedure below to open the [Check Mailbox] screen.
Note
1
• Features displayed may vary according to the machine’s configuration.
Press the <All Services> button.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
C
Check Mailbox
2
<All Services>
button
Open the next screen, and select
[Check Mailbox].
6
Step 2 Selecting the Mailbox
Access to the selected mailbox may be restricted, depending on authorization settings.
For information about selectable mailboxes depending on the authorization feature, refer to "Types of
Mailbox" (P.394).
1
Select a mailbox.
2
Select [Document List].
For information about the [Check
Mailbox] screen, refer to "Selecting a
Mailbox" (P.188).
Step 3 Checking/Selecting Mailbox Documents
1
Select a document.
For information about the [Document List]
screen, refer to "Checking/Selecting
Mailbox Documents" (P.189).
186
Check Mailbox Procedure
Step 4 Checking Mailbox Documents
Operations available in the [Check Mailbox] screen and their references are listed
below.
Printing/Deleting Documents in Mailbox ................................................................................ 190
Configuring/Starting Job Flow................................................................................................. 191
Check Mailbox
6
187
6 Check Mailbox
Selecting a Mailbox
Access to the selected mailbox may be restricted, depending on user authorization
settings.
For information about selectable mailboxes depending on the authorization feature, refer to "Types of
Mailbox" (P.394).
1
Select a mailbox.
Note
• Select [ ] to display the
previous screen and select
[ ] to display the next screen.
You can directly access a
mailbox by entering a threedigit mailbox number in the
[Go to] with the numeric
keypad.
• An arrow is displayed next to mailboxes that have a linked Job Flow, and which have been
configured for Auto Start.
• When a mailbox is selected, and it contains documents, the number of stored documents is
indicated in [No. of Docs.] in the lower right area of the screen.
• If a password entry screen appears, enter the password and select the [Confirm] button.
2
Check Mailbox
6
188
Select [Document List].
Checking/Selecting Mailbox Documents
Checking/Selecting Mailbox Documents
1
Select a document.
Note
• The number of documents
saved is displayed in [No. of
Docs.].
• Updated information is
displayed by selecting
[Refresh].
• Select [ ] to display the previous screen and select [ ] to display the next screen. When
[Select All] is selected, all documents in the mailbox are selected. Selection will be canceled
if the button is selected again.
• You can sort documents in ascending or descending order by pressing either [Doc. Name]
or [Stored Date].
• To the left of the document name is displayed an icon showing the document contents.
:Scanned Document
:Documents for Private Polling
:Fax to Mailbox
:iFax to Mailbox
• Up to 9 documents can be selected separately. You can also select all documents. When
selecting individual documents, a number appears to the left of the document icon indicating
the order in which it was selected. Documents are processed in this order.
Check Mailbox
6
189
6 Check Mailbox
Printing/Deleting Documents in Mailbox
1
Select a document to be printed
and select [Print/Delete].
Important • Scanned documents cannot
be printed.
• Cannot print when multiple
documents are selected. You
can only print when 1 or all
documents are selected.
2
To print a document, select [Print].
To delete a document, select
[Delete].
Note
Check Mailbox
6
190
• Pressing [Change Doc. Name]
allows you to rename the
document. However, this is
unavailable when multiple
documents are selected.
Configuring/Starting Job Flow
Configuring/Starting Job Flow
Operations supported in Job Flow Configure/Start and their references are listed
below.
Creating a Job Flow.................................................................................................................. 191
About Job Flow Restrictions .................................................................................................... 195
Creating a Job Flow
Job Flow is a feature for executing a series of registered actions.
A Job Flow operates on documents stored in a mailbox, and are started in the following
ways: 1) manually or automatically start a Job Flow when a document is stored to a
mailbox, or 2) select a Job Flow to act on documents stored in the mailbox.
To start a Job Flow, you must first link a mailbox with the Job Flow. When set to start
automatically, documents are automatically processed by the Job Flow when stored in
the mailbox.
Features that can be registered are listed below.
„Forward
Multiple forward recipients can be configured for each forwarding method.
z
• The following feature is not available for some models.
An optional package is necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support
Center.
Check Mailbox
Note
FTP
Forward via FTP. Up to 2 recipients can be specified.
z
SMB
6
Forward via SMB. Up to 2 recipients can be specified.
z
Mail
Forward via E-mail. Up to 100 recipients can be specified.
z
Fax
Forward via fax. Up to 100 recipients can be specified.
z
iFax transmission
Forward via iFax. Up to 100 recipients can be specified.
191
6 Check Mailbox
„Print
Prints documents stored in the mailbox.
Permissible combinations of features may be limited, depending on the mailbox
storage method.
Output
Print
Fax
iFax
Send
Mail
FTP
SMB
Fax Documents for
Private Polling






Scan
–
–
–



Fax to Mailbox






iFax Received




Input
: Available
– : Not available
: Available depending on System Administration mode settings
Important • When the [Input] is Fax Private Polling or Fax to Mailbox, and a monochrome (2-tone)
document is forwarded by e-mail, FTP, or SMB, and the Job Flow [File Format] is set to
[JPEG], the file cannot be opened by the recipient.
1
Press the <All Services> button.
Check Mailbox
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
C
6
2
Open the next screen, and select
[Check Mailbox].
3
Select a mailbox and select
[Document List].
4
Select [Job Flow Settings].
Note
<All Services>
button
• To operate a Job Flow on a
document, select the target
document before pressing this
button.
• Select [ ] to display the
previous screen and select
[ ] to display the next screen.
• You can sort documents in ascending or descending order by pressing either [Doc. Name]
or [Stored Date].
192
Configuring/Starting Job Flow
5
Perform a Job Flow.
„Auto Start
This configuration auto starts a Job Flow on a document when that document is stored
in a mailbox. If this box is checked, the Job Flow automatically starts when a document
is stored.
„Start
Select documents from the mailbox and press this button to start the Job Flows linked
to this mailbox.
Important • Always print the job history report to confirm the results after executing a job flow. For
information about the job history report, refer to "Job Status/Activity Report" (P.376).
„Cut Link
Cancels the link between a mailbox and its Job Flows.
„Create/Change Link
[Link Job Flow Sheet to Mailbox] screen is displayed.
Pressing this button while documents are selected opens the [Select Job Flow Sheet]
screen.
[Link Job Flow Sheet to Mailbox] Screen
You can cancel the link between a mailbox and its Job Flows.
Note
1
• Creating and canceling links, as auto start settings can also be performed when creating a
mailbox.
Select the Job Flow to link, and
select [Close].
Important • Pressing [Close] without
selecting a Job Flow does not
create a link. If the selected
Job Flow is already linked,
then the link is cancelled.
Note
• Select [
] to display the previous screen and select [
] to display the next screen.
• You can sort documents in ascending or descending order by pressing either [Name] or
[Last Updated].
• To the left of the name is displayed an icon showing the target of the Job Flow.
:Mailbox Document
„Sheet Filtering
The [Sheet Filtering] screen is displayed.
„Create
[Create New Job Flow Sheet] screen is displayed.
For more information, refer to "Create New Job Flow Sheet" (P.327).
193
Check Mailbox
„Select Job Flow Sheet
6
6 Check Mailbox
„Edit/Delete
The [Edit/Delete] screen is displayed.
For more information, refer to "Content Check" (P.333).
[Sheet Filtering] Screen
You can filter the displayed Job Flows. Screen display may vary, depending on
authorization feature settings.
Displayed Job Flows may vary depending on authorization features. "Job Flow Sheet Types" (P.391),
"6.3 Registering/Confirming Account Data" (P.196).
1
Select filter conditions, and select
[Save].
[Select Job Flow Sheet] Screen
For a selected document, you can specify a Job Flow and start it.
1
Select the Job Flow, and press the
<Start> button.
Check Mailbox
Note
• Select [ ] to display the
previous screen and select
[ ] to display the next screen.
• You can sort documents in
ascending or descending
order by pressing either
[Name] or [Last Updated].
• To the left of the name is displayed an icon showing the target of the Job Flow.
:Mailbox Document
6
„Sheet Filtering
The [Sheet Filtering] screen is displayed.
For more information, refer to "[Sheet Filtering] Screen" (P.194).
„Create
[Create New Job Flow Sheet] screen is displayed.
For more information, refer to "Create New Job Flow Sheet" (P.327).
„Show Details
The [Show Details] screen is displayed.
For more information, refer to "Content Check" (P.333).
„Edit Destination
If the selected Job Flow Sheet setting is editable, the [Edit] screen is displayed and you
can temporarily change the settings.
For more information, refer to "Job Flow Sheets" (P.197).
194
Configuring/Starting Job Flow
About Job Flow Restrictions
Job Flows can be assigned to an individual, shared by many users, or only accessible
from the specified mailbox to which they are linked.
Job Flow restrictions may vary depending on authorization features. For information about initializing
data, refer to "Job Flow Sheet Types" (P.391).
Check Mailbox
6
195
7 Job Flow Sheets
This section describes scan operations using a Job Flow created on a network
computer and registered with the machine. The [Job Flow Sheets] screen is also
explained.
Note
• The Job Flow feature is not available for some models. An optional package is
necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.
z
Job Flow Procedure..................................................................................198
z
Job Flow List.............................................................................................200
z
Confirming/Changing Job Flow.................................................................201
7 Job Flow Sheets
Job Flow Procedure
Job Flow procedure steps and their references are listed below.
Step 1 Opening the [Job Flow Sheets] Screen ..........................................................................198
Step 2 Selecting a Job Flow ......................................................................................................198
Step 3 Confirming/Changing a Job Flow..................................................................................198
Step 4 Starting a Job Flow ........................................................................................................199
Step 1 Opening the [Job Flow Sheets] Screen
Follow the procedure below to open the [Job Flow] screen.
Note
1
• Features displayed may vary from device model to model.
Press the <All Services> button.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
C
Job Flow Sheets
2
7
Open the next screen, and select
[Job Flow Sheets].
Step 2 Selecting a Job Flow
1
Select a Job Flow.
For more information about [Job Flow
Sheets] screen, refer to "Job Flow List"
(P.200).
Step 3 Confirming/Changing a Job Flow
1
Select a Job Flow.
2
To confirm Job Flow contents,
select [Show Details]. To change
contents, select [Edit].
For more information about configuring
and changing Job Flow, refer to
"Confirming/Changing Job Flow" (P.201).
198
<All Services>
button
Job Flow Procedure
Step 4 Starting a Job Flow
1
Load the original.
2
Press the <Start> button.
Important • Always print the job history report to confirm the results after executing a job flow. For
information about the job history report, refer to "Job Status/Activity Report" (P.376).
Job Flow Sheets
7
199
7 Job Flow Sheets
Job Flow List
Job Flow is a feature for executing a series of registered actions.
The Job Flows available here are limited to Job Flows created for scans using
CentreWare EasyOperator on computers on the network.
Note
• To enable communication with network computers, the [SOAP port] on this device must be
opened.
• Change/Duplicate/Delete actions are not permitted for Job Flows created on a network
computer. However, fields that allow changes can be temporarily changed and used.
Job Flow Sheet Filtering
You can filter the displayed Job Flows. Screen display may vary, depending on user
authorization feature settings.
Displayed Job Flows may vary depending on authorization features. "Job Flow Sheet Types" (P.391)".
1
Select [Sheet Filtering].
Note
• Updated information is
displayed by selecting
[Refresh].
• Select [ ] to display the
previous screen and select
[ ] to display the next screen.
Job Flow Sheets
• You can sort documents in ascending or descending order by pressing either [Name] or
[Last Updated].
2
7
200
Select filter conditions, and select
[Save].
Confirming/Changing Job Flow
Confirming/Changing Job Flow
You can confirm a Job Flow and temporarily change its parameters. However, only
fields that have been give change permission when the Job Flow was created can be
edited.
1
Select a Job Flow.
Note
• Updated information is
displayed by selecting
[Refresh].
• Select [ ] to display the
previous screen and select
[ ] to display the next screen.
• You can sort documents in ascending or descending order by pressing either [Name] or
[Last Updated].
2
To confirm Job Flow contents, select [Show Details]. To change contents, select
[Edit].
3
Select the group to change from
the [Group of Items], and select
[Change Settings].
Note
Select the items to change and
select [Change Settings].
Note
Job Flow Sheets
4
• Data included in the Job Flow
is displayed in the [Group of
Items].
• A triangle icon appears to the
left of groups that have
mandatory fields.
• Data included in the Job Flow
is displayed in the [Items] and
[Current Settings].
5
7
Contents of the displayed screen vary to match the data you wish to change. You
make changes on this screen.
201
8 Stored Programming
This chapter describes the Stored Programming features provided by the
machine.
z
Stored Programming Overview.................................................................204
z
Registering/Deleting/Renaming Stored Programming ..............................205
z
Recalling Stored Programming.................................................................207
8 Stored Programming
Stored Programming Overview
Frequently used features can be registered as Stored Programming and recalled by a
single button operation. In addition, you can also register a screen to open from a
shortcut button.
Stored programming not only remembers feature settings, but also can record a series
of operations. This enables you to record the hierarchy of displayed screens for each
step.
For example, Stored Programming could be used when you wish to record the
following: press the <Machine Status> button, and display the screen to print the
Report Job [Activity Report].
References for registering and recalling Stored Programming are listed below.
Registering/Deleting/Renaming Stored Programming .............................................................205
Recalling Stored Programming.................................................................................................207
Stored Programming
8
204
Registering/Deleting/Renaming Stored Programming
Registering/Deleting/Renaming Stored Programming
The [Stored Programming] screen allows you to set the following items:
Registering Stored Programming ............................................................................................. 205
Deleting Stored Programming.................................................................................................. 206
Naming/Renaming Stored Programming ................................................................................. 206
1
Press the <All Services> button.
2
Select [Setup Menu].
3
Select [Stored Programming].
Registering Stored Programming
Stored Programming can record up to 40 features. In addition, up to 58 actions can be
registered with Stored Programming.
Below describes the procedure for registering actions with Stored Programming.
Important • Stored programming content can change in the following situations.
• If the contents of a button registered in Stored Programming is changed when a job flow, job
template, recipient, comments, and other registered information is changed, or if default
values are changed after Stored Programming is registered, then the program's content
changes.
Note
• Job Flow, Job Template, services using Address Book, and System Settings cannot be
registered to Stored Programming.
• If the <Interrupt> button is pressed, if the Auto Reset feature causes a time-out, or if a popup
window (paper jam, etc.) appears, then Stored Programming record operation is cancelled.
1
Select [Store].
2
Select the number to register.
Note
• Once a job is stored to a
button, it cannot be
overwritten.
• Select [
3
] to display the next screen.
Set the feature you wish to register.
Note
4
] to display the previous screen and select [
• A tone is generated while registering to job memory.
Press the <Start> button or <Clear All> button.
You can change the volume of the sound that notifies of Stored Programming registration. For
information about setup, refer to "Stored Programming Tone" (P.257).
205
Stored Programming
One touch buttons M01 to M20 are provided for Stored Programming 1 to 20.
8
8 Stored Programming
Deleting Stored Programming
Below describes the procedure for deleting Stored Programming.
1
Select [Delete].
2
Select the number to delete.
Note
3
• Select [ ] to display the
previous screen and select
[ ] to display the next screen.
Select [Yes].
„Yes
Deletes Stored Programming.
Note
• Deleted Stored Programming cannot be restored.
„No
The Stored Programming delete operation is cancelled.
Naming/Renaming Stored Programming
Below describes the procedure for naming and renaming Stored Programming.
Stored Programming
Up to 18 characters are allowed in Stored Programming name.
For information about how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.252).
1
Select [Enter/Change Name].
2
Select the number to add or
change a name.
Note
8
3
206
• Select [ ] to display the
previous screen and select
[ ] to display the next screen.
Enter the name, and select [Save].
Recalling Stored Programming
Recalling Stored Programming
This describes the procedure for recalling [Stored Programming].
When recalling a specified Stored Programming, the last screen shown during Stored
Programming registration appears.
1
Press the <All Services> button.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
C
2
Open the next screen, and select
[Stored Programming].
3
Select the number of Stored
Programming containing the
features you want to recall.
Note
<All Services>
button
Stored Programming
• You can only select registered
numbers.
• Select [ ] to display the
previous screen and select
[ ] to display the next screen.
4
5
After Stored Programming is
recalled, select other features if
necessary.
Press the <Start> button if
necessary.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
<Start> button
C
207
8
9 Computer Operations
Describes operations performed from a PC, such as importing print and scan
documents, as well as using CentreWare Internet Services.
Note
• Features described in this section are not available for some models. An optional
package is necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.
• The computer screen images shown in this section are as of October 2004.
z
Overview of Features................................................................................210
z
Printing......................................................................................................215
z
E-mail Print ...............................................................................................216
z
Importing Scanned Data ...........................................................................217
z
Sending a Fax...........................................................................................223
9 Computer Operations
Overview of Features
Describes an overview of features available on the computer.
Print Driver
In order to print from your computer, a print driver must be installed on the computer.
The print driver is software that converts print and command data from the computer
into forms usable by the machine.
For instructions on installing the print driver, refer to the manual contained in the CentreWare Utilities
CD-ROM.
„Print Driver Screen
Computer Operations
Main Features
Describes the major print features.
To learn about print features, click on [Help] in the print driver screen and refer to the print driver’s
online help. For information about how to print, refer to "Printing" (P.215).
Note
9
• In the [Printer] tab, there are some features that cannot be used without configuring optional
settings. Unavailable features are disabled in gray.
„Multiple Up
Prints multiple pages onto 1 sheet of paper.
„2 Sided Print
If 2 sided printing is available, then the paper is printed on both sides.
„Poster
Splits 1 page of print data into multiple sheets of paper and expands the printed image
to fit the size of each sheet. Used when making large posters, etc.
„Booklet Creation
If 2 sided printing is supported, then 2 sided printing and page allocations are fitted for
printing booklets in the correct page order.
210
Overview of Features
„Transparency Separators
A blank sheet of paper is automatically inserted as a separator each time that a
transparency is printed.
„Watermarks
Prints fixed text, such as "Confidential", over the print data.
„Secure Print
Temporarily stores the print data on the machine, and waits for a print command from
the device before printing. Used when printing confidential documents, etc.
For information about how to print, refer to "Secure Print" (P.360).
„Sample Print
When printing multiple copies of a document, you can first print only 1 copy for
confirmation, and then print the rest from the machine.
For information about how to print, refer to "Sample Print" (P.362).
„Charge Print
Temporarily stores the print data on the machine for each UserID, and waits for a print
command from the machine before printing.
For information about how to setup charge printing, refer to "Charge Print Settings" (P.350). For
information about how to print, refer to "Charge Print" (P.359).
„E-mail Print
You can send e-mail with TIFF or PDF documents attached from a computer to the
machine. Received e-mail is automatically printed.
For more information, refer to "E-mail Print" (P.216).
„Direct Fax
To learn about other direct fax features, click on [Help] and refer to the driver’s online help. For
information about how to send, refer to "Sending a Fax" (P.223).
Network Scanner Utility 2
Using Network Scan Utility 2, you can import scan documents stored on the device’s
mailbox onto a network computer.
There are 2 types of Network Scanner Utility 2:
z
Network scan driver
Note
z
Mailbox Viewer 2
• Use the included CentreWare Utilities CD-ROM to install Network Scanner Utility 2.
211
Computer Operations
You can directly send fax documents created with application software in the same way
that you print.
9
9 Computer Operations
„Network Scan Driver
The Network scan driver is used to allow client-side application software to import
documents (scan data) stored on the machine’s mailbox via the network.
For more information, refer to "Importing from a TWAIN Compatible Application" (P.217).
„Mailbox Viewer 2
Using Mailbox Viewer 2, you can import documents stored in the machine's mailbox
without using any application software.
For more information, refer to "Importing from Mailbox Viewer 2" (P.219).
CentreWare Internet Services
CentreWare Internet Services requires a TCP/IP environment, and enables you to view
the status of the machine and its jobs, as well as change settings via a web browser.
You can also import documents saved in a mailbox.
For information about importing documents, refer to "Importing using CentreWare Internet Services"
(P.221).
An explanation of CentreWare Internet Services is also provided in the Network Administrator Guide.
The CentreWare Internet Services Screen
The [CentreWare Internet Services] screen is made up of 4 frames (divided windows).
At the top and bottom are frames that occupy the full width of the browser. Between
those are 2 frames on the left and right. The contents displayed in each frame change
depending on the feature in use (service, job, status, property, maintenance, support).
Note
• You can read explanations of CentreWare Internet Services via the online help by clicking
on the [Help] button in the top frame.
Computer Operations
Top Frame
Upper Left Frame
Right Frame
Lower Left Frame
9
„Top Frame
This frame appears at the top of the window. It includes the logo, the machine name, a
link to online help, and tabs (links) to each feature.
For information about each feature provided by CentreWare Internet Services, click on [Help] in this
frame and refer to the displayed help.
„Right Frame, Upper Left Frame
Contents of the right frame and upper left frame change depending on the selected
feature. When a feature is selected, configurable features and data are displayed in the
right frame and upper left frame.
A link to the Copyright screen is displayed in the [Status] tab.
212
Overview of Features
„Lower Left Frame
A link to the Fuji Xerox home page is shown.
Primary features provided by CentreWare Internet Services are listed below.
Tab name
Services
Main features
z
Print Command
You can specify a file on your PC for printing.
Note
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is
necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support
Center.
Job
z
Job List, Job History Report, Delete Jobs
Status
z
Display Device Status
Display the status of paper tray and output tray, and consumables such
as toner
Reboot by system administrator
z
Properties
z
z
z
z
z
Display and configuration of the below properties
Device information and date/time settings, memory and print language
device configuration display, counter display, paper tray settings, paper
settings, power saver mode settings, fax address list edit, mailbox edit,
Job Flow edit, security settings, ID management, mail notification
settings, Auditron settings, Internet Services settings, port settings
Port Settings
Protocol Settings
Emulation Settings
Memory Allocation
Maintenance
z
Display Error History
Support
z
Display Support Data
Note
• A user name and password is required to make changes to system administrator settings.
The default user name is "11111". The default password is "x-admin".
Browser
CentreWare Internet Services has been tested on the below browsers.
z
Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 Service Pack 1 or later
Browser Settings
Computer Operations
• Some field settings only take effect after a reboot (after power cycle of the machine, or after
changing a system setting from the control panel).
9
Before using this service, check the following settings in your browser.
Below is described the configuration procedure for Internet Explorer 6.0 SP1.
1
Select [Internet Options] from the [Tools] menu.
2
In the [General] tab, click the [Settings] button in the [Temporary Internet Files] pane.
3
In the [Settings] dialog box, set [Check for newer versions of stored pages:] to either
[Every visit to the page] or [Every time you start Internet Explorer].
4
Click [OK].
213
9 Computer Operations
Proxy Server and Port Numbers
This describes proxy server settings and port numbers when using this service.
„Proxy Server
We recommend that you use this service by connecting directly, and not using a proxy
server.
Note
• If using a proxy server, specifying the machine’s IP address in the browser results in slower
responses, and could prevent some screens from appearing. In this case, it is necessary to
configure the machine’s IP address on the browser-side without going through a proxy
server. Refer to your browser’s documentation for configuration instructions.
„Port Number
This service is configured to use port "80" by default. The port number can be changed
in [Properties] > [Protocol Settings] > [HTTP]. Usable ports are "80" and "8000" "9999".
If you change the port to a value other than "80", you must add ":" plus the port number
to the IP address when typing the URL into your browser.
For example, if the port number is "8080", the URL is:
http://[the machine's IP address]:8080/
OR
http://[the machine's Internet address]:8080/
You can verify the port number in [Settings List] > [Maintenance]. For information about the [Setting
List], refer to "Settings List - Common Items" (P.377).
Note
• If communications are encrypted, you must specify an address that starts with "https"
instead of "http" to access CentreWare Internet Services.
Starting CentreWare Internet Services
To use this service, perform the following procedure on your computer.
Computer Operations
1
Start up the computer and the browser.
2
Enter the device IP address or Internet address in the browser address field and press
the <Enter> key.
Note
• If your network uses DNS (Domain Name System) and the device host name is registered
with the domain name server, you can access the machine using a combination of the host
name and the domain name as the "URL". For example, if the host name is "dccf450", and
the domain name is [fujixerox.com], then the "URL" becomes "dccf450.fujixerox.com".
• Contact your system administrator for the IP address or Internet address to enter.
9
• When specifying a port number, add ":" and "80" (default port number) to the end of the
address.
• If using the authorization feature on the machine, enter a UserID and Password into the
[User Name] and [Password] fields. Ask the machine administrator for the UserID and
Password.
• If communications are encrypted, you must specify an address that starts with "https"
instead of "http" to access CentreWare Internet Services.
214
Printing
Printing
Describes print procedures.
Print procedures vary depending on the application software you are using. For more
information, refer to the documentation provided with each application.
1
Select [Print] from the application’s [File] menu.
2
Confirm the [Printer Name] and click [Properties] if necessary.
3
Configure the properties if
necessary.
4
Click [OK].
5
Click [OK] in the [Print] dialog box.
Computer Operations
9
215
9 Computer Operations
E-mail Print
You can send e-mail with TIFF or PDF documents attached from a computer to the
machine. Received e-mail is automatically printed. This feature is called "Direct Fax".
Setup
To use the E-mail Print feature, the following setup is necessary. Check with your
system administrator or network administrator whether these settings have been
completed.
„Network Environment Settings
Register a User Account.
„Set the E-mail Environment
Configure the port, machine's e-mail address, TCP/IP environment, e-mail server, etc.
For information about Network Settings, refer to the Network Administrator Guide.
Sending E-mails
This example describes how to use Outlook Express to send e-mail from a computer
to each printer.
1
Use your e-mail client to create the e-mail body, and then attach a TIFF or PDF
document if available.
Important • Only plain text is permitted in the e-mail body. Change the body text format to plain text from
within your e-mail client.
Computer Operations
Note
• Attached files that do not have the ".tif" or ".pdf" extension may not print correctly.
• Up to 31 documents can be attached.
2
Enter the machine's e-mail address
for the recipient.
3
Send the e-mail.
9
Note
216
• The e-mail body and attached documents are printed with the following configuration:
E-mail body:
The machine's PCL print driver is installed on the sending computer with a default TIFF
format document attachment:
Default value of logical printer configured by [TIFF] [Memory Settings] in the CentreWare
Internet Services [Emulation Settings].
PDF format document attachment:
Default value of logical printer configured by [Postscript] > [Logical Printer Number] in the
CentreWare Internet Services [Emulation Settings].
Offset output specification is disabled in each case.
Importing Scanned Data
Importing Scanned Data
There are 3 methods for importing documents from a machine mailbox to your
computer.
Importing from a TWAIN Compatible Application ................................................................ 217
Importing from Mailbox Viewer 2........................................................................................... 219
Importing using CentreWare Internet Services........................................................................ 221
These procedures are described below.
Importing from a TWAIN Compatible Application
The following describes methods for using application software to import a document
stored on a machine mailbox.
The network scan driver is used to import stored documents.
The Network scan driver is used to allow client-side application software to import
documents (scan data) stored on the machine's mailbox via the network.
For instructions on installing the network scan driver, refer to the manual contained in the CentreWare
Utilities CD-ROM.
To learn about fields in the displayed dialog box, click on [Help] and refer to the network scan driver’s
online help.
1
Launch the application software to import the document.
Important • The application must support TWAIN. TWAIN is a standard for scanners and other input
devices.
Note
• For information about supported applications, refer to the [Readme] contained in the
CentreWare Utilities CD-ROM.
From the [File] menu, select the command used to choose the scanner (source).
3
From the [Sources], select [FX
Network Scan], and click [Select].
4
From the [File] menu, select the command used to import the image from the scanner.
5
From the displayed list, click the
scanner name of the machine, and
click the [Select Scanner] button.
Note
Computer Operations
2
9
• If no items are shown in the
list, click [Refresh]. The
application searches for
scanners.
• Click on [Options] to change
the way scanner names are
displayed.
• Only scanners connected to a uniform network are automatically shown in the list. To view
scanners from other networks, click on [Options] and change the settings. For information
about changing settings, refer to "Changing Network Scan Driver Settings" (P.218).
217
9 Computer Operations
6
In the [Mailbox No.] field, input the
mailbox number (001~200) that
contains the document you wish to
import, and input a password (up to
20 digits) into the [Password] field.
Note
• When you check the [Save Password] check box, you can skip steps 5~7 the next time you
select the same mailbox.
• Clicking [Change Scanner] returns to step 5, where you can reselect a scanner.
7
Click [Open Mailbox].
8
Select a document to import from
the list, and click [Import].
Note
• You can select one or more
documents.
• [Import], [Update], and
[Delete] are available from the
menu that appears when you
right-click on the list.
When import begins, a dialog
appears like the one shown at right.
Scan data is forwarded from the
mailbox to the client.
Once forwarding ends, the
document is loaded into the
application software and is deleted
from the mailbox.
Computer Operations
Note
• If importing one page at a time, documents that have pages not yet imported are shown in
the list with a [*].
• With the exception of DocuWorks, for most applications, the network scan driver expands
the compressed data and passes it to the application as a BMP file.
• It can be configured not to delete the document in the mailbox after forwarding. For how to
configure, refer to "Delete Documents After Retrieval" (P.324).
Changing Network Scan Driver Settings
To learn about fields in the displayed dialog box, click on [Help] and refer to the network scan driver’s
online help.
9
„Configure the Display Method for the Scanner Name
You can change the display method
for the scanner name shown when
that scanner is selected.
To change the scanner name
display method, click on [Options] in
the scanner select dialog box and
configure the display.
218
Importing Scanned Data
„Configure the Import Method for Scanned Documents
You can change the display method
and import method for documents
when importing them from a
mailbox.
To change the import method, click
[Settings] in the document select
dialog box, and configure the
settings in the dialog box that
appears.
Importing from Mailbox Viewer 2
The following describes methods for using Mailbox Viewer 2 to import a document
stored on the machine's mailbox.
Using Mailbox Viewer 2, you can import documents stored in the machine's mailbox
without using any application software.
Important • Mailbox Viewer 2 does not support importing one document at a time. All documents stored
on the selected mailbox are imported.
For instructions on installing Mailbox Viewer 2, refer to the manual contained in the CentreWare
Utilities CD-ROM.
To learn about fields in the displayed dialog box, click on [Help] and refer to the Mailbox Viewer 2
online help.
1
Click [Start] > [Programs] > [FujiXerox] > [Utilities] > [Mailbox Viewer 2].
2
• When a different program folder was specified during installation, choose the specified name
instead of [Utilities].
• If no items are shown in the
list, click [Refresh]. The
application searches for
scanners.
Computer Operations
Note
• Click on [Options] to change
the way scanner names are
displayed.
9
From the displayed list, click the
scanner name of the machine, and
click the [Select Scanner] button.
Note
• Only DocuCentre Color
devices connected to a
uniform network are
automatically shown in the list.
To view DocuCentre Color
devices from other networks,
click on [Options] and register
an IP address and scanner
name.
219
9 Computer Operations
3
In the [Mailbox No.] field, input the
mailbox number (001 to 200) that
contains the document you wish to
import, and input a password (up to
20 digits) into the [Password] field.
Note
• When you check the [Save Password] check box, you can skip steps 2 to 4 the next time you
select the same mailbox.
• Clicking [Change Scanner] returns to step 2, where you can reselect a scanner.
4
Click [Open Mailbox].
5
Click [Import].
Important • Mailbox Viewer 2 does not
support importing one
document at a time. All
documents stored on the
selected mailbox are imported
when you click on [Import].
Note
• To import documents, the
[Auto Import] check box must
be checked in Mailbox Viewer
2.
For information about Mailbox Viewer 2 settings, refer to "Configure the Import Method for Scanned
Documents" (P.221).
6
Clicking on the [Import] button removes all stored documents from the mailbox, and
saves them in the specified directory (default: C\Program Files\Fuji Xerox\Network
Scan\Temp).
Changing Mailbox Viewer 2 Settings
Computer Operations
To learn about fields in the displayed dialog box, click on [Help] and refer to the Mailbox Viewer 2
online help.
„Configure the Display Method for the Scanner Name
You can change the display method
for the scanner name shown when
that scanner is selected.
To change the scanner name
display method, click on [Options] in
the scanner select dialog box and
configure the display.
9
220
Importing Scanned Data
„Configure the Import Method for Scanned Documents
You can change the display method
and import method for documents
when importing them from a
mailbox.
To change the import method, click
[Settings] in the document select
dialog box, and configure the
settings in the dialog box that
appears.
Scan Settings
When [Auto Import] is checked, you
can configure the import method for
documents removed from the
mailbox.
Importing using CentreWare Internet Services
Describes methods for importing documents stored on the machine's mailbox using
CentreWare Internet Services.
For an outline of CentreWare Internet Services, refer to "CentreWare Internet Services" (P.212).
Start up the host device and the browser.
2
Enter the machine's IP address or Internet address in the browser address field and
press the <Enter> key.
Note
• If your network uses DNS (Domain Name System) and the machine's host name is
registered with the domain name server, you can access the machine using a combination
of the host name and the domain name as the "URL". For example, if the host name is
"dccf450", and the domain name is "fujixerox.com", then the "URL" becomes
"dccf450.fujixerox.com".
Computer Operations
1
9
• Contact your system administrator for the IP address or Internet address to enter.
• When specifying a port number, add ":" and "80" (default port number) to the end of the
address.
• If using the authorization feature on the machine, enter a UserID and Password into the
[User Name] and [Password] fields. Ask the System Administrator for the UserID and
Password.
• If communications are encrypted, you must specify an address that starts with "https"
instead of "http" to access CentreWare Internet Services.
221
9 Computer Operations
3
Select a [Mailbox] from the
[Properties] tab.
4
In the [Mailbox Number] field, input
the mailbox number (1~200) that
contains the document you wish to
import, and input a password (up to
20 digits) into the [Password] field.
5
Click [Document List].
6
Place a check next to the
documents to import, and click
[Retrieve].
Note
Computer Operations
7
• To retrieve a color document
as a JPEG, place a check
next to [Retrieve Page], and
specify the page number.
Click [Save this link].
To learn about operating details, click on
the bottom frame [Help] button and refer
to the online help.
9
222
Sending a Fax
Sending a Fax
Describes Direct Fax procedures.
Direct Fax procedures vary depending on the application software you are using. For
more information, refer to the documentation provided with each application.
1
Select [Print] from the application’s [File] menu.
2
Select the fax printer to use from [Printer Name].
3
Click [Properties] and select [Fax]
for Job Type.
4
Click [OK].
5
Print dialog box appears. Click
[OK].
6
Enter a recipient to [Recipient List].
7
Click [OK].
To learn about specifying recipients, click
on the printer driver’s [Help] and refer to the online help.
Registering a Destination
This describes the method for using a computer to share recipients registered on the
machine with other Document Centre C450/C360/C250 devices.
Uses CentreWare Internet Services to register recipients.
For information about CentreWare Internet Services, refer to "CentreWare Internet Services" (P.212).
You can register recipients individually from the machine’s control panel. For information about
registering recipients, refer to "Address Book" (P.334).
Important • Since multiple users can simultaneously access CentreWare Internet Services, you should
setup an Administrator/Password to prevent registered data from being overwritten. We
recommend that you configure a Administrator/Password, and have the Administrator make
changes.
• Do not setup the Administrator at the same time as when you register a recipient from the
control panel.
• Recipients with the same Address Number are overwritten.
1
Start up the computer and the browser.
2
Enter the printer IP address or Internet address in the browser address field and press
the <Enter> key.
Note
• If your network uses DNS (Domain Name System) and the device host name is registered
with the domain name server, you can access the machine using a combination of the host
name and the domain name as the "URL". For example, if the host name is "dccf450", and
the domain name is "fujixerox.com", then the "URL" becomes "dccf450.fujixerox.com".
• Contact your system administrator for the IP address or Internet address to enter.
• When specifying a port number, add ":" and "80" (default port number) to the end of the
address.
223
Computer Operations
You can use this same method to register recipients from other Document Centre
C450/C360/C250 devices onto the machine.
9
9 Computer Operations
• If using the authorization feature on the machine, enter a UserID and Password into the
[User Name] and [Password] fields. Ask the System Administrator for the UserID and
Password.
• If communications are encrypted, you must specify an address that starts with "https"
instead of "http" to access CentreWare Internet Services.
Computer Operations
9
224
3
Click the [Properties] tab and select
[Fax Speed Dial Directory] in the
left frame of the screen that is
displayed.
4
Click [Retrieve All] > [Retrieve in
CSV format].
5
Specify the save destination to
save the files.
6
Enter the Document Centre C450/C360/C250 IP address or Internet address in the
browser address field and press the <Enter> key.
7
Click the [Properties] tab and select [Fax Speed Dial Directory] in the left frame of the
screen that is displayed.
8
Click on the [Register All] [Browse] button and specify the files saved in step 5.
9
Click the [Register in CSV Format] button.
10 Paper and Other Media
This chapter describes the types of paper that can be used on the machine,
precautions when handling paper, and how to load paper in trays.
z
Paper Type ...............................................................................................226
z
Loading Paper ..........................................................................................232
z
Changing the Size of Paper in Trays ........................................................235
z
Changing Paper Settings..........................................................................237
10 Paper and Other Media
Paper Types
This section describes the kinds of paper available for this device.
Use of inappropriate paper may result in paper jams, cause reduced print quality,
malfunctions and other trouble. To make full and effect use of the machine's
performance, we recommend using only paper recommended by Fuji Xerox.
If you want to use paper not recommended by Fuji Xerox, contact our Customer
Support Center.
Important • The printed image may fade due to moisture such as water, rain or vapor. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
Paper Type
Plain Paper (Printable Paper)
When using supplier paper (known as printable paper) for copies or printing, make sure
that it complies with the following specifications. However, it is recommended that you
use the standard paper types introduced on the next page, to achieve clear copy and
print results.
Paper tray
Weight
Loadable quantity
Trays 1 to 4
64 to 98 g/m2
560 sheets (Xerox P paper)
Tray 3 (high capacity)
64 to 98 g/m2
980 sheets (Xerox P paper)
Tray 4 (high capacity)
64 to 98 g/m2
1,280 sheets (Xerox P paper)
Tray 5 (bypass)
55 to 220 g/m2
Up to 10mm 100 sheets
(Xerox P paper)
Paper and Other Media
Important • Printing with paper that is a different type or size from the paper selected by the printer
driver, or printing from an unsupported paper tray can result in paper jams. To ensure
correct printing, select the correct paper size, paper type, and paper tray.
Note
• When copying with a non-standard paper size from Tray 5 (bypass), you must manually
enter the paper size. In addition, if you use a non-standard paper size often, you can preset
the size in the device. Then the preset size appears under [Standard Sizes] in the [Tray 5
(Bypass)] screen. For information about setup, refer to "Tray 5 (Bypass) Paper Size
Defaults" (P.262).
• When using 12 × 18 inch paper from Tray 5 (bypass) to copy or print, slide the paper guide
before setting the paper.
• You can further categorize image quality processing methods for plain paper. For more
information, refer to "Paper Type Priority" (P.261).
• When sheets such as postcards, which are B5 in size or narrower are printed continuously,
the non-paper passage side on the fuser unit heats up. For this reason, the message
“Please wait” is sometimes displayed and output is discontinued. Printing resumes after one
to 2 minutes. The message “Please wait” is also sometimes displayed and printing is
discontinued for 30 seconds or more when one sheet of paper A5 in size or smaller has
been printed.
10
• For the Document Centre C360/C250, no configuration is provided for a high capacity paper
tray.
226
Paper Types
Standard Paper
The following table shows the standard paper recommended by Fuji Xerox.
Paper Paper
Weight Type
Image
Quality
Usage Notes
Size
Colotech Plus
A3
90
Bond
Plain Paper A
Colotech Plus
A4
90
Bond
Plain Paper A Use when used in the B zone.
Blue Wrap
A4
80
Plain
Plain Paper D
Blue Wrap
A3
80
Plain
Plain Paper D
Pro-Explore
A4
80
Plain
Plain Paper D
Business (3R91820)
A4
80
Plain
Plain Paper D
Business (3R91821)
A3
80
Plain
Plain Paper D
Xerox Blue
A4
80
Plain
Plain Paper D Fine white areas appear when used in the
C-zone.
Diplomat
A4
80
Plain
Plain Paper D
Diplomat
A3
80
Plain
Plain Paper D Small dots appear.
KX-H H803
A4
80
Plain
Plain Paper D Small dots appear in solid areas when
used in the C-zone.
KX-H H804
A4
80
Plain
Plain Paper D
PREMIUM
A4
80
Plain
Plain Paper D
DocuPaper
A4
70
Plain
Plain Paper D
DocuPaper
A4
80
Plain
Plain Paper D
L000
A4
80
Plain
Plain Paper D Solid areas appear slightly fuzzy.
L742
A3
80
Plain
Plain Paper D
Xtra
A4
80
Plain
Plain Paper D
Xtra
A4
75
Plain
Plain Paper D Small dots appear in solid areas when
used in the A-zone.
Flag ship
A3
70
Plain
Plain Paper D
Note
• The above limits describe the results of measurements made in the following environment,
and guarantees can not be made for other environments.
A-zone (high temperature and humidity)28ºC, 85%
B-zone (normal office)22ºC, 55%
C-zone (low temperature and humidity)10ºC, 15%
227
Paper and Other Media
Paper Name
10
10 Paper and Other Media
Semi Standard Paper
The following table shows the standard paper recommended by Fuji Xerox.
Paper Paper
Weight Type
Image
Quality
Usage Notes
Size
Performer
A4
80
Plain
Plain Paper D Small dots appear in solid areas. To
prevent this, switch to Blue Wrap paper.
Pro-Explore
A4
90
Plain
Plain Paper A
Performa White
A3
80
Plain
Plain Paper D Small dots appear in solid areas. To
prevent this, switch to Blue Wrap paper.
Excel
A4
80
Plain
Plain Paper D Small dots appear in solid areas. To
prevent this, switch to Diplomat paper.
Excel
A3
80
Plain
Plain Paper D Small dots appear in solid areas. To
prevent this, switch to Diplomat paper.
KX New X X703
A3
75
Plain
Plain Paper D Small dots appear in solid areas. To
prevent this, switch to KX-H paper.
KX New X X704
A4
75
Plain
Plain Paper D Small dots appear when used in the Czone. To prevent this, switch to KX-H
paper.
V705
Letter
70
Plain
Plain Paper D Small dots appear in solid areas on side
1. To prevent this, switch to Premium
paper.
Green Label
A4
70
Plain
Plain Paper D Small dots appear in solid areas when
used in the A-zone.
Planet
A3
70
Plain
Plain Paper D Small dots appear when used in the Aand C-zones.
Xplore(RED)
A3
70
Plain
Plain Paper D Small dots appear in solid areas when
used in the C-zone.
Flag ship
A3
70
Plain
Plain Paper D Small dots appear in solid areas when
used in the C-zone.
Gold Flag ship
A3
80
Plain
Plain Paper D Small dots appear when used in the Aand C-zones.
Gold Flag ship
A3
70
Plain
Plain Paper D Small dots appear when used in the Aand C-zones.
16K
16K
75
Plain
Plain Paper D Dots appear when used in the A- and Czones.
8K
16K
75
Plain
Plain Paper D Dots appear when used in the A- and Czones.
Paper and Other Media
Paper Name
10
Note
228
• The above limits describe the results of measurements made in the following environment,
and guarantees can not be made for other environments.
A-zone (high temperature and humidity)
28ºC, 85%
B-zone (normal office)
22ºC, 55%
C-zone (low temperature and humidity)
10ºC, 15%
Paper Types
Usable Paper
The following describes the types of paper that can be used on the machine other than
recommended paper.
Image
Quality
Paper Name
Size
Paper
Weight
Colotech Plus
A3
100
Green Wrap
A4
80
Plain
Plain Paper D
Colotech Plus Gloss
A4
140
Heavyweight 1
Coat 1
Pro-Explore
A4
100
Heavyweight 1 Heavyweight 1
XEROX ONE
A4
80
Plain
Plain Paper D
Small dots appear in solid areas.
To prevent this, use Diplomat
paper.
XEROX ONE
A3
80
Plain
Plain Paper D
Image wrinkle may occur
sporadically. To prevent this, use
Diplomat paper.
Warrior
A3
80
Plain
Plain Paper D
Small dots appear in solid areas.
KX A4 Paper
A4
75
Plain
Plain Paper D
Small dots appear in solid areas
when used in the C-zone. To
prevent this, use KX-H paper.
P70 V703
A3
70
Plain
Plain Paper D
Small dots appear in solid areas.
To prevent this, use Premium
paper.
Xcite(Red)
A3
80
Plain
Plain Paper D
Small dots appear in solid areas
when used in the A- and C-zones.
Transmate
A3
80
Plain
Plain Paper D
Dots appear in solid areas when
used in the A- and C-zones.
Usage Notes
Heavyweight 1 Heavyweight 1 Small white areas appear. To
prevent this, use ColotechPlus 90
g/m2 paper.
To prevent small dots and minor
white stripes, contact our
Customer Support Center for
adjustment.
• The above limits describe the results of measurements made in the following environment,
and guarantees can not be made for other environments.
A-zone (high temperature and humidity)
28ºC, 85%
B-zone (normal office)
22ºC, 55%
C-zone (low temperature and humidity)
10ºC, 15%
Paper and Other Media
Note
Paper Type
10
Usable Special Media
Copies and prints can also be made on the following paper type when Tray 5 (bypass)
is used. This media is called special media. The following table shows the main special
media that can be used on this machine:
Paper Paper
Weight Type
Image
Quality
Paper Name
Size
3R96019
A4
OHP
OHP
OHP
Laser Card
040P00142
A4
A4
Label
Plain Paper D
Usage Notes
Solid areas may come out light.
Small dots may appear.
229
10 Paper and Other Media
Paper Paper
Weight Type
Image
Quality
Paper Name
Size
Usage Notes
V522
A4
OHP
OHP
OHP
L515
A4
OHP
OHP
OHP
Small dots appear on halftone copies.
P801
A4
OHP
OHP
OHP
Paper has a static charge after printing or
copying.
Limited Paper
Use of the following paper types is not recommended.
Paper and Other Media
10
Paper Name
Size
Paper
Weight
Paper Type
Image
Quality
3R96000
A4
OHP
OHP
OHP
Do not use in the A-zone.
3R96002
A4
OHP
OHP
OHP
Do not use in the A-zone.
Pro-Explore
A4
120
3R95809
A4
OHP
OHP
OHP
Black Wrapped
A4
80
Recycled
Plain Paper D
Small dots appear in solid black
areas. To prevent this, use
Diplomat paper.
Label 3R97407
A4
Label
Label
Plain Paper D
Do not use in the A-zone.
Multi Purpose
A4
75
Plain
Plain Paper D
Small dots appear in solid areas.
To prevent this, use KX-H paper.
Multi Purpose
A4
75
Plain
Plain Paper D
Small dots appear in solid blue
areas. To prevent this use KX-H
paper.
Multi Purpose
A4
75
Plain
Plain Paper D
Small dots appear in solid blue
areas. To prevent this use
Premium paper.
N000
A4
80
Plain
Plain Paper D
To prevent small dots, contact our
Customer Support Center for
adjustment.
Use L000 paper.
Note
230
Usage Notes
Heavyweight 1 Heavyweight 1 Small dots or white areas may
appear. To prevent this, contact our
Customer Support Center for
adjustment.
Solid areas may come out slightly
lighter.
If the paper is double-feeding, load
the sheets one at a time.
• The above limits describe the results of measurements made in the following environment,
and guarantees can not be made for other environments.
A-zone (high temperature and humidity)
28ºC, 85%
B-zone (normal office)
22ºC, 55%
C-zone (low temperature and humidity)
10ºC, 15%
Paper Types
Storing and Handling Paper
„Please Keep the Following Points in Mind When Storing Paper
z
Store paper inside a cabinet or other dry place. Paper that has absorbed moisture
can cause paper jams and image quality defects.
z
After opening a package of paper, wrap up the remaining paper to store it. It is
recommended that you include moisture prevention packets.
z
Paper should be stored flat, to prevent bends or warping.
„Please Adhere to the Following When Setting Paper into the Tray
z
Align the stack of paper neatly before setting it in the tray.
z
Do not use paper that is folded, creased, or heavily warped.
z
Do not use waved or curled paper.
z
Do not load paper of mixed size together into the tray.
z
Transparency paper and label paper can cause paper jams, and multiple sheets can
be fed to the printer at once. Be sure to carefully fan these types of paper.
z
When continuously outputting onto transparencies, transparency sheets sometimes
will stick to each other. Remove transparencies from the output tray every 20 or so
sheets, and fan them to cool them down.
Paper and Other Media
10
231
10 Paper and Other Media
Loading Paper
The following describes how to load paper in Trays 1 to 4 and in Tray 5 (bypass).
Loading Paper in Trays 1 to 4
The following describes the procedure for loading paper in Trays 1 to 4.
When the machine runs out of paper during copying or printing, a message is displayed
on the control panel display. Add paper according to the displayed instructions.
Copying or printing is automatically resumed when paper is added.
For information about changing the paper size and orientation, refer to "Changing the Size of Paper in
Trays" (P.235).
1
Pull out the tray towards you until it
stops.
2
Load and align the edge of the
paper against the left edge of the
tray with the side to be copied or
printed on facing up.
M A X
Important • Do not load paper exceeding
the maximum fill line. Doing so
might cause paper jams or
machine trouble.
Paper and Other Media
3
MAX
Push the tray in gently until it comes
to a stop.
10
„About Types of Paper Loaded in Trays 1 to 4
Plain paper, recycled paper and bond paper of density 64 - 98g/m2 can be loaded in
Trays 1 to 4. The machine automatically detects the size and orientation of loaded
paper. The paper type, however, must be set. Normally, each of the trays is set to
plain paper. When loading recycled paper or bond paper in trays, change the paper
type setting. Plain paper, recycled paper and bond paper can also be named, and set
as user-defined paper. Up to five paper types can be set as user-defined paper.
For information about changing the paper type in trays, refer to "Paper Type" (P.260).
232
Loading Paper
„Automatic Tray Selection
If you set paper source on the [Paper/Output] tab to [Paper Tray] in the PCL print
driver's properties screen when making prints, the machine automatically selects the
corresponding paper tray according to the size and orientation of the document to print.
This is called [Automatic Tray Selection]. When making copies, automatic tray
selection is active if [Auto] is selected for [Paper Select]. If the machine judges that
there are two or more corresponding trays in automatic tray selection, the machine
gives higher priority to the tray having the highest [Paper Type Priority] set at [Tray
Paper Type]. During automatic tray selection, trays whose [Paper Type Priority] setting
is set to [Off] are not targeted in [Automatic Tray Selection]. Also, if the [Paper Priority]
setting is exactly the same, automatic tray selection is determined by [Tray Priority].
Note
• When the machine runs out of paper during copying or printing, select the tray containing the
paper of the same size and orientation that was being used for copying or printing, and
continue copying or printing (Auto Tray Switch feature). During this operation, a tray
containing paper of type whose [Paper Priority] setting is set to [Off] cannot be switched to.
For information about setting [Paper Type], [Paper Type Priority], [Paper Tray Priority], and setting the
paper substitute feature, refer to "Paper Tray Attributes" (P.259). The same settings can also be made
from CentreWare Internet Services.
Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass)
When printing or copying with paper sizes or types that cannot be set in Trays 1 to 4,
use Tray 5 (bypass). The following describes how to load paper into Tray 5 (bypass).
To make detailed instructions during printings, specify the instructions using the [Tray/
Output] tab in the print driver. When doing this, also specify the type of paper to load.
1
Open Tray 5 (bypass).
Note
Paper and Other Media
2
• If necessary, extend the
extension flap. The extension
flap can be extended in two
stages. When pulling out the
extension flap, do it gently.
Check the position of the paper
guides at the front side of Tray 5
(bypass).
Note
• Normally, set the paper guide
to the <Normal> position.
If the paper guide is in the <12"
(305mm)> or <12.6" (320mm)>
position, return it to the
<Normal> position. If using
paper for prints or copies
whose width exceeds that of
A3 (297mm), such as 12 × 18
inches or 12.6 × 17.7 (SRA3)
inches, move the paper guide.
For information about how to
move the paper guides, refer
to "Moving the Position of the
Paper Guide" (P.234).
10
233
10 Paper and Other Media
3
Load paper with the side to be
copied or printed on facing down,
and insert the paper lightly along
the paper guide on the front side of
the machine until it comes to a stop.
Important • Do not load mixed paper types
into the tray.
• Do not load paper exceeding
the maximum fill line. Doing so
might cause paper jams or
machine trouble.
• When making copies or
printing on thick-stock paper
such as postcards, and the
paper is not fed into the
machine, apply a curl to the
leading edge of the paper as
shown in the figure on the
right. Note, however, that
excessively bending or folder
the paper might cause paper
jams.
4
Lightly push the paper guide
against the paper you loaded.
5
Select copying or printing.
Paper and Other Media
Moving the Position of the Paper Guide
If using paper for prints or copies whose width exceeds that of A3 (297mm), move the
paper guide.
Important • After you have finished making copies or prints, be sure to return the paper guides to the
<Normal> position.
1
10
234
Slide the paper guide on the front
side of Tray 5 (bypass) to the <12"
(305 mm)> or <12.6" (320mm)>
position.
Changing the Size of Paper in Trays
Changing the Size of Paper in Trays
The following describes how to change the paper size on Trays 1 to 4.
Note
• The paper quality for Paper Trays 1 to 4 is configured. There are 8 paper qualities: [Plain],
[Bond], [Recycled], and [Custom 1~5]. Paper quality is normally set to [Plain]. When
changing the setting to a different paper quality, change the paper quality settings to match
the type of paper to be loaded to maintain high print quality.
For information about how to set the paper quality, refer to "Paper Type" (P.260).
• When setting a non-standard paper size, you must register the paper size. For information
about registering paper sizes, refer to "Paper Size" (P.260).
For a description of how to make copies on non-standard size paper, refer to "Paper Supply (Selecting
the Paper to Use for Copying)" (P.55). For a description of how to print to non-standard size paper, refer
to the print driver’s online help.
Pull out the tray towards you until it
stops.
2
Remove any paper if loaded on the
tray.
3
While holding the grip, move the
inner paper guide lever to the back
of the tray.
4
While holding the grip, move the
right paper guide lever to the right
side of the tray.
Paper and Other Media
1
10
235
10 Paper and Other Media
5
Load and align the edge of the
paper against the front left edge of
the tray with the side to be copied or
printed on facing up.
Important • Do not load mixed paper types
into the tray. This can be the
cause of paper jams.
• Do not load paper exceeding
the maximum fill line. Doing so
might cause paper jams or
machine trouble.
6
Move the two paper guide levers
while holding their grips so that they
lightly contact the edges of the
paper.
Important • Exerting excessive pressure
when aligning the paper levers
against the edges of the paper
might cause paper jams.
• Make sure that the paper
guides fit flush against the
paper. If the paper guides are
not flush against the paper, the
device may not be able to auto
detect the paper size, or a
paper jam or other error could
result. In this case, reset the
paper guides and realign them.
7
Push the tray in gently until it comes
to a stop.
Note
Paper and Other Media
8
• Affix the paper size label to the
front of the paper tray.
After changing the paper size, set the paper type for the paper tray.
For information about how to set the paper type, refer to "Changing Paper Settings" (P.237).
10
236
Changing Paper Settings
Changing Paper Settings
The following describes how to change the paper size on Trays 1 to 4 and how to set
image quality processing by individual paper type.
Image quality best suited to the paper type can be obtained by setting the desired
image processing to particular paper types.
Note
• For custom paper 1 to 5, the user assigns any name to plain paper, bond paper, and
recycled paper.
For information about how to set names to custom paper 1 to 5, refer to "Custom Paper Name" (P.260).
For information about image quality processing for different paper types, refer to "Image Quality"
(P.262).
1
Press the <Log In/Out> button.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
<Log In/Out>
button
C
2
Enter the User ID with the numeric
keypad, and select [Confirm]
Note
• The default UserID value is
"11111". When using the
Authentication feature, a
password is required. The
default password value is "xadmin".
Select [System Settings].
4
Select [System Settings].
5
Select [Common Settings].
Paper and Other Media
3
10
237
10 Paper and Other Media
Paper and Other Media
6
Select [Paper Tray Attributes].
7
Select [Paper Type].
8
Select the paper tray whose paper
type setting is to be changed at
[Items], and select [Change
Settings].
9
Select the paper type to change,
and select [Save].
10
Make sure that the [Current Settings] at the [Items] you changed is the newly entered
value, and select [Close].
11
Select [Image Quality].
12
Select the paper type whose image
processing is to be changed at
[Items], and select [Change
Settings].
13
Select the image processing value
to change, and select [Save].
14
Make sure that the [Current Settings] at the [Items] you changed is the newly entered
value, and select [Close].
15
Select [Close] repeatedly until the [System Settings] screen is displayed.
16
Select [Exit] to exit the System Administration mode.
10
238
11 Setups
The machine has factory default (initial) settings, but you can customize the
system settings. To change the settings, enter System Administration mode,
and use the [System Settings] screen.
This chapter describes the features for changing settings that can be carried out
by the system administrator, and the procedures for doing so.
z
System Settings Procedure ......................................................................240
z
System Settings Menu List .......................................................................243
z
Entering Text ............................................................................................252
z
Common Settings .....................................................................................253
z
Copy Mode Settings .................................................................................275
z
Network Settings.......................................................................................286
z
Print Mode Settings ..................................................................................290
z
Scan Mode Settings..................................................................................295
z
Fax Mode Settings....................................................................................302
z
E-mail/iFax Settings..................................................................................314
z
Mailbox/Stored Document Settings ..........................................................320
z
Setup Menu ..............................................................................................323
z
System Administrator Settings..................................................................342
z
Login Setup/Auditron Administration ........................................................344
11 Setups
System Settings Procedure
To make or change the system settings, it is necessary to be in System Administration
mode.
This section describes the basic procedure for system settings. The following are the
steps in the system settings procedure.
Step 1 Entering System Administration Mode .........................................................................240
Step 2 Entering the System Administrator UserID and Password............................................240
Setups
Step 3 Selecting the Operation Mode from the System Administrator Menu ..........................240
Step 4 Selecting an Item from the [System Settings] Screen....................................................241
Step 5 Setting the Feature .........................................................................................................242
Step 6 Exiting System Administration Mode ...........................................................................242
11
Step 1 Entering System Administration Mode
1
Press the <Log In/Out> button.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
<Log In/Out>
button
C
Step 2 Entering the System Administrator UserID and Password
To enter System Administration mode, enter the system administrator UserID. If you
are using the authentication feature, a password may be required.
It is recommended to change the system administrator UserID and password immediately after installing
the machine. For information about the setting, refer to "System Administrator Settings" (P.342).
1
Enter the system administrator
UserID with the numeric keypad,
and select [Confirm].
Note
• The default UserID value is
"11111". When using the
Authentication feature, a
password is required. The
default password value is "xadmin".
Step 3 Selecting the Operation Mode from the System Administrator Menu
1
240
Select [System Settings].
System Settings Procedure
„User Mode
While still in System Administration mode, you can still carry out normal operations
such as copying and scanning.
Note
• To exit a mode entered from [User Mode], use the following procedure.
(1) Press the <Log In/Out> button.
(2) In the [Log In] screen, select [Cancel].
„System Settings
You can set or register the system settings.
Setups
Step 4 Selecting an Item from the [System Settings] Screen
In the [System Settings] screen, select an item.
For the items that can be selected in the system settings, refer to "System Settings Menu List" (P.243).
1
Select the item to be set.
System Settings
You can set or change the initial values.
„Common Settings
These settings relate to the machine itself.
For more information, refer to "Common Settings" (P.253).
„Copy Mode Settings
You can set the copy feature defaults, copy operation control, button indications, and so on.
For more information, refer to "Copy Mode Settings" (P.275).
„Network Settings
You can set the ports, protocols, and so on.
For the items that can be set, refer to "Network Settings" (P.286).
„Print Mode Settings
You can set the memory settings, print time operation, and so on.
For more information, refer to "Print Mode Settings" (P.290).
„Scan Mode Settings
You can set the scanner feature defaults, button indications, and so on.
For more information, refer to "Scan Mode Settings" (P.295).
„Fax Mode Settings
You can set the fax feature defaults, fax operation control, button indications, and so
on.
For more information, refer to "Fax Mode Settings" (P.302).
„E-mail/iFax Settings
You can set the e-mail and iFax feature defaults, address search, and so on.
For more information, refer to "E-mail/iFax Settings" (P.314).
241
11
11 Setups
„Mailbox/Stored Document Settings
You can set the settings relating to mailboxes.
For more information, refer to "Mailbox/Stored Document Settings" (P.320).
Setup Menu
You can create mailboxes, and create and delete fax short dialing codes.
For more information, refer to "Setup Menu" (P.323).
System Administrator Settings
Setups
11
You can set the system administrator ID and system administrator password for
entering System Administration mode.
For more information, refer to "System Administrator Settings" (P.342).
Login Setup/Auditron Administration
You can set restrictions on users using feature of the machine, or set restrictions on
individual users.
For more information, refer to "Login Setup/Auditron Administration" (P.344).
Step 5 Setting the Feature
1
Set any feature.
2
After setting the feature, select [Save].
Step 6 Exiting System Administration Mode
242
1
When the settings are completed,
select [Close] until the [System
Settings] screen appears.
2
Select [Exit].
System Settings Menu List
System Settings Menu List
The following table shows a list of the items that can be set. Note that the items
appearing depend on the configuration of the machine.
System Settings
„Common Settings
For more information, refer to "Common Settings" (P.253).
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Audio Tones
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Screen Defaults
z
z
z
z
Paper Tray Attributes
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Set Numbering
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Setups
Machine Clock/Timers
Date
Time
NTP Time Synchronization
z Connection to Time Server
z Connection Interval
z Time Server IP Address
Auto Clear
Auto Job Release
Auto Print
Auto Power Saver
11
Control Panel Select Tone
Control Panel Alert Tone
Machine Ready Tone
Copy Job Complete Tone
Non-Copy Job Complete Tone
Fault Tone
Alert Tone
Out of Paper Warning Tone
Low Toner Alert Tone
Line Monitor Volume
Ringing Volume
Stored Programming Tone
Auto Clear Alert Tone
Base Tone
All Services
Custom Buttons 1 to 3
Job Type on Job Status screen
Default Language
Custom Paper Name
Paper Type
Paper Size
Auto Paper by Output Color
Paper Tray Priority
Paper Type Priority
Image Quality
Tray 5 (Bypass) Paper Size Defaults
Auto Tray Switching
Offset Stacking (Center Output Tray)
Set Numbering - Text Effect
Set Numbering - Text Size
Set Numbering - Background Pattern
Set Numbering - Color
Set Numbering - Printing Density
Set Numbering - Text/Background Contrast
Set Numbering - Copy Job
Set Numbering - Client Print
243
11 Setups
Image Quality Adjustment
z
z
Reports
z
z
Setups
z
z
z
z
11
z
z
z
Maintenance
z
z
z
Other Settings
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Image Quality
z
Photo & Text Recognition
z
Output Color Recognition
z Photo Reproduction Level
z Photo Image Quality
z Color Copy Auto Exposure
z B/W Copy Auto Exposure
z Image Enhancement
Auto Gradation Adjustment
Job History Report
Activity Report
Transmission Report - Undelivered
Transmission Report - Cancelled
Mailbox Documents Report
Broadcast/Multi-Poll Report
Relay Broadcast Report
2 Side Report
Recipient on Activity Report
Initialize Hard Disk
Delete All Data
Software Options
Offset Stacking (Center Output Tray)
Offset Stacking (Finisher Tray)
Auto Job Promotion
Default Print Paper Size
Odd Page 2 Sided
Paper Size Settings
Millimetres/Inches
Keyboard Input Restriction
Operation of Up/Down Buttons
Display Consumables Screen
Overwrite Hard Disk
Data Encryption
Software Download
„Copy Mode Settings
For more information, refer to "Copy Mode Settings" (P.275).
Basic Copying Tab
z
z
z
z
z
z
Copy Defaults
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
244
Features Allocation
Paper Supply - 2nd Button
Paper Supply - 3rd Button
Paper Supply - 4th Button
Reduce/Enlarge - 3rd Button
Reduce/Enlarge - 4th Button
Paper Supply
Reduce/Enlarge
Output Color
Single Color
Dual Color - Source Color
Dual - Target Color (Target Area)
Dual - Target Color (Non-target Area)
Original Type
Original Type - Auto (Non-Black)
Original Type - Auto (Black)
Lighten/Darken
System Settings Menu List
Copy Defaults
z
(Continued from previous page)
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Copy Control
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Memory Full Procedure
Maximum Stored Pages
Auto Paper Off
Mixed Size Originals - Copy to Side 2
Fine-tune 100%
Auto Exposure (Text & Photo)
Auto Exposure (Text)
Text & Photo (Halftone) Originals
Original Type - Lightweight Originals
Annotation - Stamp Size
Annotation - Stamp Density
Stamp Position on Side 2
Date Position on Side 2
Page Number Position on Side 2
Original Size Defaults
-
Reduce/Enlarge Presets
-
Custom Colors
-
245
Setups
z
Contrast
Sharpness
Color Saturation
Auto Exposure
Color Balance - Yellow
Color Balance - Magenta
Color Balance - Cyan
Color Balance - Black
Color Shift
2 Sided
Mixed Size Originals
Border Erase - Top & Bottom
Border Erase - Left & Right
Center Erase
Margin Shift - Side 1
Margin Shift - Side 2
Image Rotation
Image Rotation Direction
Original Orientation
Set the default value for [Original
Orientation] in the [Scan Options] screen.
Output Destination
Annotation - Stamp Position
Annotation - Stamp Color
Annotation - Date Position
Annotation - Page Number - Style
Annotation - Page Number - Position
11
11 Setups
„Network Settings
For the items that can be set, refer to "Network Settings" (P.286).
For more details, refer to the Network Administrator Guide.
Port Settings
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Setups
z
z
z
z
11
z
z
z
z
z
z
Protocol Settings
z
z
z
z
z
z
Machine E-mail Address/Host Name
z
z
z
POP3 Server Settings
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
SMTP Server Settings
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Domain Settings
z
z
Remote Authentication Server
z
z
246
Parallel
USB
LPD Spool
NetWare
SMB Spool
IPP
EtherTalk
Salutation
Port9100
SNMP
FTP client
Receive E-mail
Send E-mail
Mail Notification Service
UPnP Discovery
Internet Service (HTTP)
SOAP
Ethernet settings
TCP/IP - Get IP Address
TCP/IP - IP Address
TCP/IP - Subnet Mask
TCP/IP - Gateway Address
TCP/IP - IP Filter
E-mail Address
Host name
Domain name
POP3 Server - Setup
POP3 Server - IP Address
POP3 Server - Server Name
POP3 Server - Port Number
POP3 Server - Check Interval
POP3 Server - Login Name
POP3 Server - Password
POP Password Encryption
SMTP Server - Setup
SMTP Server - IP Address
SMTP Server - Server Name
SMTP Server - Port Number
E-mail Send Authentication
SMTP AUTH - Login Name
SMTP AUTH - Password
Domain Filtering
to 51. Domains 1 to 50
Authentication System
Remote Authentication Server 1 through 5
z
Server - Server Setup
z
Server - IP Address
z
Server - Server Name
z
Server - Port Number
z
Server - Realm Name
System Settings Menu List
PKI (Public Key) Settings
z
HTTP - SSL/TLS Settings
z
HTTP - SSL/TLS Communications
z
HTTP - SSL/TLS Port Number
Other Settings
z
E-mail receive protocol
„Print Mode Settings
For more information, refer to "Print Mode Settings" (P.290).
Allocate Memory
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Other Settings
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Setups
z
PostScript Memory
HP-GL/2 Auto Layout Memory
Receiving Buffer - Parallel
Receiving Buffer - USB
Receiving Buffer - LPD Spool
Receiving Buffer - NetWare
Receiving Buffer - SMB Spool
Receiving Buffer - IPP Spool
Receiving Buffer - EtherTalk
Receiving Buffer - Port 9100
11
Print Area
Substitute Tray
Paper Attributes Mismatch
Unregistered Forms
Print ID
Banner Sheet
Banner Sheet Tray
PostScript Default Color
PostScript Paper Supply
PostScript Font Absence
PostScript Font Substitution
„Scan Mode Settings
For more information, refer to "Scan Mode Settings" (P.295).
Basic Scanning Tab
z
z
z
z
Scan Defaults
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Feature in 2nd Column
Reduce/Enlarge - 2nd Button
Reduce/Enlarge - 3rd Button
Reduce/Enlarge - 4th Button
Output Color
Original Type
File Format
Lighten/Darken
Contrast
Sharpness
Auto Exposure
Background Suppression
Color Space
Original Orientation
Scan Resolution
Mixed Size Originals
Border Erase
Border Erase - Top & Bottom
Border Erase - Left & Right
Center Erase
Image Compression
Scan-to-FTP/SMB Defaults
z
Transfer Protocol
Scan Size Defaults
z
Scan Size buttons 1 to 11
247
11 Setups
Output Size Defaults
z
Output Size buttons 1 to 8
Reduce/Enlarge Presets
z
Preset % 1 to 7
Other Settings
z
Scan Service
Memory Full Procedure
Maximum Stored Pages
Color Saturation
Auto Exposure Level
Background Suppression Level
Color Space
TIFF Format
Image Transfer Screen
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Setups
z
„Fax Mode Settings
11
For more information, refer to "Fax Mode Settings" (P.302).
Screen Defaults
z
z
z
Fax Defaults
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Fax Control
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
File Destination / Output Destination
z
z
248
Fax Screen Default
Address Book Default
Transmission Screen
Resolution
Original Type
Lighten / Darken
Mixed Size Originals
Communication Mode
Send Header
Transmission Report
Send/Read Status
iFax Profile
Send Header - Polling
Doc for Polling - Auto Delete
Rotate 90 degrees
Sender ID
Redial Attempt
Redial Interval
Transmission Interval
Batch Send
Manual Send/Receive Default
Auto Switch Attempts
Fax Receiving Mode
Border Limit
Auto Reduce on Receipt
Receiving Paper Size
2 Up On Receipt
2 Sided Printing
Border Erase - Top & Bottom
Border Erase - Left & Right
Reduction of 8.5 × 11"
original to A4
Pseudo-Photo Gradation Mode
Box Selector - Line Setup
Memory Full Procedure
Maximum Stored Pages
Mailbox Receive Display Priority 1 to 5
File
Destination
Line
Destination - Line Setup
Output Destination - Line Setup
Reduce/Enlarge Presets
z
R/E Preset 1 to 7
Scan Size Defaults
z
Scan size buttons 1 to 11
SetupFile
System Settings Menu List
Local Terminal Information
z
z
z
z
z
z
iFax Control
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Broadcast iFax Profile
Broadcast Communication Mode
Delivery Confirmation Method
Incoming iFax Print Options
Incoming iFax Output Destination
Fax Transfer from Address Book
Fax Transfer - Add Sender Header
Fax Transfer Maximum Data Size
Setups
z
Local Name
Company Logo
Machine Password
G3 Fax ID
G3 Dial Type
G3 Line Type
11
„E-mail/iFax Settings
For more information, refer to "E-mail/iFax Settings" (P.314).
E-mail Defaults
z
Subject
Address Search (Directory Service)
z
Directory Service (LDAP)
Primary Server
Primary Server Port Number
Secondary Server
Secondary Server Port Number
Login Name
Password
Search Root Entry DN
Scope of Search from Root Entry
Object Class of Search Target
Server Application
Attribute Type of Recipient Name
Attribute Type of Last Name
Attribute Type of First Name
Attribute Type of E-mail Address
Attribute Type of Custom Items 1 to 3
Attribute Name of Custom Items 1 to 3
Maximum Search Results
Search Time-Out
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Other Settings
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Maximum E-mail Size
Maximum Address Entries
Auto Print Error Mail
Response to Read Status (MDN)
Read Status (MDN)
Auto Print Delivery Confirmation Mail
Page size for Split Send
„Mailbox/Stored Document Settings
For more information, refer to "Mailbox/Stored Document Settings" (P.320).
Mailbox Settings
z
z
z
Stored Document Settings
z
z
z
z
Documents Retrieved By Client
iFax to iFax
iFax to E-mail
Document Expiry Date
Delete Charge Print Documents
Delete Secure Print Documents
Delete Sample Print Documents
249
11 Setups
Setup Menu
For more information, refer to "Setup Menu" (P.323).
Mailbox
z
z
z
z
z
z
Job Flow Sheets
z
z
Setups
z
z
z
z
11
z
z
Mailbox Name
Password
Check Password
Delete Documents After Retrieval
Delete Documents with Expiry Date
Link Job Flow Sheet to Mailbox
Name
Description
Send as Fax
Send as iFax
Send as E-mail
Transfer via FTP (1), Transfer via FTP (2)
Transfer via SMB (1), Transfer via SMB (2)
Print
Content Check
Address Book
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Address Type
Fax Number
Recipient Name
Index
Communication Mode
Resolution
Cover Note
Maximum Image Size
Delayed Start
Remote Mailbox
F Code
Relay Broadcast
iFax Profile
Last Name
First Name
Custom Item 1
Custom Item 2
Custom Item 3
Transfer Protocol
Server Name/IP address
Shared Name (SMB Only)
Save in
Login Name
Password
Port Number
Group Send
-
Comments
-
Paper Type
-
System Administrator Settings
For more information, refer to "System Administrator Settings" (P.342).
250
System Administrator Login ID
-
System Administrator Password
-
Maximum Login Attempts
-
System Settings Menu List
Login Setup/Auditron Administration
For more information, refer to "Login Setup/Auditron Administration" (P.344).
Create/Check User Accounts
z
z
z
z
z
z
Reset User Accounts
z
z
z
z
z
All User Accounts
All Color Access Settings
All Account Limits
Total Impressions
Print Meters
System Administrator Copy Meter
User Details Setup
Setups
z
UserID
User Name
Password
E-mail Address
Account Limit
z Color Access
z Account Limit
Reset Total Impressions
Reset Account
11
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
UserID Characters
Hide User ID
Account ID Characters
Hide Account ID (***)
Failed Access Log
Checking Authentication information
Store User Details
Charge Print Settings
z
Receive Control
Login Setup/Auditron Mode
z
Off
Local Machine Access
Network Access
z
Check User Details
Remote Access
z
Guest User
z
Guest Password
Auditron Mode
Mailbox Access
z
z
z
z
z
251
11 Setups
Entering Text
During operations, a screen sometimes appears for the entry of text. This section
describes how to enter such text.
Setups
In the text you can enter the following characters: numerals, letters, and symbols.
Item
11
252
Description
Entering letters and numerals
Select [Alphanumeric].
If you select [Shift], capital letters appear. To return to
lowercase, select [Shift] once more.
Entering symbols
Select [Symbol].
Entering a space
Select [Space].
Deleting characters
Select [Backspace]. This deletes characters one at a
time.
Common Settings
Common Settings
In [Common Settings], you can make settings relating to the machine itself. The
following are the places to reference for information about each item.
Machine Clock/Timers............................................................................................................. 253
Audio Tones ............................................................................................................................. 256
Screen Defaults ........................................................................................................................ 258
Paper Tray Attributes ............................................................................................................... 259
Setups
Auto Job Promotion ................................................................................................................. 270
Image Quality Adjustment ....................................................................................................... 264
Reports ..................................................................................................................................... 266
Maintenance ............................................................................................................................. 268
11
Other Settings........................................................................................................................... 269
1
In the [System Settings] screen,
select [System Settings].
For the method of displaying the [System
Settings] screen, refer to "System Settings
Procedure" (P.240).
2
Select [Common Settings].
3
Select the item to be set.
Machine Clock/Timers
You can set the clock time, or the timer interval until power saving or reset features take
effect.
1
Select [Machine Clock/Timers].
2
Select the item to be set or
changed, and select [Change
Settings].
Note
3
Select [
Note
4
• Select [ ] to display the
previous screen and select
[ ] to display the next screen.
], [
], or the numeric keypad to enter a numeric quantity.
• Depending on the item, entry with the numeric keypad may not always be possible.
Select [Save].
253
11 Setups
Date
Set the date in the in the system clock of the machine. The date set here is printed on
lists and reports.
1
Select [Date], and select [Change
Settings].
2
Select the date format.
3
Select Year/Month/Day.
Setups
Time
Set the time in the system clock of the machine, using 12-hour or 24-hour
representation.
The time set here is printed on lists and reports.
11
1
Select [Time], and select [Change
Settings].
2
Select the display format.
3
When [12-Hour Clock] is selected,
select [AM] or [PM].
4
Set the hours and minutes.
NTP Time Synchronization
You can get the time from a time server (NTP: Network Time Protocol), to synchronize
the machine to the time server time.
1
Select [NTP Time
Synchronization], and select
[Change Settings].
2
Select any item, and select
[Change Settings].
„Connection to Time Server
Select whether to connect to a time server. If you select [No], it is not possible to get
the time from a time server.
„Connection Interval
Select the time interval at which a connection is made to the time server.
Select an interval from 1 to 500 hours, in steps of one hour.
„Time Server IP Address
Set the IP address of the time server from which the time is obtained, using values 0 to
255.
Note
254
• Addresses 244 to 255.XXX.XXX.XXX and 127.XXX.XXX.XXX cannot be set.
Common Settings
Auto Clear
If a given time period elapses with no operation, the machine automatically returns to
the initial screen.
Set a period from 1 to 4 minutes, in intervals of 1 minute. In order not to set this, select
[No].
Note
• When using the Build Job function, the settings will be cleared after 1 minute, even if you set
the time for longer.
Select [Auto Clear], and select
[Change Settings].
2
Select [Off] or [On].
3
If you selected [On], set the time
interval.
Setups
1
11
Auto Job Release
Set the time that elapses when, during a copy or scan, an error (paper feed, original
jam, copy jam, etc.) occurs, until the current job is cleared, enabling the next job. At this
point, jobs that can be continued are limited to those that only use parts of the machine
not affected by the error.
Set the value in the range 4 to 99 minutes, in 1 minute increments. In order not to set
this, select [No].
1
Select [Auto Job Release], and
select [Change Settings].
2
Select [Off] or [On].
3
If you selected [On], set the time.
Auto Print
When a certain time has elapsed with no operation, a print job can be automatically
started. Set this time.
Set the value from 1 to 240 seconds, in one second steps. If you select [No], once the
machine is ready, printing can start immediately.
1
Select [Auto Print], and select
[Change Settings].
2
Select [Off] or [On].
3
If you selected [On], set the time.
Auto Power Saver
In power saving mode, there is a "low-power mode" and a "sleep mode," and when the
set time has elapsed, these modes are switched to in the following way, thus reducing
the power consumption.
Last operation on the machine J Low-power mode J Sleep mode
1
Select [Auto Power Saver], and
select [Change Settings].
2
Set low-power mode and sleep
mode.
255
11 Setups
„From Last Selection to Low Power Mode
Set the time to go from last operation to low-power mode.
Set the time from 1 to 240 minutes, in 1 minute increments.
Note
• It is not possible to disable low-power mode.
• Set the time [From Last Selection to Low Power Mode] not to exceed the time [From Last
Selection to Sleep Mode].
„From Last Selection to Sleep mode
Setups
Set the time to go from last operation to sleep mode from 1 to 240 minutes, in 1 minute
increments.
Audio Tones
11
Select whether or not to sound an alarm, for example when a job ends or there is a fault.
1
Select [Audio Tones].
2
Select the item to be set or
changed, and select [Change
Settings].
Note
• Select [ ] to display the
previous screen and select
[ ] to display the next screen.
3
Select the setting value.
4
Select [Save].
Control Panel Select Tone
Select the sound to be made when a button displayed on the screen is correctly
selected.
You can select the volume from [High], [Medium], and [Low]. To disable the sound,
select [Off].
Control Panel Alert Tone
Select the sound to be made when a button that cannot be selected is selected, or an
error occurs.
You can select the volume from [High], [Medium], and [Low]. To disable the sound,
select [Off].
Machine Ready Tone
Set the sound for when the machine is ready to copy or print, after powering on, for
example.
You can select the volume from [High], [Medium], and [Low]. To disable the sound,
select [Off].
Copy Job Complete Tone
Select the sound to be made when a copy completes normally.
You can select the volume from [High], [Medium], and [Low]. To disable the sound,
select [Off].
256
Common Settings
Non-Copy Job Complete Tone
Select the sound to be made when a job other than copying completes.
You can select the volume from [High], [Medium], and [Low]. To disable the sound,
select [Off].
Fault Tone
Select the sound to be made when there is an error termination.
You can select the volume from [High], [Medium], and [Low]. To disable the sound,
select [Off].
Select the sound to be made when a fault such as a paper jam occurs, and the fault is
left unattended to.
You can select the volume from [High], [Medium], and [Low]. To disable the sound,
select [Off].
Out of Paper Warning Tone
Select the sound to be made when there is no paper in the paper tray and the job is left
unattended to.
You can select the volume from [High], [Medium], and [Low]. To disable the sound,
select [Off].
Low Toner Alert Tone
Select the sound to be made when the drum toner cartridge is due to be replaced.
You can select the volume from [High], [Medium], and [Low]. To disable the sound,
select [Off].
Line Monitor Volume
You can relay the sound on the telephone circuit in the interval from dialing until the
connection is made through the speakers on the machine. This is convenient for using
FAX information services without using the telephone.
You can select the volume from [High], [Medium], and [Low]. To disable the sound,
select [Off].
Ringing Volume
Select the sound to be made when an incoming call arrives at the machine.
You can select the volume from [High], [Medium], and [Low]. To disable the sound,
select [Off].
Stored Programming Tone
Select the sound to be made while recording in job memory.
You can select the volume from [High], [Medium], and [Low].
Note
• It is not possible to disable this sound.
Auto Clear Alert Tone
Select the sound to be made when the automatic clear feature is enabled and it is 5
seconds before automatically returning to the initial screen.
You can select the volume from [High], [Medium], and [Low]. To disable the sound,
select [Off].
257
Setups
Alert Tone
11
11 Setups
Base Tone
For a button that toggles (changes setting each time it is pressed), set the sound to be
made when in the home position. In the machine this sound is made when the
<Interrupt> button is released.
You can select the volume from [High], [Medium], and [Low]. To disable the sound,
select [Off].
Screen Defaults
Setups
Set the initial screen display when the power is turned on.
11
1
Select [Screen Defaults].
2
Select the item to be set or
changed, and select [Change
Settings].
3
Set the setting value.
4
Select [Save].
All Services
Set the layout of buttons that appear in the [Menu] screen when the <All Services>
button on the control panel is pressed.
The layout of buttons shown on the [Button Layout on the Menu Screen] screen shows
the layout of buttons on the [Menu] screen.
Note
• It is not possible to assign the same feature to more than one button.
1
Select [All Services], and select
[Change Settings].
2
Select the button in the position
where you want to display a
feature.
Note
• Select [ ] to display the
previous screen and select [
3
Select [Features] or
[Supplementary Features].
4
Select the feature to be displayed.
] to display the next screen.
„Features
You can select a feature button. The feature buttons are the oval buttons in the [Menu]
screen.
If you select [Not Set], the selected button position will remain empty.
„Supplementary Features
You can select an auxiliary feature button. The auxiliary features appear in the [Menu]
screen as rectangular buttons.
If you select [Not Set], the selected button position will remain empty.
258
Common Settings
Custom Buttons 1 to 3
You can assign features to the custom buttons on the control panel: Custom 1 to
Custom 3.
To leave a feature unassigned, select [Not Set].
1
Select [Custom Button 1], and
select [Change Settings].
2
Select the feature to be assigned.
Note
Setups
• Select [ ] to display the
previous screen and select
[ ] to display the next screen.
Job Type on Job Status screen
Select the job types to be shown on the [Completion Status] screen of the [Job Status]
screen when the <Job Status> button on the control panel is pressed.
Select from [All], [Fax/Mail/Scanner], [Auto Transfer Jobs], and [Print].
Default Language
You can select the language displayed on the machine. Select [Japanese] or [English].
There are two ways of selecting the language: a method used from System
Administration mode, and a method for ordinary users to use.
z
Setting from System Administration mode
This sets the standard language when the machine is powered on, and it maintained
when powered off and on again.
z
Ordinary user setting
The language setting in [Language] in the [Menu] screen is lost when the machine is
powered off.
Important • When set to [English], it is only possible to enter ASCII characters.
Note
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
• If you select a language that is not installed, or select a language with use restrictions, the
display appears in Japanese.
Paper Tray Attributes
Set the items relating to the paper and trays, including the types of paper loaded in the
trays, precedence, and image processing settings for each paper.
1
Select [Paper Tray Attributes].
2
Select the item to be set.
3
Select the item to be set or
changed, and select [Change
Settings].
4
Set the setting value.
5
Select [Save].
259
11
11 Setups
Custom Paper Name
For user paper 1 to 5, plain paper, bond paper, and recycled paper only, you can set a
custom name. You can use letters, numerals, and symbols in the name, up to a
maximum of 24 characters.
For example, you can attach names giving the feature, such as "Color" for colored
paper, and "Covers" for bond paper.
For information about entering text, refer to "Entering Text" (P.252).
Setups
11
1
Select [Custom Paper Name].
2
Select the item to be set or
changed, and select [Change
Settings].
3
Enter the name.
Paper Type
Set the type of paper loaded in Trays 1 to 4, and Tray 5 (bypass).
For Trays 1 to 4 you can select 18 paper types, and user paper types 1 to 5.
In Tray 5 (bypass) you can select 15 paper types and user paper types 1 to 5.
1
Select [Paper Type].
2
Select the item to be set or
changed, and select [Change
Settings].
3
Select the type of paper.
Paper Size
Standard sized paper loaded into paper Trays 1 to 4 is automatically detected, but
when a nonstandard size is loaded, it is necessary to specify the width and height.
Important • Depending on the paper size, the guide lever may not fit, and this may cause paper jams or
other errors. Tray detection may also not be possible. In such cases, use Tray 5 (bypass).
1
Select [Paper Size].
2
Select the item to be set or
changed, and select [Change
Settings].
3
Select [Auto Size Detect] or
[Variable Size].
4
When [Variable Size] is selected,
set the numeric values using [ ],
[ ], [ ], and [ ].
„Auto Size Detect
Standard sized paper loaded in Trays 1 to 4 is automatically detected.
„Variable Size
When a nonstandard size is loaded, set the width (x-dimension) in the range 210 to 432
mm, and the height (y-dimension) in the range 148 to 297 mm, in 1-mm increments.
260
Common Settings
Auto Paper by Output Color
The automatically selected paper tray may be designated according to the output color
settings. In any mode other than the specified output color mode, the designated tray
will not be selected when the paper tray is set to auto. Choose from [All output colors],
[When Color is selected], or [When Black is selected].
Automatic tray selection means that a tray containing the appropriate paper is
automatically selected by the machine for copying or printing.
You can select paper trays 1 to 4. Tray 5 (manual feed) cannot be selected.
Select [Auto Paper by Output
Color].
2
Select the item to be set or
changed, and select [Change
Settings].
3
Select the color mode.
Setups
1
11
Paper Tray Priority
Set the paper tray priority sequence for automatic tray selection. Automatic tray
selection means that a tray containing the appropriate paper is automatically selected
by the machine for copying or printing.
You can select paper Trays 1 to 4. Tray 5 (bypass) cannot be selected.
1
Select [Paper Tray Priority].
2
Select [Change Settings].
3
Select any of numbers 1 to 4, to
assign a tray from Trays 1 to 4.
Note
• You cannot set the same
paper tray to different
positions in the sequence.
Paper Type Priority
Set the paper type priority sequence for automatic tray selection. Automatic tray
selection means that a tray containing the appropriate paper is automatically selected
by the machine for copying or printing.
You can set any of bond paper, plain paper, recycled paper, side 2 paper, heavy paper
F, coated paper F, heavy paper F(A), and user paper types 1 to 5.
The paper type setting takes precedence over the tray priority sequence.
If different paper types appear in the same priority sequence, the paper selection is
determined by tray priority sequence.
For information about the tray priority sequence, refer to "Paper Tray Priority" (P.261).
261
11 Setups
1
Select [Paper Type Priority].
2
Select the item to be set or
changed, and select [Change
Settings].
3
Select the priority sequence.
Image Quality
Setups
You can specify the image quality processing method for each of bond paper, plain
paper, recycled paper, side 2 paper, heavyweight paper 1, heavyweight paper
1(reverse side), heavyweight paper 2, heavy paper 2(reverse side), heavy paper F, and
user paper types 1 to 5.
When the machine is copying or printing, the type of paper set in [Paper Type], and the
image quality processing specified for that type of paper are used to control the image
quality.
11
1
Select [Image Quality].
2
Select the item to be set or
changed, and select [Change
Settings].
3
Select image quality processing.
4
Select [Save].
Refer to the following table for the items that can be set.
For information about paper characteristics and notes on use, refer to "Paper Type" (P.226).
Setting value
Meaning
Plain A
Image quality suited to paper for color printing.
Plain B
Image quality for paper for general purpose office use.
Plain C
Image quality suited to recycled paper and similar with 100% recycled
pulp or 70% and above recycled pulp.
Plain D
Image quality suited to using 100% recycled pulp consisting mainly of
newsprint.
Heavyweight 1A
Image quality suited to bond paper, paper of environmentally favorable
100% wood pulp, postcard stock, and so on.
Heavyweight 2A
Image quality suited to bond paper, paper using environmentally
favorable 100% wood pulp, envelopes, 100% recycled paper business
card stock, and so on.
Note
• Plain E, Plain F, Plain paper G, Heavyweight 1B, Heavyweight 1C, Heavyweight 1S,
Heavyweight 2B, Heavyweight 2C, Heavyweight 2D, and Heavyweight 2S are not supported
by the machine.
• Plain S is set by our customer engineer.
Tray 5 (Bypass) Paper Size Defaults
Set the paper sizes shown in the [Tray 5 (Bypass)] screen for [Paper Selection] when
copying with Tray 5 (bypass).
You can assign 11 paper sizes to Tray 5 standard size buttons 1 to 11.
If a nonstandard size paper is frequently used for copying, by setting this size, it is no
longer necessary to set the paper dimensions each time a copy is made. It is also
convenient to set the commonly used paper sizes toward the top.
262
Common Settings
1
Select [Tray 5 (Bypass) Paper Size
Defaults].
2
Select the item to be set or
changed, and select [Change
Settings].
3
Select the paper size.
Auto Tray Switching
1
Select [Auto Tray Switching].
2
Select [Change Settings].
3
Select the method of switching.
Setups
Set the method of auto tray switching.
11
„Enable during Auto Paper
When the paper selection is [Auto] only, the machine automatically selects a tray
containing appropriate paper.
„Always Enable
Regardless of which paper tray is selected, depending on circumstances, the machine
automatically selects a tray containing appropriate paper.
Set Numbering
Date Format
Set the format for printing dates in annotations and set numbering. This setting is
common to annotation and set numbering.
Set Numbering - Text Effect
You can set a text effect. When the text effect is set, and a copy made, invisible text is
embedded in the background. If the created copy is recopied, this embedded text
appears as [Embossed] or [White Cutout].
„Embossed
The text hidden in the background is printed as embossing. The text part of the text is
printed with the pattern set in [Set Numbering - Background Pattern].
„White cutout
The text hidden in the background is printed as white cutout. In the background other
than the text printed as white cutout, the pattern set in [Set Numbering - Background
Pattern] is printed.
263
11 Setups
„Off
There is no text effect.
Set Numbering - Text Size
Set the size of the text printed in set numbering.
You can select from three possibilities: 48 point, 64 point, and 80 point.
Set Numbering - Background Pattern
Set the background pattern to be used for the set numbering text effect.
Setups
11
You can select from eight patterns: wave, circle, stripes, chain, beam, diamond,
sunflower, and fan.
Set Numbering - Color
Set the color used for printing set numbering text.
You can select from three colors: black, magenta, and cyan.
Set Numbering - Printing Density
Set the density for printing the text in set numbering.
You can select from three levels from faint to dark.
Set Numbering - Text/Background Contrast
Set the text/background contrast for printing set numbering.
You can select from contrast levels 1 to 9. Set the text/background contrast after
checking the results of printing a [Text Effect Sample List].
For information about sample printing, refer to "Text Effect Sample List" (P.382).
Set Numbering - Copy Job
Set whether to force set numbering printing for copying.
Set Numbering - Client Print
Set whether to force set numbering printing for printing from a client computer.
Image Quality Adjustment
You can set the image quality and auto gradation adjustment settings.
264
1
Select [Image Quality Adjustment].
2
Select the item to be set.
3
Select the item to be set or
changed, and select [Change
Settings].
4
Set the setting value.
5
Select [Save].
Common Settings
Image Quality
You can select the image quality processing method when the machine is scanning an
original.
1
Select [Image Quality].
2
Select the item to be set or
changed, and select [Change
Settings].
Note
Setups
3
• Select [ ] to display the
previous screen and select
[ ] to display the next screen.
Set the setting value.
„Photo & Text Recognition
You can change the level at which the machine separates text from photos while
scanning the original, when copying with [Original Type] in the [Image Quality] screen
set to [Text & Photo].
Selecting [More Text] makes it easier for very fine print to be recognized as text.
Selecting [More Photo] makes it easier for newspaper and advertisement halftone
images to be recognized as photos.
„Output Color Recognition
In the [Basic Copying] screen, when copying with [Output Color] set to [Auto], you can
change the level at which the machine distinguishes monochrome and color images.
Selecting [More Black] makes originals more easily recognized as monochrome.
Selecting [More Color] makes originals more easily recognized as color.
„Photo Reproduction Level
When copying with [Original Type] in the [Image Quality] screen set to [Text & Photo],
you can adjust the color reproduction level in the areas determined by the machine to
be photos.
Selecting [More Text] emphasizes the dense parts of the image, yielding a bold copy
effect.
Selecting [More Photo] makes the gradation of the photo parts of the image softer.
„Photo Image Quality
[Photo Image Quality] is effective when copying with [Original Type] in the [Image
Quality] screen set to [Photo].
Selecting [Off] allows copying to proceed with no loss of speed.
Selecting [On] allows copying with an image quality more true to the original.
Note
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
• If you select image quality as the priority, there may be a drop in copying speed.
„Color Copy Auto Exposure
Set the method of auto exposure to be used when making color copies.
Set how the machine detects the density of and deletes the background color.
Select [Off] to sample a section of the original and detect the background color.
Select [On] to conduct a pre-scan, and sample the whole document to detect the
background color.
265
11
11 Setups
„B/W Copy Auto Exposure
Set the method of auto exposure for copying and scanning black and white (2-color)
documents.
Set how the machine detects the density of and deletes the background color.
Select [Off] to sample a section of the original and detect the background color.
Select [On] to conduct a pre-scan, and sample the whole document to detect the
background color.
„Image Enhancement
Setups
You can select whether or not to carry out image enhancement. If you select [On], copy
and fax data is smoothed, to give a smoother appearance.
Auto Gradation Adjustment
11
When the print image quality color gradation is misplaced, the gradation is adjusted. By
means of this adjustment, the print image quality of the machine can be maintained at
a constant level.
For information about procedures for auto gradation adjustment, refer to "Executing Auto Gradation
Adjustment" (P.424).
Note
1
• If despite regular auto gradation adjustment the color gradation is not properly corrected,
contact our Customer Support Center.
Select [Auto Gradation
Adjustment].
„Copy Job - Text
Adjusts the gradation for when copying text originals.
„Copy Job - Photo
This adjusts the gradation for copying originals such as photos.
„Print Job - Text
This adjusts the gradation for printing data such as text.
„Print Job - Photo
This adjusts the gradation for printing data such as photos.
Reports
These settings relate to printing reports.
1
Select [Reports].
2
Select the item to be set or
changed, and select [Change
Settings].
Note
3
266
• Select [ ] to display the
previous screen and select
[ ] to display the next screen.
Select the setting value.
Common Settings
4
Select [Save].
Job History Report
You can select whether or not to automatically print a [Job History Report] when a total
of 50 jobs have been processed. All jobs are listed on the automatically printed report.
Activity Report
You can select whether or not to automatically print an [Activity Report] when a total of
100 communications results have been obtained.
Setups
Transmission Report - Undelivered
You can select whether or not to automatically print a [Transmission Report Undelivered].
11
Transmission Report - Cancelled
You can select whether or not to automatically print a [Transmission Report Cancelled].
Mailbox Documents Report
You can select whether or not to automatically print a [Mailbox Documents Report].
Broadcast/Multi-Poll Report
You can select whether or not to automatically print a [Broadcast Multi-Poll Report].
Relay Broadcast Report
You can select whether or not to automatically print a [Relay Broadcast Report].
„Off
Does not print automatically.
„Send to Relay Station
Send to the relay station specified by the machine
„Print at Local Station
Print on the machine.
„Send to Relay Station and Print at Local Station
Send to the relay station specified by the machine, and also print on the machine.
2 Side Report
When printing a report/list, select whether to print 1 sided or 2 sided.
Note
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
Recipient on Activity Report
You can specify how the information on the other party is shown when printing an
[Recipient on Activity Report].
„First 40 characters
Show the first 40 characters.
267
11 Setups
„Last 40 characters
Show the last 40 characters.
Maintenance
You can initialize the hard disk or delete data recorded in the machine.
Setups
11
1
Select [Maintenance].
2
Select the item to be carried out.
Initialize Hard Disk
This initializes the hard disk.
The data erased by the formatting includes supplementary fonts, HP-GL/2 form, ART
IV user-defined data, and SMB folders.
Note
• Some does not appear for some models.
• The secure print document log is not erased.
1
Select [Initialize Hard Disk].
2
Select the partition to be
reformatted, and select [Start].
3
Select [Yes].
4
When reformatting completes
successfully, the message on the
screen on the right appears; select
[Confirm].
Delete All Data
This deletes all data recorded in the machine. This includes all user settings, and data
recorded automatically by the system (job history and so on).
Important • Once data is deleted, it cannot be recovered.
• If you select the [Cancel] that appears on the screen during the deletion process, the
remainder of the deletion process is canceled. Data deleted before [Cancel] was pressed
cannot be recovered.
• When the data security kit is installed, to carry out a more thorough deletion of data, from
one to two hours is required.
268
Common Settings
Select [Delete All Data].
2
Select [Start].
3
Select [Yes].
4
While deleting all data, the
message screen on the right
appears. By pressing [Cancel], you
can cancel the deletion of all data.
5
When the deletion of all data completes successfully, the message screen on the right
appears.
6
Power the unit off and on again.
Setups
1
11
Software Options
This feature is for customer engineer use. Contact our Customer Support Center.
Other Settings
These are other settings relating to the machine itself.
1
Select [Other Settings].
2
Select the item to be set or
changed, and select [Change
Settings].
Note
• Select [ ] to display the
previous screen and select
[ ] to display the next screen.
3
Select the setting value.
4
Select [Save].
Offset Stacking (Center Output Tray)
Offset stacking means that the paper is output in different positions, to the front or rear
of the machine. Set the operation of this offset feature.
Note
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
„None
No offset output.
269
11 Setups
„Offset per set
Output paper in the number of copy sets being made.
„Offset per job
Output paper with each job offset.
Offset Stacking (Finisher Tray)
Set the offset feature for the finisher tray.
For information about setting items, refer to "Offset Stacking (Center Output Tray)" (P.269).
Setups
11
Note
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
Auto Job Promotion
If the machine is unable to start an operation for any reason, (for example if there is no
paper in the tray at the start of a copy or print operation), then select whether to allow
other jobs that can be started to automatically bypass the job.
Note
• Stored documents such as secure prints and sample prints are excluded from bypassing
permission.
1
Select [Change Settings].
2
Select [Disabled] or [Enabled].
3
Select [Save].
Default Print Paper Size
Set the paper size normally used when printing a report/list.
You can select from two sizes: A4, or 8.5 × 11".
Odd Page 2 Sided
When 2 sided printing is specified for an original with an odd number of pages, the
paper-feed system treats those sheets printed on both sides differently from those
printed on one side only.
Since odd-numbered pages are printed on the reverse side of the paper, sheets printed
on both sides are ejected to the tray the opposite way up from sheets printed on only
one side.
For example, when printing on punched forms, or stock with the front and rear sides of
different colors, to prevent the printing from being back to front, you can set forced 2
sided printing.
„Off
Do not treat as 2 sided.
„On
For a page printed on one side only, a blank page is added, and treated by the system
as an even-numbered page, thus being handled as in 2 sided printing.
Note
270
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
Common Settings
Paper Size Settings
Set the paper sizes for standard size originals and for automatic paper detection.
You can select from five possibilities: A/B series (8 × 13"), A/B series, A/B series (8K/
16K), A/B series (8×13"/8×14"), and Inch Series.
Refer to the following table for the combinations of sizes that can be detected
automatically.
„Original Detection
A/B series (8K/16K)
A/B series (8×13"/8×14")
Inch series
A/B series (8x13")
A/B series
A/B series (8K/16K)
A/B series (8×13"/8×14")
Inch series
Size/orientation
Document feeder
A/B series
Document glass
A/B series (8×13")
Original position
A6
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
A5
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
A5
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
A4
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
A4
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
A3
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
B6
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
B6
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
B5
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
B5
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
B4
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
5.5 × 8.5
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
5.5 × 8.5
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
7.25 × 10.5
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
8 × 10
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
8 × 10
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
8.5 × 11
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
8.5 × 11
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
8.5 × 13
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
8.5 × 14
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
11 × 15
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
11 × 17
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
16K
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
16K
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
8K
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Postcard
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Postcard
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No. 3 standard
envelopes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Setups
The following are the sizes that can be detected automatically when the document is
placed on the document glass or in the document feeder.
11
271
11 Setups
„Copy Paper Detection
When paper is loaded into Trays 1 to 4, Tray 5 (bypass), and high capacity trays 3 and
4, the sizes that can be automatically detected are as follows.
Loading
position
Trays 1 to 4
A/B series (8×13")
A/B series
A/B series (8K/16K)
A/B series (8×13"/8×14")
Inch series
A/B series (8×13")
A/B series
A/B series (8K/16K)
A/B series (8×13"/8×14")
Inch series
A/B series (8×13")
A/B series
A/B series (8K/16K)
A/B series (8×13"/8×14")
Inch series
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
A5
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
A5
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
A4
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
A4
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
A3
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
B6
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
B6
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
B5
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
B5
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
B4
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
5.5 × 8.5
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
5.5 × 8.5
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
7.25 × 10.5
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
8 × 10
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
8 × 10
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
8.5 × 11
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
8.5 × 11
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
8.5 × 13
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
8.5 × 14
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
11 × 15
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
11 × 17
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
16K
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
16K
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
8K
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Postcard
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
Return postcard
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No. 3 standard
envelopes
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
Setups
A6
Size/orientation
11
272
High capacity trays
3 and 4
Tray 5 (bypass)
Common Settings
Millimetres/Inches
Select whether dimensions on the screen are shown in millimeters or inches.
Keyboard Input Restriction
Select whether to restrict the display of the virtual keyboard on the machine. To prevent
characters being garbled when switched from one character set to another, you can
restrict the input to ASCII characters only. If you select [On (Standard ASCII only)], the
displayed keyboard shows ASCII characters only.
Operation of Up/Down Buttons
„Disable Fast Scrolling
11
Holding down the scroll buttons does not scroll.
„Enable Fast Scrolling
Holding down the scroll buttons causes continuous scrolling.
Display Consumables Screen
Set whether the machine displays the parts status when parts need to be replaced.
„Off
Do not display the consumable status screen.
„When Power is switched on
Status is displayed at startup.
„When Auto Clear is activated
Status displayed when auto clear* is executed.
Overwrite Hard Disk
Select whether or not to carry out hard disk overwrite erasing. If so, you can select
whether to overwrite once or three times.
After deleting data from the hard disk, the area on which the data was stored is
overwritten. This prevents unauthorized retrieval or restoration of the data recorded on
the hard disk. This applies to copy source, and other information stored temporarily by
the system.
Important • If the machine is powered off during the overwriting operation, unfinished files may remain
on the hard disk.
• The data is erased by overwriting once, but overwriting three times makes it even more
definite that the data cannot be recovered. It does, however, take longer.
• During the overwriting process, processing of normal operations may be slowed down.
Note
Setups
Select whether or not there is a continuous scrolling effect when the scroll buttons are
held down.
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
For information about how to check the status during the overwriting process, refer to "Overwrite Hard
Disk" (P.371).
273
11 Setups
Data Encryption
Select whether to encrypt the data recorded on the hard disk of the machine.
By setting data encryption, when data is written to the hard disk it is automatically
encrypted. The encryption prevents unauthorized access to the stored data. When
encryption is active, set the encryption key.
Important • Encrypted data cannot be recovered in the event of a problem with the hard disk.
Setups
1
Select [Data Encryption].
2
Select [On].
3
Select [Keyboard], and enter a 12character encryption key.
Note
11
• The default value for the
encryption key is
"111111111111" (12
characters).
4
Select [Save].
5
Using the same procedure, enter the same encryption key once more.
Note for restoring the encrypted data
The encrypted data cannot be restored in the following cases:
z
Hard disk failure
z
The encryption key is forgotten
z
When [Service Rep. Restricted Operation] is set to [On], and the system
administrator's User ID and password is forgotten
Starting use of the data encryption feature and changing the settings
When data encryption is started or ended, and when the encryption key is changed, the
machine must be restarted. The corresponding recording area (the hard disk is
reformatted when restarting. At this point the previous data is not guaranteed.
The recording area stores the following data.
- Spooled print data
- Secure print, sample print, and similar print data
- Forms for the form overlay feature
- Mailbox and job flow sheet settings (box name, passwords. etc)
- Documents in mailbox
Important • Be sure to save all necessary settings and documents before starting to use the data
encryption feature or changing the settings.
Service Rep. Restricted Operation
Select whether to allow our customer engineer to perform [Overwrite Hard Disk] and
[Data Encryption] operation, or to change the system administrator's User ID and
password.
Important • When [On] is selected, make sure not to forget the system administrator's User ID and
password. If this happens, the machine must be reset to the factory defaults. Contact our
Customer Support Center.
Note
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
Software Download
This feature is for customer engineer use. Contact our Customer Support Center.
274
Copy Mode Settings
Copy Mode Settings
In [Copy Mode Settings], you make settings relating to the copy feature. The following
are the places to reference for information about each item.
Basic Copying Tab ................................................................................................................... 275
Copy Defaults........................................................................................................................... 277
Copy Control ............................................................................................................................ 281
Original Size Defaults .............................................................................................................. 284
Setups
Reduce/Enlarge Presets ............................................................................................................ 284
Custom Colors.......................................................................................................................... 285
1
11
In the [System Settings] screen,
select [System Settings].
For the method of displaying the [System
Settings] screen, refer to "System Settings
Procedure" (P.240).
2
Select [Copy Mode Settings].
3
Select the item to be set.
Basic Copying Tab
You can change the tray and magnification settings appearing in the [Basic Copying
Tab] screen. By setting most commonly used tray and magnification settings, you can
reduce the number of selection operations for making a copy.
1
Select [Basic Copying Tab].
2
Select the item to be set or
changed, and select [Change
Settings].
Note
• Select [ ] to display the
previous screen and select
[ ] to display the next screen.
3
Select the setting value.
4
Select [Save].
275
11 Setups
Features Allocation
You can set the features that appear in the [Basic Copying Tab] screen, in the third and
fourth columns from the left. By setting the most commonly used features, you reduce
the need to use operations in other tabs.
Setups
1
Select [Features Allocation], and
select [Change Settings].
2
Select the features to be displayed.
3
From the buttons appearing on the
right, select the position for which you want to make a setting.
Note
11
• The position of the buttons on the right of the screen shows the position of the buttons in the
[Basic Copying Tab] screen.
„5 Features
The [Output Color], [Reduce/Enlarge], [Paper Supply], [2 Sided], and [Copy Output/
Stapling] features appear. Note that it is not possible to change the displayed features
or their layout.
„6 Features
You can set the features appearing in the fourth column from the left of the [Basic
Copying Tab] screen. You can set up to three features.
Note
• It is not possible to select [Output Color], [Reduce/Enlarge], or [Paper Supply].
„8 Features
You can set the features appearing in the third and fourth columns from the left of the
[Basic Copying Tab] screen. You can set up to five features. However, the [Output
Color] at the top position in the third column is fixed.
Note
4
Select the feature to be displayed,
and select [Save].
Note
5
• It is not possible to select [Output Color], [Reduce/Enlarge], and [Paper Selection].
• Select [ ] to display the
previous screen and select
[ ] to display the next screen.
Repeat steps 3 and 4 as required.
Paper Supply - 2nd Button
For the five feature buttons appearing in [Paper Supply] in the [Basic Copying Tab]
screen, you can set the second paper tray from the top. You can select from Trays 1 to
4, and Tray 5 (bypass).
Paper Supply - 3rd Button
For the five feature buttons appearing in [Paper Supply] in the [Basic Copying Tab]
screen, you can set the third paper tray from the top. You can select from Trays 1 to 4,
and Tray 5 (bypass).
Paper Supply - 4th Button
For the five feature buttons appearing in [Paper Supply] in the [Basic Copying Tab]
screen, you can set the fourth paper tray from the top. You can select from Trays 1 to
4, and Tray 5 (bypass).
276
Copy Mode Settings
Reduce/Enlarge - 3rd Button
For the five feature buttons appearing in [Reduce/Enlarge] in the [Basic Copying Tab]
screen, you can set the magnification for the third row from the top.
You can select the magnification from the registered R/E Preset buttons.
For information about R/E Preset buttons, refer to "Reduce/Enlarge Presets" (P.284).
Note
• When the [5 Features] setting is made in [Features Allocation], for [Reduce/Enlarge] in the
[Basic Copying Tab] screen, the five feature buttons do not appear.
Reduce/Enlarge - 4th Button
You can select the magnification from the registered R/E Preset buttons.
For information about R/E Preset buttons, refer to "Reduce/Enlarge Presets" (P.284).
Note
• When the [5 Features] setting is made in [Features Allocation], for [Reduce/Enlarge] in the
[Basic Copying Tab] screen, the five feature buttons do not appear.
Copy Defaults
This sets the default settings of copy feature settings. When the power is turned on or
the machine returns from a power-saving state, or the <Clear All> button is pressed,
these default settings take effect. By setting the defaults to commonly used features,
you can reduce the number of setting operations required in use.
1
Select [Copy Defaults].
2
Select the item to be set or
changed, and select [Change
Settings].
Note
• Select [ ] to display the
previous screen and select
[ ] to display the next screen.
3
Select the setting value.
4
Select [Save].
Paper Supply
Set the default value for [Paper Supply] in the [Basic Copying] screen.
When the default value of [Reduce/Enlarge] is set to [Auto %], for [Paper Supply] it is
not possible to set [Auto].
Reduce/Enlarge
Set the default value for [Reduce/Enlarge] in the [Basic Copying Tab] screen.
Select the magnification from the seven buttons registered as R/E Preset buttons,
[100%], and [Auto %], a total of nine possibilities.
When the default setting for [Paper Supply] is [Auto], for [Reduce/Enlarge] it is not
possible to set [Auto %].
For information about R/E Preset buttons, refer to "Reduce/Enlarge Presets" (P.284).
277
Setups
For the five feature buttons appearing in [Reduce/Enlarge] in the [Basic Copying Tab]
screen, you can set the magnification for the fourth row from the top.
11
11 Setups
Output Color
Set the default value for [Output Color] in the [Basic Copying Tab] screen.
When [No Default] is selected, in the [Basic Copying Tab] screen, select the color mode
before starting to copy.
Single Color
Set the default value for [Output Color]>[More...]>[Single Color] in the [Basic Copying
Tab] screen. You can select from six preset colors and six custom colors.
For information about custom colors, refer to "Custom Colors" (P.285).
Setups
Dual Color - Source Color
Set the default value for [Source Color] that appears when [Output
Color]>[More...]>[Dual Color] is selected in the [Basic Copying Tab] screen.
11
After selecting [Color Selection], you can select from six colors.
Dual - Target Color (Target Area)
Set the default value for [Copy Color for Target Area] that appears when [Output
Color]>[More...]>[Dual Color] is selected in the [Basic Copying Tab] screen. You can
select from seven preset colors and six custom colors.
For information about custom colors, refer to "Custom Colors" (P.285).
Dual - Target Color (Non-target Area)
Set the default value for [Dual - Color (Non-target Area)] that appears when [Output
Color]>[More...]>[Dual Color] is selected in the [Basic Copying Tab] screen. You can
select from seven preset colors and six custom colors.
For information about custom colors, refer to "Custom Colors" (P.285).
Original Type
Set the default value for [Original Type] in the [Image Quality] screen.
Original Type - Auto (Non-Black)
Set the default value for [Original Type] in the [Image Quality] screen.
This is valid when [Auto] or [Full Color] is selected for [Output Color] in the [Basic
Copying Tab] screen.
Original Type - Auto (Black)
Set the default value for [Original Type] in the [Image Quality] screen.
This is valid when [Black] is selected for [Output Color] in the [Basic Copying Tab]
screen.
Lighten/Darken
Set the default value for [Lighten/Darken/Contrast] > [Lighten/Darken] in the [Image
Quality] screen.
Contrast
Set the default value for [Lighten/Darken/Contrast] > [Contrast] in the [Image Quality]
screen.
Sharpness
Set the default value for [Sharpness/Color Saturation] > [Sharpness] in the [Image
Quality] screen.
278
Copy Mode Settings
Color Saturation
Set the default value for [Sharpness/Color Saturation] > [Saturation] in the [Image
Quality] screen.
Auto Exposure
Set the default value for [Auto Exposure] in the [Image Quality] screen.
[Auto Exposure] is valid when [Original Type] is set to [Text & Photo], [Text], or [Map].
Color Balance - Yellow
You can set each of the [Low Density], [Medium Density], and [High Density] values for
yellow.
Color Balance - Magenta
Set the default value for the [Color Balance] density levels in the [Image Quality]
screen.
You can set each of the [Low Density], [Medium Density], and [High Density] values for
magenta.
Color Balance - Cyan
Set the default value for the [Color Balance] density levels in the [Image Quality]
screen.
You can set each of the [Low Density], [Medium Density], and [High Density] values for
cyan.
Color Balance - Black
Set the default value for the [Color Balance] density levels in the [Image Quality]
screen.
You can set each of the [Low Density], [Medium Density], and [High Density] values for
black.
Color Shift
Set the default value for [Color Shift] in the [Image Quality] screen.
2 Sided
Set the default value for [2 Sided] in the [Scan Options] screen.
Note
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
Mixed Size Originals
Set the default value for [Mixed Size Originals] in the [Scan Options] screen.
Border Erase - Top & Bottom
Set the default value for the amount of border erased from the original in the top and
bottom directions in [Border Erase] in the [Scan Options] screen. Set the value from 0
to 50 mm in 1-mm steps.
279
Setups
Set the default value for the [Color Balance] density levels in the [Image Quality]
screen.
11
11 Setups
Border Erase - Left & Right
Set the default value for the amount of border erased from the original in the left and
right directions in [Border Erase] in the [Scan Options] screen. Set the value from 0 to
50 mm in 1-mm steps.
Center Erase
Set the default value for the center erase amount of the original in [Border Erase] in the
[Scan Options] screen.
Set the value from 0 to 50 mm in 1-mm steps.
Setups
Margin Shift - Side 1
11
Margin Shift - Side 2
Set the default value for [Margin Shift] > [Side 1] in the [Scan Options] screen.
Set the default value for [Margin Shift] > [Side 2] in the [Scan Options] screen.
Image Rotation
Set the default value for [Image Rotation] in the [Scan Options] screen.
Image Rotation Direction
Set the default value for [Image Rotation Direction] when [Image Rotation] in the [Scan
Options] screen is set to [Always On] or [On during Auto].
The [Auto] item can be selected when the finisher is installed.
Note
• When the finisher is installed, [Auto] is the default value.
Original Orientation
Set the default value for [Original Orientation] in the [Scan Options] screen.
Output Destination
Set the default value for copy or print destination.
Note
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
Annotation - Stamp Position
Set the default value for [Position] displayed when [Annotation] > [Stamp] is selected
in the [Output Format] screen.
Annotation - Stamp Color
Set the default value for [Color] displayed when [Annotation] > [Stamp] is selected in
the [Output Format] screen.
Annotation - Date Position
Set the default value for [Position] displayed when [Annotation] > [Date] is selected in
the [Output Format] screen.
Annotation - Page Number - Style
Set the default value for [Style] displayed when [Annotation] > [Page Number] is
selected in the [Output Format] screen.
280
Copy Mode Settings
Annotation - Page Number - Position
Set the default value for [Position] displayed when [Annotation] > [Page Number] is
selected in the [Output Format] screen.
Sample Set
Set the default value for [Sample Set] in the [Job Assembly] screen.
Setups
Copy Control
These settings relate to copy operation control.
1
Select [Copy Control].
2
Select the item to be set or
changed, and select [Change
Settings].
Note
11
• Select [ ] to display the
previous screen and select
[ ] to display the next screen.
3
Select the setting value.
4
Select [Save].
Memory Full Procedure
While scanning an original, if there is insufficient hard disk space, a screen appears,
asking how the partly stored data should be handled. Once a certain time has elapsed
with the confirmation screen displayed, the subsequent processing is determined by
these settings.
You can set the time until memory overflow handling is carried out. For more information, refer to
"Auto Job Release" (P.255).
„Cancel Job
The stored data is discarded.
„Run Job
The read-in data is treated as valid, and the part of the original read in is copied.
Maximum Stored Pages
Set the maximum number of stored pages of a copy original. You can set a number
from 1 to 999 pages.
Auto Paper Off
Select the tray used when [Paper Supply] > [Auto] in the [Basic Copying Tab] screen is
canceled (the tray used when in the [Basic Copying Tab] screen [Paper Supply], [Auto]
is selected, and for [Reduce/Enlarge], [Auto %] or [Independent X-Y %] is selected).
Mixed Size Originals - Copy to Side 2
When making 2 sided copies of mixed originals, set what happens when the paper size
is automatically selected.
When side 1 and side 2 are different sizes and the back side is copied onto the same
sheet, parts of the back image may be cut off.
281
11 Setups
„Off (Copy on New Sheet)
Side 2 will be copied onto the front of a new sheet.
„On
Side 2 is copied onto the back of the specified sheet.
Fine-tune 100%
Setups
You can fine tune magnification when copying at 100% (actual size). The set value is
applied when [Reduce/Enlarge] or [R/E Presets] on the [Basic Copying] screen is set
to 100%.
Set the height and width ratios within the range of 98 to 102% in 0.1% increments.
Important • This feature is only applied when making copies on the document glass. This is not applied
when using [Zoom], [Independent X-Y%], or when [R/E Preset] is set to 100%.
11
Note
• Even if adjustments are made here, the magnification is still displayed as [100%].
1
Select [Fine Tune 100%], and
select [Change Settings].
2
Enter a ratio using [
and [ ].
], [
],[
],
Auto Exposure (Text & Photo)
Set the auto exposure level for color copying. This setting is valid when [Text & Photo]
is selected for [Original Type] in the [Image Quality] screen.
The larger the value, the stronger the effect of removing background noise.
Auto Exposure (Text)
Set the auto exposure level for color copying. This setting is valid when [Text] is
selected for [Original Type] in the [Image Quality] screen.
The larger the value, the stronger the effect of removing background noise.
Text & Photo (Halftone) Originals
Set the type of original when [Text & Photo] > [Halftone] is selected for [Original Type]
in the [Image Quality] screen.
„Normal
Copy with standard image quality.
„Inkjet Originals
Select when copying an original printed with an inkjet printer. This improves the
recognition of inkjet colors.
„Highlighted Originals
Select when copying an original marked with a fluorescent pen. This improves the
recognition of the fluorescent pen colors.
Original Type - Lightweight Originals
When [Text] is selected for [Original Type] in the [Image Quality] screen, set whether
to display a special original (original on thin paper).
282
Copy Mode Settings
Annotation - Stamp Size
Set the size of stamp printed in the annotation.
You can select from three point sizes: 32 point, 48 point, and 64 point.
Annotation - Stamp Density
Set the translucency of the stamp printed in the annotation.
You can select from three translucency values: 0% (solid), 25%, and 50%. The 0%
value represents no translucency.
Note
• With [0%], if the stamp is over text, the text may no longer be readable.
Setups
Stamp Position on Side 2
When an annotation stamp is specified for 2 sided copying, set where to place the
stamp printed on the reverse side.
11
„Opposite to Side 1
Print in a position symmetrically opposite to the front side.
„Same as Side 1
Print in the same position as the front side.
Date Position on Side 2
When an annotation date is specified for 2 sided copying, set where to place the date
printed on the reverse side.
„Opposite to Side 1
Print in a position symmetrically opposite to the front side.
„Same as Side 1
Print in the same position as the front side.
Page Number Position on Side 2
When an annotation page is specified for 2 sided copying, set where to place the page
printed on the reverse side.
„Opposite to Side 1
Print in a position symmetrically opposite to the front side.
„Same as Side 1
Print in the same position as the front side.
283
11 Setups
Original Size Defaults
Set the original sizes that appear in [Original Size] in the [Scan Options] screen.
An original size is assigned to each of the eleven buttons other than [Auto Size Detect].
When frequently copying nonstandard size originals, by presetting a nonstandard size,
it is not necessary to enter the original size each time a copy is made.
Note that to set the nonstandard size, with [Variable Size] the width is set from 15 to
432 mm, and the height from 15 to 297 mm, in 1 mm increments.
Setups
1
Select [Original Size Defaults].
2
Select the item to be set or
changed, and select [Change
Settings].
11
Note
• Select [ ] to display the
previous screen and select
[ ] to display the next screen.
3
Select the setting value.
4
Select [Save].
„A/B Series Size
You can select from ten A and B series sizes.
„Inch Size
You can select from twelve inch series sizes.
„Others
You can select from thirteen other sizes.
„Variable Size
You can enter any size. Set the width from 15 to 432 mm, and the height from 15 to 297
mm, in 1 mm increments.
Reduce/Enlarge Presets
Set the magnifications shown in [Preset %], in [Reduce/Enlarge] in the [Basic Copying
Tab] screen.
You can assign any magnification to each of the R/E Preset buttons 1 to 7.
1
Select [Reduce/Enlarge Presets].
2
Select the item to be set or
changed, and select [Change
Settings].
Note
284
• Select [ ] to display the
previous screen and select
[ ] to display the next screen.
3
Select the setting value.
4
Select [Save].
Copy Mode Settings
Custom Colors
Set the custom colors used for [Output Color] > [Single Color] and [Dual Color].
To each of custom color buttons 1 to 6, you can assign custom colors with yellow (0 to
100), magenta (0 to 100), and cyan (0 to 100).
1
Select [Custom Colors].
2
Select the item to be set or
changed, and select [Change
Settings].
3
4
• Select [ ] to display the
previous screen and select
[ ] to display the next screen.
Adjust with [
Note
Setups
Note
] and [
].
11
• Adjust so that the total of
yellow, magenta, and cyan
does not exceed 240%.
Select [Save].
285
11 Setups
Network Settings
In [Network Settings], set the type of interface through which the machine is connected
to the client in [Port Settings], and the parameters required for communications in
[Protocol Settings].
For information about network settings, refer to the Network Administrator Guide.
When using CentreWare Internet Services, more detailed settings are possible. For more details, refer to
"CentreWare Internet Services" (P.212), and refer to the Network Administrator Guide.
Setups
The following are the places to reference for information about each setting.
Port Settings ..............................................................................................................................286
Protocol Settings .......................................................................................................................287
11
Machine E-mail Address/Host Name .......................................................................................287
POP3 Server Settings ................................................................................................................287
SMTP Server Settings...............................................................................................................287
Domain Settings........................................................................................................................287
Remote Authentication Server ..................................................................................................288
Other Settings............................................................................................................................289
1
In the [System Settings] screen,
select [System Settings].
For the method of displaying the [System
Settings] screen, refer to "System Settings
Procedure" (P.240).
2
Select [Network Settings].
3
Select the feature to be set.
Port Settings
Set the interface by which the machine is connected to the client. In [Port Settings], you
can set the following items.
For information about port settings, refer to the Network Administrator Guide.
286
1. Parallel
7. EtherTalk
13. Send E-mail
2. USB
8. Salutation
14. Mail Notice Service
3. LPD
9. Port9100
15. UPnP Discovery
4. NetWare
10. SNMP
16. Internet Services (HTTP)
5. SMB
11. FTP Client
17. SOAP
6. IPP
12. Receive E-mail
Network Settings
Protocol Settings
Set the parameters required for communications. In [Protocol Settings], you can set the
following items.
For information about protocol settings, refer to the Network Administrators Guide.
1. Ethernet Settings
4. TCP/IP - Subnet Mask
2. TCP/IP - Get IP Address
5. TCP/IP - Gateway Address
3. TCP/IP - IP Address
6. TCP/IP - IP Filter
Setups
Machine E-mail Address/Host Name
Set the e-mail address and host name for this unit. In [Machine E-mail Address/Host
Name], you can set the following items.
For information about this unit e-mail address/host name, refer to the Network Administrator Guide.
1. E-mail Address
2. Host Name
3. Domain Name
POP3 Server Settings
Set the POP3 server. In [POP3 Server Settings], you can set the following items.
For information about POP server settings, refer to the Network Administrator Guide.
1. POP3 Server Setup
5. POP3 Server Check Interval
2. POP3 Server IP Address
6. POP3 Server Login Name
3. POP3 Server Name
7. POP3 Server Password
4. POP3 Server Port Number
8. POP Password Encryption
SMTP Server Settings
Set the SMTP server. In [SMTP Server Settings], you can set the following items.
For information about SMTP server settings, refer to the Network Administrator Guide.
1. SMTP Server Setup
5. E-mail Send Authentication
2. SMTP Server IP Address
6. SMTP AUTH Login Name
3. SMTP Server Name
7. SMTP AUTH Password
4. SMTP Server Port Number
Domain Settings
Set the accepted domains. In [Domain Settings], you can set the following items.
For information about accepted domain settings, refer to the Network Administrator Guide.
1. Domain Filtering
2. to 51. Domains 1 to 50
287
11
11 Setups
Remote Authentication Server
Set the remote authentication server. Up to five servers can be set.
Note
Setups
1
Select [Remote Authentication
Server Settings].
2
Select the item to be set or
changed, and select [Change
Settings].
Note
11
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
• Select [
] to display the previous screen and select [
3
Set the setting value.
4
Press Save.
] to display the next screen.
Authentication System
You can select the system for authentication from [Kerberos (Windows2000)] and
[Kerberos (Solaris)].
Remote Authentication Server 1 through 5
Make the server settings.
„Server - Server Setup
You can select the remote authentication server specification method from [By IP
Address] and [By Server Name].
„Server - IP Address
Set the IP address of the remote authentication server using values from 0 to 255.
Note
• You can set this when [Remote Server -Setup] is set to [By IP Address].
• 224.XXX.XXX.XXX to 255.XXX.XXX.XXX and 127.XXX.XXX.XXX cannot be set.
„Server - Server Name
You can set the server name of the remote authentication server. 255 characters are
allowed.
Note
• You can set this when [Remote - Server Setup] is set to [By Server Name].
„Server - Port Number
Set the remote authentication server port number in the range 1 to 65535.
„Server - Realm Name
Set the remote authentication server realm name. 64 characters are allowed.
288
Network Settings
PKI (Public Key) Settings
Set the HTTP-SSL/TLS.
Note
• Before setting the HTTP-SSL/TLS communications, the device certificate must be set. For
information about the device certificate, refer to the Network Administrator Guide.
1
Select [PKI (Public Key) Settings].
2
Select [HTTP-SSL/TLS Settings].
Setups
HTTP - SSL/TLS Settings
Set the HTTP-SSL/TLS.
1
Select the item to be set or
changed, and select [Change
Settings].
2
Set the setting value.
3
Select [Save].
11
„HTTP - SSL/TLS Communications
Enable or disable the HTTP-SSL/TLS communications.
„HTTP - SSL/TLS Port Number
Set the HTTP-SSL/TLS communications port number in the range from 1 to 65535.
Other Settings
Make other settings. In [Other Settings], you can set the following items.
For information about other settings, refer to the Network Administrator Guide.
1. E-mail Receive Protocol
289
11 Setups
Print Mode Settings
In [Print Mode Settings], you make settings relating to the printer feature.
When using CentreWare Internet Services, more detailed settings are possible. For more details, refer to
"CentreWare Internet Services" (P.212), and refer to the Network Administrator Guide.
The following are the places to reference for information about each setting.
Allocate Memory ......................................................................................................................290
Setups
Other Settings............................................................................................................................292
1
11
In the [System Settings] screen,
select [System Settings].
For the method of displaying the [System
Settings] screen, refer to "System Settings
Procedure" (P.240).
2
Select [Print Mode Settings].
3
Select the item to be set.
Allocate Memory
For each interface, set the memory capacity for the receiving buffer (temporary storage
for data sent from the client).
You can change the receiving buffer capacity depending on the pattern of use and
purpose. Increasing the receiving buffer capacity may allow a client to be released
sooner from an interface.
Important • If you change the memory capacity settings, the memory is reset, and therefore data stored
in all memory areas is lost.
• It is not possible to assign more than the total memory. When the power is turned on, if the
settings exceed the available memory capacity, they are automatically adjusted by the
system.
1
Select [Allocate Memory].
2
Select the item to be set or
changed, and select [Change
Settings].
Note
3
290
• Select [ ] to display the
previous screen and select
[ ] to display the next screen.
Set the setting value.
Print Mode Settings
4
Select [Save].
Note
• When a port is set to [Disabled], the corresponding items do not appear.
• Depending on the amount of data sent from the client, increasing the memory capacity may
not change the time taken to release the client.
PostScript Memory
Specify the memory capacity used for PostScript.
Set a value from 8.00 to 96.00 MB, in 0.25 MB increments.
Note
• The maximum value that can be set varies according to the available memory capacity.
HP-GL/2 Auto Layout Memory
11
Specify the memory capacity used for HP-GL/2.
Set a value from 64 to 5120 KB, in 32 KB increments.
Note
• This feature appears when the emulation kit or PostScript3 kit is installed.
• The maximum value that can be set varies according to the available memory capacity.
Receiving Buffer - Parallel
Set the parallel receiving buffer.
Set a value from 64 to 1024 KB, in 32 KB increments.
Receiving Buffer - USB
Set the receiving buffer for USB.
Set a value from 64 to 1024 KB, in 32 KB increments.
Note
Setups
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
Receiving Buffer - LPD Spool
„Off
Do not use spooling. While LPD print processing is being carried out for one client, data
cannot be received over the same interface from another client. Set a value for the
dedicated LPD receiving buffer memory capacity from 1024 to 2048 KB, in 32 KB
increments.
„Memory
Carry out spooling. The receiving buffer for spooling uses memory. When this
candidate value is selected, set the memory capacity of the receiving buffer for
spooling, from 0.50 MB to 32.00 MB, in 0.25 MB increments.
Note that print data exceeding the set memory capacity is not accepted. In such cases,
select [Hard Disk], or [Off].
„Hard Disk
Carry out spooling. The receiving buffer for spooling uses the hard disk.
Receiving Buffer - NetWare
Set the NetWare receiving buffer.
Set a value from 64 to 1024 KB, in 32 KB increments.
291
11 Setups
Receiving Buffer - SMB Spool
„Off
Do not use spooling. While SMB print processing is being carried out for one client,
data cannot be received over the same interface from another client.
Set a value for the dedicated SMB receiving buffer memory capacity from 64 to 1024
KB, in 32 KB increments.
„Memory
Setups
Carry out spooling. The receiving buffer for spooling uses memory. When this
candidate value is selected, set the memory capacity of the receiving buffer for spooling
from 0.50 MB to 32.00 MB, in 0.25 MB increments.
Note that print data exceeding the set memory capacity is not accepted. In such cases,
select [Hard Disk], or [Off].
11
„Hard Disk
Carry out spooling. The receiving buffer for spooling uses the hard disk.
Receiving Buffer - IPP Spool
„Off
Do not use spooling. While IPP print processing is being carried out for one client, data
cannot be received over the same interface from another client. Set a value for the
dedicated IPP receiving buffer memory capacity from 64 to 1024 KB, in 32 KB
increments.
„Hard Disk
Carry out spooling. The receiving buffer for spooling uses the hard disk.
Receiving Buffer - EtherTalk
Set the EtherTalk receiving buffer.
Set a value from 1024 to 2048 KB, in 32 KB increments.
Receiving Buffer - Port 9100
Set the Port9100 receiving buffer.
Set a value from 64 to 1024 KB, in 32 KB increments.
Other Settings
Make settings relating to the paper used in the printer.
1
Select [Other Settings].
2
Select the item to be set or
changed, and select [Change
Settings].
Note
292
• Select [ ] to display the
previous screen and select
[ ] to display the next screen.
3
Select the setting value.
4
Select [Save].
Print Mode Settings
Print Area
Set whether to expand the print area.
For information about the print area, refer to "Printable Area" (P.501).
Substitute Tray
When there is no tray containing the paper size selected by the automatic tray
selection, select whether or not to print replaced with paper loaded in another paper
tray. In the event of using substitute tray, set the size.
„Display Message
Setups
Do not use substitute tray, but display a paper loading message.
„Use Larger Size
Replace with the next larger paper size than that selected, and print at the same size.
„Use Nearest Size
Replace with the closest paper size to that selected, and print. If necessary, the printing
is automatically reduced in size.
Note
• If there is a client specification, the client specification takes precedence.
„Select Tray 5 (Bypass)
This prints using the paper in tray 5 (bypass).
Paper Attributes Mismatch
Set the action to be taken when the paper type loaded in the paper tray does not match
that specified.
„Print
Carry on printing, even if the paper type is different.
„Display Confirmation Screen
Show a confirmation screen, and prompt for action.
Unregistered Forms
When a form specified for printing in a form data file (overlay printing) is not present on
the host computer, set whether to print the job or not. If you specify [Print], since the
specified form is not present, only the data is printed.
This setting is added to the print settings menu when there is a print specification from
the host computer.
Print ID
Set whether user information is printed when printing using ART EX printer driver. The
first 64 letters of the user information is printed.
Select where to print. [Top Left], [Top Right], [Bottom Left], or [Bottom Right].
Note
• UserID must be set in ART EX printer driver before Print ID can be used. For more
information about how to set, refer to the print driver's online help.
• When user information is not available [UnknownUser] is printed
293
11
11 Setups
Banner Sheet
Select whether to output banner sheets to separate different outputs.
Note
• Even if the stapler feature is enabled, banner sheets are not stapled.
• On a print job from a Macintosh, the document name does not appear on the banner sheet.
• When printing banner sheets, they are counted for metering purposes.
„Off
Do not print banner sheets.
Setups
„Start Sheet
Print before a print job.
„End Sheet
11
Print after a print job.
„Start Sheet & End sheet
Print before and after a print job.
Banner Sheet Tray
Set the paper tray used for banner sheets.
Select from [Tray 1] to [Tray 4].
PostScript Default Color
Set the default values for AdobePS and PDF color mode.
Note
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
PostScript Paper Supply
Select whether the PostScript DMS (Deferred Media Selection) feature is enabled or
not.
Note
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
PostScript Font Absence
Set the handling when a PostScript font specified in a job is not present.
Note
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
„Cancel Printing
Cancel printing.
„Substitute Font and Print
Continue printing, using a substitute font.
PostScript Font Substitution
When a PostScript font specified in a job is not present, set whether to use ATCx for
the substitute font.
Note
294
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
Scan Mode Settings
Scan Mode Settings
Make settings relating to the scanner feature.
Note
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
When using CentreWare Internet Services, more detailed settings are possible. For more details, refer to
"CentreWare Internet Services" (P.212), and refer to the Network Administrator Guide.
Setups
The following are the places to reference for information about each setting.
Basic Scanning Tab.................................................................................................................. 295
Scan Defaults............................................................................................................................ 296
Scan-to-FTP/SMB Defaults ..................................................................................................... 298
11
Scan Size Defaults.................................................................................................................... 298
Output Size Defaults ................................................................................................................ 299
Reduce/Enlarge Presets ............................................................................................................ 299
Other Settings........................................................................................................................... 300
1
In the [System Settings] screen,
select [System Settings].
For the method of displaying the [System
Settings] screen, refer to "System Settings
Procedure" (P.240).
2
Select [Scan Mode Settings].
3
Select the item to be set.
Basic Scanning Tab
Set items relating to the [Basic Scanning Tab] screen display.
1
Select [Basic Scanning Tab].
2
Select the item to be set or
changed, and select [Change
Settings].
Note
• Select [ ] to display the
previous screen and select
[ ] to display the next screen.
3
Set the setting value.
4
Select [Save].
295
11 Setups
Feature in 2nd Column
You can set the features shown in the second column of the [Basic Scanning Tab]
screen.
You can select from [2 Sided Originals], [Scan Resolution], [Lighten/Darken], and
[Reduce/Enlarge].
Reduce/Enlarge - 2nd Button
This item can be set when [Reduce/Enlarge] is selected in [Feature in 2nd Column].
Setups
Set the magnification shown in the second row from the top of the five feature buttons
shown in [Reduce/Enlarge] in the [Basic Scanning Tab] screen.
11
Select the magnification from the registered R/E Preset buttons.
For information about R/E Preset buttons, refer to "Reduce/Enlarge Presets" (P.299).
Reduce/Enlarge - 3rd Button
This item can be set when [Reduce/Enlarge] is selected in [Feature in 2nd Column].
Set the magnification shown in the third row from the top of the five feature buttons
shown in [Reduce/Enlarge] in the [Basic Scanning Tab] screen.
Select the magnification from the registered R/E Preset buttons.
For information about R/E Preset buttons, refer to "Reduce/Enlarge Presets" (P.299).
Reduce/Enlarge - 4th Button
This item can be set when [Reduce/Enlarge] is selected in [Feature in 2nd Column].
Set the magnification shown in the fourth row from the top of the five feature buttons
shown in [Reduce/Enlarge] in the [Basic Scanning Tab] screen.
Select the magnification from the registered R/E Preset buttons.
For information about R/E Preset buttons, refer to "Reduce/Enlarge Presets" (P.299).
Scan Defaults
Set the default values for the scanner feature. When the power is turned on or the
machine returns from a power-saving state, or when the <Clear All> button is pressed,
the system returns to the defaults set here. By setting the defaults to commonly used
features, you can reduce the number of setting operations required in use.
The values set become valid after the power has been turned off and on again.
1
Select [Scan Defaults].
2
Select the item to be set or
changed, and select [Change
Settings].
Note
• Select [ ] to display the
previous screen and select
[ ] to display the next screen.
3
Set the setting value.
4
Select [Save].
Output Color
Set the default value for [Output Color] in the [Basic Scanning Tab] screen.
296
Scan Mode Settings
Original Type
Set the default value for [Original Type] in the [Basic Scanning Tab] screen.
File Format
Set the default value for [File Format] in the [Basic Scanning Tab] screen.
Lighten/Darken
Set the default value for [Lighten/Darken/Contrast] > [Lighten/Darken] in the [Image
Quality] screen.
Set the default value for [Lighten/Darken/Contrast] > [Contrast] in the [Image Quality]
screen. The contrast setting is valid when [Output Color] is set to [Full Color] or
[Grayscale].
Sharpness
Set the default value for [Sharpness] in the [Image Quality] screen.
Auto Exposure
Set the default value for [Auto Exposure] in the [Image Quality] screen.
Background Suppression
Set the default value for [Background Suppression] in the [Image Quality] screen.
Color Space
Set the default value for color space in the [Image Quality] screen.
Original Orientation
Set the default value for [Original Orientation] when scanning.
Scan Resolution
Set the default value for [Scan Resolution] in the [Scan Options] screen.
You can select from 200 dpi, 300 dpi, 400 dpi, and 600 dpi.
Mixed Size Originals
Set the default value for [Mixed Size Originals] in the [Scan Options] screen.
Note
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
Border Erase
Set the default value for [Border Erase] in the [Scan Options] screen. You can select
from [Normal] or [Variable Erase].
Border Erase - Top & Bottom
Set the default value for the amount of border erased from the original in the top and
bottom directions in [Border Erase] in the [Scan Options] screen. Set a value from 0 to
50 mm, 1 mm increments.
297
Setups
Contrast
11
11 Setups
Border Erase - Left & Right
Set the default value for the amount of border erased from the original in the left and
right directions in [Border Erase] in the [Scan Options] screen. Set a value from 0 to 50
mm, in 1 mm increments.
Center Erase
Set the default value for the center erase amount of the original in [Border Erase] in the
[Scan Options] screen. Set a value from 0 to 50 mm, in 1 mm increments.
Setups
11
Image Compression
Set the default value for [Image Compression] in the [Output Format] screen.
Scan-to-FTP/SMB Defaults
You can select the default protocol used for transfer from FTP, SMB, and SMB (UNC
format).
1
Select [Scan-to-FTP/SMB
Defaults].
2
Select [Change Settings].
3
Select the setting value.
4
Select [Save].
Scan Size Defaults
Set the original size shown in [Scan Size] in the [Scan Options] screen.
An original size is assigned to each of the eleven buttons other than [Auto Detect].
When frequently scanning nonstandard size originals, by presetting a nonstandard
size, scan it is not necessary to enter the original size each time a scan is made.
Note that to set the nonstandard size, with [Variable Size] the width is set from 15 to
432 mm, and the height from 15 to 297 mm, in 1 mm increments.
1
Select [Scan Size Defaults].
2
Select the item to be set or
changed, and select [Change
Settings].
Note
298
• Select [ ] to display the
previous screen and select
[ ] to display the next screen.
3
Select the setting value.
4
Select [Save].
Scan Mode Settings
„A/B Series Size
You can select from ten A and B series sizes.
„Inch Size
You can select from twelve inch series sizes.
„Others
You can select from thirteen other sizes.
„Variable Size
11
Output Size Defaults
Set the sizes to be displayed at [Output Size] when selecting [Auto %] for scanning
documents at [Reduce/Enlarge] in the [Scan Options] screen.
Any output sizes can be assigned to output size buttons 1 to 8.
By setting the commonly used sizes, you can reduce the number of selection
operations for making a scan.
1
Select [Output Size Defaults].
2
Select the item to be set or
changed, and select [Change
Settings].
Note
• Select [ ] to display the
previous screen and select
[ ] to display the next screen.
3
Select the setting value.
4
Select [Save].
Reduce/Enlarge Presets
Set the magnifications shown in [Preset %] for [Reduce/Enlarge] in the [Scan Options]
screen.
You can assign any magnification to the R/E Preset buttons 1 to 7 other than [100%].
1
Select [Reduce/Enlarge Presets].
2
Select the item to be set or
changed, and select [Change
Settings].
Note
• Select [ ] to display the
previous screen and select
[ ] to display the next screen.
3
Select [Preset %] or [Variable].
4
Select the setting value.
5
Select [Save].
Setups
You can enter any size. Set the width from 15 to 432 mm, and the height from 15 to 297
mm, in 1 mm increments.
299
11 Setups
„Preset %
You can select from twenty standard magnification ratios.
„Variable %
You can set any magnification. Specify a value from 25% to 400%, in 1% increments.
Other Settings
These settings relate to the scanner feature specification.
Setups
1
Select [Other Settings].
2
Select the item to be set or
changed, and select [Change
Settings].
11
Note
• Select [ ] to display the
previous screen and select
[ ] to display the next screen.
3
Select the setting value.
4
Select [Save].
Scan Service
Set whether or not to use the scanner feature.
Memory Full Procedure
While scanning an original, if there is insufficient hard disk space for the scanner, a
screen appears, asking how the partly stored data should be handled. Once a certain
time has elapsed with the confirmation screen displayed, the subsequent processing is
determined by these settings.
You can set the time until memory overflow handling is carried out. For more information, refer to
"Auto Job Release" (P.255).
„Cancel Job
The stored data is discarded.
„Run Job
The read-in data is treated as valid, and the part of the original read in is treated as a
complete file.
Maximum Stored Pages
Set the maximum number of stored pages of a scan original. You can set a number
from 1 to 999 pages.
Color Saturation
Set the saturation when scanning a full color original. When carrying out a scan, it is
automatically adjusted according to this setting value.
Auto Exposure Level
For a color scan, set the auto exposure level. This is valid when [Auto Exposure] is set
to [On].
The larger the value, the stronger the effect of removing background noise.
300
Scan Mode Settings
Background Suppression Level
Set the show-through prevention level. This is valid when [Background Suppression] is
set to [On].
Color Space
Set whether to display the color space feature.
When set to [On], [Color Space] buttons appear in the [Image Quality] screen for [Email], [Scan to Mailbox], [Scan to FTP/SMB], and [Job Template].
Setups
TIFF Format
Set the TIFF format for scanned data. You can select from [TIFF V6] and [TTN2].
Image Transfer Screen
11
Select whether to display a message when the scan of an original is completed.
„Hide Message and Screen
Do not show a scan completion message.
„Display Message Only
Show a scan completion message.
„Display Message and Screen
Show a screen while original is being scanned, and also a scan completion message.
301
11 Setups
Fax Mode Settings
In [Fax Mode Settings], make settings relating to the fax feature.
Note
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
The following are the places to reference for information about each setting.
Screen Defaults .........................................................................................................................302
Setups
Fax Defaults ..............................................................................................................................303
11
Reduce/Enlarge Presets.............................................................................................................308
Fax Control ...............................................................................................................................304
File Destination / Output Destination .......................................................................................307
Scan Size Defaults ....................................................................................................................309
Local Terminal Information......................................................................................................309
iFax Control ..............................................................................................................................311
1
In the [System Settings] screen,
select [System Settings].
For the method of displaying the [System
Settings] screen, refer to "System Settings
Procedure" (P.240).
2
Select [Fax Mode Settings].
3
Select the item to be set.
Screen Defaults
Set items relating to [Fax/Internet Fax] screen displays.
302
1
Select [Screen Defaults].
2
Select the item to be set or
changed, and select [Change
Settings].
3
Set the setting value.
4
Select [Save].
Fax Mode Settings
Fax Screen Default
You can set the default screen that appears when the [Fax/Internet Fax] screen is
displayed.
You can select from [Basic Features] and [Address Book].
Address Book Default
You can set the entry number from which the address book display starts.
Set the address number in the range from 1 to 500.
Note
• When the address book extension kit is installed, you can set a value up to 999.
Setups
Transmission Screen
Set whether to display the transmission progress during transmission.
11
Fax Defaults
Set the default values for the fax feature. When the power is turned on or the machine
returns from a power-saving state, or when the <Clear All> button is pressed, these
default settings take effect. By setting the defaults to commonly used features, you can
reduce the number of setting operations required in use.
1
Select [Fax Defaults].
2
Select the item to be set or
changed, and select [Change
Settings].
Note
• Select [ ] to display the
previous screen and select
[ ] to display the next screen.
3
Set the setting value.
4
Select [Save].
Resolution
You can set the default value for [Resolution] in the [Basic Features] screen.
Original Type
You can set the default value for [Original Type] in the [Basic Features] screen.
Lighten / Darken
Set the default value for [Lighten / Darken] in the [Basic Features] screen.
Mixed Size Originals
Set the default value for [Mixed Size Originals] in the [Scan Options] screen.
Note
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
Communication Mode
Set the default value for [Communication Mode] in the [Send Options] screen.
Send Header
Set the default value for [Send Header] in the [Send Options] screen.
303
11 Setups
Transmission Report
Set the default value for [Report/Read Status] > [Transmission Report] in the [Send
Options] screen. Set whether a report for checking the transmission result is
automatically printed.
Send/Read Status
Set the default value for [Report/Read Status] > [Read Status (MDN)] in the [Send
Options] screen.
Set whether to request read status.
Setups
11
iFax Profile
Set the default value for [iFax Profile] in the [Send Options] screen.
Fax Control
Set the fax control settings.
1
Select [Fax Control].
2
Select the item to be set or
changed, and select [Change
Settings].
Note
• Select [ ] to display the
previous screen and select
[ ] to display the next screen.
3
Set the setting value.
4
Select [Save].
Send Header - Polling
Set whether to attach a send header to a polling document.
A "polling document" means that an original is stored in the machine's public mailbox
for polling, and can then be sent by an operation from the other end.
Doc for Polling - Auto Delete
Set whether polling documents should be automatically deleted after sending.
Rotate 90 degrees
If the original can be rotated and sent without reducing the original image, set whether
to automatically rotate.
Note
• If an arbitrary magnification is specified in the multiple-up, scan specification feature, then
automatic rotation transmission does not feature.
Sender ID
For G3 communications, you can select whether to notify the G3-ID to the other party.
Redial Attempt
The redial feature automatically redials when the other party is busy, or does not
respond for any other reason. Set the number of redials from 0 to 9.
Note
304
• In order to use this feature, it must first be enabled by a customer engineer.
Please note that this feature is not available in some countries.
Fax Mode Settings
Redial Interval
Set the redialing interval from 1 to 15 minutes, in 1 minute increments.
Note
• In order to use this feature, it must first be enabled by a customer engineer.
Please note that this feature is not available in some countries.
Transmission Interval
Set a value for the interval between the end of one transmission and the beginning of
the next, from 3 to 255 seconds, in 1 second increments.
Setups
A longer transmission interval increases the total time to send a broadcast
transmission, for example, but allows calls to be received during the standby time.
Batch Send
A batch send means that when multiple transmissions have been stored for the same
address, the documents are sent in a single transmission to the address, and this sets
whether or not to do this. When set, the communications cost can be reduced.
Note that a batch send is not possible for manual transmissions, broadcast, relay
broadcast, mailbox transmissions, and transmissions with a specified time before the
specified time. When using a redial, resend, or delayed start send transmission job, or
a Copylyzer or Doculyzer, to send to the same address from different users, then a
batch send is not possible.
Manual Send/Receive Default
When using on-hook, set whether the initial state of the touch screen is manual
receiving or manual transmission.
Auto Switch Attempts
Set the number of times the phone ring should sound for an incoming call before
starting fax communications. Set a value from 0 to 9 rings.
If the other party is a telephone, within the set number of rings you can use an external
telephone to answer the call, and if it is a fax, switch manually to receiving.
Note
• In order to use this feature, it must first be enabled by a customer engineer.
Please note that this feature is not available in some countries.
Fax Receiving Mode
You can set the default value for [Fax Receiving Mode] in the [Machine Status] screen
displayed by pressing the <Machine Status> button. Select whether to receive a fax
transmission automatically or manually.
Border Limit
When the length of a received document is more than the paper size, set the length to
make a page break. Set a value from 0 to 127 mm, in 1 mm increments.
This setting can conveniently be used together with the auto reduce on receipt feature.
Auto Reduce on Receipt
When the length of a received document exceeds the paper length but is within the
page break threshold value, select whether to automatically reduce the image to fit the
page.
This setting can conveniently be used together with the page break threshold value. If
you select [No], the part of the image beyond the paper length is discarded.
305
11
11 Setups
Receiving Paper Size
You can set the method of notifying the paper size on which the received document will
be printed, from the receiver to the sender.
1
Select [Receiving Paper Size], and
select [Change Settings].
2
Select [Tray Mode] or [User Mode].
3
If you pressed [User Mode], select
any paper size.
Setups
„Tray Mode
The paper (plain paper only) loaded into any of the trays can be used for printing. The
received document is printed on the paper size available in the trays and closest to the
same size as the original without losing any of the page.
11
„User Mode
The paper size to be printed is specified (declared), and regardless of whether it is
loaded into a tray, only the declared size paper is used for printing. You can select more
than one paper size.
2 Up On Receipt
You can set to have two received pages printed combined on one sheet. This is
convenient for saving paper.
For example, when two A5 pages are received, they are printed on a single A4 sheet.
However, if paper of the same paper size as the received document is declared, it is
printed on that size. Depending on the sizes of the received documents, multiple-up
receiving may not be possible.
2 Sided Printing
Set whether to print received fax documents (including iFax received documents) 2
sided. This is convenient for saving paper.
Note
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
• Even if you select [Yes], depending on the data, 2 sided printing may not always be possible.
Border Erase - Top & Bottom
Set the amount of border erased from the original in the top and bottom directions. Set
a value from 0 to 20 mm in 1 mm increments.
Border Erase - Left & Right
Set the amount of border erased from the original in the left and right directions. Set a
value from 0 to 20 mm in 1 mm increments.
Reducing 8.5×11"
Originals to A4
When [Reduce/Enlarge] in the [Scan Options] screen is set to [Auto %], you can set
whether to reduce 8.5 × 11" size to A4, while scanning the original.
Pseudo-Photo Gradation Mode
You can set the toning method for photo originals. To get closer to photo image quality,
select the handling of intermediate tones (gray). You can select from [Error Diffusion]
and [Dither].
306
Fax Mode Settings
Box Selector - Line Setup
Select whether to use the box selector by receiving line feature.
Using the box selector by receiving line feature, a received document is stored to a
specified mailbox according to the receiving line.
Memory Full Procedure
You can set the time until the memory full procedure is carried out. For more information, refer to "Auto
Job Release" (P.255).
„Cancel Job
11
The stored data is discarded.
„Run Job
The read-in data is treated as valid, and the part of the original read in is treated as a
complete stored file.
Maximum Stored Pages
Set the maximum number of stored pages of a fax original. You can set a number from
1 to 999 pages.
Mailbox Receive Display Priority 1 to 5
Set the display priority for documents received using mailboxes. The priority levels are
from 1 to 5, and each setting takes these values. For each item, the same setting as
another item can be set.
Note
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
File Destination / Output Destination
Set the method of assigning received documents to specified mailboxes, when using
the box selector feature.
1
Select [File Destination / Output
Destination].
2
Select the item to be set or
changed.
Setups
While scanning an original, if there is insufficient hard disk space, a screen appears,
asking how the partly stored data should be handled. Once a certain time has elapsed
with the confirmation screen displayed, the subsequent processing is determined by
these settings.
File Destination - Line Setup
When you use assignment using the receiving line, the received documents are stored
in mailboxes assigned by receiving line.
307
11 Setups
1
Select [File Destination - Line
Setup].
2
Select the line you want to register,
and select [Change Settings].
Note
Setups
11
• The displayed items may be
different, depending on the
options installed.
3
Select [On].
4
Enter the mailbox number (three
digits) where you want to store the
documents, with the numeric
keypad.
5
Select [Save].
Output Destination - Line Setup
In [Output Destination - Line Setup], you can set the output destination for each
receiving line, and the destination for a mailbox print.
Note
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
• The displayed items may be different, depending on the options installed.
1
Select [Output Destination - Line
Setup].
2
Select the line you want to register,
and select [Change Settings].
3
Select the destination.
4
Select [Save].
Reduce/Enlarge Presets
Set the magnifications shown in [Preset], in [Reduce/Enlarge] in the [Scan Options]
screen. You can assign any magnification to the seven buttons other than [100%] and
[Auto %].
1
Select [Reduce/Enlarge Presets].
2
Select the item to be set or
changed, and select [Change
Settings].
Note
308
• Select [ ] to display the
previous screen and select
[ ] to display the next screen.
3
Select [Preset] or [Variable].
4
Select the setting value.
5
Select [Save].
Fax Mode Settings
„Preset
You can select from 23 standard magnification ratios.
„Variable
You can set any magnification. Set a value from 50 to 400%, in 1% increments.
Scan Size Defaults
Set the original sizes shown in [Scan Size] in the [Scan Options] screen.
When frequently scanning nonstandard size originals, by presetting a nonstandard
size, it is not necessary to enter the original size for each scan.
Note that to set the nonstandard size, with [Variable Size] the width is set from 15 to
432 mm, and the height from 15 to 297 mm, in 1 mm increments.
1
Select [Scan Size Defaults].
2
Select the item to be set or
changed, and select [Change
Settings].
Note
• Select [ ] to display the
previous screen and select
[ ] to display the next screen.
3
Select the setting value.
4
Select [Save].
„A and B Series Size
You can select from ten A and B series sizes.
„Inch Sizes
You can select from twelve inch series sizes.
„Others
You can select from thirteen other sizes.
Local Terminal Information
Set the local terminal information, including local name and sender name.
Note
• The displayed items may be different, depending on the options installed.
• There are a maximum of three lines that can be used for G3 communications: line 1, line 2
(or 3), and line 4 (or 5).
• For each line, you can set a G3 ID (fax number), G3 dialing type, and G3 line type.
309
Setups
An original size is assigned to each of the eleven buttons other than [Auto Size Detect].
11
11 Setups
1
Select [Local Terminal
Information].
2
Select the item to be set or
changed, and select [Change
Settings].
Note
Setups
11
• Select [ ] to display the
previous screen and select
[ ] to display the next screen.
3
Set the items.
4
Select [Save].
For information about entering text, refer to "Entering Text" (P.252).
Local Name
Save the name of the local terminal as the local name.
The local name is shown in the other party's [Activity Report]. However, depending on
the other party's device, it may not be shown.
Using the displayed keyboard and the numeric keypad, make the specification with not
more than 20 characters.
Company Logo
Save the sender name. The sender name is the name of the local terminal as printed
in the send headers and on cover notes.
Using the displayed keyboard and the numeric keypad, make the specification with not
more than 30 characters.
Machine Password
Set the receiving password when you want to limit the other parties that can send faxes.
When the receiving password is set, only a party that sends the correct receiving
password by F code is allowed to send or poll. Note that this means that faxes cannot
be accepted from a fax without the F code feature.
G3 Fax ID
When using G3 communications, register the G3 ID. The G3 ID is normally set to the
local terminal fax number.
Using the displayed keyboard and the numeric keypad, specify this is not more than 20
digits.
Note
• A G3 ID (fax number) consists of not more than 20 digits, including 0 to 9, +, and space.
G3 Dial Type
You can set the dial type.
„Tone
Tone dialing line.
„10pps
Pulse dialing line.
G3 Line Type
You can set the line type.
310
Fax Mode Settings
„PSTN
Subscriber telephone line.
„PBX
Private branch exchange.
iFax Control
Make the settings relating to control of Internet fax (iFax) operation.
Select [iFax Control].
2
Select the item to be set or
changed, and select [Change
Settings].
Note
Setups
1
11
• Select [ ] to display the
previous screen and select
[ ] to display the next screen.
3
Select the setting value.
4
Select [Save].
Broadcast iFax Profile
Set the default value for iFax profile when carrying out an iFax broadcast send.
The profile determines the capability of the machine for sending and receiving within
the iFax range, including image resolution, paper size, and other attributes.
Important • The TIFF file profiles that can be handled depend on the other party's iFax supporting machine.
When specifying a profile, check that it can be handled by the other party's iFax supporting
machine.
„TIFF-S
This is the iFax standard. Originals larger than A4 size are automatically reduced to A4
size for transmission.
„TIFF-F
Select this to specify ultra-high image quality for transmitting image quality, or for
sending A3 size, or B4 size originals.
„TIFF-J
Send this when sending originals with JBIG.
Broadcast Communication Mode
Set the default value for communications mode when sending an iFax broadcast.
Delivery Confirmation Method
Set the default value for the method of confirming that a transmitted e-mail has arrived
at its destination.
Note
• You can use [Send Status (DSN)] when the other end supports the DSN feature. You can
use [Read Status (MDN)] when the other end supports the MDN feature.
„Send Status (DSN)
An e-mail is received confirming whether the e-mail reached the destination mail
server.
311
11 Setups
„Read Status (MDN)
An e-mail is received confirming whether the e-mail reached the addressee.
Incoming iFax Print Options
When an e-mail is received from an iFax supporting machine addressed to the e-mail
address of the machine, you can select the print operation.
„Print Attachment
The attached document only is printed.
Setups
„Print All Headers and Contents
This prints the e-mail headers and body of the e-mail.
„Print Basic Headers and Contents
11
This prints some e-mail headers (From/To/Subject/Date) and the e-mail body.
„Auto Print
If the e-mail body is non-empty, this prints the e-mail headers and e-mail body.
Incoming iFax Output Destination
Set the output tray to be used for printed iFax received documents.
Note
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
Fax Transfer from Address Book
Set whether to set restrictions when forwarding e-mail received in SMTP format by iFax
to fax addresses not in the address book.
„Off
Forwarding is not restricted.
„On
When received by SMTP, check if the recipient telephone number is listed in the
address book, and if not refuse the received e-mail, and destroy the data.
Fax Transfer - Add Sender Header
When forwarding received e-mail from iFax by fax, select whether to add a send
header.
The document received at the other end has added the time of starting transmission,
sender name, recipient, G3 ID, and number of pages.
Fax Transfer Maximum Data Size
When sending a received e-mail from iFax to a fax, set the maximum data size.
312
1
Select [Fax Transfer Maximum
Data Size].
2
Select [Off] or [On].
3
If you selected [On], select [ ],
[ ], or the numeric keypad to
enter a numeric quantity.
Fax Mode Settings
4
Select [Save].
„Off
The data size is unrestricted.
„On
Set a value from 1 to 65535 KB in 1 KB increments. If the set value is exceeded, the
data is destroyed.
Setups
11
313
11 Setups
E-mail/iFax Settings
In [E-mail/iFax Settings], you make settings relating to the e-mail and iFax features.
Note
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
The following are the places to reference for information about each setting.
E-mail Defaults .........................................................................................................................314
Setups
Address Search (Directory Service)..........................................................................................315
Other Settings............................................................................................................................318
1
11
In the [System Settings] screen,
select [System Settings].
For the method of displaying the [System
Settings] screen, refer to "System Settings
Procedure" (P.240).
2
Select [E-mail/iFax Settings].
3
Select the feature to be set.
E-mail Defaults
Set the default subject for e-mail. The subject line can be up to 128 characters long.
314
1
Select [E-mail Defaults].
2
Select [Change Settings].
3
Enter the default subject, and
select [Save].
E-mail/iFax Settings
Address Search (Directory Service)
Set the attributes and ranges for searching address books stored in the address search
(directory service).
Note
• This feature only supports address book used with the e-mail scan feature.
1
Select [Address Search (Directory
Service)].
2
Select the item to be set, and
select [Change Settings].
Setups
Note
• Select [ ] to display the
previous screen and select
[ ] to display the next screen.
3
Select the setting value.
4
Select [Save].
11
Directory Service (LDAP)
Select whether to allow the use of address books stored on the directory server.
z
Even when [Enable] is selected, unless the following conditions are met the directory
server address book will not be started.
- The IP address must be correctly set
- The directory server (primary) IP address or FQDN must be set
- The port number used for LDAP communications must be set
Primary Server
Make the directory server settings.
1
Select [Primary Server].
2
Select the item to be set, and
select [Change Settings].
3
Set the setting value.
„Primary Server Setup
You can select the primary server specification method from [By IP Address] and [By
Server Name].
„Primary Server IP Address
Set the primary server IP address, using values from 0 to 255.
Note
• You can set this when [Primary Server Setup] is [By IP Address].
• 224.XXX.XXX.XXX to 255.XXX.XXX.XXX and 127.XXX.XXX.XXX cannot be set.
„Primary Server Name
You can set the server name for the primary server. You can enter up to 64 characters.
Note
• You can set this when [Primary Server Setup] is [By Server Name].
Primary Server Port Number
Set the directory server port number in the range from 1 to 65535.
315
11 Setups
Secondary Server
Make the directory server (secondary server) settings.
1
Select [Secondary Server].
2
Select the item to be set, and
select [Change Settings].
3
Set the setting value.
„Secondary Server Setup
Setups
You can select the secondary server specification method from [By IP Address] and [By
Server Name].
„Secondary Server IP Address
11
Set the secondary server IP address, using values from 0 to 255.
Note
• You can set this when [Secondary Server Setup] is [By IP Address].
• 224.XXX.XXX.XXX to 255.XXX.XXX.XXX and 127.XXX.XXX.XXX cannot be set.
„Secondary Server Name
Set the server name for the secondary server. You can enter up to 64 characters.
Note
• You can set this when [Secondary Server Setup] is [By Server Name].
Secondary Server Port Number
Set the directory server (secondary server) port number in the range from in the range
from 1 to 65535.
Login Name
Set the login name for access to the directory server. However, set this only when
authentication is required for the directory service. Do not make the setting when
authentication is not required.
When setting the login name, you can enter up to 256 characters.
Password
Set a password for access to the directory server. However, set this only when
authentication is required for the directory service. Do not make the setting when
authentication is not required.
When setting the password, you can enter up to 32 characters.
Search Root Entry DN
You can enter the search root character string with up to 256 characters.
Scope of Search from Root Entry
Select the search range from the search root.
„Root entry only
Searches the root level only.
„One level below root entry only
Searches from the root, as far as one level below.
„All levels below root entry
Searches from the root, including all levels below.
316
E-mail/iFax Settings
Object Class of Search Target
You can enter the search target object classes with up to 32 characters.
Server Application
You can select the software used for the directory server, from [Microsoft Active
Directory], [Novell NetWare 5.*], and [Other Applications].
Attribute Type of Recipient Name
Set the recipient name attribute type. You can enter up to 32 characters.
Setups
Attribute Type of Last Name
Set the sender's family name attribute type. You can enter up to 32 characters.
11
Attribute Type of First Name
Set the sender's first name attribute type. You can enter up to 32 characters.
Attribute Type of E-mail Address
Set the e-mail address attribute type. You can enter up to 32 characters.
Attribute Type of Custom Items 1 to 3
Set the LDAP attribute type of custom items 1 to 3. You can enter up to 32 characters.
Attribute Name of Custom Items 1 to 3
Set the attribute name assigned to custom items 1 to 3. You can enter up to 16
characters.
Maximum Search Results
Set the upper limit on the number of searched address results, from 5 to 100. If there
are more search results than the upper limit, the search operation is stopped at that
number.
Search Time-Out
Select whether or not to set a search timeout.
1
Select [Search Time-Out].
2
Select [Off] or [On].
3
If you selected [Set], set the time.
„Off
No search timeout limit is set.
„On
Set a value from 5 to 120 seconds, in 1 second increments.
317
11 Setups
Other Settings
Make other settings relating to e-mail transmission.
1
Select [Other Settings].
2
Select the item to be set or
changed, and select [Change
Settings].
Note
Setups
11
• Select [ ] to display the
previous screen and select
[ ] to display the next screen.
3
Select the setting value.
4
Select [Save].
Maximum E-mail Size
You can select whether or not to set an upper limit on data size in e-mail transmissions.
„Off
There is no limit on data size.
„On
Set an upper limit on data size.
Set a value from 50 to 65535 KB, in 1 KB increments.
Note
• If the set value is exceeded, the e-mail transmission is aborted.
Maximum Address Entries
Set the maximum number of addressees that can be specified when sending an e-mail.
The number of addressees is the total number in To:/Cc:/Bcc:.
You can set the maximum number of addressees in the range from 1 to 100. If the
maximum number of addressees is exceeded, the e-mail transmission is aborted.
Note
• This does not apply to iFax features.
Auto Print Error Mail
Select whether the error e-mail resulting from an incorrect address, or transmission
error should be automatically printed.
Response to Read Status (MDN)
When an iFax requesting read status (MDN) is received, set whether or not to respond.
„Off
Do not respond.
„On
Automatically notify that the e-mail has been opened.
Read Status (MDN)
Select whether to use the read status (MDN) feature. When an e-mail is sent from the
machine, select whether a dialog box should open requesting the recipient to return the
read status.
Note
318
• This does not apply to the iFax feature.
E-mail/iFax Settings
„Off
The read status (MDN) feature cannot be used.
„On
All users are permitted to use the read status (MDN) feature.
Auto Print Delivery Confirmation Mail
Select whether to automatically print transmission result e-mails (DSN response/MDN
response).
Setups
„On
Transmission result e-mail are not automatically printed.
„Off
11
Transmission result e-mail are automatically printed.
„Print when delivery fails
Printing only when the transmission failed.
Page size for Split Send
Select whether to split the attachment data into pages for transmission.
When split for transmission, set the number of pages.
Important • It is only possible to split into multiple-page files when the output file format is specified as
PDF, DocuWorks or multiple - page TIFF.
1
Select [Page Size for Split Send].
2
Select [Off] or [On].
3
When [On] is selected, set the
number of pages.
„Off
The attachment data is not split for transmission.
„On
Set a value from 1 to 999pages, in 1page increments.
319
11 Setups
Mailbox/Stored Document Settings
In [Mailbox/Stored Document Settings], make the settings for handling of documents
stored in mailboxes. The following are the places to reference for details of each
setting.
Note
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
Mailbox Settings .......................................................................................................................320
iFax to iFax ...............................................................................................................................321
Setups
iFax to E-mail............................................................................................................................321
Stored Document Settings.........................................................................................................321
11
1
In the [System Settings] screen,
select [System Settings].
For the method of displaying the [System
Settings] screen, refer to "System Settings
Procedure" (P.240).
2
Select [Mailbox/Stored Document
Settings].
3
Select the item to be set or
changed.
Mailbox Settings
Set what happens after documents from a client are received and when forwarding
received iFax documents.
320
1
Select [Mailbox Settings].
2
Select the item to be set or
changed, and select [Change
Settings].
3
Set the setting value.
4
Select [Save].
Mailbox/Stored Document Settings
Documents Retrieved By Client
Set whether to delete a document stored in the mailbox when it is retrieved by the
client.
„Delete according to Mailbox settings
Follow the document automatic deletion settings for each individual mailbox
For information about mailbox settings, refer to "Delete Documents After Retrieval" (P.324).
„Force Delete
iFax to iFax
Select whether to permit automatic forwarding of documents received in a mailbox from
an iFax supporting machine to an iFax supporting machine.
iFax to E-mail
Select whether to permit automatic e-mail forwarding of documents received in a
mailbox from an iFax supporting machine.
Stored Document Settings
Select whether documents stored in a mailbox are automatically deleted. You can
select the set the how long documents are kept and time of deletion.
You can also select whether individual documents are deleted or not.
1
Select [Stored Document Settings].
2
Select the item to be set or
changed, and select [Change
Settings].
3
Set the setting value.
4
Select [Save].
Document Expiry Date
Set the document storage period. If automatically deleted, you can set the date
(elapsed days) and time of deletion. This setting applies to all stored documents.
1
Select [Document Expiry Date],
and select [Change Settings].
2
Select [Off] or [On].
3
If you selected [On], with [ ] and
[ ], set the storage period, and
the time of deletion after the
storage period has expired.
„Documents kept for
Set the document storage period in the range 1 to 14 days.
321
Setups
Ignore the settings for each individual mailbox, and when a document is retrieved from
a mailbox, forcibly delete it.
11
11 Setups
„Documents deleted at
Set the time for the document to be deleted after the storage period has expired, in the
range from 0 to 23 hours, 00 to 59 minutes.
When a storage period is set, set document deletion to enabled. For more information, refer to "Delete
Documents with Expiry Date" (P.325).
Delete Charge Print Documents
Select whether or not to delete charge print documents after the storage period has
expired.
Setups
11
Delete Secure Print Documents
Select whether or not to delete secure print documents after the storage period has
expired.
Delete Sample Print Documents
Select whether or not to delete sample print documents after the storage period has
expired.
322
Setup Menu
Setup Menu
In [Setup Menu], you can create mailboxes and job flow, and create and update
address book entries (fax/iFax/mail scan).
Note
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
The following are the places to reference for information about each setting.
Setups
Mailbox .................................................................................................................................... 323
Job Flow Sheets........................................................................................................................ 326
Content Check .......................................................................................................................... 333
Address Book ........................................................................................................................... 334
11
Group Send............................................................................................................................... 340
Comments................................................................................................................................. 341
Paper Type................................................................................................................................ 341
1
In the [System Settings] screen,
select [Setup Menu].
For the method of displaying the [System
Settings] screen, refer to "System Settings
Procedure" (P.240).
2
Select the item to be created (or
changed).
Mailbox
You register mailboxes in order to stored scanned documents, or carry out mailbox
communications, and when assigning received documents to mailboxes. You can
register up to 200 mailboxes.
Scanned documents, and documents received for a mailbox or stored for polling are
stored in the specified mailbox. It is convenient to make separate mailboxes, for
example for received documents, and documents to be transmitted (store for polling),
according to purpose.
You can check the current mailboxes in the "Mailbox registration list." For more information, refer to
"Mailbox List" (P.380).
1
Select [Mailbox].
2
Select the mailbox to be registered,
and select [Create/Delete].
Note
• Select [ ] to display the
previous screen and select
[ ] to display the next screen.
• By entering a three-digit number with the numeric keypad, you can specify the mailbox
directly.
323
11 Setups
3
When creating a new mailbox, a
password setting screen appears.
If not setting a password
1) Select [Off], and select [Save].
z
When setting a password
1) Select [On], and enter the password.
z
2) Select [Save].
Setups
11
4
Select the item to be set, and
select [Change Settings].
5
Select the setting value.
6
Select [Save].
Mailbox Name
Set the mailbox name.
Using the displayed keyboard and the numeric keypad, you can enter up to 20
characters.
For information about entering text, refer to "Entering Text" (P.252).
Password
Set the mailbox password. You can enter up to 20 numeric digits (0 to 9). The password
setting is optional.
Check Password
To restrict access to specified users only, you can set a password. When the password
is set, it is necessary to enter the password each time a mailbox reading or writing
operation is carried out.
„Save (Write)
When a mailbox is selected, password input is required.
„Print/Delete (Read)
When a document in a mailbox is printed or deleted, password input is required.
„Always
For both of the two above operations, password input is required.
Delete Documents After Retrieval
When a document stored in a mailbox is printed, or is retrieved by an external action,
set whether the document should be deleted.
„Save
The document is left stored.
„Delete
After the document is printed, or is retrieved by an external action, it is automatically
deleted.
324
Setup Menu
Delete Documents with Expiry Date
Specify whether to enable the feature to delete documents stored in a mailbox at a
specified time after a storage period has expired.
„Disabled
Even when the set storage period has elapsed, documents are not deleted.
„Enabled
For information about setting the document storage period, refer to "Mailbox Settings" (P.320).
Link Job Flow Sheet to Mailbox
You can associate a job flow with a mailbox. By associating a job flow with a previously
registered process, you can determine how documents stored in a mailbox are
processed.
For the method of registering a job flow, refer to "Job Flow Sheets" (P.326).
1
Select [Link Flow Sheet to
Mailbox], and select [Create/
Change Link].
When a job flow is already
associated, the screen on the right
appears.
„Cut Link
Disassociate the job flow from the mailbox.
„Create/Change Link
A screen for job flow association appears. You can select from the existing job flows or
create a new job flow.
For information about the operation, refer to "Job Flow Sheets" (P.326).
„Auto Start
If you select the [Auto Start] check box, when a document is stored in the mailbox, the
procedure registered in the job flow is automatically is started.
When the [Delete Mailbox] Button is Selected
This deletes the selected mailbox. If there are documents in the mailbox, they are all
deleted. To delete the mailbox, select [Yes].
Important • The deleted document cannot be recovered.
325
Setups
Documents are deleted at a specified time after the storage period has expired.
However, unless the storage period has already been set, even when set to [Enable],
documents are not deleted. Set the document storage period.
11
11 Setups
Job Flow Sheets
Job Flow is a feature for executing a series of registered actions.
A Job Flow operates on documents stored in a mailbox, and are started in the following
ways: 1) manually or automatically start a Job Flow when a document is stored to a
mailbox, or 2)select a Job Flow to act on documents stored in the mailbox. To start a
Job Flow, you must first link a mailbox with the Job Flow. When set to start
automatically, documents are automatically processed by the Job Flow when stored in
the mailbox.
Note
Setups
• To link a job flow created with [Job Flow Sheets] with a mailbox, start from [Check Mailbox].
For more details, refer to "Configuring/Starting Job Flow" (P.191).
Features that can be registered are listed below.
11
z
Forwarding specification (FTP, SMB, mail, fax transmission, iFax transmission)
z
Multiple forwarding specifications, multiple processing execution
z
Printing
z
Automatic document deletion (specification of expiry time)
z
Document deletion
Depending on the method of storing in the mailbox, there are restrictions on the
combination of features.
Print
Fax
transmission
iFax
Transmission
Mail
Transmission
FTP
transmission
SMB
transmission
Fax Documents for
Private Polling
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Scan
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Fax mailbox
reception
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
iFax reception
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Output
Input
Sometimes Sometimes
Yes: can be run
No: cannot be run
Sometimes: can be run, depending on settings in System Administration mode
Important • When the [Input] is Fax Private Polling or Fax to Mailbox, and a monochrome (2-tone)
document is forwarded by e-mail, FTP, or SMB, and the Job Flow [File Format] is set to
[JPEG], the file cannot be opened by the recipient.
Restrictions on Using Job Flow
A job flow may be for use by an individual user, for shared use, or for use only when
linked with a particular mailbox, and you can use the authentication feature to control
access to job flow features.
For information about the available job flow features and restrictions on use, refer to "Authentication for
Job Flow Sheet and Mailbox" (P.391).
326
1
Select [Job Flow Sheets].
2
Carry out the job flow operation.
Setup Menu
„Sheet Filtering
You can filter the job flow display. The screen display depends on the user
authentication feature settings.
1
Select the filtering conditions, then
select [Close].
Setups
„Create
The [Create New Job Flow] screen appears.
11
„Edit/Delete
The [Content Check] screen appears.
Create New Job Flow Sheet
Create a new job flow.
1
Select the item to be changed.
„Delete Settings
This deletes the setting values of all selected items.
„Change Settings
With this you can confirm or change the setting values of the selected items.
2
Select [Change Settings].
Name
Set the name for the job flow, of up to 128 characters.
Description
Set the description of the job flow, of up to 256 characters.
Send as Fax
Specify the fax transmission address.
You can specify a total of up to 100 addresses, using either address book numbers or
direct input.
Important • It is not possible to use wildcard or group number specifications.
327
11 Setups
„Address Number
Specify the address with an address book number. The specified address appears in
[Recipient/Fax Number] in the [3. Send as Fax] screen.
1
Enter an address book number
with the numeric keypad, and
select [Save].
Setups
„New Recipient
Specify a new address. The specified address appears in [Recipient/Fax Number] in
the [3. Send as Fax] screen.
11
1
Select the item you want to
change, and select [Change
Settings] to set.
„Delete Recipient
This deletes all information for the selected addresses.
„Change Settings
You can confirm or change a selected address.
For information about the method for confirm/change, refer to "Address Book" (P.334).
Send as iFax
Specify an address for iFax transmission.
You can specify a total of up to 100 addresses, using either already registered address
book numbers or direct input.
Important • It is not possible to use wildcard or group number specifications.
„Address Number
Specify an address by an address book number. The specified address appears in
[Recipient Name/E-mail Address] in the [4. Send as iFax] screen.
1
328
Enter the address book number
with the numeric keypad, and
select [Save].
Setup Menu
„New Recipient
Specify a new address. The specified address appears in [Recipient Name/E-mail
Address] in the [4. Send as iFax] screen.
1
Select the item you want to
change, and select [Change
Settings] to set.
For information about the address setting,
refer to "Address Book" (P.334).
Setups
„Detailed Settings
You can set an iFax comment and an iFax profile.
Note
1
• The iFax comment can be set when a comment is registered. For information about
comment registration, refer to "Comments" (P.341).
11
Select the item you want to
change, and select [Change
Settings] to set.
For information about the method for
confirm/change, refer to "Address Book"
(P.334).
„Delete Recipient
This deletes all information for the selected addresses.
„Change Settings
You can confirm or change a selected address.
For information about the method for confirm/change, refer to "Address Book" (P.334).
Send as E-mail
Specify the recipients for the e-mail.
You can specify a total of up to 100 addresses, either selecting from the address book
numbers or by direct input.
„Address Book
The recipients can be specified from address book. The specified recipients appear in
[Recipient Name/E-mail Address] in the [5. Send as E-mail] screen.
1
Search for recipient.
For information about the operation, refer
to "Scan to Mailbox" (P.165).
329
11 Setups
„New Recipient
Specify a new recipient. The specified recipient appears in [Recipient Name/E-mail
Address] in the [5. Send as E-mail] screen.
1
Select the item you want to
change, and select [Change
Settings] to set.
For information about the recipient setting,
refer to "Address Book" (P.334).
Setups
„Detailed Settings
You can set the subject and output file format.
1
11
Select the item you want to
change, and select [Change
Settings] to set.
For information about the method for
confirm/change, refer to "Address Book"
(P.334).
„Delete Recipient
This deletes all information for the selected recipients.
„Change Settings
You can confirm or change the selected recipients.
For information about the method for confirm/change, refer to "Address Book" (P.334).
Transfer via FTP (1), Transfer via FTP (2)
Specify where FTP forwarding is to be stored.
„Address Book
When the server address is registered in the address book, you can specify the
address from the address book. The specified address appears in the [SMB Transfer]
screen.
For more about the address book, refer to "Address Book" (P.334).
330
Setup Menu
„File Format
Specify the output file format.
Note
• The formats that can be selected depend on the model of scanner installed.
Setups
„Clear Field
This deletes all information for the selected addresses.
„Keyboard
Select one of [Recipient Name], [Server], [Save in], [Login Name], and [Password] and
press the button, to display an input screen.
The numbers of characters you can input are as follows.
z
Recipient Name: 18 bytes maximum
z
Server
: 64 bytes maximum
z
Save in
: 128 bytes maximum
z
Login Name
: 32 bytes maximum
z
Password
: 32 bytes maximum
For more details, refer to "Address Book" (P.334).
Transfer via SMB (1), Transfer via SMB (2)
Specify where SMB forwarding is to be stored.
„Address Book
When the server address is registered in the address book, you can specify the
address from the address book. The specified address appears in the [FTP Transfer]
screen.
For more about the address book, refer to "Address Book" (P.334).
331
11
11 Setups
„File Format
Specify the output file format.
Note
• The formats that can be selected depend on the model of scanner installed.
Setups
„Clear Field
11
„Keyboard
This deletes all information for the selected addresses.
Select one of [Recipient Name], [Server], [Shared Name], [Save in], [Login Name], and
[Password] and press the button, to display an input screen.
The numbers of characters you can input are as follows.
z
Recipient Name: 18 bytes maximum
z
Server
z
Shared Name : 128 bytes maximum
z
Save in
: 128 bytes maximum
z
Login Name
: 32 bytes maximum
z
Password
: 32 bytes maximum
: 64 bytes maximum
For more details, refer to "Address Book" (P.334).
Print
Make print settings.
1
Select [On] or [Off].
2
When [On] is selected, you then
configure print settings.
„Quantity
Set the number of copies, from 1 to 999, in increments of 1.
1
Set the number of copies using [
and [ ] or with the numeric
keypad.
]
„Paper Supply
The [Paper Supply] screen appears.
332
Setup Menu
[Paper Supply] Screen
Select the printing paper tray. When [Auto] is selected, the same paper size as the
original size is printed.
1
Select the paper.
Setups
„Auto
A suitable paper tray is automatically selected.
„ Trays 1 to 4
11
You can select paper from the four trays.
„ Bypass...
This prints from Tray 5 (Bypass).
Content Check
You can check the content of a job flow, and modify/copy/delete.
1
Select a job flow, and select [Edit/
Delete].
2
Check the content.
3
Press the desired button.
„Delete
Pressing the [Delete] button displays a confirmation dialog box; select [Yes].
„Copy
This makes a copy of the selected job flow. From the copy of the job flow you can create
a new job flow.
The method of creation is the same as when creating a new job flow. For more details, refer to "Create
New Job Flow Sheet" (P.327).
„Edit
You can modify the selected job flow settings.
The method of modification is the same as when creating a new job flow. For more details, refer to
"Create New Job Flow Sheet" (P.327).
333
11 Setups
Address Book
You can store frequently used addresses in the address book. You can select the type
of address stored from fax, iFax, e-mail, and server (FTP/SMB).
When an address is registered, you can search for it with [Address Book] in the [Basic
Features] screen or [E-mail] screen.
You can store a total of 500 addresses, including fax, iFax, e-mail, and server (FTP/
SMB).
Note
• If the Address Book Extension Kit is installed, you can register up to 999 locations.
• Abbreviated address book numbers (001 to 070) are supported by One Touch buttons.
Setups
• To specify an e-mail address (for insertion in the address book), it is not possible to use an
address book number specified with the numeric keypad, one-touch dialing, or an address
group.
11
1
Select [Address Book].
2
Press the abbreviated number you
want to register, and select
[Create/Delete].
Note
• Select [ ] to display the
previous screen and select
[ ] to display the next screen.
• By entering a three-digit number with the numeric keypad, you can specify the abbreviated
number directly.
3
Select [Address Type], and select
[Change Settings].
4
Select the address type, and select
[Close].
5
Select the item to be set, and
select [Change Settings].
6
When the settings are completed,
select [Save].
„When You Selected [Fax] as the Address Type
The following items appear.
334
z
Address Type
z
Delayed Start
z
Fax Number
z
Remote Mailbox
z
Recipient Name
z
F Code
z
Index
z
Relay Broadcast
z
Communication Mode
z
Billing - Day Time
z
Resolution
z
Billing - Night Time
Setup Menu
z
Cover Note
z
Maximum Image Size
z
Billing - Midnight Time
„When you selected [iFax] as the Address Type
The following items appear.
Address Type
z
Communication Mode
z
E-mail Address
z
Resolution
z
Recipient Name
z
Maximum Image Size
z
Index
z
iFax Profile
Setups
z
„When You Selected [Mail] as the Address Type
11
The following items appear.
Address Type
z
First Name
z
E-mail Address
z
Custom Item 1
z
Recipient Name
z
Custom Item 2
z
Last Name
z
Custom Item 3
z
„When You Selected [Server] as the Address Type
The following items appear.
z
Address Type
z
Save in
z
Recipient Name
z
Login Name
z
Transfer Protocol
z
Password
z
Server Name/IP Address
z
Port Number
z
Shared Name (SMB Only)
Address Type
You can change the address type.
Fax Number
Enter the fax number as not more than 128 digits.
For information about entering text, refer to "Entering Text" (P.252).
E-mail Address
Enter the e-mail address as not more than 128 characters.
For information about entering text, refer to "Entering Text" (P.252).
Recipient Name
Enter the recipient as not more than 18 characters.
For information about entering text, refer to "Entering Text" (P.252).
Index
You can enter a single alphanumeric index character for use as a "keyword" to search
the address book.
For information about entering text, refer to "Entering Text" (P.252).
335
11 Setups
Communication Mode
Set the communications mode. You can select from [G3 (Auto)] or [F4800].
When the destination is specified by an address book entry with the communications
mode set, it is not possible to change the communications mode in the [Fax/iFax]
screen.
Note
• When the iFax kit is installed, you can select [G4 (Auto)].
• For iFax, the setting applies to the section between the fax gateway and the recipient fax.
Resolution
Setups
Set the image quality in a transmission.
11
Select from [Panel] (image quality selected on the control panel), [Standard], [Fine],
[Superfine (400 dpi)], and [Superfine (600 dpi)].
Cover Note
Select whether to send transmissions with a cover sheet attached. If attached, specify
comments relating to the recipients and sender to be included in the cover sheets.
Comments must be registered in advance.
For information about comment registration, refer to "Comments" (P.341).
1
[Off] or [On].
2
When [On] is selected, select
[Comment].
3
Select [Recipient's Comment].
4
Select [On], and select a comment
from the displayed list of
comments.
Note
• Select [ ] to display the
previous screen and select
[ ] to display the next screen.
5
Select [Save].
6
To insert a [Sender's Comment], repeat the procedure of steps 4 and 5.
Maximum Image Size
Select the maximum storage size from [A3], [B4], and [A4], to match the recipient's
paper size or processable profile.
336
Setup Menu
Delayed Start
You can set whether or not to use a delayed start transmission.
1
Select [Off] or [On].
2
If you selected [On], select [AM] or
[PM], then set the time with [ ]
and [ ].
Remote Mailbox
11
Select whether to use mailbox communications. Note that when using mailbox
communications, the other party's mailbox number and password must be set in
advance.
1
Select [Off] or [On].
2
If you selected [On], with the
numeric keypad enter the other
party's box number, and select
[Next].
3
If a password is set, enter the password with the numeric keypad, and select [Next].
Note
• If no password is set, do not input anything, and select [Next].
F Code
Select whether to use F code communications.
F code communications is a communications protocol agreed by the information
communications network industrial body, as a way of using the T.30 (a communications
standard) subaddresses standardized by ITU-T.
The F code (subaddress) and password use not more than 20 digits 0 to 9, *, and #.
1
Select [Off] or [On].
2
If you selected [On], with the
numeric keypad enter the F code,
and select [Next].
Note
3
• The F code consists of "0" +
mailbox number. For example,
if the mailbox number is 123,
the F code is "0123".
Enter the password as required with the numeric keypad, and select [Next].
Note
Setups
If the time in the system clock of the machine is set to display in the 24-hour clock, [AM] and [PM] do
not appear. For information about the system clock, refer to "Time" (P.254).
• You can enter up to 20 digits for the password.
Relay Broadcast
When the machine is used as a relay station in a relay broadcast, set the
specifications to be send to the relay station when the a registered address book entry
is used for the relay station. When set to [Enabled], set [Relay Station ID], [Broadcast
Recipients], and [Print at Relay Station].
337
11 Setups
1
For a relay broadcast, select [On],
and select [Save].
2
With the numeric keypad, enter the
relay station ID as two digits, then
select [Enter/Change Recipients].
Note
Setups
3
11
With the numeric keypad, enter the
address book number (001 to 099)
or address group number (#01 to
#09) for the broadcast destination,
and select [Add].
Note
4
• The relay station ID is the
address book number for the
relay station (the machine)
already registered as a relay
station.
• If there is more than one
broadcast destination,
continue by entering another
address book number or
address group number, and
pressing [Add].
To print a document also to the relay station, under [Print at Relay Station] select [On].
Billing - Day Time, Billing - Night Time, Billing - Late Night Time
Set the connection time for one unit charge in each of the time bands (daytime/night/
late night).
This item appears when the fax feature for the Login Setup/Auditron Administration is
enabled.
For information about how to enable the feature, refer to "Auditron Mode" (P.352).
The registered details can be confirmed by printing the [Billing Data List].
For information about how to print, refer to "Billing Data List" (P.380).
338
1
Insert the card, and enter the
System Administration mode, then
use the procedure from step 2.
2
Select one of [Billing - Day Time],
[Billing - Night Time], and [Billing Midnight Time], and select [Change
Settings].
3
Select [Not Billing] or [Billing].
4
When [Billing] is selected, using the keyboard displayed on the screen or the numeric
keypad on the control panel, enter the time for one unit charge(0.1 to 255.9 seconds).
5
Select [Save].
6
Exit System Administration mode, and remove the card.
Setup Menu
iFax Profile
Set the profile format of the iFax profile.
Here, profile refers to the a specification controlling attributes such as image resolution
and paper size when two iFax supporting machines are communicating.
„TIFF-S
This is the iFax standard. Originals larger than A4 size are automatically reduced to A4
size for transmission.
„TIFF-F
Setups
Select this to specify ultra-high image quality for transmitting image quality, or for
sending A3 size, or B4 size originals.
„TIFF-J
11
Send this when sending originals with JBIG.
Last Name
Enter the recipient's family name, as up to 32 characters.
For information about entering text, refer to "Entering Text" (P.252).
First Name
Enter the recipient's given name, as up to 32 characters.
For information about entering text, refer to "Entering Text" (P.252).
Custom Item 1
The attribute name set as [Custom Item 1 <attribute name>] is shown as the item
name.
You can input any information as an auxiliary item. You can input up to 20 characters.
This is appropriate for information represented by a shortish character string, such as
telephone number, employee number, and so on.
For more about attribute name, refer to "Attribute Name of Custom Items 1 to 3" (P.317).
Custom Item 2
The attribute name set as [Custom Item 2 <attribute name>] is shown as the item
name.
You can input any information as an auxiliary item. You can input up to 40 characters.
This is appropriate for information represented by a longer character string, such as
company location or division and so on.
For more about attribute name, refer to "Attribute Name of Custom Items 1 to 3" (P.317).
Custom Item 3
The attribute name set as [Custom Item 3 <attribute name>] is shown as the item
name.
You can input any information as an auxiliary item. You can input up to 60 characters.
This is appropriate for information represented by a longer character string, such as
company division or address and so on.
For more about attribute name, refer to "Attribute Name of Custom Items 1 to 3" (P.317).
Transfer Protocol
Set the forwarding destination protocol. You can select from [FTP] and [SMB].
339
11 Setups
Server Name/IP address
Enter the server name or IP address.
Shared Name (SMB Only)
Enter the shared name set for the SMB folder.
Save in
Enter the directory for storing documents.
Setups
11
Login Name
When a login name is required to be input by the forwarding destination server, set the
login name. For the login name, you can enter up to 32 characters.
Password
When a password is required to be input by the forwarding destination server, set the
password. For the password, you can enter up to 32 characters.
Port Number
Set the forwarding destination port number. Input a number in the range 1 to 65535.
When the [Delete All Settings] Button is Selected
This deletes all registered information for the selected address book entry. To delete
all registered information for the selected address book entry, select [Yes].
Important • Deleted information cannot be recovered.
Group Send
You can register up to 50 address groups for sending broadcast transmissions. Each
group can include up to 20 address book entries.
Note that recipients to be added to an address group must already be stored in the
address book.
Note
• It is not possible to include an address group in another address group.
• As shown in the following example, you can use wildcards for specifying the numbers.
• 01*: specifies the ten addresses with address book numbers 010 to 019.
• ***: specifies all address book numbers.
1
Select [Group Send].
2
Select the address group number
you want to register, and select
[Create/Delete].
Note
340
• Select [ ] to display the
previous screen and select
[ ] to display the next screen.
3
Enter the address book number
(three digits) want to register with
the numeric keypad, and select
[Add].
4
Repeat the above procedure, to
register the address book numbers.
Setup Menu
5
Select [Save].
„Delete
Delete a registered address. Enter the address book number you want to delete with
the numeric keypad, and select [Delete].
Comments
For information about entering text, refer to "Entering Text" (P.252).
1
Select [Comments].
2
Select the comment number you
want to register, and select
[Create/Delete].
Note
3
Setups
This registers a comment to be added to the cover sheet. There is a maximum of 50
comments, and for each you can enter up to 18 characters.
11
• Select [ ] to display the
previous screen and select
[ ] to display the next screen.
Using the keyboard on the screen and the numeric keypad, enter the comment, and
select [Save].
Paper Type
This item is the same as [Paper Type] in [Paper Tray Attributes] of [Common Settings].
For more information, refer to "Paper Tray Attributes" (P.259).
341
11 Setups
System Administrator Settings
In [System Administrator Settings], you set the system administrator ID and password.
You are recommended to set the system administrator ID and password to prevent
setting changes and ensure security.
The following are the places to reference for information about each setting.
System Administrator Login ID................................................................................................342
System Administrator Password ...............................................................................................343
Setups
Maximum Login Attempts........................................................................................................343
1
11
In the [System Settings] screen,
select [System Administrator
Settings].
For the method of displaying the [System Settings] screen, refer to "System Settings Procedure" (P.240).
2
Select the feature to be set.
System Administrator Login ID
Set the system administrator UserID. You can enter from 1 to 32 characters.
Note
342
• The default setting of the system administrator UserID is 11111.
1
Select [System Administrator Login
ID].
2
Select [On].
3
Select [Keyboard], then in [New
System Administrator Login ID],
enter the system administrator ID,
and select [Save].
4
Select [Keyboard] once more, and in [Re-enter System Administrator Login ID], enter
the same system administrator ID, and select [Save].
5
Select [Save].
System Administrator Settings
System Administrator Password
Set the password for System Administration mode. This is recommended for stronger
security.
Note
• The default setting of the system administrator password is "x-admin".
This item appears when in the Login Setup/Auditron Administration operation, you set
[Yes] for using a password. Set the password after setting the system administrator
UserID.
You can set the password to from 4 to 12 numeric digits.
1
Select [System Administrator
Password].
2
Select [Set].
3
With the numeric keypad, enter
[New Password] (4 to 12 digits),
and select [Save].
4
In [Re-enter Password], enter the same password, and select [Save].
Note
Setups
For more about enabling and disabling passwords, refer to "Login Setup/Auditron Administration"
(P.344).
11
• To set no password, leave the password blank, and select [Save].
Maximum Login Attempts
If system administrator ID authentication fails repeatedly, you can set a limit beyond
which further tries are not allowed.
You can set the number of authentication attempts allowed, from 1 to 10.
Note
• The count is reset when the machine is restarted.
1
Select [Maximum Login Attempts].
2
Select [On].
3
With [ ] and [ ], set the number
of authentication attempts allowed.
4
Select [Save].
343
11 Setups
Login Setup/Auditron Administration
In [Login Setup/Auditron Administration], to prevent unauthorized users from accessing
the machine, you can set different restrictions for each user, or limit the number of
pages each user can produce.
When the Login Setup/Auditron Administration feature is enabled, each user of the
machine must enter a UserID and password (if the optional Copylyzer is installed,
inserting a card), thus providing administrative control and accounting for the machine.
The following are the places to reference for information about each setting.
Setups
Create/Check User Accounts ....................................................................................................344
11
User Details Setup.....................................................................................................................348
Reset User Accounts .................................................................................................................347
System Administrator Copy Meter ...........................................................................................348
Charge Print Settings ................................................................................................................350
Fax Billing Data ........................................................................................................................351
Password Entry from Control Panel..........................................................................................351
Login Setup/Auditron Mode .....................................................................................................351
1
In the [System Settings] screen,
select [Login Setup/Auditron
Administration].
For the method of displaying the [System Settings] screen, refer to "System Settings Procedure" (P.240).
2
Select the feature to set/change.
Create/Check User Accounts
When the login setup/Auditron administration feature is enabled, in order to carry out
authentication of registered users, the UserIDs, and user names are registered.
For a user of the machine, you can control the use of color modes, or set a limit on the
number of pages. For each registered user, you can also check the cumulative number
of pages. You can register up to 1,000 sets of user data.
Note
344
• This item does not appear when [Network Access] or [Remote Access] is selected in "Login
Setup/Auditron Mode" (P.351).
Login Setup/Auditron Administration
1
Select [Create/Check User
Account].
2
Select the item for which you want
to carry out user registration, and
select [Create/Delete].
Note
• Select [ ] to display the
previous screen and select
[ ] to display the next screen.
• By entering a four-character UserID with the numeric keypad, you can specify the user
directly.
Enter the ID number (up to 32
characters) to be set for the user,
and select [Save].
4
Select any item, and set it.
5
Select [Save].
Setups
3
11
UserID
You can enter up to 32 characters for a UserID to use the machine.
User Name
Set the user name. You can enter up to 32 characters.
For information about entering text, refer to "Entering Text" (P.252).
Password
Set the password. This is recommended for stronger security. You can set the
password to from 4 to 12 numeric digits.
[Password] appears when in [Login Setup/Auditron Mode], [Check User Details] is set to [On]. For
information about [Login Setup/Auditron Mode], refer to "Login Setup/Auditron Mode" (P.351).
E-mail Address
Enter an e-mail address. Set an e-mail address. Up to 128 characters can be entered.
The address set here will be shown as the sender when sending [E-mail].
For information about how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.252).
Account Limit
You can set restrictions on the use of color modes and limits on the number of pages
for copying, scanning, and printing.
1
Select [Account Limit].
2
Select [Copy Service], [Scan
Service] or [Print Service].
3
To set [Color Access], select [Color
Access], and select the color
modes that can be used.
345
11 Setups
4
To set [Account Limit], select
[Account Limit], then with the
numeric keypad enter the
maximum number of pages in the
color mode.
Note
• Selecting [Next] causes the
input to switch to the next
item.
Setups
„Color Access
Set the color mode that can be used.
z
11
Free Access
All color modes can be used.
z
Black Only
Monochrome only can be used.
z
Color Only
Color only can be used.
„Account Limit
Set the maximum number of pages that can be used in a copy or scan.
z
Color
You can set from 1 to 9999999 pages (7 digits). Set this in units of one page.
z
Black
You can set from 1 to 9999999 pages (7 digits). Set this in units of one page.
Reset Total Impressions
Reset the current cumulative number of pages for a selected user, returning it to zero.
1
Select [Reset Total Impressions].
„Yes
Reset the current cumulative number of pages for the user. Once reset, the previous
count cannot be restored.
„No
Cancel resetting the cumulative number of pages.
346
Login Setup/Auditron Administration
Reset Account
This deletes all registered information for the selected user.
1
Select [Reset Account].
„Yes
Important • All job flows, mailboxes, and documents within mailboxes belonging to the user are deleted.
If the user is owner of a large amount of material (when a large quantity of documents is left
remaining within a mailbox for example), the deletion will take a considerable time.
„No
This cancels the deletion of the user data.
Reset User Accounts
You can delete all registered information for all registered users in a single operation,
or reset the auditron. You can also print an auditron report to include all services
Note
• This item does not appear when [Network Access] or [Remote Access] is selected in "Login
Setup/Auditron Mode" (P.351).
1
Select [Reset User Accounts].
2
When printing an auditron report
for all services, select [Print
Report].
3
Select the item to delete/reset, and
select [Reset].
4
Select [Yes] or [No].
„All User Accounts
This deletes all registered information for each user. It also deletes all data including
the maximum number of pages, cumulative number of pages, color mode restrictions,
printer auditron, and so on.
Important • All job flows, mailboxes, and documents within mailboxes belonging to the user are deleted.
If the user is owner of a large amount of material (when a large quantity of documents is left
remaining within a mailbox for example), the deletion will take a considerable time.
„All Color Access Settings
This resets the [Color Access] settings for all users to [Free Access].
„All Account Limits
This resets the maximum number of pages for all users to the default value.
The default value for the maximum number of color/monochrome pages is 9999999
pages.
347
Setups
This deletes the registered user data.Once deleted, the data cannot be restored.
11
11 Setups
„Total Impressions
This resets all Auditron administration data for all users including the system
administrator. The number of pages is also reset to 0.
„Print Meters
This resets all printer auditron, and deletes automatically registered job owner names.
The count of the number of pages printed is also reset to zero.
„Print Report
An auditron report of all services is printed.
Setups
„Yes
This deletes/resets the data for the selected item. Once deleted/reset, it cannot be
restored.
11
„No
This cancels the operation on the selected item.
System Administrator Copy Meter
You can check/reset the cumulative number of pages copied using System
Administration mode on the screen.
The cumulative number of pages is counted up to 9999999 pages for both color and
monochrome.
1
Select [System Administrator Copy
Meter].
2
This checks the cumulative number
of pages.
3
To reset, select [Reset].
User Details Setup
Set the information required when carrying out authentication.
1
Select [User Details Setup].
2
Press any item, and set it.
3
Select [Save].
UserID Characters
If required, you can change the indication that appears as UserID on the [System
Administrator Login] screen when the control panel <Log In/Out> button is pressed to
such as "UserName" or "Number". The alias can be set to 1 to 15 characters.
Note
348
• The value set is also reflected in report/list displays, and when accessing from CentreWare
Internet Services.
Login Setup/Auditron Administration
Hide User ID
You can set the way in which the UserID is shown as it is being input. Use this for extra
security as required.
„Show
As you enter the UserID, the characters are echoed on the screen in the normal way.
„Hide
As you enter the UserID, the character string is hidden as a row of asterisks (*****).
If required, you can change the indication that appears as AccountID on the [System
Administrator Login] screen when the control panel <Log In/Out> button is pressed to
such as "AccountName" or "Number". The alias can be set to 1 to 15 characters.
Note
• This item appears when [Network Access] is selected in "Login Setup/Auditron Mode"
(P.351).
• The value is also reflected in report/list displays, and when accessing from CentreWare
Internet Services.
Hide Account ID
You can set the way in which the AccountID is shown as it is being input. Use this for
extra security as required.
Note
• This item appears when [Network Access] is selected in "Login Setup/Auditron Mode"
(P.351).
„Show
As you enter the AccountID, the characters are echoed on the screen in the normal
way.
„Hide
As you enter the AccountID, the character string is hidden as a row of asterisks (*****).
Failed Access Log
In order to detect unauthorized access, if the number of times that authentication fails
within a set time exceeds the [Failed Attempts] value set here, then an error is logged.
1
Select [Failed Access Log].
2
Select [On], and with the numeric
keypad enter the number of
failures.
Store User Details
You can set the destination to save authentication information. Select NVM or hard
disk.
Note
• This item appears when [Network Access] is selected in "Login Setup/Auditron Mode"
(P.351).
349
Setups
Account ID Characters
11
11 Setups
Charge Print Settings
Set how received print jobs should be handled.
1
Select [Charge Print Settings].
2
Select the item to be set, and
select [Change Settings].
3
Set the setting value.
4
Select [Save].
Setups
Receive Control
When using the authentication feature, set how to handle print jobs for which
authentication failed (the print driver did not provide the correct UserID, password, and
other authentication information).
11
For information about printing from a print driver, refer to "Printing" (P.215).
Note
• Even if [Printer] in Login Setup/Auditron Administration is set to [Off], the setting here of
[According to Print Auditron] is not affected.
1
Select [Receive Control].
2
Select [According to Print Auditron]
or [Save All].
3
Select the treatment of jobs with
invalid authentication and jobs with
no UserID.
„According to Print Auditron
Operation follows the receiving controls set on the machine. When [According to Print
Auditron] is selected, items [Job Login Failure] and [Job without UserID] appear.
Note
z
• [Job without UserID] can be displayed by selecting the CentreWare Internet Services
[Properties] tab > [Auditron Settings] > [Non-Account Print]. For information about
CentreWare Internet Services, refer to "CentreWare Internet Services" (P.212).
Job Login Failure
Set the action for jobs for which authentication failed.
- When [Save All] is selected, all jobs received are saved.
- When [Cancel Job] is selected, jobs received are deleted.
z
Job without UserID
Set the action for jobs with no UserID input.
- When [Save All] is selected, all jobs received are saved.
- When [Cancel Job] is selected, jobs received are deleted.
For information about where jobs are saved, refer to "Charge Print" (P.359).
„Save All
Regardless of whether the authentication feature is being used or not, all jobs received
are saved.
For information about job saving, refer to "Charge Print" (P.359).
350
Login Setup/Auditron Administration
Fax Billing Data
This section describes the settings for the fax billing.
In order to register the billing data, enable the fax feature for the Login Setup/Auditron
Administration prior to the operations.
For information about how to enable the feature, refer to "Auditron Mode" (P.352).
Set the communications time per unit charge in each time band (daytime/night/late night) in [Billing].
For information about the settings in [Billing], refer to "Billing - Day Time, Billing - Night Time,
Billing - Late Night Time" (P.338).
Insert the card, and enter System
Administration mode.
2
Select [Fax Billing Data].
Setups
1
11
3
Select [Change Settings].
4
Using the keyboard displayed on
the screen or the numeric keypad,
enter the charges.
5
Select [Save].
Password Entry from Control Panel
Set whether a password is input when the system administrator or a user is using the
machine.
Select [On], to enable "Password" (P.345) for "System Administrator Password"
(P.343) and [Create/Check User Account].
Select [Off] to not require the password, even if it is set in the above procedures.
Important • The setting of [Password Entry from Control Panel] is used for verification on the machine.A
password must always be input when are using CentreWare Internet Services or other
remote access, regardless of the use of password setting. Depending on verification
procedures, a password may be required for other processes as well.
Note
• The system administrator password is also used to change settings from CentreWare
Internet Services.
Login Setup/Auditron Mode
Set whether the Auditron administration feature is enabled or not, and whether to
request an authentication operation.
1
Select [Login Setup/Auditron
Mode].
2
Select any item.
Off
To operate the machine requires no user login setup/Auditron administration.
Note
• Even if [Auditron Mode] and [Mailbox Access] are set to [On], this does not feature.
351
11 Setups
Local Machine Access
The Auditron administration is carried out using the authenticated users already registered
on the machine.
For information about authentication on the machine, refer to "Authentication and Auditron
Administration" (P.400).
Network Access
Carry out Auditron administration using user information managed by an external
accounting service. User information is registered by the remote accounting service.
Setups
For information about net authentication, refer to "Authentication and Auditron Administration"
(P.400).
Note
11
• When set to [Network Access], in the [Authentication] screen which appears when the
control panel <Log In/Out> button is pressed, you can enter "Account ID".
„Check User Details
Select whether to use user details.
If this is set to [Off (Keep logon records)], [User ID] and [Account ID] must be entered,
but are not checked. However, the entered information is logged onto the machine.
Select [On] to verify user information.
Remote Access
Verifies remote authentication server. Can be used to manage user information
managed on a remote authentication server. User information cannot be registered on
the machine.
For more information about remote authentication, refer to "Authentication and Auditron
Administration" (P.400).
Important • When switching to or from remote access mode, the following information is lost.
• All user information
• Personal mailboxes and personal job flow sheets
Note
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
„Guest User
Set whether a user not registered with the remote authentication server can use the
machine as a guest user.
„Guest Password
Configure the guest password as necessary. 4 to 12 characters can be entered for the
password.
The following items are common settings for each verification feature.
Auditron Mode
Select whether to use the Auditron administration feature when using the copy, fax,
scanner, and printer features. Note that login setup/Auditron administration cannot be
used unless the system administrator UserID is set.
For information about the items you can manage, refer to "Authentication and Auditron Administration"
(P.387).
Note
• When "Local Machine Access" (P.352) or "Network Access" (P.352) is selected, this is
enabled.
• To set the fax charging data, be sure to select [Exit], and exit the System Administration
mode, then once again enter the System Administration mode to make the settings.
• The items appearing depend on the services provided.
352
Login Setup/Auditron Administration
1
Select [Auditron Mode].
2
For the services for which you want
to enable the administration
feature, select [On].
„Copy Service
Administration relating to copy operations.
Setups
„Fax Service
Administration relating to fax and iFax operations.
„Scan Service
11
Administration relating to scanner operations.
„Print Service
Administration relating to the printer operations.
Mailbox Access
Set whether to carry out authentication when printing or retrieving documents stored in
a mailbox.
Note
• When "Local Machine Access" (P.352) or "Network Access" (P.352) is selected, this is
enabled.
1
Select [Mailbox Access].
2
Set any item.
„Login During Printing
Set whether authentication is required when a document within a mailbox is printed.
„Login During Retrieval
Set whether authentication is required when a document within a mailbox is retrieved
through the network.
353
12 Job Status
This chapter describes the job status features.
z
Job Status Overview.................................................................................356
z
Checking Executing/Pending Jobs ...........................................................357
z
Checking Completed Jobs........................................................................358
z
Printing and Deleting Stored Documents..................................................359
z
Preferentially Printing Pending Print Jobs ................................................365
z
Handling Error Terminations .....................................................................366
12 Job Status
Job Status Overview
In the job status features, you can check executing or pending jobs, and check on
completed jobs. You can also cancel printing, or preferentially print pending print jobs.
1
Press the <Job Status> button.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
<Job Status>
button
Job Status
C
In the [Job Status] screen, you can do the following.
„Checking Jobs
12
You can check lists of executing and pending jobs, and display more details. You can
also cancel an executing or pending job.
For more details, refer to "Checking Executing/Pending Jobs" (P.357).
„Checking the Status of Completed Jobs
You can display the status of completed jobs. You can also display more details.
For more details, refer to "Checking Completed Jobs" (P.358).
„Checking Stored Documents
You can print or delete authentication print, security print, sample print, delayed print,
and documents stored in a public mailbox.
For more details, refer to "Printing and Deleting Stored Documents" (P.359).
„Job Priority Printing
You can preferentially print pending print jobs.
For more details, refer to "Preferentially Printing Pending Print Jobs" (P.365).
356
Checking Executing/Pending Jobs
Checking Executing/Pending Jobs
This section describes how to check executing or pending jobs. In the status screen,
you can cancel jobs, or preferentially execute jobs.
1
Press the <Job Status> button.
2
Check the executing/pending job.
Note
• Select [ ] to display the
previous screen and select
[ ] to display the next screen.
To cancel or preferentially execute
a job, select the job.
4
Select [Stop] or [Promote Job].
Job Status
3
12
„Stop
Cancels the executing or pending job.
„Promote Job
Promotes the job to be run after the currently executing job. Note, however, that if after
using [Promote Job], you continue, to use [Promote Job] for another job, the later
promoted job will be promoted ahead of the earlier promoted job and in the [Current
and Pending Jobs] screen will have a mark by [Status].
357
12 Job Status
Checking Completed Jobs
This section describes how to check completed jobs.
You can check whether a job has completed successfully. Also, by selecting a job, you
can display more details.
1
Press the <Job Status> button.
2
Select the [Completed Jobs] tab.
Note
Job Status
12
358
• Select [ ] to display the
previous screen and select
[ ] to display the next screen.
3
To check the details of a job, select
the job.
4
After checking, select [Close].
Printing and Deleting Stored Documents
Printing and Deleting Stored Documents
This section describes how to print or delete documents stored by the secure print or
sample print feature, or documents stored by authentication print receiving control.
Note
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
Carry out printing and deletion of stored documents from the following [Job Status]
screen.
Press the <Job Status> button.
2
Select the [Stored Documents] tab.
Job Status
1
12
Charge Print
When authorization features are in use, print jobs which have failed to authenticate
(incorrect authentication details such as UserID or password on the print drivers) are
processed according to the settings in [Charge Print Settings].
This section describes how to print or delete documents stored by charge print
receiving control.
For more details of charge print settings, refer to "Charge Print Settings" (P.350).
1
Press the <Log In/Out> button.
2
With the numeric keypad, enter the
UserID for whom the auditron
apply, and select [Confirm].
3
Select [Charge Print].
4
Select the number you want to
check, and select [Document List].
Note
• Select [Refresh] to display the
updated information.
• Select [
] to display the previous screen and select [
] to display the next screen.
• With the numeric keypad, you can also enter a three-digit number directly.
5
Enter the password, and select
[Confirm].
Note
6
• If no password is set, the
[Password] screen does not
appear.
Select the document you want to
print or delete.
359
12 Job Status
When You Selected [Delete]
This deletes the document stored by authentication print.
1
Select [Delete].
2
Select [Yes].
„Yes
This deletes the document.
Job Status
Important • Once the document is deleted, it cannot be recovered.
12
„No
This cancels deleting the document.
When You Selected [Print]
This prints the document saved by charge print.
1
Select [Print].
2
Select what happens to the
document after printing.
„Print and Delete
This starts printing the document. After printing, the document is deleted.
„Print and Save
This starts printing the document. After printing, the document remains undeleted.
„Cancel
This cancels printing the document.
Secure Print
This section describes how to print and delete documents stored by the secure print
feature.
For information about secure print operations, refer to the print driver help information.
1
Select [Secure Print].
2
Select the number you want to
check, and select [Document List].
Note
• Select [Refresh] to display the
updated information.
• Select [
] to display the previous screen and select [
] to display the next screen.
• You can also enter the three-digit number directly with the numeric keypad.
360
Printing and Deleting Stored Documents
3
Enter the password, and select
[Confirm].
Note
4
• If no password is set, the
[Password] screen does not
appear.
Select the document you want to
print or delete.
Note
• Select [Select All] to select all
documents. Press this button
once more to deselect all
documents.
Job Status
When You Selected [Delete]
This deletes the security print document.
1
Select [Delete].
2
Select [Yes].
12
„Yes
This deletes the document.
Important • Once the document is deleted, it cannot be recovered.
„No
This cancels deleting the document.
When You Selected [Print]
This prints the security print document.
1
Select [Print].
2
Select what happens to the
document after printing.
„Print and Delete
This starts printing the document. After printing, the document is deleted.
„Print and Save
This starts printing the document. After printing, the document remains undeleted.
„Cancel
This cancels printing the document.
361
12 Job Status
Sample Print
When printing multiple copies from a client, specifying a sample print means that the
job terminates after printing just one copy. After checking the print results, to print the
remaining copies, indicate the printing of the sample print from the screen of the
machine.
This section describes how to print and delete documents stored by the sample print
feature.
For information about the method of sample printing, refer to the print driver help information.
Select [Sample Print].
2
Select the number you want to
check, and select [Document List].
Job Status
1
Note
• Select [Refresh] to display the
updated information.
• Select [
] to display the previous screen and select [
] to display the next screen.
• You can also enter a three-digit number directly with the numeric keypad.
12
3
Select the document you want to
print or delete.
Note
• Select [Select All] to select all
documents. Press this button
once more to deselect all
documents.
When You Selected [Delete]
This deletes the sample print document.
1
Select [Delete].
2
Select [Yes].
„Yes
This deletes the document.
Important • Once the document is deleted, it cannot be recovered.
„No
This cancels deleting the document.
When You Selected [Print]
The sample print document is printed. After printing the remaining copies, the stored
sample print document is deleted.
362
1
Select [Print].
2
Select [Yes].
Printing and Deleting Stored Documents
„Yes
This starts printing the document. After printing, the document is deleted.
„No
This cancels printing the document.
Delayed Print
This section describes how to print and delete documents stored by the delayed print
feature.
For information about delayed print operations, refer to the print driver help information.
Select [Delayed Print].
2
Select the document you want to
print or delete.
Note
Job Status
1
12
• Select [Refresh] to display the
updated information.
• Select [ ] to display the
previous screen and select
[ ] to display the next screen.
When You Selected [Delete]
This deletes the document saved by the delayed print feature.
1
Select [Delete].
2
Select [Yes].
„Yes
This deletes the document.
Important • Once the document is deleted, it cannot be recovered.
„No
This cancels deleting the document.
When You Selected [Print]
This prints the document saved by the delayed print feature. After printing, the
document is deleted. If printed manually, the document is not printed again at the
scheduled time.
1
Select [Print].
2
Select [Yes].
„Yes
This starts printing the document. After printing, the document is deleted.
„No
This cancels printing the document.
363
12 Job Status
Public Mailboxes
This section describes how to print and delete documents stored in a public mailbox.
For information about saving in public mailboxes for polling, refer to "Storing for Polling (Allowing
Remote Machines to Retrieve Documents from Your Machine)" (P.137).
Note
1
Select [Public Mailbox].
2
Select the document you want to
print or delete.
Note
Job Status
12
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
• Select [Refresh] to display the
updated information.
• Select [
] to display the previous screen and select [
] to display the next screen.
• Select [Select All] to select all documents. Press this button once more to deselect all
documents.
When You Selected [Delete]
This deletes the document saved in a public mailbox.
1
Select [Delete].
2
Select [Yes].
„Yes
This deletes the document.
Important • Once the document is deleted, it cannot be recovered.
„No
This cancels deleting the document.
When You Selected [Print]
Printing a document stored in a public mailbox.
When you select [Print], printing starts.
364
Preferentially Printing Pending Print Jobs
Preferentially Printing Pending Print Jobs
You can preferentially print pending print jobs.
Note
• If there are no pending print jobs, then you cannot select [Print Waiting Jobs].
1
Press the <Job Status> button.
2
Select [Print Waiting Jobs].
Job Status
12
365
12 Job Status
Handling Error Terminations
This section describes how to handle error terminations.
„For a Print Job
Select a job shown as an error termination in the [Completed Jobs] tab to check the
error code. Respond appropriately to the error code.
For information about error codes, refer to "Error Code" (P.460).
„For a Fax Job
Job Status
This prints a transmission report - undelivered.
For information about transmission report (undelivered), refer to "Transmission Report - Undelivered"
(P.382). For information about how to select whether to print undelivered fax reports automatically,
refer to "Transmission Report" (P.382).
„For Other Jobs
12
Print a job status/activity report, and check the execution results.
For information about job status/activity reports, refer to "Job Status/Activity Report" (P.376).
366
13 Machine Status
This chapter describes the features for checking the machine status.
z
Overview of Machine Status .....................................................................368
z
Machine Status .........................................................................................369
z
Billing Meter/Print Report..........................................................................374
z
Consumables............................................................................................384
z
Faults ........................................................................................................385
13 Machine Status
Overview of Machine Status
You can check the machine status, and number of printed pages, on the screen. You
can also print a report/list, and check the job history, and settings/recorded values.
1
Press the <Machine Status>
button.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
<Machine
Status> button
C
Machine Status
In the [Machine Status] screen, you can do the following.
„Checking the Machine Status
You can check the machine configuration, paper tray status, and overwrite hard disk
status. You can also set the printer mode and fax receiving mode.
13
For more information, refer to "Machine Status" (P.369).
„Meter Checking and Report Output
You can check the number of pages printed for each meter, or for each user. You can
also print a report/list, and check the job history, and settings/recorded values.
For more information, refer to "Billing Meter/Print Report" (P.374).
„Checking Consumables
You can check the status of consumables.
For more information, refer to "Consumables" (P.384).
„Checking Faults
You can check the faults that have occurred in the machine.
For more information, refer to "Faults" (P.385).
368
Machine Status
Machine Status
In the [Machine Status] screen, you can check the configuration of the machine and the
paper tray status. You can also set the printer mode and fax receiving mode.
Refer to the following sections for the features in the [Machine Status] screen.
Machine Information................................................................................................................ 369
Paper Tray ................................................................................................................................ 370
Overwrite Hard Disk ................................................................................................................ 371
Print Mode................................................................................................................................ 371
Fax Receiving Mode ................................................................................................................ 373
Press the <Machine Status>
button.
2
In the [Machine Status] screen that
appears, you can check the
machine status.
Machine Status
1
13
Machine Information
In [Machine Information], you can check the serial number, machine configuration, and
software version.
1
Select [Machine Information].
„For enquiry on maintenance and operation
This indicates how to make maintenance and operating inquiries.
„Serial Number
You can check the machine serial number.
„Machine Configuration
The [Machine Configuration] screen is displayed.
„Software Version
The [Software Version] screen is displayed.
[Machine Configuration] Screen
You can check the configuration of the machine.
1
Select [Machine Configuration].
Note
• Select [ ] to display the
previous screen and select
[ ] to display the next screen.
369
13 Machine Status
In the [Machine Configuration] screen, you can check the following items.
z
Configuration Code
z
Output Device
z
HP-GL/2
z
Auto Document Feeder
z
Duplex Module
z
PCL
z
Paper Tray
z
Hard Disk
z
PDF
z
High capacity paper tray
z
Page Memory Size
z
Fax Main Board
z
Side Output Tray
z
System Memory Size
z
Fax Extended Board 1
z
Offset Stacking Module
z
PostScript
z
Fax Extended Board 2
Note
• "Output Device" indicates whether the finisher (optional) is installed or not. When the finisher
is installed, "Finisher" appears.
Machine Status
[Software Version] Screen
You can check the software version.
1
Select [Software Version].
Note
• Select [ ] to display the
previous screen and select
[ ] to display the next screen.
13
In the [Software Version] screen, you can check the following items.
z
Controller + PS ROM
z
IIT Option ROM
z
IOT ROM
z
ADF ROM
z
Finisher B ROM
z
Fax ROM
z
IIT ROM
z
Fax G3 Option ROM
Paper Tray
You can check the paper trays configured in the machine. On the screen, you can
check the following items.
1
370
z
Tray status
z
Amount of paper remaining
z
Paper size
z
Paper type
Select [Paper Tray].
Machine Status
Overwrite Hard Disk
You can check whether the hard disk is being overwritten. When "Standby" appears,
the overwriting operation has finished.
Note
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
• [Overwrite Hard Disk] only appears when [Overwrite Hard Disk] is set in the [System
Settings]. For more information, refer to "Overwrite Hard Disk" (P.273).
1
Select [Overwrite Hard Disk].
Machine Status
Print Mode
You can set the printer mode.
Note
• The items that appear depend on the options that are installed.
1
Select [Printer Mode].
2
Select [Off-line] or [On-line].
13
„Off-line
The printer cannot accept data. Any data being sent is terminated, and not printed.
„On-line
The printer can accept data.
3
Select the printer language used to
set the printer mode.
4
Select the required item.
Stored Programming - Retrieve
You can recall a printer mode saved in memory, and use it.
1
Select [Stored Programming Retrieve].
2
Select the memory number to be
used.
„Factory Defaults
You can use the factory default settings.
„Custom Settings
The custom settings number appears.
371
13 Machine Status
Setup
You can check or set the value set for a printer mode item number.
PDF, PCL and HP-GL2 emulation modes are available for the machine. For information on KS
emulation modes, refer to the User Guide for the Hangul model. For information on the ESCPK
emulation mode, refer to the User Guide for the Traditional Chinese model.
Machine Status
1
Select [Setup].
2
Enter the [Item No.] for the feature
to be set, using the numeric
keypad.
3
Select [Confirm] if necessary.
4
Select [Change Value].
5
Enter [New Value], using the numeric keypad.
6
Select [Save].
„Item Number
13
Enter the item number for the feature you want to set.
„Current Value
When you enter an [Item Number], this shows the currently set value.
„New Value
Enter the value to which you want to change the setting.
Stored Programming - Store/Delete
You can save the printer mode in memory. You can save up to 20 modes for HP-GL/2
emulation.
1
Select [Store/Delete].
2
Select [Store Current Selections] or
[Delete].
3
Select the memory number you
want to store or delete.
„Storing Current Selections
This stores the current selections. If you select a number in which information is already
stored, this is overwritten. Overwritten data cannot be restored.
„Delete
When you select [Delete], and select the number to be deleted, this deletes the
information stored in this number.
Important • Deleted data cannot be restored.
372
Machine Status
Settings at Startup
You can start the printer with a printer mode stored in memory.
1
Select [Settings at Startup].
2
Select [Factory Defaults] or
[Custom Settings].
3
If you select [Custom Settings],
select the memory number to be
used.
„Factory Defaults
Use the factory default settings.
Machine Status
„Custom Settings
The number stored in memory appears.
Fax Receiving Mode
You can set the fax receiving mode.
For information about automatic and manual fax receiving modes, refer to "About Receiving Faxes"
(P.149).
1
Select [Fax Receiving Mode].
2
Select the receiving mode.
„Manual Receive
Reception of a fax from a remote machine is manual. This mode is convenient for
confirming the sender or using an external telephone to confirm whether it is a fax
before beginning reception.
„Auto Receive
Reception of a fax from a remote machine begins automatically.
373
13
13 Machine Status
Billing Meter/Print Report
In the [Billing Meter/Print Report] screen, you can check the number of pages printed
for each meter, or for each user. You can also print a report/list, and check the job
history, and settings/recorded values.
Refer to the following sections for the features in the [Billing Meter/Print Report] screen.
Billing Meter .............................................................................................................................374
User Account Billing Meter......................................................................................................375
Print Report/List........................................................................................................................376
Print Report/List........................................................................................................................376
Automatically Printed Reports/Lists.........................................................................................382
Machine Status
1
Press the <Machine Status>
button.
2
Select the [Billing Meter/Print
Report] tab.
13
Billing Meter
You can confirm the total number of copies and printed pages by individual meters on
the display on the control panel. Confirm meters as follows:
1
Select the [Billing Meter/Print
Report] tab.
Meter 1
Number of full color copies + Number of full color prints.
Meter 2
Number of B/W copies + Number of B/W prints + FAX*1
Meter 3
Number of large-size full color prints*2
Meter 4
Meter 1 + Meter 2
Note
• When print data resulting from color conversion using an ICC profile, for example, on the
application is printed at Auto (Color/B/W), even documents that appear in black-and-white
on the monitor are printed in color. In this case, meter 3 (color printing) is used for counting
the number of prints.
• *1 is applied on models equipped with FAX features. Only B/W and not color is supported for
FAXes.
• For *2, large-size full color is counted as a print at either of number of full color copies or
number of full color prints in meter 1 if a copy or print is made on paper of 279 mm × 400 mm
or larger (279 mm or more in the primary scanning direction and 400 mm or more in the
secondary scanning direction) when the user has selected color (4-color or 3-color) for
copying or printing or a color document has been recognized during document scanning on
the scanner.
2
374
Select [Billing Meter].
Billing Meter/Print Report
User Account Billing Meter
You can check the number of pages printed in monochrome and color by each user.
If the login setup/auditron administration feature is enabled, you can check the billing
meter for the currently authenticated UserID.
For information about the login setup/auditron administration feature, refer to "Login Setup/Auditron
Mode" (P.351).
1
Press the <Log In/Out> button.
2
Enter the UserID with the numeric
keypad, and select [Confirm].
Machine Status
„To Check the Billing Meter for the Currently Authenticated UserID
1) Enter the UserID for the user for which you want to check the billing meter.
Note
• If a password is required, enter the password.
2) Continue to step 3.
„To Check the System Administrator Meter
13
1) Enter the UserID for System Administration mode.
Note
• If a password is required, enter the password.
2) Select [User Mode].
3) Press the <Machine Status>
button.
4) Continue to step 3.
3
Select the [Billing Meter/Print
Report] tab.
4
Select [User Account Billing Meter].
5
Select the meter you want to
check.
„Copy Meter
This shows the number of pages copied.
„Scan Meter
This shows the number of pages scanned.
„Print Meter
This shows the number of pages printed.
375
13 Machine Status
Print Report/List
This section describes how to print a report/list.
Note
• The items shown depend on the features that are installed.
• When the <Job in Memory> indicator is lit, you can check the stored documents with [Stored
Documents List].
1
Select [Print Report/List].
Machine Status
Job Status/Activity Report
13
1
Select [Job Status/Activity Report].
2
Select the report/list to be output.
3
Press the <Start> button.
„Job History Report
You can check the print, scan, and fax results. The data for the last 50 jobs is printed.
The print reports available are [All], [Fax/Mail/Scanner], [Auto Forwarding Jobs], and
[Print] reports. You can also automatically print a [Job History Report] when 50 jobs are
exceeded.
For the settings, refer to "Reports" (P.266).
„Activity Report
You can check whether outgoing or incoming communications were completed
successfully. You can organize reports by the remote terminal name, or by whether the
communication was incoming or outgoing.
The following cases are not included in [Activity Report].
- Redialed outgoing communications and polling
- When a document waiting to be sent is deleted while on send standby or redial
standby
- When the power is turned off while sending, or a system error occurs
You can automatically print a report when the total number of items reaches 100.
For information about the settings, refer to "Reports" (P.266).
„Error History Report
Information about the errors occurring in the machine is printed. Information is printed
for the most recent 50 errors.
„Stored Documents List
Uncompleted jobs (documents for which sending or receiving is not completed, and
store for polling documents) stored in the mailbox are printed.
376
Billing Meter/Print Report
Copy Mode Settings
1
Select [Copy Mode Settings].
2
Select [Settings List - Common
Items].
3
Press the <Start> button.
„Settings List - Common Items
You can check the hardware configuration of the machine, and network information,
and the print feature and copy feature setting status.
Note
Print Mode Settings
1
Select [Print Mode Settings].
2
Select the report/list to be printed.
3
Press the <Start> button.
Note
13
• The items displayed depend
on the options that are
installed.
„Settings List - Common Items
You can check the hardware configuration of the machine, network information, and
the print feature and copy feature setting status.
Note
Machine Status
• The same content is printed for the [Settings List] regardless of whether you print from [Copy
Mode Settings], [Print Mode Settings], [Scan Mode Settings], or [Fax Mode Settings].
• The same content is printed for the [Settings List] regardless of whether you print from [Copy
Mode Settings], [Print Mode Settings], [Scan Mode Settings], or [Fax Mode Settings].
„PCL Settings List
This prints settings for PCL virtual printers.
„PCL Form List
This prints a list of forms registered for use with PCL.
„PDF Settings List
This prints the various settings in PDF printer mode.
„TIFF Settings List
This prints the various settings in TIFF printer mode.
„TIFF Logical Printers List
This prints a list of the logical printers created in TIFF printer mode. You can check the
settings for the stored logical printers numbered 1 to 20.
„Fonts List
This prints a list of the fonts that can be used in the machine.
„PS Logical Printers List
This prints a list of the logical printers created in PostScript.
377
13 Machine Status
„HP-GL/2 Settings List
This prints the settings in HP-GL, HP-GL/2, and HP-RTL emulation modes.
„HP-GL/2 Stored Programming List
This prints the stored programming settings for HP-GL, HP-GL/2, and HP-RTL
emulation modes.
„HP-GL/2 Palette List
This prints specimens of the 256 colors that can be specified for the pen attributes in
HP-GL and HP-GL/2 emulation.
„PostScript Fonts List
This prints the fonts that can be used with PostScript.
Machine Status
Scan Mode Settings
13
1
Select [Scan Mode Settings].
2
Select the report/list to be printed.
3
Press the <Start> button.
„Settings List - Common Items
You can check the hardware configuration of the machine, network information, and
print feature and copy feature settings.
Note
• The same content is printed for the [Settings List] regardless of whether you print from [Copy
Mode Settings], [Print Mode Settings], [Scan Mode Settings], or [Fax Mode Settings].
„Extended Features Settings List
You can check the settings relating to scan features.
Note
• The same content is printed for the [Extended Features Settings List] regardless of whether
you print from [Scan Mode Settings] or [Fax Mode Settings].
„Domain List
You can check the permitted domains registered for domain filtering.
„Job Template List
You can print a list of job templates created using CentreWare Scan Service (optional)
or CentreWare Internet Services.
For information about the CentreWare scan service, refer to the "CentreWare Scan Service Installation
Guide". For information about CentreWare Internet Services, refer to the On-line Help.
„Address Book
You can check the contents of the address numbers and relay station settings.
When you specify a range of address numbers, the three address book tables for the
specified numbers and the table for the relay station settings are printed. Each page
contains the information on 50 address book numbers.
If you select [Address Book], the following screen for setting the range of address
numbers is displayed. Select the number to be stored, and press the <Start> button.
378
Billing Meter/Print Report
Fax Mode Settings
1
Select [Fax Mode Settings].
2
Select the report/list to be printed.
3
Press the <Start> button.
You can check the hardware configuration of the machine, network information, and
print feature and copy feature settings.
Note
• The same content is printed for the [Settings List] regardless of whether you print from [Copy
Mode Settings], [Print Mode Settings], [Scan Mode Settings], or [Fax Mode Settings].
13
„Extended Features Settings List
You can check the setting status relating to the fax feature.
Note
• The same content is printed for the [Extended Features Settings List] regardless of whether
you print from [Scan Mode Settings] or [Fax Mode Settings].
„Box Selector List
You can check the settings of the feature for sorting into mailboxes.
„Domain List
You can check the permitted domains registered for domain filtering.
Note
• This can be used when the iFax kit is installed.
„Address Book
You can check the contents of the address book, relay station settings, and the group
send settings.
When you specify a range of address numbers, the three address book tables for the
specified numbers and the table for the relay station settings are printed. Each page
contains the information on 50 address book numbers.
If you select [Address Book], the following screen for setting the range of address
numbers is displayed. Select the number to be stored, and press the <Start> button.
z
Group Send
You can print a table of just the group send settings.
z
Machine Status
„Settings List - Common Items
Select All
You can print the address number tables, relay station settings, and group send
settings for all address numbers.
379
13 Machine Status
„Comments List
You can check the comments saved for use on cover notes.
„Billing Data List
You can check the status of the billing data.
Note
• [Billing Data List] appears when [Fax] in the auditron feature is set to [On].
If you select [Address Book], the following screen for setting the range of address
numbers is displayed. Select the number to be stored, and press the <Start> button.
Machine Status
z
Select All
You can print a list of all billing data.
Mailbox List
13
This prints the mailbox settings and the procedure for saving to the mailbox, in a table.
Note
• [Mailbox List] appears when entered from the [User Mode] of System Administration mode.
1
Select [Mailbox List].
2
Select the range of mailbox
numbers to be printed.
3
Press the <Start> button.
Job Counter Report
This prints the counter report for each feature.
1
Select [Job Counter Report].
2
Select [Job Counter Report].
3
Press the <Start> button.
Auditron Administration
You can print a Auditron Report by user. Note that the Auditron Report by user that
appears on the screen depends on whether the auditron administration feature is
enabled or not.
Note
• [Auditron Administration] appears when entered from the [User Mode] of System
Administration mode.
When all auditron features are set to [Off]
When the auditron features are set to [Off], the following screen appears, and you can
print a printer meter report.
For information about the auditron administration feature settings, refer to "Auditron Mode" (P.352).
380
Billing Meter/Print Report
1
Select [Auditron Administration].
2
Select [Print Meter Report].
3
Press the <Start> button.
„Print Meter Report
You can check how many pages have been printed on the machine, and the total
number of sheets of paper used, for each client (job owner). The number of print pages
is counted for each of color and monochrome. [Printer Meter Report] counts from the
time at which the data is initialized.
When the Auditron Feature is Set to [On]
For information about settings for the auditron feature, refer to "Auditron Mode" (P.352).
1
Select [Auditron Administration].
2
Select the Auditron Report feature
to be printed.
3
Select the range of user numbers
to be printed.
Note
4
Machine Status
The following screen is displayed and auditron reports can be printed for features which
are set with [On] for the auditron feature by users and by features.
13
• If you select [Select All], this selects all users.
Press the <Start> button.
„Auditron Report (Print)
You can check how many pages have been printed on the machine, and the total
number of sheets of paper used, for each client (job owner).
The number of print pages is counted for each of color and monochrome. [Auditron
Report (Print)] counts from the time at which the data is initialized.
„Auditron Report (Copy)
You can check the total number of pages copied on the machine, and the numbers of
color and monochrome print pages. If there are restrictions in place on the number of
pages, or restrictions on color, these settings will appear. [Auditron Report (Copy)]
counts from the time at which the data is initialized.
„Auditron Report (Fax)
You can check the number of fax transmissions, the number of pages sent, and so on,
for each user.
„Auditron Report (Scan)
You can check the total number of pages scanned on the machine, and the numbers
of color and monochrome pages. If there are restrictions in place on the number of
pages, or restrictions on color, these settings will appear. [Auditron Report (Scan)]
counts from the time at which the data is initialized.
381
13 Machine Status
Text Effect Sample List
This prints a number of different samples at different background contrasts. Based on
the print samples, you can select the optimum background contrast.
Note
• [Text Effect Sample List] appears when entered from the [User Mode] of System
Administration mode.
1
Select [Text Effect Sample List].
2
Select [Text Effect Sample List].
3
Press the <Start> button.
Machine Status
Automatically Printed Reports/Lists
Some reports/lists relating to fax features cannot be printed manually. You can select
these reports/lists to be printed automatically.
The following are the reports/lists that can be printed automatically.
13
z
Transmission report - undelivered
z
Broadcast report
z
Transmission report
z
Multi-poll report
z
Mailbox report
z
Relay broadcast report
Transmission Report - Undelivered
You can check documents that have not been delivered, and the transmission results.
If the result of a transmission attempt is failure, it is printed.
For information about how to set whether this should be automatically printed, refer to "Transmission
Report - Undelivered" (P.267).
Transmission Report
You can check documents that have been transmitted, and the transmission results. If
the result of a transmission attempt is success, it is printed.
You can specify whether a transmission report is to be printed when sending.
You can specify whether this is to be printed automatically when each document is sent. For information
about the settings, refer to "Transmission Report" (P.304).
Mailbox Report
You can check the documents that have arrived in a mailbox.
For information about how to set whether this should be automatically printed, refer to "Mailbox
Documents Report" (P.267).
Broadcast Report
You can check that broadcast transmissions are complete. The remote terminal name
and transmission result/status is recorded.
If this is set to be automatically printed, it is automatically printed when the broadcast
transmission is completed.
For information about how to set whether this should be automatically printed, refer to "Broadcast/MultiPoll Report" (P.267).
382
Billing Meter/Print Report
Multi-poll Report
You can check the results of multi-poll transmissions. The remote terminal name and
transmission result/status is recorded.
If this is set to be automatically printed, it is automatically printed when the multi-poll
transmission completes.
For information about how to set whether this should be automatically printed, refer to "Broadcast/MultiPoll Report" (P.267).
Relay Broadcast Report
You can check the results of a relay broadcast.
If this is set to be automatically printed, it is automatically printed when the relay
broadcast completes.
Machine Status
For information about how to set whether this should be automatically printed, refer to "Relay Broadcast
Report" (P.267).
13
383
13 Machine Status
Consumables
You can check the status of consumables in the [Consumables] screen. The status of
consumables is shown as "Ready", "Replace Soon", or "Replace Now". For toner, the
amount is shown, from 0 to 100%.
The following describes the procedure for checking the status of consumables.
For information about how to replace consumables, refer to "Replacing Consumables" (P.408).
1
Press the <Machine Status>
button.
2
Select the [Consumables] tab.
Machine Status
Note
• Select [ ] to display the
previous screen and select
[ ] to display the next screen.
On the [Consumables] screen, you can check the following items. Note that staple
cartridges only appear when the finisher is installed.
13
z
Yellow Toner (Y)
z
Magenta Drum Cartridge (A3)
z
Magenta Toner (M)
z
Cyan Drum Cartridge (A2)
z
Cyan Toner (C)
z
Black Drum Cartridge (A1)
z
Black Toner (K)
z
Waste Toner Container (B)
z
Yellow Drum Cartridge (A4)
z
Staple Cartridge
Important • If using a partly consumed toner cartridge (for example a toner cartridge removed from
another Document Centre C450/C360/C250 unit), the indicated status may not match the
actual amount of consumable remaining. When replacing toner cartridges, as far as possible
the use of new items is recommended.
384
Faults
Faults
This section describes how to check the information given with respect to a fault in the
machine.
The [Error History Report] shows the last 50 occurring errors. The items displayed
include the date and time, error code, and error category.
This section describes how to print the error history.
Press the <Machine Status>
button.
2
Select the [Faults] tab.
3
Select [Error History Report].
4
Press the <Start> button.
Note
• You can also access the [Error History Report] from the [Billing Meter/Print Report] screen
[Job Status/Activity Report].
Machine Status
1
13
385
14 Authentication and Auditron
Administration
The machine has a unique Authentication feature that restricts the ability to use
functions, and an Auditron Administration feature that manages the use of each
machine feature.
This chapter contains information for System Administrators on the features
used to change the settings and on the setting procedures.
z
Overview of Authentication .......................................................................388
z
Authentication for Job Flow Sheet and Mailbox........................................391
z
Overview of Auditron Administration.........................................................400
14 Authentication and Auditron Administration
Overview of Authentication
This section is an overview of the Authentication feature used with the machine.
Authentication and Auditron Administration
Users Controlled by Authentication
The following is an explanation about the different user types that are controlled by the
Authentication feature.
Users are classified into the following four types. The Authentication feature restricts
operations according to the user type.
z
System Administrators
z
Authenticated Users
z
Unauthenticated Users
z
General Users
System Administrators
These are users who can enter and change system settings.
A system administrator uses a special user ID called a System Administrator ID.
To enter System Administration mode, enter the System Administrator ID into the user
ID entry field on the authentication screen.
14
Authenticated Users
These are users who are registered with the machine.
When an authenticated user uses a service that is restricted, the user must enter their
user ID on the authentication screen.
Unauthenticated Users
These are users who are not registered with the machine.
An unauthenticated user cannot use services that are restricted.
General Users
These are general users who are not permitted to use the machine in the authenticated
mode.
Types of Authentication
Authentication uses the user information stored in the machine or on a remote
accounting server to manage authentication.
The following shows the three different methods in which user information can be
stored.
„Direct Authentication
Direct Authentication uses the user information stored in the machine to manage
authentication.
388
Overview of Authentication
„Network Authentication
Network Authentication uses the user information from a remote account server to
manage authentication.
User information on a remote account server is sent to, and stored in the machine.
When the user information on the server is changed, that information must be sent from
the server to update the machine.
External accounting services supported by the machine include CentreWare,
EasyAdmin, and so on.
„Remote Authentication
Verifies remote accounting server. Can be used to manage user information managed
on a remote accounting server. User information is not registered on the machine.
Features Controlled by Authentication
This section describes feature of the machine that is controlled by using the
Authentication feature.
The features controlled depend on the way in which the machine is used.
There are two ways of use, as follows.
z
Local access
z
Remote access
Authentication and Auditron Administration
Net authentication allows a number of these machines to use user information
managed centrally.
14
For information about mailbox and job flow sheet control when the Authentication feature is enabled,
refer to "Authentication for Job Flow Sheet and Mailbox" (P.391).
Local Access
Local access refers to using the machine by direct operation of the control panel on the
machine.
The features controlled in local access are as follows.
„Copy
Copy operations are restricted.
When copy operations are registered in job memory, the use of the job memory is also
restricted.
„Fax/Internet Fax
Fax and iFax operations are restricted.
When fax and iFax operations are registered in job memory, use of the job memory is
also restricted.
„Scan
Scanner (mail transmission), scanner (box storage), and scanner (PC storage)
operations on the machine are restricted.
When scanner (mail transmission), scanner (box storage), and scanner (PC storage)
operations are registered in job memory, the use of the job memory is also restricted.
389
14 Authentication and Auditron Administration
„Mailbox
On the machine, even when the Login Setup/Auditron Administration feature is not
being used for copy, fax, scan, and print, when the Authentication feature is being used
on the machine, then authentication is required for mailbox operation.
„Job Flow Sheets
Authentication and Auditron Administration
On the machine, even when the Login Setup/Auditron Administration feature is not
being used for copy, fax, scan, and print, when the Authentication feature is being used
on the machine, then authentication is required for job flow sheet operation.
„Print
The printing of documents stored on the machine is restricted.
This applies to charge print.
Remote Access
Remote access refers to using CentreWare Internet Services or CentreWare
EasyOperator/EasyAdmin, and similar, to access the machine through a network.
The features controlled by remote access are as follows.
„Print
Print directions from a computer are restricted.
To use the Authentication feature, in the print driver, the authentication information
including the UserID and password must be set.
14
Print data sent to the machine that fails authentication is stored on the machine or
deleted, according to the charge print settings.
Note
• Not restricted when [System Settings]>[Login/Setup Auditron] is set to [Remote Access].
For information about [Remote Access], refer to "Remote Access" (P.352).
„Direct fax
When the Authentication feature is used for fax, the use of direct fax from a computer
is restricted.
To use the Authentication feature, in the fax driver, the authentication information
including the UserID and password must be set.
Note
• Not restricted when [System Settings]>[Login/Setup Auditron] is set to [Remote Access].
For information about [Remote Access], refer to "Remote Access" (P.352).
„CentreWare Internet Services
On the machine, even when the Login Setup/Auditron Administration feature is not
being used for copy, fax, scan, and print, when the Authentication feature is being used
on the machine, to access the machine with a Web browser, authentication is required.
Note
• Only the system administrator is allowed access when [System Settings]>[Login/Setup
Auditron] is set to [Remote Access]. General users cannot use the machine.
For information about [Remote Access], refer to "Remote Access" (P.352).
„CentreWare EasyOperator/EasyAdmin
On the machine, even when the Login Setup/Auditron Administration feature is not
being used for copy, fax, scan, and print, when the Authentication feature is being used
on the machine, to access the machine, authentication is required.
Note
• Only the system administrator is allowed access when [System Settings]>[Login/Setup
Auditron] is set to [Remote Access]. General users cannot use the machine.
For information about [Remote Access], refer to "Remote Access" (P.352).
390
Authentication for Job Flow Sheet and Mailbox
Authentication for Job Flow Sheet and Mailbox
This section describes job flow sheet and mailbox restrictions when the Authentication
feature is enabled.
The following four types of job flow sheet can be used with the machine.
Important • The job flow sheets that can be created on the machine are mailbox operation job flow
sheets. Scanner operation job flow sheets can be created on a computer on the network,
using the CentreWare EasyOperator or other software.
• A job flow sheet created on a computer on the network cannot be displayed, edited, or
copied on the machine.
„Generally Shared Job Flow Sheet
This job flow sheet is created by a general user when the Authentication feature is not
enabled.
When the Authentication feature is not enabled, such a job flow sheet can be shared
by all users of the machine, and the settings changed freely.
When the Authentication feature is being used, such a job flow sheet can only be run
by the System Administrator.
Authentication and Auditron Administration
Job Flow Sheet Types
14
„Mailbox Job Flow Sheet
This job flow sheet is created by a general user or the System Administrator in the
Mailbox Registration screen.
The owner of such a job flow sheet is the "mailbox." Users able to use the mailbox where
the job flow sheet is created can share it, and freely change settings.
The job flow sheet can only be used when the Authentication feature is not being used,
and when the Authentication feature is being used, can only be run by the System
Administrator.
„System Administrator Shared Job Flow Sheet
This job flow sheet is created by the System Administrator.
When the Authentication feature is not being used, all users of the machine can share
the job flow sheet.
When the Authentication feature is being used, all authentication registered users of
the machine can share the job flow sheet.
However, only the System Administrator can change the settings of the job flow sheet.
To create an administrator shared job flow sheet, it is necessary to press the <Log In/
Out> button, and operate the machine as the System Administrator.
„Personal Job Flow Sheet
This job flow sheet is created by an authentication registered user when the
Authentication feature is being used.
Such a job flow sheet can only be used by the authentication registered user who
created it.
Such a job flow sheet, When the Authentication feature is not enabled, such a job flow
sheet can only be run by the System Administrator.
The ways of use of job flow sheets that can be used on the machine depend on whether
or not the Authentication feature is used.
391
14 Authentication and Auditron Administration
z
When the Authentication Feature is not Enabled
z
When the Authentication Feature is Enabled
When the Authentication Feature is not Enabled
Authentication and Auditron Administration
When the Authentication feature is not enabled, the relation between the users and the
use of a job flow sheet is as follows.
For the job flow sheet operation, the operations that can be used are different for a job
flow sheet created in the mailbox registration ([Mailbox]) screen, and a job flow sheet
created in the job flow sheet registration ([Job Flow Sheets]) screen.
„Mailbox Registration ([Mailbox]) Screen
This section describes operations that can be used from the mailbox registration screen
of the machine.
General users
System administrator
Job flow
sheet
Generally Box Administrator Personal Generally Box Administrator Personal
operation shared
shared
shared
shared
Creation/
registration
–
Yes
–
–
–
–
Yes
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Deletion
Yes
Yes
–
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Selection/
execution
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Associating
with
mailbox
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Display
Editing
Copying
14
*
*The owner of a copied job flow sheet is the user who made the copy.
Important • A job flow sheet created from [Check Mailbox] allows editing, copying, deletion, and
selection/execution only from the mailbox in which the job flow sheet was created. The users
are all users who are able to use the mailbox.
• If a job flow sheet is associated with a mailbox in which it can no longer be used as a result
of a change in the authentication status, then editing and copying are no longer possible, but
it can still be used. However, once the association is released, the job flow sheet is no longer
displayed, and cannot be used.
392
Authentication for Job Flow Sheet and Mailbox
„Job Flow Sheet Registration ([Job Flow Sheets]) Screen
This section describes operations that can be used from the Job Flow Sheet
Registration screen of the machine.
General users
System administrator
Generally Box Administrator Personal Generally
shared
shared
shared
Box
Administrator Personal
shared
Creation/
registration
Yes
–
–
–
–
–
Yes
–
Display
Yes
–
Yes
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Editing
Yes
–
–
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Copying*
Yes
–
Yes
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Deletion
Yes
–
–
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Selection/
execution
Yes
–
Yes
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Associating
with mailbox
Yes
–
Yes
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
*The owner of a copied job flow sheet is the user who made the copy.
When the Authentication Feature is Enabled
When the Authentication feature is enabled, the relation between the users and the use
of a job flow sheet is as follows.
The same operations can be used from the Mailbox Registration screen and the Job
Flow Sheet Registration screen.
„When [Local Machine Access] or [Network] > [Check User Details] > [On] is
selected, or for authenticated users other than guests for [Remote Access]
Job
flow sheet
operations
Unauthenticated user
(general user)
Authenticated user
System administrator
Generally
shared
Box
Administrator
shared
Personal
Generally
shared
Box
Administrator
shared
Personal
(owner)
Personal
(nonowner)
Generally
shared
Box
Administrator
shared
Personal
Creation/
registration
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Yes
–
–
–
Yes
–
Display
–
–
–
–
–
–
Yes
Yes
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Editing
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Yes
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Copying*
–
–
–
–
–
–
Yes
Yes
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Deletion
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Yes
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Selection/
execution
–
–
–
–
–
–
Yes
Yes
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Associating
with
mailbox
–
–
–
–
–
–
Yes
Yes
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
* The owner of a copied job flow sheet is the user who made the copy.
393
Authentication and Auditron Administration
Job flow
sheet
operation
14
14 Authentication and Auditron Administration
„When [Network Access]>[Check User Details] is set to [Off (Keep logon records)
Job
flow sheet
operations
Unauthenticated user
(general user)
Authentication and Auditron Administration
Generally
shared
Box
Administrator
shared
Personal
Creation/
registration
–
–
–
–
Display
–
–
–
–
Editing
–
–
–
Copying*
–
–
Deletion
–
Selection/
execution
Associating
with
mailbox
Authenticated user
Generally
shared
System administrator
Box
Administrator
shared
Personal
(owner)
Personal
(nonowner)
Generally
shared
Box
–
–
–
–
–
–
Yes
–
Yes
–
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
Yes
–
–
–
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
–
Yes
–
Yes
–
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
–
–
Yes
–
–
–
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
–
–
–
–
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
–
–
–
–
–
Yes
Yes
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
Administrator
shared
Yes
Personal
–
* The owner of a copied job flow sheet is the user who made the copy.
„When authenticated as guest user in [Remote Access]
14
Treated as an unauthenticated user (general user) and job flow operation cannot be
performed.
Types of Mailbox
The following three types of mailbox can be used with the machine.
„Generally Shared Mailbox
This is a mailbox created by a general user without using the Authentication feature.
When the Authentication feature is not enabled, this mailbox is shared and its settings
may be changed by all users.
When the Authentication feature is enabled, this mailbox can only be operated by a
System Administrator.
„System Administrator Shared Mailbox
This is a mailbox created by a System Administrator.
When the Authentication feature is not enabled, this mailbox is shared by all users.
When the Authentication feature is enabled, this mailbox is shared by all authenticated
users.
Only a System Administrator can change the settings.
To create an administrator shared box, it is necessary to press the <Log In/Out> button,
and operate the machine as the System Administrator.
„Personal Mailbox
This is a mailbox created by an authenticated users using the Authentication feature.
Only the authenticated users that created the mailbox can use it.
When the Authentication feature is not enabled, this mailbox can only be operated by
a System Administrator.
394
Authentication for Job Flow Sheet and Mailbox
The ways to operate mailboxes that can be used with the machine differ depending on
whether the Authentication feature is enabled. The following explains the operations
available.
z
When the Authentication Feature is not Enabled
z
When the Authentication Feature is Enabled
When the Authentication feature is not enabled, the relation between the users and the
use of mailboxes is as follows.
Mailbox
operation
General users
System administrator
Generally
shared
Administrator
shared
Personal
Creation/registration
Yes
–
–
–
Yes
–
Display
Yes
Yes
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Deletion
Yes
–
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Changing settings
Yes
–
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Document display
Yes
Yes
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Document deletion
Yes
Yes
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Document
registration *
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Document output *
Yes
Yes
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Display
Yes
Yes
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Association
Yes
–
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Auto start
Yes
Yes
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Manual
start
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Job
flow
sheet
–
–
Generally Administrator
shared
shared
Personal
Authentication and Auditron Administration
When the Authentication Feature is not Enabled
14
* 1 The following operations of document registration in a mailbox or document retrieval, are not the subject of
authentication.
• Fax mailbox receiving
• iFax mailbox receiving
• Document retrieval using a scan driver or mailbox viewer
Important • If a job flow sheet is associated with a mailbox in which it can no longer be used as a result
of a change in the authentication status, then changing/copying is no longer possible, but it
can still be used. However, once the association is released, the job flow sheet is no longer
displayed, and cannot be used.
395
14 Authentication and Auditron Administration
When the Authentication Feature is Enabled
When the Authentication feature is enabled, the relation between the users and the use
of mailbox is as follows.
„When [Local Machine Access] or [Network] > [Check User Details] > [On] is
selected, or for authenticated users other than guests for [Remote Access]
Authentication and Auditron Administration
14
Mailbox
operation
Creation/registration
Unauthenticated user
(general user)
System
administrator
Authenticated user
Generally
shared
Administrator
shared
Personal
Generally
shared
Administrator
shared
Personal
(owner)
Personal
(nonowner)
Generally
shared
Administrator
shared
Personal
–
No
–
–
–
Yes
–
–
Yes
–
–
–
Yes
Yes
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
*2
Display
–
Yes
Deletion
–
No
–
–
–
Yes
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Changing settings
–
No
–
–
–
Yes
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Document display
–
Yes*2
–
–
Yes
Yes
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Document deletion
–
Yes*2
–
–
Yes
Yes
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Document
registration *1
–
–
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Document output *1
–
Yes*2
–
–
Yes
Yes
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Display
–
–*3
–
–
Yes
Yes
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Association
–
No
–
–
–
Yes
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Auto start
–
–*3
–
–
Yes
Yes
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Manual
start
–
–*3
–
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Job
flow
sheet
Yes*2
–
–
* 1 The following operations of document registration in a mailbox or document retrieval, are not the subject of
authentication.
• Fax mailbox receiving
• iFax mailbox receiving
• Document retrieval using a scan driver or mailbox viewer
* 2 This can only be used when the Authentication feature settings in System Administration mode permit mailbox
operation.
* 3 A job flow sheet associated with the mailbox permits display, auto start, and manual start operations.
Important • If a job flow sheet is associated with a mailbox in which it can no longer be used as a result
of a change in the authentication status, then changing/copying is no longer possible, but it
can still be used. However, once the association is released, the job flow sheet is no longer
displayed, and cannot be used.
396
Authentication for Job Flow Sheet and Mailbox
„When [Network Access]>[Check User Details] is set to [Off (Keep logon records)]
Unauthenticated user
(general user)
Mailbox
operation
Generally
shared
Administrator
shared
Personal
Generally
shared
Administrator
shared
Personal
(owner)
Personal
(nonowner)
Generally
shared
Administrator
shared
Personal
–
–
–
Yes
–
–
–
–
Yes
–
–
Yes
Yes
–
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
*2
Display
–
Yes
Deletion
–
–
–
Yes
–
–
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Changing settings
–
–
–
Yes
–
–
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Document display
–
Yes*2
–
Yes
Yes
–
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Document deletion
–
*2
–
Yes
Yes
–
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Document
registration *1
–
Yes
Yes
–
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Document output *1
–
Yes*2
–
Yes
Yes
–
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Display
–
–*3
–
Yes
Yes
–
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Association
–
–
–
Yes
–
–
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Auto start
–
–*3
–
Yes
Yes
–
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Manual
start
–
–*3
–
Yes
Yes
–
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Job
flow
sheet
Yes
Yes*2
–
14
* 1 The following operations of document registration in a mailbox or document retrieval, are not the subject of
authentication.
• Fax mailbox receiving
• iFax mailbox receiving
• Document retrieval using a scan driver or mailbox viewer
* 2 This can only be used when the Authentication feature settings in System Administration mode permit mailbox
operation.
* 3 A job flow sheet associated with the mailbox permits display, auto start, and manual start operations.
Important • If a job flow sheet is associated with a mailbox in which it can no longer be used as a result
of a change in the authentication status, then changing/copying is no longer possible, but it
can still be used. However, once the association is released, the job flow sheet is no longer
displayed, and cannot be used.
„When authenticated as guest user in [Remote Access]
Treated as an unauthenticated user (general user) and mailbox operation cannot be
performed
Linking Job Flow Sheet and Mailbox
The ways to link job flow sheets to mailboxes differ, depending on whether the
Authentication feature is enabled. The following explains the relationships available.
z
When the Authentication Feature is not Enabled
z
When the Authentication Feature is Enabled
Note
Authentication and Auditron Administration
Creation/registration
System
administrator
Authenticated user
• When job flow sheets not available for operation, depending on changes made to the
authentication status, are linked to a mailbox, you can still use them except for changing/
copying them. If you release the link, the job flow sheet will no longer be displayed and will
be disabled.
397
14 Authentication and Auditron Administration
When the Authentication Feature is not Enabled
When the Authentication feature is not enabled, the relation between the users and the
use of the mailbox is as follows.
Mailbox
General users
Authentication and Auditron Administration
Generally Administrator
shared
shared
Job Flow
System administrator
Personal
Generally
shared
Administrator
shared
Personal
Box
Yes
–
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
General
shared
Yes
–
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Administrator
shared
Yes
–
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
–
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Personal
When the Authentication Feature is Enabled
When the Authentication feature is enabled, the relation between the users and the use
of the mailbox is as follows.
„Authenticated users other than guests for [Remote Access] when [Local
Machine Access], [Network Access]>[Check User Details] is set to [On]
14
Mailbox Unauthenticated user
(general user)
Authenticated user
System administrator
Generally
shared
Administrator
shared
Personal
Generally
shared
Administrator
shared
Personal
(owner)
Personal
(nonowner)
Generally
shared
Administrator
shared
Personal
General shared
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Administrator
shared
–
–
–
–
–
Yes
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Personal
(owner)
–
–
–
–
–
Yes
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Personal
(non-owner)
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Job Flow
398
Authentication for Job Flow Sheet and Mailbox
„When [Network Access] >[Check User Details] is set to [Off (Keep logon
records)]
Mailbox Unauthenticated user
(general user)
Authenticated user
System administrator
Administrator
shared
Personal
Generally
shared
Administrator
shared
Personal
(owner)
Personal
(nonowner)
Generally
shared
Administrator
shared
Personal
General shared
–
–
–
–
Yes
–
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Administrator
shared
–
–
–
–
Yes
–
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Personal
(owner)
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Personal
(non-owner)
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
„When authenticated as guest user in [Remote Access]
Treated as an unauthenticated user (general user) and job flow operation and mailbox
use is not allowed.
Authentication and Auditron Administration
Generally
shared
Job Flow
14
399
14 Authentication and Auditron Administration
Overview of Auditron Administration
This section describes an overview of the Auditron Administration features that can be
used with the machine.
Authentication and Auditron Administration
Authentication and Auditron Administration
The machine uses the Auditron Administration feature together with the Authentication
feature.
There are two ways of authentication by UserID, as follows.
„Using Authentication on this Unit
Auditron administration is carried out using authentication registered user information
already registered on the machine. For print or fax data sent directly from a computer,
the authentication information set in the client side driver is checked against the
authentication information registered on the machine before the data is accepted on
the machine.
For information about fax driver settings, refer to the fax driver online help.
„Using Net Authentication
Auditron administration is carried out using user information managed by the remote
accounting service.
14
User information managed by the remote accounting service is sent to the machine
from the remote accounting service, and registered on the machine. When the user
information managed by the remote accounting service is updated, the user
information must be sent from the remote accounting service to the machine.
Net authentication allows a number of these machines to use user information
managed centrally.
External accounting services supported by the machine include CentreWare,
EasyAdmin, and so on.
„Using Remote Authentication
Verifies remote accounting server. Can be used to manage user information managed
on a remote accounting server. User information cannot be registered on the machine.
Manageable Features and Services
This section describes features and services that can be managed with the Auditron
Administration feature.
Features That can be Managed with Authentication and Corresponding Services
The features that can be managed with authentication by UserID and corresponding
services depend on whether authentication on this unit is used, or net authentication.
400
z
Local Machine Access
z
Network Access
z
Remote Access
Overview of Auditron Administration
„Local Machine Access
Features and services that can be managed by authentication on this unit are as
follows.
Restrictions on use
UserID
Authentication
Color mode
Maximum
restrictions *1 page count *2
Per-user
usage
counts
Copy
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Print
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Charge print
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Scanner
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Fax and iFax
Yes
–
–
Yes
Direct fax
Yes
–
–
Yes
Report/list
–
–
–
–
*1 Restrictions can be placed on the color modes that can be used. For information about the method of setting, refer
to "Account Limit" (P.345).
*2 This feature sets a predetermined limit on the number of sheets that can be used, and when this limit is reached,
prevents further operation. For information about the method of setting, refer to "Account Limit" (P.345).
„Network Access
When you are using Network Authentication with the machine, Auditron Administration
information is managed through a remote account server.
The features and services that can be managed on the machine are as follows.
Restrictions on use
Corresponding
service
UserID
Authentication
Color mode
Maximum
*1
restrictions
page count *2
Per-user
usage
counts
Yes
Yes *3
–
–
Print
Yes
Yes
*3
–
–
Charge print
Yes
Yes *3
–
–
Scanner
Yes
Yes
*3
–
–
Fax and iFax
Yes
–
–
–
Direct fax
Yes
–
–
–
Report/list
–
–
–
–
Copy
*1 Restrictions can be placed on the color modes that can be used. The settings are made with the remote accounting
service.
*2 This feature sets a predetermined limit on the number of sheets that can be used, and when this limit is reached,
prevents further operation. The settings are made with the remote accounting service.
*3 You can only restrict color modes when using DocuHouse (optional). Refer to your software manual for information
about DocuHouse.
Note
• Verification does not take place when [System Settings]>[Login/Setup Auditron]>[Network
Access]>[Check User Details] is set to [Off (Keep logon records)].
For information about [Network Access], refer to "Remote Access" (P.352).
401
Authentication and Auditron Administration
Corresponding
service
14
14 Authentication and Auditron Administration
„Remote Access
When remote authentication is used, the auditron administration information can be
subjected to auditron administration with DocuHouse.
For the features that can be managed with DocuHouse, refer to the documentation
supplied with the DocuHouse (optional).
Authentication and Auditron Administration
The features and services that can be managed on the machine are as follows.
Restrictions on use
Corresponding
service
UserID
Authentication
Per-user
usage
counts
Color mode
Maximum
*1
restrictions
page count *2
Copy
Yes
Yes
–
–
Print
–
Yes
–
–
Charge print
Yes
Yes
–
–
Scanner
Yes
Yes
–
–
Fax and iFax
Yes
–
–
–
Direct fax
–
–
–
–
Report/list
–
–
–
–
*1 Restrictions can be placed on the color modes that can be used. The settings are made with the remote accounting
service.
*2 This feature sets a predetermined limit on the number of sheets that can be used, and when this limit is reached,
prevents further operation. The settings are made with the remote accounting service.
14
Job That can be Managed for Each Service
For the print, scanner, and fax features, different types of job allow auditron to be
collected for each feature.
This section describes the information for which Auditron administration is possible for
each feature.
„Print Service
This section describes the information for which Auditron administration is possible, for
the job types that can be used by print.
Users for
which
Corresponding service (job) Authentication
auditron are
collected
Normal
print
Print driver for the
machine
Other than print driver for
the machine
Secure
print
Document storage
Sample
print
Sample print
Box storage and printing
Document printing
Sample print
Box storage document
printing
402
Required
Authenticated
user
–*2
Managed items
Print color pages/monochrome pages/
number of sheets
Unauthenticated Print color pages/monochrome pages/
user
number of sheets
–
–
Authenticated
user
Print color pages/monochrome pages/
number of sheets
Required
Authenticated
user
Print color pages/monochrome pages/
number of sheets
Not required *1
Authenticated
user
Print color pages/monochrome pages/
number of sheets
Required
Not required
*1
Overview of Auditron Administration
Users for
which
Corresponding service (job) Authentication
auditron are
collected
Charge
print
Document storage
Required
–
–
Document printing
Not required *1
Authenticated
user
Print color pages/monochrome pages/
number of sheets
Document storage
Not required
–
–
Document printing
Required
Authenticated
user
Print color pages/monochrome pages/
number of sheets
Mail printing
–*2
Unauthenticated Print color pages/monochrome pages/
user
number of sheets
*1 Since a job is authenticated when it arrives at the machine, authentication is not required when printing.
*2 In CentreWare Internet Services, you can print only when [Non-Account Print] is set to [Enable].
„Fax Service
This section describes the information for which Auditron administration is possible, for
the job types that can be used by fax.
Corresponding service (job)
Fax
transmission
Authentication
Users for
which
auditron are
collected
Managed items
14
Auto send
Required
Authenticated
user
Number of fax transmissions/
pages, number of charging units
Manual feed transmission
(originating, receiving)
Required
Authenticated
user
Number of fax transmissions/
pages, number of charging units
Auto receiving and
printing
Not required
Fax receiving
Number of calls received/pages,
number of charging units, print
pages/number of sheets
Manual receiving and
printing (originating,
receiving)
Not required
Fax receiving
Number of calls received/pages,
number of charging units, print
pages/number of sheets
Fax
mailbox
receiving
Auto mailbox receiving
Not required
Fax receiving
Number of calls received/pages,
number of charging units
Mailbox receiving print
Required*1
Authenticated
user
Print pages/number of sheets
Fax
Polling
Polling document storage
(mailbox, polling box)
Required*1
–
–
Not required
Unauthenticated
user
Number of fax transmissions/pages
Required
Authenticated
user
Number of polling calls/pages,
number of charging units, print
pages/number of sheets
Required*1
Authenticated
user
Print pages/number of sheets
Fax receiving
and printing
Auto send (to mailbox)
Auto receiving and
printing
Polling document
confirmation print
(mailbox, polling box)
Authentication and Auditron Administration
Delayed
print
Managed items
403
14 Authentication and Auditron Administration
Authentication
Users for
which
auditron are
collected
Relay receiving
Not required
Fax receiving
Number of calls received/pages,
number of charging units
Relay broadcast, print
Not required
Relay broadcast
Number of fax transmissions/
pages, number of charging units,
print pages/number of sheets
Direct fax transmission
Required
Authenticated
user
Number of fax transmissions/
pages, number of charging units
iFax transmission
Required
Authenticated
user
Number of iFax transmissions/
pages
Auto receiving and
printing
Not required
iFax receiving
Number of calls received/pages,
print pages/number of sheets
Auto mailbox receiving
Not required
iFax receiving
Number of calls received/pages
Mailbox receiving print
Required*1
Authenticated
user
Print pages/number of sheets
iFax relay receiving
Not required
iFax receiving
Number of calls received/pages
Fax Auto send (forward)
Not required
iFax receiving,
fax forwarding
Number of fax transmissions/
pages, number of charging units
Corresponding service (job)
Authentication and Auditron Administration
Fax
Relay
broadcast
iFax
receiving and
printing
iFax
receiving
Fax
forwarding
14
Managed items
*1 In the System Administration mode, when you select [Off] for [System Settings] > [Login Setup/Auditron
Administration] > [Login Setup/Auditron Mode] > [Mailbox Access] > [Login During Printing], then an administrator
shared box does not require authentication, and therefore auditron are collected for unauthenticated users.
z
Restrictions on the use of Login Setup/Auditron Administration for fax
When using Login Setup/Auditron Administration for fax, note the following points.
- If separate users transmit to the same recipient, this is not counted as a batch
send.
- The number of charging units is calculated on the basis of an independent timer in
the machine. The communications charges calculated from the number of
charging units may therefore differ slightly from the amount invoiced by the
telecommunications company.
- When a received page is split for printing, the number of pages received is
counted, and not the number of pages printed.
- The number of charging units is not computed for the following communications
operations.
When the numeric keypad or on-hook/off-hook is used
When an address book number is used for which the charging data has not been
registered
When combined with a telephone call (including when a transmission is started by
making a telephone call)
404
Overview of Auditron Administration
„Scan Service
The items you can manage for scan jobs using the Auditron Administration feature are
as follows.
Authentication
Managed items
E-Mail
Required
Authenticated
user
Scanned color pages/monochrome pages, mail
transmission color pages/monochrome pages
Scan to Mailbox
Required
Authenticated
user
Scanned color pages/monochrome pages, stored
color pages/monochrome pages
Scan to FTP/SMB
Required
Authenticated
user
Scanned color pages/monochrome pages, file
transfer color pages/monochrome pages
Job template
Required
Authenticated
user
Scanned color pages/monochrome pages, file
transfer color pages/monochrome pages
Authentication and Auditron Administration
Corresponding
service
Users for
which
auditron
are
collected
14
405
15 Maintenance
This chapter describes how to replace consumables, clean the machine,
perform auto gradation adjustment, and print a report/list.
z
Replacing Consumables ...........................................................................408
z
Cleaning the Machine ...............................................................................419
z
Executing Auto Gradation Adjustment......................................................424
z
Printing a Report.......................................................................................427
15 Maintenance
Replacing Consumables
The machine is provided with the following consumables and periodical replacement parts.
We recommend using the following consumables and periodical replacement parts
because they have been made according to standards that match the specifications of the
machine.
Important • The use of consumables and periodical replacement parts not recommended by Xerox may
impair quality and performance. Use only consumables and periodical replacement parts
recommended by Xerox for the machine.
Type of consumable/Periodical
replacement part
Maintenance
Product code
Qty/Box
Toner cartridge [Y]
CT200542
1 item/1 box
Toner cartridge [M]
CT200541
1 item/1 box
Toner cartridge [C]
CT200540
1 item/1 box
Toner cartridge [K]
CT200539
1 item/1 box
Drum cartridges [A1], [A2], [A3], [A4]
CT350352
1 item/1 box
Waste Toner Container [B]
CWAA0485
1 unit/1 box
Staple Cartridge [F]
CWAA0455
5000 staples × 3 sets/1
box
Note
• We recommend having a spare toner cartridge ready.
• When it is time to replace the Fuser Cartridge, Transfer Belt Cleaner, Secondary Bias
Transfer Roll, or Transfer Belt, contact our Customer Support Center.
15
„Handling Consumables/Periodical Replacement Parts
z
Do not store boxes for consumables/periodical replacement parts upright.
z
Do not unpack consumables/periodical replacement parts until they are to be used.
Avoid storing consumables/periodical replacement parts in the following locations:
- Hot and humid location
- Location close to a fire
- Location exposed to direct sunlight
- Dusty location
z
Before using consumables/periodical replacement parts, carefully read the
instructions and precautions on the packaging.
z
We recommend having spare consumables/periodical replacement parts ready.
z
Check the product code of the consumables/periodical replacement parts and
contact our Customer Support Center to place your orders.
z
The use of toner cartridges, waste toner containers, or staple cartridges not
recommended by Xerox may impair quality and performance. Use only toner
cartridges, waste toner containers, and staple cartridges recommended by Xerox for
the machine.
„Confirming Status of Consumables
The status of consumables can be confirmed on the [Consumables] screen.
The status of consumables is indicated by "Ready", "Order New", "Replace Now", or
other indications.
Also, an indication from 0 to 100% displays the remaining amount of toner.
For information about confirming consumables, refer to "Consumables" (P.384).
408
Replacing Consumables
Replacing Toner Cartridges
Messages such as the following appear on the touch screen in accordance with the
remaining amount of toner. Solve the problem in accordance with the message.
Message*1
Please order a new
Yellow Toner (Y).
Number of pages*2
Document Centre C450/C360:
z Black: About 3,500 pages
z Other than black: About 2,500 pages
Document Centre C250:
About 200 pages
Yellow Toner (Y) needs
to be replaced.
About 50 pages
Replace the Yellow
Toner Cartridge (Y).
Solution
The toner cartridge
needs replacing.
Have a spare for the
indicated toner
cartridge ready.
Replace the
indicated toner
cartridge.
–
Important • When replacing toner cartridges, toner may spill and dirty the floor. We recommend laying
paper on the floor beforehand.
• Used toner cartridges require special processing during disposal. Return them to our
Customer Support Center.
• The use of toner cartridges not recommended by Xerox may impair quality and
performance. Use only toner cartridges recommended by Xerox for the machine.
• When only a small amount of toner remains in a toner cartridge, the machine may stop
during printing and display a message. If this happens, replace the toner cartridge for the
indicated color to continue copying or printing.
• Replace toner cartridges while the machine is on.
• After the "Please order a new xxx" message is displayed, the copy or print density may
decrease slightly.
• If a partially used toner cartridge is used, the number of pages that you can copy or print
after the "Please order a new xxx" message appears may differ considerably.
1
Make sure that the machine has
stopped before opening the front
cover.
409
Maintenance
*1 The above messages are for the yellow toner. The "Yellow Toner (Y)" part of the message varies depending on the
color and number of cartridges.
*2 The number of pages is for when A4 ( ) paper is used. The number of pages that you can copy or print is only an
estimate and varies depending on conditions such as the content, paper size, paper type, and the computer
environment.
15
15 Maintenance
2
Turn the toner cartridge of the color
indicated in the message
anticlockwise to the unlocked
position.
Note
3
• "Y" is for yellow, "M" is for
magenta, "C" is for cyan, and
"K" is for black.
Remove the toner cartridge by
gently pulling it towards you.
Important • Pull out the toner cartridge
gently. Otherwise, toner may
fly out of the cartridge.
• Return used toner cartridges
to our Customer Support
Center for disposal.
Prepare a new toner cartridge of
the same color as the cartridge that
you removed and gently tilt the
cartridge three or four times up,
down, left, and right as shown in
the figure on the right.
5
Insert the toner cartridge as far as
possible with the arrow (K) on the
cartridge facing upwards.
6
Turn the toner cartridge clockwise
to the locked position.
7
Close the front cover.
Maintenance
4
15
Note
410
• A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the front cover is even
slightly open.
Replacing Consumables
Replacing the Waste Toner Container [B]
When the waste toner container is full, a message appears on the touch screen.
If you continue copying or printing without replacing the waste toner container, a
message appears and the machine stops after copying or printing about 900 pages.
When replacing the waste toner container, use the cleaning rod packaged in the waste
toner container box to clean the Raster Output Scanners (D1, D2, D3, and D4) to
prevent uneven color density during copying and printing.
Important • When replacing the waste toner container, toner may spill and dirty the floor. We
recommend laying paper on the floor beforehand.
• Used waste toner containers require special processing during disposal. Return them to our
Customer Support Center.
• The use of waste toner containers not recommended by Xerox may impair quality and
performance. Use only waste toner containers recommended by Xerox for the machine.
• Replace the waste toner container while the machine is on.
Note
• The number of pages that you can copy or print is for when A4 ( ) paper is used.
• The number of pages is only an estimate and varies depending on conditions such as the
content, paper size, paper type, and the using environment.
1
Prepare a new waste toner
container.
Maintenance
Note
• Remove the new container,
orange vinyl cap, and cleaning
rod from the box.
2
Make sure that the machine has
stopped before opening the front
cover.
3
Open the black cover (B) at the
front of the machine by pulling the
left and right orange tabs
downward.
15
411
15 Maintenance
4
Hold the center section of the
waste toner container and pull the
container out until it comes to a
stop.
Important • Place the waste toner
container on the open black
cover. Be careful because
toner will be spilt if the waste
toner container is placed at an
angle.
Maintenance
5
Cover the top of the waste toner
container with the supplied orange
vinyl cap to prevent toner from
spilling out.
6
Hold the used waste toner
container firmly with both hands
and lift it into the empty box.
Important • Return used waste toner
containers to our Customer
Support Center for disposal.
15
7
Gently insert the supplied cleaning
rod that you removed from the box
into each of the cleaning slots D1
to D4 (square holes) with the pad
facing down.
8
When the cleaning rod is inserted
as far as it will go, gently pull it out
towards you.
Note
• Clean each of the four holes.
• It is almost impossible to see
dirt on the pad.
412
Replacing Consumables
9
Store the used cleaning rod with
the used waste toner container,
remove any air from the plastic
bag, and then close the zipper.
Important • Be sure to place the used
waste toner container in the
special plastic bag that came
in the box of the new waste
toner container and zip the
bag closed. If the zipper is left
open, the toner may leak out
during disposal.
Hold the center section of the new
waste toner container and push the
container in as far as possible while
making sure that the center section
is properly aligned.
11
Close the black cover by pulling up
the left and right orange tabs.
Maintenance
10
15
12
Close the front cover.
Note
• A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the front cover is even
slightly open.
Replacing Drum Cartridges [A1], [A2], [A3], and [A4]
When it is time to replace a drum cartridge, a message appears on the touch screen.
When this message appears, contact our Customer Support Center.
If you have concluded a spot maintenance contract, refer to this section, then confirm
the indicated drum cartridge position ([A1], [A2], [A3], or [A4]) and replace the
corresponding drum cartridge.
If you continue to use the machine without replacing the cartridge after the message
appears, the machine will stop and copying or printing will no longer be possible once
the following number of pages have been copied or printed.
z
In the Case of Document Centre C250
About 1,000 pages with yellow/magenta/cyan and about 1,100 pages with black.
z
In the Case of Document Centre C360
About 1,700 pages with yellow/magenta/cyan and about 1,800 pages with black.
z
In the Case of Document Centre C450
About 3,400 pages with yellow/magenta/cyan and about 3,800 pages with black.
413
15 Maintenance
Important • The use of drum cartridges not recommended by Xerox may impair quality and
performance. Use only drum cartridges recommended by Xerox for the machine.
Note
• Do not expose drum cartridges to direct sunlight or strong light from indoor fluorescent
lighting. Do not touch or scratch the surface of the drum. Doing so may result in
unsatisfactory printing.
• Used drum cartridges require special processing during disposal. Return them to our
Customer Support Center.
• Replace drum cartridges while the machine is on. If the power is switched off, all information
stored in the memory of the machine will be erased.
• The number of pages is for when A4 ( ) paper is used.
• The number of pages that you can copy or print is only an estimate and varies depending on
conditions such as the content, paper size, paper type, and the computer environment.
• After the "Please order a new xxx drum (AX) (maintenance request)" message appears,
images may not print clearly.
Maintenance
1
Make sure that the machine has
stopped before opening the front
cover.
2
Lift up the stopper on the left side
of the front of the machine while
pressing the bottom of the stopper
upwards.
3
Pull down the handle.
15
Note
4
• The drum cartridge lock is
released and the four drum
cartridges rise up.
Grip the handle of the drum
cartridge (A1, A2, A3, or A4)
indicated in the message and
gently pull out the cartridge.
Important • When pulling out a drum
cartridge, be careful not to
drop it on the floor.
Note
414
• The following example shows
how to replace drum A4.
Drum cartridge
Replacing Consumables
5
Pull out the drum cartridge while
holding its underside as shown in
the figure on the right.
Important • Take care not to touch any
toner on the drum cartridge.
6
Remove the new drum cartridge
from its box, then place the used drum cartridge into the supplied polyethylene bag
and place it in the box.
Important • Do not place the new drum cartridge in an upright position.
• Return used drum cartridges to our Customer Support Center for disposal.
7
Place the new drum cartridge (with
protective cover) on the handle,
and insert the end of the drum
cartridge into the machine.
Note
9
Maintenance
8
• Insert the drum cartridge up to
the arrow mark as shown in
the figure on the right.
Peel off the seal from the top of the
drum cartridge while the end of the
cartridge is inserted in the
machine.
15
Firmly hold the drum cartridge
while pressing down on the front
part of the protective cover and use
the orange tab at the top to slide
the cartridge forward.
415
15 Maintenance
10
Insert the drum cartridge as far as
possible while keeping it straight.
Note
11
Lift up the handle to return it to its
original position.
12
Pull down the stopper to lock the
handle in place.
13
Close the front cover.
Maintenance
15
• Place the protective cover as
is into the box.
Note
• A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the front cover is even
slightly open.
Replacing the Staple Cartridge
When a Staple Finisher (optional) is installed and it is time to replace the staple
cartridge, a message appears on the touch screen. When this message appears,
replace the staple cartridge with a new one.
Important • The use of staple cartridges not recommended by Xerox may impair quality and
performance. Use only staple cartridges recommended by Xerox for the machine.
Note
1
416
• To order a staple cartridge, contact our Customer Support Center.
Make sure that the machine has
stopped and then open the front
cover of the Finisher.
Replacing Consumables
Hold the staple cartridge by its
lever as shown in the figure on the
right and pull out the staple
cartridge to the right towards you.
3
Lift up the staple cartridge to
remove it.
4
Press the "PUSH" marks on both
sides of the staple cartridge.
Maintenance
2
15
You can now remove the staple
case.
Important • If there are staples inside the
staple case, the case will not
rise up even if you press on
the "PUSH" marks.
5
Insert your fingertip into the round
section on the cartridge and
remove the staple case.
417
15 Maintenance
Push a new staple case into the
staple cartridge.
7
Push down on the top of the staple
cartridge as shown in the figure on
the right.
8
Remove the seal from the new
staple case as shown in the figure
on the right.
9
Return the staple cartridge to its
original position by pushing it until
you hear it click into place.
10
Close the front cover of the
Finisher.
Maintenance
6
15
Note
418
• A message will be displayed
and the machine will not
operate if the front cover of
the Staple Finisher is even
slightly open.
Cleaning the Machine
Cleaning the Machine
The following describes how to clean the machine.
This section is divided into separate descriptions on how to clean the exterior, internal
components, document cover/document feeder, and document glass.
Cleaning the Exterior
The following describes how to clean the exterior.
Important • Before you start to clean the machine, be sure to switch off and unplug the machine. Turn
the machine off when cleaning to avoid the risk of electric shock
• Do not use benzene, paint thinner, or other volatile liquids or spray insect repellent on the
machine as doing so may discolor, deform, or crack covers.
• Cleaning the machine with an excessive amount of water may cause the machine to
malfunction or damage documents during copying.
1
Wipe the exterior with a firmly
wrung soft cloth moistened with
water.
Maintenance
Important • Do not use cleaning agents
other than water or neutral
detergent.
Note
2
• If it is difficult to remove dirt,
try gently wiping with a soft
cloth moistened with a small
amount of neutral detergent.
15
Wipe off any excess water from the exterior with a soft cloth.
Cleaning Internal Components (Raster Output Scanners)
The following describes how to clean internal components (ROS: Raster Output
Scanners).
Normally, clean Raster Output Scanners after you have replaced the waste toner
container. Also, clean Raster Output Scanners when image-quality defects such as
white or color streaks appear during copying or printing.
Important • A cleaning rod is provided on the inside of the front cover.
• Before you clean the Raster Output Scanners, remove the waste toner container.
• We recommend laying paper on the floor beforehand because toner will be spilt if the waste
toner container is placed at an angle.
1
Make sure that the machine has
stopped before opening the front
cover.
419
15 Maintenance
2
Open the black cover (B) at the
front of the machine by pulling the
left and right orange tabs
downward.
3
Hold the center section of the
waste toner container and pull the
container out until it comes to a
stop.
Note
• To prevent the waste toner
container from tilting and
spilling toner, place the
container in another location
away from the machine. Lay
paper on the floor and place
the waste toner container on
top of that paper.
Maintenance
4
Remove the cleaning rod from the
inside of the front door.
5
Gently insert the cleaning rod into
each of the cleaning slots D1 to D4
(square holes) with the pad facing
down.
6
When the cleaning rod is inserted
as far as it will go, gently pull it out
towards you.
15
Note
• Clean each of the four holes.
• It is almost impossible to see
dirt on the pad.
420
Cleaning the Machine
Hold the center section of the
waste toner container that you
removed and push the container in
as far as possible while making
sure that the center section is
properly aligned.
8
Close the black cover by pulling up
the left and right orange tabs.
9
Reattach the cleaning rod to the
inside of the front cover.
Maintenance
7
15
10
Close the front cover.
Note
• A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the front cover is even
slightly open.
Cleaning the Document Cover and Document Glass
If the document cover and document glass are dirty, dirt may appear on copies and the
machine may not properly detect document sizes.
To ensure that clean copies are made, clean the machine about once a month.
Important • Do not use benzene, paint thinner, or other organic solvents. Doing so might damage paint
or coating on plastic parts.
• Cleaning the machine with an excessive amount of water may cause the machine to
malfunction or damage documents during copying.
1
Wipe the document cover with a
soft cloth moistened with water to
remove any dirt and then wipe it
with a soft, dry cloth.
Important • Do not use cleaning agents
other than water or neutral
detergent.
Note
• If it is difficult to remove dirt,
try gently wiping with a soft
cloth moistened with a small
amount of neutral detergent.
421
15 Maintenance
2
Wipe the document glass with a
soft cloth moistened with water to
remove any dirt and then wipe it
with a soft, dry cloth.
Important • Do not use cleaning agents
other than water or neutral
detergent.
Note
• If it is difficult to remove dirt,
try gently wiping with a soft
cloth moistened with a small
amount of neutral detergent.
Cleaning the Film and Document Feeder Glass
If the machine is equipped with a document feeder and the film and document feeder
glass are dirty, dirt may appear on copies and the machine may not properly detect
document sizes.
To ensure that clean copies are made, clean the machine about once a month.
Important • Do not use benzene, paint thinner, or other organic solvents. Doing so might damage paint
or coating on plastic parts.
Maintenance
• Cleaning the machine with an excessive amount of water may cause the machine to
malfunction or damage documents during copying.
1
15
Wipe the film section with a soft
cloth moistened with water to
remove any dirt and then wipe it
with a soft, dry cloth.
Important • Do not press with excessive
force because the film is
easily damaged.
• Do not use cleaning agents
other than water or neutral
detergent.
Note
2
• If it is difficult to remove dirt, try gently wiping with a soft cloth moistened with a small amount
of neutral detergent.
Wipe the document feeder glass
with a soft cloth moistened with
water to remove any dirt and then
wipe it with a soft, dry cloth.
Important • Do not use cleaning agents
other than water or neutral
detergent.
Note
422
• If it is difficult to remove dirt,
try gently wiping with a soft
cloth moistened with a small
amount of neutral detergent.
Cleaning the Machine
Cleaning the Document Feeder Rollers
If the machine is equipped with a document feeder and the document feeder rollers are
dirty, dirt may appear on copies or the paper jams may occur.
To ensure that clean copies are made, clean the machine about once a month.
Important • Do not use benzene, paint thinner, or other organic solvents. Doing so might damage paint
or coating on plastic parts.
• Cleaning the machine with an excessive amount of water may cause the machine to
malfunction or damage documents during copying or printing.
1
Pull up the handle on the front of
the left cover of the document
feeder, and fully open the cover.
Note
2
• When you fully open the
cover, it enters a fixed
position. Open the cover
gently.
Maintenance
While turning the rollers, gently
clean it with a soft cloth moistened
with water.
Important • Do not use cleaning agents
other than water or neutral
detergent.
• Use a cloth that has been
firmly wrung to prevent drops
of water falling into the
machine. Drops of water on
internal components may
cause a malfunction.
Note
3
15
• If it is difficult to remove dirt, try gently wiping with a soft cloth moistened with a small amount
of neutral detergent.
After closing the inner cover, close
the left cover until you hear it click
into place.
423
15 Maintenance
Executing Auto Gradation Adjustment
The machine can automatically adjust gradation when the reproducibility of density or
color in copies and prints has deteriorated. The machine can adjust the gradation for
each screen type.
There are the following four types of screen.
z
Copy Job - Text
This screen compensates gradation when making copies of text and other
documents.
z
Copy Job - Photo
This screen compensates gradation when making copies of photos and other
documents.
z
Print Job - Text
This screen compensates gradation when printing text and other data.
z
Print Job - Photo
This screen compensates gradation when printing photos and other data.
Maintenance
Important • As auto gradation adjustment uses Tray 5 (bypass), reset the tray to plain paper if the paper
type for the tray is set to any other paper type. For information about the setting procedure,
refer to "Paper Type" (P.260).
Note
• We recommend executing auto gradation adjustment for all four of the screen types. When
the adjustment for one screen type is complete, specify the next screen type and repeat the
procedure.
• If color shift is not compensated for despite the periodic execution of auto gradation
adjustment, contact our Customer Support Center.
15
• The default copy settings of the System Administration mode change to the following when
gradation adjustment is executed.
Copy density = Normal or Auto (The default setting value of this feature returns to Normal
when it is Light to Dark, and returns to Auto when it is Auto.), Color Shift = Normal, Color
Saturation = Normal, Color Balance = 0, Sharpness = Normal
1
Press the <Log In/Out> button.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
C
2
Enter the UserID with the numeric
keypad, and select [Confirm].
Note
424
• The default UserID value is
"11111". When using the
Authentication feature, a
password is required. The
default password value is "xadmin".
<Log In/Out>
button
Executing Auto Gradation Adjustment
Select [System Settings].
4
Select [System Settings].
5
Select [Common Settings].
6
Select [Image Quality Adjustment].
7
Select [Auto Gradation
Adjustment].
8
Load A4 plain paper into Tray 5
(bypass) and move the paper guide
to gently touch the edge of the
paper.
9
Select the screen type for
gradation adjustment and select
[Start].
Note
Maintenance
3
15
• The example described here
is for the [Copy Job-Text]
screen.
425
15 Maintenance
Note
10
• The message "Printing the
Gradation Adjustment Chart.
[Copy Job-Text]" appears and
the document for gradation
adjustment (Gradation
Adjustment Chart) is printed.
Align the magenta color patch of
the Gradation Adjustment Chart
that was printed against the left
side of the document glass.
Note
• Place the Gradation
Adjustment Chart on the
document glass.
Place at least five sheets of white
paper on top of the Gradation
Adjustment Chart and close the
document cover.
12
Select [Start].
Maintenance
11
15
The message "Gradation adjustment is in progress. [Copy Job Text]" appears and the
machine automatically adjusts the gradation. It takes about 20 seconds to execute
gradation adjustment.
If the adjustment ends successfully, the [Auto Gradation Adjustment] screen (for setting
the screen type) is redisplayed. If there is a problem, the machine stops adjustment and
displays an error message. Solve the problem in accordance with the displayed error
message.
426
13
To continue automatic gradation adjustment for other screen types, repeat steps 6 to
10.
14
Select [Close] until the [System Settings] screen is displayed.
15
Select [Exit] to end the System Administration mode.
16
Make a copy and confirm the image quality.
Printing a Report
Printing a Report
This section describes how to print a report/ list.
Note
• The items displayed differ depending on the optional features installed.
• When the <Job in Memory> indicator is lit, you can confirm the documents stored to memory
in the [Stored Documents List].
For information about report/list types, refer to "Print Report/List" (P.376).
1
Press the <Machine Status>
button.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
<Machine Status>
button
C
Select the [Billing Meter/Print
Report] tab.
3
Select [Print Report/List].
4
Select the report/list you wish to
print and press the <Start> button.
Maintenance
2
15
427
16 Problem Solving
This section describes troubles that may occur with the machine and their
solutions.
z
Troubleshooting ........................................................................................430
z
Machine Trouble .......................................................................................432
z
Image Quality Problems ...........................................................................437
z
Trouble during Copying ............................................................................443
z
Trouble during Printing .............................................................................448
z
Trouble during Fax....................................................................................451
z
Trouble during Scanning...........................................................................455
z
Error Code ................................................................................................460
z
Paper Jams...............................................................................................475
z
Document Jams........................................................................................486
z
Stapler Faults............................................................................................488
16 Problem Solving
Troubleshooting
This section describes troubles that may occur with the machine and their solutions.
See the following for troubleshooting procedures to solve the problems.
Cause Is the <RESET> button or the power switch on the machine
off?
Power is not switched On.
No
Yes
Action
Press the RESET button, and turn the power switch on.
Refer to "Power On / Off" (P.36).
No
Cause Is the power cord plugged into the power outlet?
Action
Turn the power switch off and then firmly plug in the power
cord. Then turn the power switch on.
Refer to "Power On / Off" (P.36).
No
Cause Is the power cord disconnected from the machine or the
rear of the rack?
Action
Turn the power switch off and then firmly plug in the power
cord. Then turn the power switch on.
Refer to "Power On / Off" (P.36).
Problem Solving
No
Cause Is power of the correct voltage being supplied?
Action
16
Make sure that the power supply is 220 - 240 V (volts), 10 A
(amperes).
Make sure that power of capacity compatible with the
specified maximum power consumption of the machine (2.2
KVA) is being supplied.
Refer to "Safety Notes" (P.19).
Touch screen is dark.
No
Cause Is the <Power Saver> button on?
Yes
Action
The machine is in the Power Saver mode. Press the
<Power Saver> button on the control panel to cancel the
Power Saver mode.
Refer to "Power Saver Mode" (P.39).
No
Cause Is the Brightness Dial set too low?
Action
Use the Brightness Dial to adjust touch screen brightness.
Refer to "Control Panel" (P.42).
A message is displayed.
No
Cause Has a paper jam or document jam occurred?
Yes
Action
For information on paper jams, refer to "Paper Jams" (P.475).
For information on document jams, refer to "Document Jams"
(P.486).
No
Cause An error code displayed?
Action
430
Refer to "Error Code" (P.460).
Troubleshooting
The machine is not working
properly.
No
Action
Refer to "Trouble during Copying" (P.443).
Action
Refer to "Trouble during Printing" (P.448).
Action
Refer to "Trouble during Fax" (P.451).
Action
Refer to "Trouble during Scanning" (P.455).
Yes
Trouble during fax
No
Refer to "Image Quality Problems" (P.437).
Yes
Trouble during printing
No
Action
Yes
Trouble during copy
No
Refer to "Machine Trouble" (P.432).
Yes
Image quality is not good.
No
Action
Yes
Trouble during scanning
Yes
Problem Solving
16
431
16 Problem Solving
Machine Trouble
If you think some trouble is occurring on the machine, check the machine status again.
Symptoms
Power is not
switched On.
Check
Remedy
Is the RESET button or the
power switch on the
machine off?
Press the RESET button, and turn the
power switch on.
Is the power cord plugged
into the power outlet?
Turn the power switch off and then firmly
plug in the power cord. Then turn the
power switch on.
Is the power cord
disconnected from the
machine or the rear of the
rack?
Is power of the correct
voltage being supplied?
Refer to "Power On / Off" (P.36).
Refer to "Power On / Off" (P.36).
Problem Solving
Make sure that the power supply is 220240 V (volts), 10 A (amperes).
Make sure that power of capacity
compatible with the specified maximum
power consumption of the machine (2.2
KVA) is being supplied.
"Safety Notes" (P.19) "6.3 Registering/
Confirming Account Data" (P.196)
Touch screen is
dark.
Is the <Power Saver>
button on?
The machine is in the Power Saver mode.
Press the <Power Saver> button on the
control panel to cancel the Power Saver
mode.
Refer to "Power Saver Mode" (P.39).
16
Is the brightness dial set too
low?
Use the brightness dial to adjust display
brightness.
Refer to "Control Panel" (P.42).
432
Machine Trouble
Symptoms
Unable to print,
or
unable to copy.
Check
Remedy
Is a message displayed on
the touch screen?
Follow the instructions displayed to solve
the problem.
When the machine is
connected to a personal
computer by a parallel
interface, the personal
computer does not support
bi-directional
communications.
The default setting for bi-directional
communications on the machine is
[Enabled]. Printing is possible when the
personal computer supports bi-directional
communications. In this instance, set bidirectional communications to Disabled on
the touch screen and print again.
For information about Network Settings, refer
to Network Administrator Guide.
Insufficient memory?
Set the [Print Mode] to [Speed Priority], try
printing again using [Ensure Printing],
decrease the number of open ports,
increase the print page buffer, or increase
by adding on 128 MB memory.
Refer to "Allocate Memory" (P.290).
Note
• When there is insufficient memory,
the port setting is automatically
reset to [Stop] and the machine is
restarted.
Is the printer mode [Offline]? Press the <Machine Status> button and
confirm the [Printer Mode] in the [Machine
Status] screen. If [Printer Mode] is [Offline],
select [Online] in the [Printer Mode] screen.
<Online>
indicator does
not light even
though you
instructed it to
print.
Is the power cord
disconnected from the
machine or the rear of the
rack?
Turn the power switch off and then firmly
plug in the power cord. Then turn the
power switch on.
Is the interface cable
disconnected?
Turn the power switch off, unplug the
power cord from the power outlet, and
check the interface cable connection.
Refer to "Power On / Off" (P.36).
For information about Network Settings, refer
to Network Administrator Guide.
Is the personal computer's
environment correctly set?
Check the print driver and other
environment settings on the personal
computer.
Is the required interface
set?
Check the status of the interface port in
use.
For information about Network Settings, refer
to Network Administrator Guide.
Printing is not
performed even
though printing
was instructed
on Tray 5
(bypass).
Is paper of the size
specified for printing loaded
on the tray?
Follow the instructions displayed to load
paper of correct size and instruct it to print
again.
Refer to "Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass)"
(P.233).
433
Problem Solving
• For information about adding on
memory, contact our Customer
Support Center.
16
16 Problem Solving
Symptoms
Check
"Printing" is
displayed even
though you did
not instruct it to
print
(when the
parallel interface
is used).
Was the client turned off
after you turned the
machine on?
Unsatisfactory
print quality
A probable cause is an
image defect.
Remedy
Press the <Job Status> button to abort
processing.
Note
• Before turning the machine on,
make sure that the computer is on.
Refer to "Checking Executing/Pending Jobs"
(P.357).
Remedy the trouble referring to "Image
Quality Problems" described later.
Refer to "Image Quality Problems" (P.437).
Problem Solving
16
Text is not
printed correctly
(text is
corrupted).
Non-standard fonts are
used for printing.
Check the application or print driver
settings. If PostScript (optional) is being
used, attach the optional expansion kit,
and download the required fonts.
<Online>
indicator lights
and copies are
not delivered
with Online still
lit.
Data remaining in machine
memory.
Cancel printing, or purge remaining data.
Cannot insert or
remove trays.
Did you open a cover or turn
power off during printing?
Turn the power off without unnecessarily
inserting or removing a paper tray. Wait
several seconds and then turn the power
switch on. Make sure that the machine is
online (ready to receive data) and then
insert or remove the paper tray.
Copies are not
made at the
desired size.
Is the document scanning
glass or the document cover
dirty?
Clean the document feeder glass or the
document cover.
Is the document made of
highly transparent material
like a transparency?
Place the document on the document
glass, and place a white sheet on top of the
document before making a copy.
Is the document at the
correct position?
Load the document correctly.
Refer to "Checking Executing/Pending Jobs"
(P.357).
Refer to "Cleaning the Document Cover and
Document Glass" (P.421).
Refer to "Step 1 Loading Documents" (P.46).
Is the document loaded
correctly?
Is the document guides at
the correct position?
Properly set the document guides.
Is the document folded or
bent?
Straighten and properly reset the
document.
Refer to "Step 1 Loading Documents" (P.46).
Refer to "Step 1 Loading Documents" (P.46).
Is the document a nonstandard size?
434
Enter the document size.
Refer to "Original Size (Specifying the Scan
Size for the Document)" (P.69).
Machine Trouble
Symptoms
Paper is often
jammed or
wrinkled.
Check
Remedy
Is paper loaded properly in
the paper tray?
Load paper correctly.
Is the paper tray set
properly?
Firmly push in the paper tray as far as
possible to set it properly.
Refer to "Loading Paper in Trays 1 to 4"
(P.232).
Refer to "Loading Paper in Trays 1 to 4"
(P.232).
Is the paper damp?
Replace with paper from a new ream.
Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.232).
Is the paper curled?
Either turn the paper so that the curl is
facing down in the paper tray, or replace
with paper from a new ream.
Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.232).
Are the paper and paper
tray settings correct?
Make sure the paper and paper tray match
the configured paper size.
Refer to "Paper Tray Attributes" (P.259).
Open the door of the machine or slide out
the paper tray to remove the torn paper or
the foreign object.
Is out-of-spec paper loaded
in the tray?
Replace with paper that meets machine
specifications.
Refer to "Paper Jams" (P.475), "Loading
Paper" (P.232).
Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.232).
Is paper loaded in the paper
tray past its maximum fill
line?
Load paper in the paper tray so that it does
not exceed the maximum fill line.
Is the paper guide set
correctly?
Load the paper correctly, and apply the
paper guides to a paper lightly.
Refer to "Loading Paper in Trays 1 to 4"
(P.232).
Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.232), "Changing
the Size of Paper in Trays" (P.235).
Documents are
not fed into the
document
feeder.
Are the documents too
small?
An error
message is
displayed after
paper is loaded
in paper Tray 5
(bypass) and the
<Start> button is
pressed.
Check the position of the
paper guides at the front
side of paper Tray 5
(bypass).
The minimum size of the document that
can be loaded on the document feeder is
A5.
Refer to "Step 1 Loading Documents" (P.46).
Set the paper guides to the correct
positions.
Refer to "Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass)"
(P.233).
435
Problem Solving
Are there any torn pieces of
paper still remaining inside
the machine or is there a
foreign object in the
machine?
16
16 Problem Solving
Symptoms
Documents are
often jammed.
Properly load a document that can be
handled by the document feeder.
Are you trying to copy
irregular shaped
documents, business cards,
transparencies, or thin
documents?
Refer to "Step 1 Loading Documents" (P.46).
Are you trying to copy
documents affixed with
sticky labels, paper clips or
adhesive tape?
Remove sticky labels, paper clips or
adhesive tape from the document before
copying.
Are the document guides at
the correct position?
Properly set the document guides.
Is part of the document
ripped, and a piece of paper
remaining in the document
feeder?
Open the document feeder cover and
check inside.
When importing originals of
different sizes, is the [Mixed
Size Originals] setting set to
[ON]?
Set [Mixed Size Originals] to [ON].
Is an A5-size document
loaded horizontally ( ) on
the document feeder when
the Mixed Size Originals
feature is in use?
Load the A5-size document vertically ( ).
A corner of the
document is
folded.
Is the document curled?
Flatten out the curl and load the document
again.
Color copies
cannot be made.
Is [Output Color] set to
[Black]?
Select [Full Color] at [Output Color].
Is a message prompting
toner cartridge replacement
displayed on the touch
screen?
Replace with the toner cartridge of the
color indicated in the message.
–
Refer to "Stapler Faults" (P.488).
Stapler faults
436
Remedy
Is the right type of document
used?
Problem Solving
16
Check
Refer to "Step 1 Loading Documents" (P.46).
Refer to "Document Jams" (P.486).
Refer to "Mixed Size Originals (Scanning
Different Size Documents Simultaneously)"
(P.70).
Refer to "Output Color (Selecting the Color to
Copy)" (P.57).
Refer to "Replacing Toner Cartridges" (P.409).
Image Quality Problems
Image Quality Problems
When image quality of the printed result is poor, choose the closest symptom in the
following table, and perform the required remedy.
If image quality is not improved by performing the relevant remedy, contact our
Customer Support Center.
Symptoms
Check
The copy is dirty. Is the document glass or the
document cover dirty?
Remedy
Clean the document glass or the document
cover.
Refer to "Cleaning the Document Cover and
Document Glass" (P.421).
Is the document made of
highly transparent material
like a transparency?
If the document is highly transparent,
marks on the document cover will be
copied. Place a white sheet of paper on the
document and make a copy.
Is the document colored, of
a rough texture or a
blueprint?
Either adjust the copy density or image
quality and then retry copying.
Are you making copies of
glossy printing paper?
Glossy printing paper easily sticks to the
document glass, and shadows are
sometimes copied and reproduced as dirt.
Place a transparency or highly transparent
film under the document and retry copying.
The copy has
black lines
Is the scanning glass on the
feeder dirty?
Clean the document glass.
The copy is too
dark.
Is the copy density set to
[Dark]?
Adjust the copy density.
The copy is too
light.
Is the density of the
document too light?
Refer to "Image Quality" (P.61), "Lighten/
Darken /Contrast (Adjusting the Copy Density
and Contrast)" (P.63).
16
Refer to "Lighten/Darken /Contrast (Adjusting
the Copy Density and Contrast)" (P.63).
Is the copy density set to
[Light]?
The copy shifts
slightly.
Is the paper shifting or is the
leading edge of the paper
not loaded flush with the
tray corners?
Problem Solving
Refer to "Cleaning the Film and Document
Feeder Glass" (P.422).
Align the edges of the paper, and load the
paper again so that is flush against the
paper tray corners.
Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.232).
437
16 Problem Solving
Symptoms
Images on the
copy are
skewed.
Check
Remedy
Is the document loaded
correctly?
Load the document correctly.
Is paper loaded properly in
the tray?
Load paper correctly.
Is the paper guide for paper
Tray 5 (bypass) set so that
the tray touches the paper?
Load paper correctly.
Is the document guides at
the correct position?
Load the document correctly, and align the
document guides with the edge of the
document.
Refer to "Step 1 Loading Documents" (P.46).
Refer to "Loading Paper in Trays 1 to 4"
(P.232).
Refer to "Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass)"
(P.233).
Refer to "Step 1 Loading Documents" (P.46).
Is the paper tray set
properly?
Firmly push in the tray as far as possible to
set it properly.
Refer to "Loading Paper in Trays 1 to 4"
(P.232).
Part of the image
is missing on the
copy.
Is the paper damp?
Problem Solving
If the paper is damp, either some parts of
the copy are not shown or the copy is
smudged and unclear. Replace with paper
from a new ream.
Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.232).
Is the loaded paper folded
or wrinkled?
Remove the defective paper and replace
with paper from a new ream.
Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.232).
16
A stripe pattern
appears in
copies.
Is the document pasted
together or folded in?
A probable cause is that the pasted or
folded in section is curling back, and has
risen up from the surface of the document
glass. Place a stack of white sheets on the
document to hold the document down flat
against the document glass.
Is too large a document
enlargement ratio set?
Stripes sometimes appear in copies at
some enlargement ratios. Adjust the copy
enlargement ratio.
Refer to "Reduce/Enlarge (Making Enlarged/
Reduced Copies)" (P.52).
Tonal
reproduction in
color copies is
poor, resulting in
unsatisfactory
image quality.
438
Is tonal reproduction poor?
Perform automatic gradation adjustment in
the System Administration mode.
Refer to "Executing Auto Gradation
Adjustment" (P.424).
Image Quality Problems
Symptoms
Printing is faint
(smudged,
unclear)
Check
Is the paper damp?
Remedy
Replace with paper from a new ream.
Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.232).
The drum cartridge is
depleted or damaged.
Replace with a new drum cartridge.
There is no toner left in the
toner cartridge.
Replace with a new toner cartridge.
Black or colored
dots are printed.
The drum cartridge is
depleted or damaged.
Replace with a new drum cartridge.
Black or colored
lines are printed.
The drum cartridge is
depleted or damaged.
Replace with a new drum cartridge.
Internal components (ROS:
Raster Output Scanners)
are dirty.
Clean internal components.
The scanning glass on the
document feeder is dirty.
Clean the document feeder glass.
Dirt on the paper feed path.
Print a few pages.
The drum cartridge is
depleted or damaged.
Replace with a new drum cartridge.
Refer to "Replacing Toner Cartridges" (P.409).
Refer to "Replacing Drum Cartridges [A1],
[A2], [A3], and [A4]" (P.413).
Problem Solving
Dirt appears at
equal intervals.
Refer to "Replacing Drum Cartridges [A1],
[A2], [A3], and [A4]" (P.413).
Refer to "Replacing Drum Cartridges [A1],
[A2], [A3], and [A4]" (P.413).
Refer to "Cleaning Internal Components
(Raster Output Scanners)" (P.419).
16
Refer to "Cleaning the Film and Document
Feeder Glass" (P.422).
Refer to "Replacing Drum Cartridges [A1],
[A2], [A3], and [A4]" (P.413).
439
16 Problem Solving
Symptoms
White dots
appear in black
filled areas.
Check
Remedy
The paper in use is
unsuitable.
Load suitable paper.
The drum cartridge is
depleted or damaged.
Replace with a new drum cartridge.
Printed toner
smudges when
rubbed with your
finger.
Toner is not
fused to the
paper.
The paper is
dirtied with toner.
Is the paper damp?
Replace with paper from a new ream.
The paper in use is
unsuitable.
Load suitable paper.
The entire paper
area is printed
black.
The drum cartridge is
depleted or damaged.
Replace with a new drum cartridge.
A probable cause is a highvoltage power supply
malfunction.
Contact our Customer Support Center.
Two or more sheets of
paper are being fed
simultaneously. (doublefeed)
Fan the paper well and reset.
There is no toner left in the
toner cartridge.
Replace with a new toner cartridge.
A probable cause is a highvoltage power supply
malfunction.
Contact our Customer Support Center.
Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.232).
Refer to "Replacing Drum Cartridges [A1],
[A2], [A3], and [A4]" (P.413).
Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.232).
Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.232).
Problem Solving
16
Nothing is
printed.
440
Refer to "Replacing Drum Cartridges [A1],
[A2], [A3], and [A4]" (P.413).
Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.232).
Refer to "Replacing Toner Cartridges" (P.409).
Image Quality Problems
Symptoms
White areas or
white or colored
stripes appear.
Check
Remedy
A probable cause is a dirty
Raster Output Scanner.
Clean the Raster Output Scanner.
Is the paper damp?
Replace with paper from a new ream.
Refer to "Cleaning Internal Components
(Raster Output Scanners)" (P.419).
Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.232).
The entire page
is printed faint.
Load suitable paper.
When the print was made
using Tray 5 (bypass), the
size and type of the actually
loaded paper differed from
the setting on the print
driver.
Either load paper of the correct size and
type into Tray 5 (bypass), or fan the paper
thoroughly before loading it again.
Two or more sheets may be
feeding at once.
Fan the paper well and reset.
The paper in use is
unsuitable.
Replace with paper from a new ream.
Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.232).
Refer to "Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass)"
(P.233).
Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.232).
Problem Solving
Paper becomes
wrinkled.
Text is blurred.
The paper in use is
unsuitable.
Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.232).
Paper is being added while
it is being fed.
Is the paper damp?
16
White or color is The drum cartridge is
missing vertically depleted or damaged.
Replace with a new drum cartridge.
Refer to "Replacing Drum Cartridges [A1],
[A2], [A3], and [A4]" (P.413).
There is no toner left in the
toner cartridge.
Replace with a new toner cartridge.
A probable cause is a dirty
Raster Output Scanner.
Clean the Raster Output Scanner.
Refer to "Replacing Toner Cartridges" (P.409).
Refer to "Cleaning Internal Components
(Raster Output Scanners)" (P.419).
441
16 Problem Solving
Symptoms
Text or images
are printed at an
angle
Problem Solving
16
442
Check
The paper guide in the
paper tray is not set at the
correct position.
Remedy
Set the horizontal and vertical paper
guides to the correct positions.
Refer to "Loading Paper in Trays 1 to 4"
(P.232).
Trouble during Copying
Trouble during Copying
Describes solutions for problems encountered during copying.
Unable to Copy
Describes solutions when unable to copy.
Document not fed properly
from the document feeder
Cause
Document size is too small.
Action
The minimum size of the document that can be loaded on
the document feeder is A5.
Refer to "Step 1 Loading Documents" (P.46).
Cause
The right type of document is not being used.
Action
The document feeder cannot be used with irregular sized
documents, business cards, transparencies, or thin
documents.
In addition, documents with tags, paper clips, and
cellophane tape cannot be used.
Refer to "Step 1 Loading Documents" (P.46).
The document guides are in the incorrect position.
Action
Set the document guides to correctly match the document
size.
Refer to "Step 1 Loading Documents" (P.46).
Cause
Part of the document is ripped, and a piece of paper
remaining in the document feeder.
Action
Open the document feeder cover, and remove the piece of
paper.
Problem Solving
Cause
16
Refer to "Document Jams" (P.486).
Cause
Documents of different sizes are set.
Action
When using documents of different sizes, you must specify
[Mixed Size Originals]. Otherwise, a paper jam will result.
When setting documents of different sizes, be sure to
specify [Mixed Size Originals].
Refer to "Mixed Size Originals (Scanning Different Size
Documents Simultaneously)" (P.70).
443
16 Problem Solving
The Copy Result is not What was Expected
Described solutions for situations in which the copy result is different from that
expected.
The copy is dirty.
No
Cause
The document glass or the document cover is dirty.
Action
Clean the document glass or the document cover.
Refer to "Cleaning the Document Cover and Document
Glass" (P.421).
Problem Solving
Copy is too dark, or too
light
No
16
The copy shifts slightly.
No
Cause
The document is made of highly transparent material like a
transparency.
Action
If the document is highly transparent, marks on the
document cover will be copied. Place a white sheet of paper
on the original document and make a copy.
Cause
Color paper, rough paper, or blueprint paper is being used.
Action
The paper's background color is copied. Either adjust the
copy density or image quality, or specify suppress
background color, and then retry copying.
Cause
Glossy printing paper is being used.
Action
Glossy printing paper easily sticks to the document glass,
and shadows are sometimes copied and reproduced as dirt.
Place a transparency or highly transparent film under the
document and retry copying.
Cause
Copy density is set to [Dark], or to [Light].
Action
Adjust the copy density.
Refer to "Lighten/Darken /Contrast (Adjusting the Copy Density
and Contrast)" (P.63).
Cause
Density of the document is too light.
Action
Adjust the copy density.
Refer to "Lighten/Darken /Contrast (Adjusting the Copy Density
and Contrast)" (P.63).
Cause
The [Original Type] is inappropriate.
Action
Copy black text. If it is too light, select [Text] for [Original
Type].
Refer to "Image Quality Presets (Selecting Image Quality)"
(P.61).
Cause
Paper set in the paper tray is misaligned.
Action
Align the edges of the paper, and load the paper again so
that is flush against the front tray corners.
Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.232).
444
Trouble during Copying
Part of the image is
missing on the copy.
No
Cause
The paper is damp.
Action
If the paper is damp, either some parts of the copy are not
shown or the copy is smudged and unclear. Replace with
paper from a new ream.
Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.232).
Cause
Paper with folds or wrinkles has been set in the paper tray.
Action
Remove the defective paper and replace with paper from a
new ream.
Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.232).
Cause
The document is pasted together or folded in.
Action
It is possible that the folded in or pasted part of the
document is not touching the document glass. Place a
stack of white sheets on the document to hold the
document down flat against the document glass.
Stripes appear in the copy
Cause
The document enlargement ratio is too large.
No
Action
Stripes sometimes appear in copies at some enlargement
ratios. Adjust the copy enlargement ratio.
Images on the copy are
skewed.
No
Cause
The document is not loaded correctly.
Action
Load the document correctly.
Problem Solving
Refer to "Reduce/Enlarge (Making Enlarged/Reduced
Copies)" (P.52).
Refer to "Step 1 Loading Documents" (P.46).
Cause
The document guides are in an incorrect position.
Action
Load the document correctly, and align the document
guides with the edges of the document.
16
Refer to "Step 1 Loading Documents" (P.46).
Cause
Action
The paper tray is not set properly.
Firmly push in the tray as far as possible to set it properly.
Refer to "Loading Paper in Trays 1 to 4" (P.232).
Cause
The paper guide for Tray 5 (bypass) is misaligned.
Action
Load the paper correctly, and align the paper guide with the
edge of the paper.
Refer to "Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass)" (P.233).
Copies are not made at the
desired size.
Cause
The document glass or the document cover is dirty.
No
Action
Clean the document glass or the document cover.
Refer to "Cleaning the Document Cover and Document
Glass" (P.421).
445
16 Problem Solving
No
Cause
The document is made of highly transparent material like a
transparency.
Action
Place a white sheet of paper on the original document and
make a copy.
Cause
The document is misaligned.
Action
Load the document correctly.
Refer to "Step 1 Loading Documents" (P.46).
Cause
The document guides are in an incorrect position.
Action
Load the document correctly, and align the document
guides with the edges of the document.
Refer to "Step 1 Loading Documents" (P.46).
Problem Solving
Cause
The document is a non-standard size.
Action
Enter the document size and then copy.
Refer to "Original Size (Specifying the Scan Size for the
Document)" (P.69).
Cause
The document is folded or bent.
Action
Straighten and properly reset the document.
Refer to "Step 1 Loading Documents" (P.46).
Unable to take color
copies
No
Cause
Action
[Output Color] is set to [Black].
Set [Output Color] to [Auto] or [Full Color].
Refer to "Output Color (Selecting the Color to Copy)"
(P.57).
16
A corner of the copy is cut
off.
Cause
The document exceeds the printable area.
No
Action
Adjust the reduce/enlarge to make the copy a little smaller.
Cause
Tonal reproduction is misconfigured.
Action
Perform gradation adjustment.
Colors differ between the
original and the copy.
No
Refer to "Executing Auto Gradation Adjustment" (P.424).
446
Cause
A document type appropriate for this document is not
selected.
Action
In [Original Type], select a type appropriate for the
document.
Refer to "Image Quality Presets (Selecting Image Quality)"
(P.61).
Trouble during Copying
No stapling done
Cause
The finisher is not attached.
Action
A finisher is needed to perform stapling. Attach a finisher, or
remove stapling from the print options.
Cause
The number of pages to staple exceeds 50.
Action
A maximum of 50 pages can be stapled. Reduce the
number of pages to 50 or lower.
Problem Solving
16
447
16 Problem Solving
Trouble during Printing
Describes solutions for problems encountered during printing.
Unable to Print
Describes solutions when unable to print.
Data remains in the printer
icon.
No
Cause The printer is not powered on.
Action
Turn the power on.
Cause The network cable is disconnected from the computer.
Action
Connect the network cable to the computer.
Cause The network cable is disconnected from the machine.
Action
Connect the network cable to the machine.
For information about Network Settings, refer to Network
Administrator Guide.
Problem Solving
Cause Printer mode is set to Offline.
Action
Press the <Machine Status> button and confirm the [Printer
Mode] in the [Machine Status] screen. If [Printer Mode] is
[Offline], select [Online] in the [Printer Mode] screen.
Cause An error occurred with the printer.
Action
16
Check the error details.
Cause The IP address or SMB network path is misconfigured.
Action
Configure a correct IP address or SMB network path.
For information about Network Settings, refer to Network
Administrator Guide.
Cause The network connection between the computer and
machine is abnormal.
Action
Check with your system administrator.
Cause The port is not enabled.
Action
Enabled the port in use.
For information about Network Settings, refer to Network
Administrator Guide.
Cause Insufficient space available on the hard disk.
Action
448
Delete unnecessary data to increase free space.
Trouble during Printing
No
Cause The printer is connected to multiple computers.
Action
Sent to printer
Wait for a while, and then try printing again.
Cause Out of paper.
Action
Supply paper to the printer.
Cause No paper for the specified paper size.
Action
Set paper for the specified paper size.
Refer to "Loading Paper in Trays 1 to 4" (P.232), or "Loading
Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass)" (P.233).
Cause Copy operation is performed during interrupt, and interrupt
is performed.
Action
Cancel the interrupt operation.
Cause An error occurred with the printer.
Action
Check the error details.
The Printed Result is not what was Expected
Problem Solving
Described solutions for situations in which the print result is different from that
expected.
Cannot print in color
No
No stapling done
No
Cause In print options, the [Output Color] is set to [B/W].
Action
Set [Output Color] to [Auto] or [Color].
Cause The finisher is not attached.
Action
A finisher is needed to perform stapling. Attach a finisher, or
remove stapling from the print options.
Cause The number of pages to staple exceeds 50.
Action
Cannot print 2 sided
No
A maximum of 50 pages can be stapled. Reduce the
number of printed pages to 50 or lower.
Cause The duplex module is not attached.
Action
For 2 sided printing, the duplex module is needed. Attach
the duplex module, or remove 2 sided printing from the print
options.
Cause Insufficient print page buffer.
Action
Printing performed with a
different paper size.
No
Add memory.
Cause Paper size provided is different from the specified tray size.
Action
Change the paper size set in the tray, or change print
options to specify a tray that contains the appropriate size.
449
16
16 Problem Solving
The image is cut off on the
edge of the paper.
No
The printed font differs
from the font specified on
the computer.
No
Cause Image exceeds the printer's printable area.
Action
Increase the printer's printable area, or decrease the
document print area.
Cause Font replacement is configured on the print driver.
Action
Check the font replacement table.
Cause Non-standard fonts are used for printing.
Action
Printing does not offset
No
Printing is slow
No
Problem Solving
The settings specified for
print options do not take
effect
No
16
Check the application or print driver settings.
If the PostScript 3 kit is being used, download the required
fonts.
Cause The printer is not equipped with an offset feature.
Action
To output with offset, an offset output unit or finisher is
needed.
Cause The print mode specifies Print Quality.
Action
When printing image data that has image quality as a
priority, such as pictures, the print speed decreases. Turn
off the quality priority in the print mode.
Cause A print driver for another model is in use.
Action
Install the print driver for this model.
Cause The optional apparatus cannot be attached to the printer.
Action
There is no edge
Cause Image exceeds the printer's printable area.
Action
450
Check the options attached with this printer, and reset the
printer configuration.
Increase the printer's printable area, or decrease the
document print area.
Trouble during Fax
Trouble during Fax
Describes solutions for problems encountered during fax.
Note
• Fax features are not available for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more
information, contact Our Customer Support Center.
Problems Sending
Describes solutions when unable to send.
A Transmission ReportUndelivered is output
No
Is anything wrong with the
telephone line?
No
Cause Unable to send due to an error.
Action
Check the [Transmission Results] in the Transmission
Report ñ Undelivered. If an error code is displayed, refer to
"Error Code" (P.460) for a solution.
Cause The telephone line is not correctly connected.
Action
The printer has multiple telephone line inputs. If the wrong
input is used, then transmission will fail.
When the correct input is used, you are able to make phone
calls with the [On-hook] feature.
Problem Solving
Cause The line type for the telephone line is not configured
correctly.
Action
Match the configured line type with the actual line type
(Tone/10pps).
Cause There is an error with the telephone line.
Action
Use a regular phone to test whether you can make phone
calls. If no calls can be made, then there is a problem with
the phone line, not the printer.
Cause The recipient fax is not working properly.
Action
Is the operation correct?
No
If the recipient fax is not turned on, or if the receive mode is
set to manual, then G3 sending is not possible.
Call the recipient to confirm.
Cause You are faxing to a wrong number.
Action
Check the fax number, and try sending again.
Cause The number called is not a fax number.
Action
Phone the recipient, and if you do not hear a "beep" sound,
then the number is not a fax number.
451
16
16 Problem Solving
No
Cause When using Login Setup/Auditron Administration, faxes are
sent directly from the computer.
Action
When using Login Setup/Auditron Administration, to send a
fax directly from the computer, a correct user name and
password must be configured in the fax driver.
For information about Login Setup/Auditron
Administration, refer to "Login Setup/Auditron
Administration" (P.344). For information about sending
faxes directly from your computer, refer to "For more
information, refer to "Importing from Mailbox Viewer 2"
(P.219)." (P.212), or "Sending a Fax" (P.223).
Image quality is not good.
Cause Is the document feeder glass clean?
Action
Clean the document feeder glass.
Refer to "Cleaning the Film and Document Feeder Glass"
(P.422).
Cause The sending density is not appropriate.
Action
Adjust the density level.
Refer to "Density Level (Adjusting Density Level)"
(P.120).
Problem Solving
Cause There is a problem with the receiver.
Action
Ask the remote station.
Note
16
452
• Poor output quality may be caused by the
remote machine.
Trouble during Fax
Receiving Trouble
Describes solutions when unable to receive.
Cause
The telephone line is not correctly connected.
No
Action
The printer has multiple telephone line inputs. If the wrong
input is used, then transmission will fail. When the correct
input is used, you are able to make phone calls with the
[On-hook] feature.
Cause
There is an error with the telephone line.
Action
Use a regular phone to test whether you can make phone
calls. If no calls can be made, then there is a problem with
the phone line, not the printer.
Cause
Power is OFF.
Action
Unable to receive if the printer is not powered on. Turn the
power on.
Cause
Paper is not set.
Action
When paper is not set in the machine, received documents
cannot be printed.
Cause
Paper jam
Action
View the touch screen and remove the jammed media.
Cause
The System Administration mode is on.
Action
When the machine is in System Administration modes,
faxes cannot be received. Exit the System Administration
mode.
Cause
A receive password is configured.
Action
When a receive password is configured, receive and
polling can be performed only for senders who provide a
correct receive password as an F Code.
Cause
The machine is set to Manual Receive.
Action
Perform manual receive, or reconfigure to auto receive.
Is the operation correct?
No
Problem Solving
Is anything wrong with the
telephone line?
Refer to "Fax Receiving Mode" (P.373)
Cause
The machine is set to Manual Send.
Action
When using a FAX data service, change the receive
setting to Manual Receive in the On-hook or Off-hook
screen, enter a data code, and then press the <Start>
button.
453
16
16 Problem Solving
No
Cause
The document is not loaded correctly at the sender's
machine.
Action
Ask the remote station.
Note
• Poor output quality may be caused by the
remote machine.
Image quality is not good.
Cause
The drum cartridge is damaged.
No
Action
If the copied image quality is also poor, replace the drum
cartridge.
Refer to "Replacing Drum Cartridges [A1], [A2], [A3],
and [A4]" (P.413).
Cause
Is the sender's document scanner portion clean?
Action
Ask the remote station.
Note
Cause
Sender's resolution is too low.
Action
Ask the remote station.
Note
Problem Solving
A 1 page received
document is split into
multiple pages.
16
• Poor output quality may be caused by the
remote machine.
• Poor output quality may be caused by the
remote machine.
Cause
During scanning on the sender's side, for some reason the
document was scanned large.
Action
Auto Reduce on Receipt and Border Limit can be
combined on the machine for when documents, like those
described in the items on the left, are received. Depending
on the combination, a received document prints in the
following ways.
Auto Reduce
Receive
Page Split
Border Limit
When border
limits are
not exceeded
When border
limits are
exceeded
Auto Reduce
Document
Received
Auto Reduce
No Documents
Received
The document is
automatically
reduced and
printed as one
page.
The portion that
exceeds the set
page size is cut
off and the
document is
printed.
The document is printed at the
same magnification on separate
pages.
Refer to "Border Limit" (P.305), or "Auto Reduce on
Receipt" (P.305).
454
Trouble during Scanning
Trouble during Scanning
Describes solutions for problems encountered during scanning.
Note
• Scan features are not available for some models. An optional package is necessary. For
more information, contact our Customer Support Center.
Unable to Scan with the Machine
Describes solutions when unable to scan.
Document not fed properly
from the document feeder
Cause Document size is too small.
Action
The minimum size of the document that can be loaded on
the document feeder is A5.
Refer to "Step 1 Loading Documents" (P.154).
Cause The right type of document is not being used.
Action
Refer to "Step 1 Loading Documents" (P.154).
Cause The document guides are in the incorrect position.
Action
Set the document guides to correctly match the
document size.
Refer to "Step 1 Loading Documents" (P.154).
16
Cause Part of the document is ripped, and a piece of paper
remaining in the document feeder.
Action
Open the document feeder cover, and remove the
piece of paper.
Refer to "Document Jams" (P.486).
Cause Documents of different sizes are set.
Action
Problem Solving
The document feeder cannot be used with irregular sized
documents, business cards, transparencies, or thin
documents.
In addition, documents with tags, paper clips, and
cellophane tape cannot be used.
When using documents of different sizes, you must specify
[Mixed Size Originals]. Otherwise, a paper jam will result.
When setting documents of different sizes, be sure to
specify [Mixed Size Originals].
Refer to "Mixed Size Originals (Scanning Different Size
Documents Simultaneously)" (P.179).
455
16 Problem Solving
Unable to Import Scanned Document into Computer
Describes solutions when unable to import scanned document into computer.
Unable to find scanner
No
Cause The printer is not powered on.
Action Turn the power on.
Cause The network cable is disconnected from the computer.
Action Connect the network cable to the computer.
Cause The network cable is disconnected from the machine.
Action Connect the network cable to the machine.
For information about Network Settings, refer to Network
Administrator Guide.
Cause The Salutation port is not enabled.
Action Enable the Salutation port.
For information about Network Settings, refer to Network
Administrator Guide.
Problem Solving
Cause The network connection between the computer and machine
is abnormal.
Action Check with your system administrator.
Unable to open Mailbox
No
Cause No Mailbox has been created.
Action Create a Mailbox.
Refer to "Mailbox" (P.323).
16
Cause Mailbox password forgotten.
Action Unable to verify password. Set the password to [Off], and
then reset the password again.
Refer to "Mailbox" (P.323).
Scanner unable to scan
data due to TWAIN
transmission error.
No
Operation halts during
scanning
Cause The scan driver is not installed.
Action Install the scan driver.
Cause Is the file size too big?
Action Reduce the resolution, or choose a compressed output file
format, and rescan.
Refer to "File Format (Select the Scanned Data Type)" (P.172), or
"Image Compression (Specifying an Image Compression Ratio
When Scanning)" (P.182).
456
Trouble during Scanning
Unable to Send the Scanned Document over the Network (FTP/SMB)
Describes solutions when scanned documents cannot be sent over the network.
Unable to forward over the
network
Cause Is the server entered correctly?
Action
Check the inputted server.
Cause Is the save location entered correctly?
Action
Check the save location.
Cause When using SMB, is the Shared Name entered correctly?
Action
Check the Shared Name.
Cause When using SMB (UNC Format), is the save location
entered correctly?
Action
Check the save location.
Cause Is the login name entered correctly?
Action
Check the login name.
Problem Solving
Cause Is the password entered correctly?
Action
Check the password.
Problems with Sending E-mail
Describes solutions when e-mail cannot be sent.
Unable to send e-mail
16
Cause Mail address is incorrect
Action
Check the e-mail address.
Cause Maximum sending e-mail size is exceeded
Action
Change the maximum sending e-mail size, or reduce the
resolution.
Refer to "Maximum E-mail Size" (P.318), or "Scan Resolution
(Specifying a Scanning Resolution)" (P.177).
457
16 Problem Solving
Image not What was Expected
Describes solutions for dealing with situations where the scan data does not produce
image data as expected.
The image is dirty
No
Cause
The document glass or the document cover is dirty.
Action
Clean the document glass or the document cover.
Refer to "Cleaning the Document Cover and Document
Glass" (P.421).
Problem Solving
Image is too dark, or too
light
No
16
Cause
The document is made of highly transparent material like a
transparency.
Action
If the document is highly transparent, marks on the
document cover will appear on the image. Place a white
sheet of paper on the document and scan.
Cause
The document is colored, of a rough texture or a blueprint,
etc.
Action
Either adjust the copy density or image quality and then
retry scanning.
Cause
Glossy printing paper is being scanned.
Action
Glossy printing paper easily sticks to the document glass,
and shadows are sometimes scanned and reproduced as
dirt. Place a transparency or highly transparent film under
the document and retry scanning.
Cause
Scan density is set to [Dark], or to [Light].
Action
Adjust the scan density.
Refer to "Lighten/Darken/Contrast (Adjusting Scan
Density and Contrast)" (P.175).
Cause
The Original Type is inappropriate.
Action
Select an image quality appropriate for the document.
Refer to "Image Quality" (P.174).
Part of the image is
missing.
No
The image is not the
desired size
No
Cause
The document is pasted together or folded in.
Action
It is possible that the folded in or pasted part of the
document is not touching the document glass. Place a
stack of white sheets on the document to hold the
document down flat against the document glass.
Cause
The document glass or the document cover is dirty.
Action
Clean the document glass or the document cover.
Refer to "Cleaning the Document Cover and Document
Glass" (P.421).
458
Trouble during Scanning
No
Cause
The document is made of highly transparent material like a
transparency.
Action
Place a white sheet of paper on the document and scan.
Cause
The document is misaligned.
Action
Load the document correctly.
Refer to "Step 1 Loading Documents" (P.154).
Cause
The document guides are in an incorrect position.
Action
Load the document correctly, and align the document
guides with the edges of the document.
Refer to "Step 1 Loading Documents" (P.154).
Cause
The document is a non-standard size.
Action
Enter the document size and then scan.
Refer to "Scan Size (Specifying a Scanning Size)" (P.179).
Cause
Action
The document is folded or bent.
Straighten and properly reset the document.
Refer to "Step 1 Loading Documents" (P.154).
No
Cause
Action
Problem Solving
The image is not color
[Output Color] is set to [B/W], or [Grayscale].
Select [Full Color] at [Output Color].
Refer to "Output Color (Selecting the Scanning Color)"
(P.170).
The image is coarse
No
Cause
Resolution is too low.
Action
Set a higher resolution.
16
Refer to "Scan Resolution (Specifying a Scanning
Resolution)" (P.177).
Cause
Image is saved with high compression.
Action
Select a lower compression output file format.
Refer to "Image Compression (Specifying an Image
Compression Ratio When Scanning)" (P.182).
Black & white gradations
are not as desired
Cause
[B/W] is selected for [Output Color].
Action
Select [Grayscale] for [Output Color].
Refer to "Output Color (Selecting the Scanning Color)"
(P.170).
459
16 Problem Solving
Error Code
Explains error codes.
If an error caused the printing to end abnormally, or a malfunction occurred in the
printer, then an error message code (***-***) is displayed.
For faxes, error codes are displayed in the Activity Report and Transmission Report
Undelivered.
If an error code appears that is not listed in the table below, or if an error persists after
following the listed solution, then contact our Customer Support Center.
For information about the Activity Report, refer to "Activity Report" (P.376). For information about the
Transmission Report Undelivered, refer to "Transmission Report/Read Status (Printing Transmission
Report/Receiving Fax Transmission Result Mail)" (P.129).
Refer to the following table for error codes, and rectify the problem.
If an error code appears that is not listed in the table below, then contact our Customer
Support Center or your Xerox dealer.
Important • If an error code is displayed, all print data of the printer as well as print data stored in the
printer's built-in memory is discarded.
Errors are divided into the following [Categories].
C: Copy
Problem Solving
P: Print
F: Fax
S: Scan
M: Mail
O: Others Problems
16
Category
Error Code
Cause and Remedy
C P F S M O

002-770
003-750

 [Cause]
Unable to process job template due to insufficient hard
disk space.
[Remedy] Remove unnecessary data from the hard disk to
increase free disk space.
[Cause]
Unable to store any documents with 2 Sided Book Copy
feature.
[Remedy] Check the 2 Sided Book Copy settings.
Refer to "2 Sided Book Copy (Making 2 Sided Copies of Facing Pages)"
(P.68).

[Cause]
003-752

[Cause]
003-760
 
[Cause]
003-751
460

The machine is unable to process size, because the
specified document area is too small.
[Remedy] Increase resolution or scan area size.
When setting a mixed size document to Full Color/2 Side
and attempting to scan at 600dpi, an error occurs.
[Remedy] Decrease [Scan Resolution] to [400dpi] or less, and
rescan.
An incompatible combination of features are specified in
the document scan conditions.
[Remedy] Check the selected options.
Error Code
Category
Error Code
Cause and Remedy
C P F S M O
003-761
 
[Cause]
The paper size of the tray selected for auto tray is
different from the paper size of the tray selected for Auto
Repeat.
[Remedy] Change the paper size for the tray, or change the [Paper
Type Priority] settings.
 [Cause]
003-763
An error occurred when reading the Gradation
Adjustment Chart.
[Remedy] Place the Adjustment Chart properly on the document
glass.
Refer to "Executing Auto Gradation Adjustment" (P.424).

003-780
003-795

003-972

003-973
 
When enlarging/reducing a scanned document to the
specified paper size, the redution/enlargement ratio
value exceeds the allowed range.
[Remedy] Take one of the following actions:
z
Manually enter a redution/enlargement ratio.
z
Change the paper size.

Refer to 003-976.
 
[Cause]

[Cause]
[Cause]
16
The maximum storable document pages for each service
is exceeded.
[Remedy] Have your System Administrator check the [Maximum
Storable Page Number] settings.
The document orientation and specified paper
orientation are different.
[Remedy] Start the job as is, or cancel the job and reconfigure.

003-976
003-977
[Cause]
Problem Solving
003-970
[Cause]
Failed to compress scanned document.
[Remedy] Reduce resolution or redution/enlargement ratio to
decrease the data size, or send in several pieces.
The document size exceeds the readable area, resulting
in an error.
[Remedy] Change the document size, or send in sections.
[Cause]
[Remedy
For Bound Originals/Booklet Creation/Poster, when
resetting the document, the new document size is
different from the old size.
Return to the document of the correct size, and restart.
003-980

[Cause]
The specified staple position is incorrect.
[Remedy] Check and reconfigure the document orientation and
staple position, or cancel stapling.
003-981

[Cause]
005-275
005-280
005-283
005-284
005-285
005-286
Stapling of mixed size documents is only possible when
the widths are the same.
[Remedy] Cancel stapling, or align the paper widths and
reconfigure.
 [Cause]
An error occurred in the document feeder.
[Remedy] Power-cycle the printer. Contact our Customer Support
Center.
461
16 Problem Solving
Category
Error Code
Cause and Remedy
C P F S M O
Problem Solving
16
462
007-250
 [Cause]
007-252
 [Cause]
007-270
 [Cause]
007-271
 [Cause]
007-272
 [Cause]
007-273
 [Cause]
007-274
 [Cause]
007-276
 [Cause]
007-277
 [Cause]
007-281
 [Cause]
007-282
 [Cause]
007-283
 [Cause]
007-284
 [Cause]
007-291
 [Cause]
007-293
 [Cause]
A communications error occurred between the printer
and the paper tray.
[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center. Paper Tray 1 can
be used.
Set paper differs from the configured paper type, the
specified size is not in the paper tray, etc., there is an
error in the specified conditions.
[Remedy] Check the set paper, and power-cycle the printer. If the
error persists, contact our Customer Support Center.
Paper Tray 1 malfunctioned.
[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center. Trays other than
Paper Tray 1 can be used.
Paper Tray 2 malfunctioned.
[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center. Trays other than
Paper Tray 2 can be used.
Paper Tray 3 malfunctioned.
[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center. Trays other than
Paper Tray 3 can be used.
Paper Tray 4 malfunctioned.
[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center. Trays other than
Paper Tray 4 can be used.
Paper Tray 5 (bypass) malfunctioned.
[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center. Trays other than
Tray 5 (bypass) can be used.
Paper Tray 3 (high capacity) malfunctioned.
[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center. Trays other than
Paper Tray 3 (high capacity) can be used.
Paper Tray 4 (high capacity) malfunctioned.
[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center. Trays other than
Paper Tray 4 (high capacity) can be used.
Paper Tray 1 malfunctioned.
[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center. Trays other than
Paper Tray 1 can be used.
Paper Tray 2 malfunctioned.
[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center. Trays other than
Paper Tray 2 can be used.
Paper Tray 3 malfunctioned.
[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center. Trays other than
Paper Tray 3 can be used.
Paper Tray 4 malfunctioned.
[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center. Trays other than
Paper Tray 4 can be used.
Paper Tray 3 (high capacity) malfunctioned.
[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center. Trays other than
Paper Tray 3 (high capacity) can be used.
Paper Tray 4 (high capacity) malfunctioned.
[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center. Trays other than
Paper Tray 4 (high capacity) can be used.
Error Code
Category
Error Code
Cause and Remedy
C P F S M O
012-241
012-242
 [Cause]
012-244
 [Cause]
012-252
012-253
 [Cause]
012-254
 [Cause]
012-255
 [Cause]
012-256
012-257
012-260
012-262
012-267
012-281
 [Cause]
016-450
 [Cause]
Finisher malfunctioned.
[Remedy] Power-cycle the printer. If the error persists, contact our
Customer Support Center.
Finisher staple apparatus malfunctioned.
[Remedy] Power-cycle the printer. If the error persists, contact our
Customer Support Center.
Finisher malfunctioned.
[Remedy] Power-cycle the printer. If the error persists, contact our
Customer Support Center.
Paper output to the Finisher encountered the sensor
before the Finishing Tray could lower, or a foreign object
was in the Finishing Tray.
[Remedy] Check that the Finishing Tray is clear of any foreign
objects, and power-cycle the printer. If the error persists,
contact our Customer Support Center.
Finisher Tray malfunctioned.
[Remedy] Power-cycle the printer. If the error persists, contact our
Customer Support Center.
The SMB host name already exists.
[Remedy] Change the host name.
For information about Network Settings, refer to Network Administrator
Guide.
 [Cause]
016-454
Unable to retrieve IP address from DNS.
[Remedy] Check the DNS configurations and IP address retrieve
method.
For information about Network Settings, refer to Network Administrator
Guide.
016-503

[Cause]
016-504

[Cause]
016-505

[Cause]
Unable to login to POP3 server during mail send.
[Remedy] Check that the user name and password used in the
POP3 server from CWIS are correct.
Unable to resolve SMTP server name during E-mail
send.
[Remedy] Check that the SMTP server settings from CWIS are
correct. Also, check the DNS server settings.
Unable to resolve POP3 server name during E-mail
send.
[Remedy] Check that the POP3 server settings from CWIS are
correct. Also, check the DNS server settings.
463
Problem Solving
Finisher Tray malfunctioned.
[Remedy] Power-cycle the printer. If the error persists, contact our
Customer Support Center.
16
16 Problem Solving
Category
Error Code
Cause and Remedy
C P F S M O

016-702
[Cause]
PCL print data could not be processed as there was
insufficient print page buffer.
[Remedy] Take one of the following actions.
z Set [Print Mode] to [Speed Priority].
z Use Ensure Print.
z Increase the size of the print page buffer.
z Add on memory.
For information about print modes and print guarantees, refer to the print
driver's online help. For information about memory, refer to "Allocate
Memory" (P.290).

016-703
[Cause]
Mail specifying a non-registered or invalid mailbox No.
was received.
[Remedy] Take one of the following actions.
z Request the sender to register the mailbox with the
specified number.
z Request the sender to send to a valid mailbox.
 [Cause]
016-704
Documents stored in the mailbox have reached the limit,
and hard disk capacity is insufficient.
[Remedy] Remove unnecessary documents from the mailbox, and
save the document.
Problem Solving
Refer to "Printing/Deleting Documents in Mailbox" (P.190).

016-705
[Cause]
Unable to register a Secure Print document, because the
HDD kit is not installed.
[Remedy] A HDD kit is needed to use the Secure Print feature.
Refer to "Secure Print" (P.360).

016-706
[Cause]
The maximum number of Secure Print users has been
exceeded, and no space is available on the hard disk.
[Remedy] Remove unnecessary documents stored on the printer,
and delete unnecessary Secure Print users.
16
For information about Secure Print, refer to "Secure Print" (P.360). For
information about mailboxes, refer to "Printing/Deleting Documents in
Mailbox" (P.190).

016-707
016-708
016-710
016-711
016-712
464
[Cause]
Unable to sample print, because the HDD kit is not
installed or has malfunctioned.
[Remedy] A HDD kit is needed to use the Sample Print feature. If
the kit is malfunctioning, contact our Customer Support
Center.

[Cause]
Annotation is not possible due to insufficient hard disk
space.
[Remedy] Remove unnecessary data from the hard disk to
increase free disk space.

[Cause]
Unable to register a Delayed Print document, because
the HDD kit is not installed.
[Remedy] A HDD kit is needed to use the Delayed Print feature.

 Refer to 016-985.

Refer to 003-752.
Error Code
Category
Error Code
Cause and Remedy
C P F S M O
016-716

[Cause]
Unable to spool TIFF file, because of insufficient disk
space.
[Remedy] Remove unnecessary documents and users stored on
the printer, and then attach the hard disk. When
attaching a hard disk, contact our Customer Support
Center.
Refer to "Printing/Deleting Documents in Mailbox" (P.190).
016-721

 [Cause]
An error occurred during print processing. Probable
causes are as follows:
Printing was instructed by [automatic tray selection]
when [Paper Type Priority] is set to [Automatic Tray
switching Off] for all paper in the [Common Settings].
[Remedy] For 1, when printing by automatic tray selection, set one
of the paper types to a setting other than [Automatic Tray
switching Off] in [Paper Type Priority].
For 2, check print data.
Refer to "Paper Type Priority" (P.261).

[Cause]
016-728

[Cause]
An unsupported tag was included in the TIFF file.
[Remedy] Check the print data.
The print language cannot be automatically selected
when the print mode specified is set to [Auto].
Probable causes are as follows:
1 PostScript data was sent when the Post Script3 kit
(optional) is not installed.
2 LPR, etc. was used to send a PDF file directly to the
printer, which had a PostScript3 kit installed, but no
HDD kit.
[Remedy] For 1, the PostScript3 kit must be installed.
For 2, the HDD kit must be installed.
16
Refer to "Scan Options" (P.177).
016-729

[Cause]
Unable to print because the number of colors/resolution
of the TIFF file exceeds the allowed range.
[Remedy] Change the number of colors/resolution for the TIFF file,
and specify the print data again.
Refer to "Scan Options" (P.177).
016-731

[Cause]
Unable to print TIFF data because it was interrupted.
[Remedy] Retry printing.
016-732

[Cause]
Unable to registered form specified by Emulation with
host.
[Remedy] Resend the form data.

016-735
016-748
  
016-749

Problem Solving
016-726
 [Cause]
Attempted to print [Job Template List] while updating the
job template.
[Remedy] Retry printing after waiting for a period.
 [Cause]
Printing is not possible due to insufficient hard disk
space.
[Remedy] Reduce the number of pages of print data, for example,
by dividing up the print data or printing one copy at a
time when making multiple copies.
[Cause]
A PJL command syntax error occurred.
[Remedy] Either confirm the print settings, or correct the PJL
command.
465
16 Problem Solving
Category
Error Code
Cause and Remedy
C P F S M O
016-756
 [Cause]
016-757
 [Cause]
No permissions to use the service.
[Remedy] Check with your System Administrator.
Password is incorrect.
[Remedy] Enter the correct password.
016-758
   
[Cause]
016-759
 
[Cause]
016-760

User is not registered with a section that is authorized to
use this service.
[Remedy] Check with your Auditron Administrator.

Maximum number of pages for this service has been
reached.
[Remedy] Check with your Auditron Administrator.
[Cause]
An error occurred during PostScript (optional)
processing.
[Remedy] Take one of the following actions.
z Set [Print Mode] to [Speed Priority].
z Increase PostScript memory.
For information about [Print Modes], refer to the print driver's online help.
For information about memory, refer to "Allocate Memory" (P.290).
Problem Solving
16
016-761

[Cause]
An error occurred during image processing.
[Remedy] Set the [Print Mode] to [Speed Priority] and instruct
printing again. If this does not remedy printing, print in the
Ensure Print mode.
016-762

[Cause]
016-764

[Cause]
Could not connect to the SMTP server.
[Remedy] Contact the SMTP server administrator.
016-765

[Cause]
016-766

[Cause]
An error occurred on the SMTP server.
[Remedy] Contact the SMTP server administrator.
016-767

[Cause]
Could not send mail as the mail address was wrong.
[Remedy] Check the mail address and transmit again.
016-768

[Cause]
Could not connect to the SMTP server as the mail
address of the machine was incorrect.
[Remedy] Check the mail address of the machine.
016-769

[Cause]
016-771
016-772
466
A print language not installed on the machine was
specified.
[Remedy] In [Specify Print Mode] under [Port Settings], specify a
print language.

Could not send mail as the hard disk on the SMTP
server was full.
[Remedy] Contact the SMTP server administrator.
The SMTP server does not support confirmation of mail
distribution (DSN).
[Remedy] Send mail without setting confirmation of mail distribution
(DSN).
[Cause]
Unable to retrieve scan data repository address for the
scanning service using a Job Template.
[Remedy] Check the DNS address. Or, define the scan data
repository address by its IP address.
Error Code
Category
Error Code
Cause and Remedy
C P F S M O
 [Cause]
016-773
The IP address for the machine is not set properly.
[Remedy] Check the DHCP environment. Or, specify a fixed IP
address for the machine.
For information about Network Settings, refer to Network Administrator
Guide.
016-774
 
 [Cause]
016-775
 
 [Cause]
016-776
 
 [Cause]
Compression conversion is not possible due to
insufficient hard disk space.
[Remedy] Remove unnecessary data from the hard disk to
increase free disk space.
Image conversion is not possible due to insufficient hard
disk space.
[Remedy] Remove unnecessary data from the hard disk to
increase free disk space.
An error occurred during image conversion processing.
[Remedy] A portion of the data might have finished image
conversion processing.
Check the data via CentreWare Internet Services.
Refer to "CentreWare Internet Services" (P.212).
A hard disk error occurred during image processing.
[Remedy] The hard disk might be defective. When replacing a hard
disk, contact our Customer Support Center.
016-778

[Cause]
016-779

[Cause]
016-780

[Cause]
016-781

[Cause]
016-782

[Cause]
016-783

[Cause]
Conversion processing of scanned image was
interrupted, because of insufficient disk space.
[Remedy] Remove unnecessary data from the hard disk to
increase free disk space.
An error occurred during scanned image conversion
processing.
[Remedy] Retry scanning.
16
A hard disk error occurred during scanned image conversion
processing.
[Remedy] The hard disk might be defective. When replacing a hard
disk, contact our Customer Support Center.
Unable to connect to server when forwarding a file
scanned with a Job Template.
[Remedy] Have the network administrator check the network and
server environments.
Unable to login to server when forwarding a file scanned
with a Job Template.
[Remedy] Check the login user name and password.
Unable to find the specified server path when forwarding a
file scanned with a Job Template.
[Remedy] Check the server path name specified by the job
template.
Refer to the CentreWare Scan Service Installation Guide or the online help
for CentreWare Internet Services.
016-784

Problem Solving
 [Cause]
016-777
[Cause]
A write error on the server occurred while forwarding a
file scanned with a Job Template.
[Remedy] Check whether space is available on the server
directory, and that you have privileges.
467
16 Problem Solving
Category
Error Code
Cause and Remedy
C P F S M O
016-785

[Cause]
016-786

 [Cause]
016-787

When using the scan feature, hard disk capacity is
insufficient for writing to a file.
[Remedy] Either remove unnecessary data from the hard disk to
increase free disk space, or initialize the hard disk.
[Cause]
Invalid server IP address specified in job template.
[Remedy] Specify the correct job template.
016-788
 [Cause]
016-789
  [Cause]
Problem Solving
016-793
16
016-981
Failed to load a file from the Web browser.
[Remedy] Take out of the following actions, and try again.
z Reload the browser page
z Restart the browser
z Power-cycle the machine.
Insufficient space available for mail processing.
Processing was interrupted.
[Remedy] Reduce resolution or reduction/enlargement ratio to
decrease the data size, or send in several pieces.

016-791
468
Unable to forward a file scanned with a Job Template
due to insufficient hard disk on the server.
[Remedy] Remove unnecessary data from the server hard disk to
increase free disk space.
 [Cause]
In the scanner (save to PC) or job template scan, the
forwarding destination or job template save location
could not be accessed.
[Remedy] Check whether you can access the specified forwarding
destination.
 [Cause]
The hard disk has run out free space.
[Remedy] Either remove unnecessary data from the hard disk to
increase free disk space, or initialize the hard disk.

 Refer to 003-976.
016-982
 [Cause]
016-985
  [Cause]
021-750
021-751
021-770
021-771
021-772
 [Cause]
An error occurred due to insufficient hard disk space.
[Remedy] Remove unnecessary documents stored on the printer,
and remove unnecessary documents from the mailbox.
The configured maximum mail size has been exceeded.
[Remedy] Take one of the following actions, and resend.
z Decrease document pages.
z
Reduce [Scan Resolution].
z
Reduce [Scan Magnification].
z
When performing several scans, increased the [Image
Compression].
z
Have the System Administrator increase your
[Maximum Send E-mail Data Size].
During an inspection or maintenance request, a
transmission error occurred, and our Customer Support
Center could not be contacted.
[Remedy] Check that the phone lines are connected, and try
sending an inspection or maintenance request again
after a short time.
If the error persists, contact our Customer Support
Center.
Error Code
Category
Error Code
Cause and Remedy
C P F S M O
024-746

[Cause]
024-747

[Cause]
A feature (one of paper size, tray, output tray, or 2 sided
printing) that is incompatible with the specified paper
quality has been specified.
[Remedy] Check the print data.
An illegal print parameter combination was set. For
example a non-standard size was specified, and [Tray
Selection] was set to [Auto].
[Remedy] Check the print data. In the above case, select Tray 5
(bypass).
024-985
 [Cause]
027-452
 [Cause]
Tray 5 (bypass) produced an error.
[Remedy] Check paper size, paper orientation, and paper type,
and then press the <Start> button.
IP address already exists.
[Remedy] Change the IP address.
For information about Network Settings, refer to Network Administrator
Guide.
 [Cause]
027-453
Failed to obtain IP address from DHCP server.
[Remedy] Change the IP address manually.
027-500
  [Cause]
027-501
  [Cause]
Unable to resolve SMTP server name during answer Email send.
[Remedy] Check that the SMTP server settings from CWIS are
correct.
Unable to resolve POP3 server name when using POP3
protocol.
[Remedy] Check that the POP3 server settings from CWIS are
correct.
  [Cause]
027-502
Unable to login to POP3 server when using POP3
protocol.
[Remedy] Check that the user name and password used in the
POP3 server from CWIS are correct.
027-737

 [Cause]
027-739

 [Cause]
027-740

 [Cause]
027-741

 [Cause]
027-742

 [Cause]
027-743

 [Cause]
An error occurred while reading data from the job
template pool server.
[Remedy] Check to see whether you have privileges for the
directory storing the job template.
Unable to find the specified job template server.
[Remedy] Check the path name for the job template server.
Unable to login to job template server.
[Remedy] Check the login user name and password.
Unable to connect to job template server.
[Remedy] Have the network administrator check the network and
server environments.
Unable to store job template due to insufficient hard disk
space.
[Remedy] Remove unnecessary data from the hard disk to
increase free disk space.
The specified job template server is incorrect.
[Remedy] Check the settings for the job template server.
469
Problem Solving
For information about Network Settings, refer to Network Administrator
Guide.
16
16 Problem Solving
Category
Error Code
Cause and Remedy
C P F S M O
027-744

 [Cause]
027-745

 [Cause]
027-746

 [Cause]
There is a problem in the domain name of the job
template server.
[Remedy] Make sure that the DNS server connection and the
domain name are registered to the DNS server.
The address of the DNS server is not registered on the
machine.
[Remedy] Either register the address of the DNS server on the
machine, or set the address of the job template server by
an IP address.
The specified job template pool server protocol settings
are incorrect.
[Remedy] Set up the correct port.
Problem Solving
027-750
 [Cause]
027-751
 [Cause]
027-753
 [Cause]
027-796
For a scanned document, attempt made to fax forward/
print/iFax forward the document.
[Remedy] For a scanned document, you cannot fax forward/print/
iFax forward the document. Configure the job flow
correctly.
When following the job flow, an error occurred.
[Remedy] Check the settings for the job flow.
The necessary port for the job flow is either not enabled
or is unavailable.
[Remedy] Have your System Administrator check the port status.

  [Cause]
When the machine is configured to only print attached
documents when received by mail, a message with no
attachments is discarded upon receipt.
[Remedy] To print the mail body or header information as well,
change settings in the CentreWare Internet Services
Properties screen.
16
Refer to "E-mail Print" (P.216).
  [Cause]
027-797
Invalid received mail output destination.
[Remedy] Specify a correct output destination, and send the mail
again.
034-211
034-212

[Cause]
An error occurred on the fax controller.
[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center.
034-501

[Cause]
The telephone line (modular jack) is not connected.
[Remedy] Check that the phone line is connected correctly and
send again.
Refer to "Telephone Line Connectors" (P.34).
034-507
470

[Cause]
Communication could not take place because the ID of
the remote machine and the password you specified do
not match.
[Remedy] Make sure that the password and telephone number are
correct.
It is possible that the other party’s machine has been set
up to not receive ID from other parties. Ask the remote
station.
This code is also displayed when a polling request is
rejected.
Error Code
Category
Error Code
Cause and Remedy
C P F S M O
034-511

[Cause]
A Relay Broadcast cannot be transmitted.
[Remedy] Check if Relay Broadcast is correctly registered in the
speed dial code.
Print the [Address Book] and check whether or not Relay
Broadcast is correctly registered. If incorrect, edit the
Address Number.
Also, check the contents of Address Number registered
at the relay station.
For information on Relay Broadcast, refer to "Relay Broadcast
(Transmitting Documents Through a Relay Station)" (P.140). For
information about remote Relay Broadcast, refer to "Remote Relay
Broadcast (Performing Relay Broadcast to Remote Locations)" (P.143).
034-530
[Cause]
A correct operation was not performed in a certain time.
[Remedy] Perform operations within the specified time.
034-728
034-784
034-785

[Cause]
034-790
034-792
034-793
034-794
034-795

Refer to 034-501.
034-796

Refer to 034-728.
035-701

Refer to 034-728.
035-702

[Cause]
035-704

[Cause]
035-705
035-708
035-709
035-710
035-712

[Cause]
An error might have occurred on the other party’s side.
[Remedy] Call the other party to check if there is anything wrong
with the remote machine, then transmit again.
035-714

Refer to 035-702.
035-715

Refer to 034-507.
Transmission can not be made because the telephone
number is not correct.
[Remedy] Check the phone number and transmit again.
Customers who use G3 DP (Dial Pulse) should check if
the dialed number contains ∗ or #.
Problem Solving
16
The other party terminated the transmission. There is
nothing wrong with the machine.
[Remedy] Call the other party to check the status of the remote
machine, then transmit again.
A feature such as polling was set up on the machine, but
the remote machine does not have this feature.
[Remedy] Call the other party to confirm.
471
16 Problem Solving
Category
Error Code
Cause and Remedy
C P F S M O
Problem Solving
035-720

[Cause]
035-725

Refer to 034-511.
035-744
035-745

Refer to 035-704.
035-746

[Cause]
The fax network does not respond.
[Remedy] This may be caused by the following, check them and
then send the fax again.
Is the telephone line correctly connected?
The person you are faxing may not have a contract with
the fax network, or there may be some trouble with the
fax network. Furthermore, when you are connected to
the fax network, enter two pauses after "161" and "162"
then dial the telephone number.
035-749

[Cause]
036-507

Refer to 035-702.
036-786
036-787

Refer to 034-507.
16
The other party was redialed the set number of times but
did not answer.
[Remedy] Check with the other party if the telephone line of the
remote machine is disconnected or the exchange is
defective.
062-211
 [Cause]
062-277
 [Cause]
062-790
 [Cause]
063-210
 Refer to 062-211.
065-210
065-211
065-212
065-213
065-214
 [Cause]
116-701
472
You were connected to the remote machine, but it could
not receive.
[Remedy] Call the other party to check if there is something wrong
with the remote fax, such as:
z Out of paper
z Paper jam
z Memory full
z The remote machine does not support G3 reception.
When specifying features such as a Relay Broadcast
Send or Remote Mailbox, call the other party to check
whether the remote machine has these features, and if
the password is correct.
An error occurred in the document feeder.
[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center.
A communications error occurred between the document
scan unit and the document feeder.
[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center.
The scanned document is copy-protected.
[Remedy] Refer to "Illegal Copies and Printouts" (P.28), and check
to see if the document can be copied.
An error occurred with the machine.
[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center.
 
[Cause]
2 sided printing was not possible due to insufficient
memory.
[Remedy] Add memory, or install the HDD kit if it is not already
installed.
Error Code
Category
Error Code
Cause and Remedy
C P F S M O
116-702

[Cause]
Printing was performed using a substitute font.
[Remedy] Check the print data.
116-703

[Cause]
116-710

[Cause]
An error occurred during PostScript (optional)
processing.
[Remedy] Either confirm the print data, or click [Spool Settings] on
the [Details] tab in the print driver to set bi-directional
communications off.
A probable cause is that the correct document size could
not be judged as the receive data exceeded the HP-GL/2
(optional) spool size.
[Remedy] Increase the size assigned to HP-GL/2 auto-layout
memory.
 [Cause]
116-713
Job was divided and printed due to insufficient disk
space.
[Remedy] Remove unnecessary data from the hard disk to
increase free disk space.

[Cause]
An HP-GL/2 (optional) command error occurred.
[Remedy] Check the print data.
116-720

[Cause]
116-740

[Cause]
116-747

[Cause]
116-748

[Cause]
There is no plot data in the HP-GL/2 (optional) print data.
[Remedy] Check the print data.
116-749

[Cause]
116-771
116-772
116-773
116-774
116-775
116-776
116-777
116-778
116-780
An error occurred during printing as there was
insufficient memory.
[Remedy] Stop unnecessary ports, remove unnecessary data from
the hard disk to increase free disk space.
Numerical value operation error occurred as a value
exceeding the value limit of the printer was used in the
print data.
[Remedy] Check the print data.
There are too many paper margin values for the HP-GL/
2 (optional) effective coordinate area.
[Remedy] Reduce the paper margin values, and instruct it to print
again.
Job cancelled because the specified font was
unavailable.
[Remedy] Install the font, or setup font replacement on the print
driver side.

[Cause]
There was a problem with the parameters in the data.
They were automatically edited.
[Remedy] The printed image might not be complete. Check with
the other party, or ask for a resend. When using the
Internet Fax (iFax) feature, check with the mail recipient.
  [Cause]
There is a problem with the document attached to the
received mail.
[Remedy] Check the attached document.
473
Problem Solving
116-714
16
16 Problem Solving
Category
Error Code
Cause and Remedy
C P F S M O
124-701
 [Cause]
124-702
 [Cause]
The specified tray (side output tray) malfunctioned, and
the output destination switched to the center output tray.
[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center. Trays other than
the malfunctioned paper tray can be used.
The specified tray (Finisher tray) malfunctioned, and the
output destination switched to the center output tray.
[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center. Trays other than
the malfunctioned paper tray can be used.
Other Errors
Remedies are described for situations in which the following messages are displayed.
Error Code
Message
Problem Solving
16
A fault has
occurred.
Switch off the
machine.
Ensure that
the screen
disappears
before
switching it on.
(xxx-yyy)
Category
Cause and Remedy
C P F S M O
      [Cause]
An error occurred.
[Remedy] Turn off the power, wait until the touch screen goes dark,
and then turn on power again.
If the message persists, record the displayed contents
for [(xxx-yyy)]. Switch off the machine immediately, wait
for the touch screen to go dark, and contact our
Customer Support Center.
      [Cause]
A fault has
occurred. The
machine has
[Remedy]
rebooted. If the
problem
persists, call
for service.
(xxx-yyy)
Processing
has been
cancelled due
to an error.
See User
Guide for
information on
fault code.
(xxx-yyy)
474
      [Cause]
An auto-recoverable internal error occurred, and the
machine restarted automatically.
Select the [Close] button. The machine is operating
normally now. If the error persists, call our Call Center.
The machine operation has stopped due to a fault.
[Remedy] Restart the job.
Paper Jams
Paper Jams
When paper jams inside the machine, the machine stops and an alarm sounds. A
message also is displayed on the touch screen. Follow the instructions displayed and
remove the jammed paper.
Gently remove the paper taking care not to tear it. If paper is torn while it is being
removed from the machine, remove all torn pieces making sure that none remain inside
the machine.
If a paper jam message is displayed again after you have cleared the paper jam, paper
is probably jammed at another location. Clear this by following the message.
When you have finished clearing a paper jam, printing is automatically resumed from
the state before the paper jam occurred.
If a paper jam occurred during copying, press the <Start> button. Copying is resumed
from the state before the paper jam occurred.
This section describes how to clear paper jams that occur at the following locations:
The references are described below.
Paper Jams in Top Left Cover.................................................................................................. 476
Paper Jams in Middle Left Cover............................................................................................. 477
Paper Jams in Lower Left Cover.............................................................................................. 478
Paper Jams in Trays 1 to 4 ....................................................................................................... 479
Paper Jams in High Capacity Tray........................................................................................... 479
Paper Jams in the Duplex Module............................................................................................ 481
Paper Jams in the Finisher........................................................................................................ 482
Important • When a paper jam occurs, paper is sometimes torn and remains inside the machine if you
draw out a paper tray without checking the paper jam position. This may cause machine
malfunctions. Check where the paper jam occurred before remedying the problem.
• If a piece of jammed paper remains inside the machine, the paper jam message will not
disappear from the touch screen.
Problem Solving
Paper Jams in Tray 5 (Bypass)................................................................................................. 481
16
• Paper jams can be clear with the machine still on. When the power is turned off, all
information stored to the machine's memory will be erased.
• Do not touch components inside the machine. This can cause print defects.
475
16 Problem Solving
Paper Jams in Top Left Cover
The following describes how to clear paper jams that occur at the top left cover of the
body.
Important • When removing jammed paper, images are sometimes transferred to the transfer belt (black
film belt) on the machine body inside the top left cover. Do not touch this transfer belt. Doing
so might adversely effect image quality, or damage the transfer belt, necessitating belt
replacement.
1
Gently open the top left cover while
lifting up the release lever.
„Side Output Tray (Optional) Attached
Problem Solving
Remove the paper from the side
output tray before opening the left
upper cover. If delivered sheets are
left on the tray, it will become heavy
when the top left cover is returned
to its original position.
16
2
If the edge of the jammed paper
can be reached at the output tray,
pull out the jammed paper in the
direction of the feed-out area.
3
Remove the jammed paper.
Note
476
• If paper is torn, check for any
torn pieces of paper inside the
machine.
Paper Jams
4
If paper is jammed inside the fuser
unit, lift up the green lever and
remove the jammed paper.
Note
5
• After you have removed the
jammed paper, return the
lever to its original position.
Press the center section of the top
left cover to gently close the cover,
and lift up Tray 5 (bypass).
Paper Jams in Middle Left Cover
1
Gently open the left center cover
while pulling the release lever.
Problem Solving
The following describes how to clear paper jams that occur at the middle left cover of
the body.
16
2
Remove the jammed paper.
Note
• Paper can become jammed in
hard to find upper regions.
Look carefully for jams.
• If paper is torn, check for any
torn pieces of paper inside the
machine.
3
Gently close the left center cover.
477
16 Problem Solving
Paper Jams in Lower Left Cover
The following describes how to clear paper jams that occur at the lower left cover of the
body.
1
Gently open the lower left cover
while pulling the release lever.
2
Remove the jammed paper.
Note
Problem Solving
3
16
478
• If paper is torn, check for any
torn pieces of paper inside the
machine.
Gently close the bottom left cover.
Paper Jams
Paper Jams in Trays 1 to 4
The following describes how to clear paper jams that occur on trays 1 to 4.
When using the Document Centre C450 Tandem Tray model, refer to "Paper Jams in High Capacity
Tray" (P.479) for dealing with Paper Tray 3, 4 paper jams.
1
Pull out the tray where the paper
jam occurred.
Important • Paper is sometimes torn and
remains inside the machine if
you draw out a tray without
checking the paper jam
position. This may cause
machine malfunction. Check
where the paper jam occurred
before remedying the
problem.
2
Remove the jammed paper.
Note
Problem Solving
3
• If paper is torn, check for any
torn pieces of paper inside the
machine.
Push the tray in gently until it
comes to a stop.
16
Paper Jams in High Capacity Tray
This describes how to clear paper jams in the high capacity tray when using the
Document Centre C450 Tandem Tray model.
Paper Jams in Tray 3 (High Capacity)
1
Pull out Tray 3 (high capacity).
Important • Paper is sometimes torn and
remains inside the machine if
you draw out a tray without
checking the paper jam
position. This may cause
machine malfunction. Check
where the paper jam occurred
before remedying the
problem.
479
16 Problem Solving
2
Remove the jammed paper.
Note
3
• If paper is torn, check for any
torn pieces of paper inside the
machine.
Push the tray in gently until it
comes to a stop.
Paper Jams in Tray 4 (High Capacity)
Problem Solving
1
Pull out Tray 4 (high capacity).
Important • Paper is sometimes torn and
remains inside the machine if
you draw out a tray without
checking the paper jam
position. This may cause
machine malfunction. Check
where the paper jam occurred
before remedying the
problem.
16
2
Remove the jammed paper.
Note
3
480
• If paper is torn, check for any
torn pieces of paper inside the
machine.
If paper is jammed in the paper
feed section, open the inner cover
and remove the paper.
Paper Jams
4
Push the tray in gently until it
comes to a stop.
Paper Jams in Tray 5 (Bypass)
The following describes how to clear paper jams that occur on Tray 5 (bypass).
1
Inspect the inside part (paper feed
entrance) of Tray 5 (bypass), and
remove any jammed paper.
Important • When two or more sheets of
paper are loaded, remove all
of the sheets from the tray.
Note
2
Fan the paper you removed making sure that all four corners are neatly aligned.
3
Insert the paper into the tray with
the printing side facing down until
its leading edge lightly comes up
against the paper feed entrance.
Problem Solving
• If paper is torn, check for any
torn pieces of paper inside the
machine.
16
Paper Jams in the Duplex Module
This describes how to clear paper jams in the duplex module if the model you are using
supports 2 sided printing.
1
Open the Tray 5 (bypass) and
gently open the duplex module
cover.
1
2
481
16 Problem Solving
2
Remove the jammed paper.
Note
3
• If paper is torn, check for any
torn pieces of paper inside the
machine.
Close the duplex module cover,
and lift up Tray 5 (bypass).
Paper Jams in the Finisher
Problem Solving
The following describes how to clear paper jams that occur inside the light finisher
when the light finisher (optional) is installed.
Paper Jams on the Light Finisher Top Cover
1
Press the button on the light
finisher top cover.
2
The light finisher top cover opens.
16
482
Paper Jams
3
Remove the jammed paper.
Note
4
• If paper is torn, check for any
torn pieces of paper inside the
machine.
Close the light finisher top cover.
Finisher Connector Paper Jams
Problem Solving
1
Move the light finisher to the right.
16
2
Open the top cover on the light
finisher interface.
3
Remove the jammed paper.
Note
• If paper is torn, check for any
torn pieces of paper inside the
machine.
483
16 Problem Solving
4
Close the light finisher interface
cover.
5
Return the light finisher to the main
body.
Paper Jams on the Center Output Tray Exit
Problem Solving
1
Move the light finisher to the right.
2
Remove the jammed paper.
16
Note
3
484
• If paper is torn, check for any
torn pieces of paper inside the
machine.
If the jammed paper is hidden from
view, open the exit cover and
check inside.
Paper Jams
4
Return the light finisher to the main
body.
Problem Solving
16
485
16 Problem Solving
Document Jams
If a document jams on the document feeder, the machine stops, and an error message
is displayed on the touch screen. Clear the document jam according to the instructions
displayed, and then load the document again on the document feeder.
1
Pull up the handle at the front of the
left cover on the document feeder,
and open the left cover until it
comes to a stop.
Note
• When you fully open the
cover, it enters a fixed
position. Open the cover
gently.
Problem Solving
2
If the document is not caught in the
input section, you can remove it.
3
If there are instructions to turn the
wheel, turn the green wheel to eject
the document upward.
16
Important • If the document is stuck, do
not pull on it directly. The
document could be damaged.
4
If there are instructions to open the
inner cover, lift up the lever with the
green seal on it, and open the inner
cover.
5
Turn the green wheel to eject the
document upward.
Important • If the document is stuck, do
not pull on it directly. The
document could be damaged.
6
486
After closing the inner cover, close
the left cover until you hear it click
into place.
Document Jams
7
If the document cannot be found, pick up the document feeder slowly, and remove the
document if it is there, then close the document feeder.
8
If the document is not found in step
7, then pick up the document
feeder tray and remove the
document.
9
Gently return the document feeder
tray.
10
Make sure that the document is not
torn, wrinkled or folded, and load
the document again following the
instructions displayed on the touch
screen.
Note
• Torn, wrinkled or folded documents may cause document jams and damage. To scan such
documents, directly place the document on the document glass to make copies.
Problem Solving
• After removing the jammed
document, load the entire
document again including
delivered document sheets.
Already scanned document
sheets will automatically be
skipped, and scanning will
resume from the unscanned
document sheet.
16
487
16 Problem Solving
Stapler Faults
Below describes stapler troubles when the finisher (optional) is installed.
Follow the procedures on the following pages when copies are not stapled or when
staples are bent. Contact our Customer Support Center if the problem persists after you
have tried the following solutions.
Bent staple
Unstapled
If staples are stapled on the copies in the manner shown in the figures below, contact
our Customer Support Center.
Staple bent in reverse direction
Flattened staple
Entire staple rising up
Problem Solving
One side of staple rising up
16
Staple rising up with
center pressed in
488
Stapler Faults
Make sure that the machine has
stopped, and then open the front
cover on the light finisher.
2
Hold the staple cartridge by its
lever as shown in the figure on the
right, and draw out the staple
cartridge to the right towards you.
3
Lift up to remove the staple
cartridge.
4
After removing the staple cartridge,
check the inside of the finisher for
any remaining staples.
5
Problem Solving
1
16
Pull up the lever on the front of the
staple cartridge.
489
16 Problem Solving
6
Remove the jammed staples
together with the staple sheet.
Important • When removing jammed
staples, also remove the
staple sheet. Do not just break
off the bent staple.
Problem Solving
16
7
Close the lever on the front of the
staple cartridge until you hear it
click into place.
8
Lower the lever to return the staple
cartridge to its original position until
you hear it click into place.
9
Close the light finisher's front
cover.
Note
• A message will be displayed
and the machine will not
operate if the staple finisher's
front cover is even slightly
open.
If the staples cannot be removed after carrying out the above procedures, contact our
Customer Support Center.
490
17 Appendix
This chapter contains descriptions about the following:
z
Specifications............................................................................................492
z
Printable Area ...........................................................................................501
z
Using PDF Direct Print..............................................................................502
z
PCL Emulation..........................................................................................504
z
List of Options...........................................................................................521
z
Cautions and Limitations ..........................................................................522
z
Using the Telephone.................................................................................526
z
Simple Procedures ...................................................................................529
17 Appendix
Specifications
This section lists the specifications of the Document Centre C450/C360/C250. In the
interests of product development, product specifications and external appearance are
subject to change without prior notice.
For the latest information, contact our Customer Support Center.
„Main Unit and Copier Specifications
Type
Console Type
Color support
Full color
Scan resolution
600 × 600 dpi (23.6 × 23.6 dots/mm)
Output resolution
600 × 600 dpi (23.6 × 23.6 dots/mm)
Color Graduation
256 color graduation for each color (16,700,000 colors).
Warm-up time
45 seconds or less (when the room temperature at 20 ºC).
Important • It may take more than 45 seconds when optional fax kits are
installed or due to the network environment configuration.
The maximum size is 297 × 432 mm (A3, 11 × 17 inch) for both
sheets and books.
Copy (sheet) size
[Paper Tray - 4]
Maximum: A3 (297 × 432 mm) or
11 × 17 inch (279 × 432 mm).
Minimum:
A5 (148 × 210 mm)
[bypass tray]
Maximum: 12.6 × 17.7 inch (320 × 449.6 mm) or
12 × 18 inch (304.8 x 457.2 mm)
Maximum: postcard (100 × 148mm) or
envelope (120 × 235 mm)
Non-standard size:
X direction (horizontal) 100 to 483 mm,
Y direction (vertical) 100 to 305 mm (When
copying both sides on a non-standard size paper,
specify the size within the range from 148 to
432 mm for the X (horizontal) direction and from
140 to 297 mm for the Y (vertical) direction.)
Image loss width:
First 4mm or less, last 2 mm or less,
and top/front 2 mm or less.
Appendix
Copy document
17
Important • Copying may not be performed correctly when the X
(horizontal) direction of a non-standard size paper is less
than 140 mm.
Copy paper
Paper Tray 1 - 4 :
Paper Tray 5 (Bypass) :
64 - 169 g/m2
55 - 220 g/m2
Important • It is recommend using Xerox recommended papers.
Copying may not be performed correctly depending on the
deployment conditions.
492
Specifications
Fast copy time
<When using the Document glass>
For A4/monochrome priority mode (The default for the [Output
Important • Values may
Color] is [Black] or [No Default])
differ by device
Monochrome :4.5 seconds
configuration.
Color :
9.5 seconds
For A4/color priority mode (The default for the [Output Color] is
[Full Color], [Auto], [Dual Colors], or [Single Color])
Monochrome :6.9 seconds
Color :
7.0 seconds
<When using the Auto document feeder>
For A4/monochrome priority mode (The default for the [Color
Mode] is [Black] or [No Default])
Monochrome :6.7 seconds
Color :
10.3 seconds
For A4/color priority mode (The default for the [Output Color] is
[Full Color], [Auto], [Dual Colors], or [Single Color])
Monochrome :8.8 seconds
Color :
8.1 seconds
* Same magnification, from the paper Tray 1, single sided, and
output to the center output tray.
Copy reduction/
enlargement ratio
Same magnification 1:1±0.7%
Fixed reduction/enlargement ratios 1:0.500, 1:0.707, 1:0.816,
1:0.866, 1:1.154, 1:1.225, and 1:1.414
Custom reduction/enlargement ratios 1:0.25 - 1:4.00 (1% units)
Appendix
17
493
17 Appendix
Continuous copy speed
<Document Centre C450>
Paper Tray 1- 4 :Continuous 1 sided copy/same magnification
Important • The speed
[Monochrome] [Color]
may be
B5
,
A4
:
45 pages/minute 35 pages/minute
reduced in
34 pages/minute 26 pages/minute
order to adjust B5, A4 :
B4 :
27 pages/minute 21 pages/minute
the image
quality.
A3 :
22 pages/minute 17 pages/minute
Paper Tray 1 - 4 :Continuous double sided copy/same
• The
magnification
performance
may be
[Monochrome] [Color]
reduced
B5 , A4 : 36 pages/minute 28 pages/minute
depending on
B5, A4 :
21 pages/minute 16 pages/minute
the paper type. B4 :
18 pages/minute 14 pages/minute
• When printing A3 :
17 pages/minute 13 pages/minute
papers
Paper Tray 5* :Continuous 1 sided copy/same magnification
narrower than [Monochrome]
[Color]
B5 such as
B5 , A4 : 34 pages/minute 26 pages/minute
postcards
B5, A4 :
27 pages/minute 21 pages/minute
continuously,
B4
:
22 pages/minute 17 pages/minute
the
A3
:
21 pages/minute 17 pages/minute
temperature of
Paper
Tray
5*
:Continuous
double sided copy/same magnification
part of the
[Monochrome]
[Color]
fuser unit
B5 , A4 : 34 pages/minute 26 pages/minute
where the
paper is not
B5, A4 :
19 pages/minute 15 pages/minute
passing will
B4 :
17 pages/minute 13 pages/minute
rise and a
A3 :
17 pages/minute 13 pages/minute
Appendix
message
"Please wait
..." may be
displayed
while the
printing is
paused. The
printing will
resume after 1
- 2 minutes.
Also, for the
paper size less
than A4, only 1
page output
may cause,
the message
"Please wait
..." be
displayed and
printing be
paused more
than 30
seconds.
17
494
* When feeding from paper Tray 5 (bypass try) and the paper size
is set to [Auto Size Detect], the printing speed for the first page
will be slower.
<Document Centre C360>
Paper Tray 1 -4 :Continuous 1 sided copy/same magnification
[Monochrome] [Color]
B5 , A4 : 36 pages/minute 26 pages/minute
B5, A4 :
27 pages/minute 21 pages/minute
B4 :
22 pages/minute 17 pages/minute
A3 :
19 pages/minute 15 pages/minute
Paper Tray 1 - 4 :Continuous double sided copy/same
magnification
[Monochrome] [Color]
B5 , A4 : 22 pages/minute 17 pages/minute
B5, A4 :
19 pages/minute 15 pages/minute
B4 :
17 pages/minute 13 pages/minute
A3 :
16 pages/minute 12 pages/minute
Paper Tray 5* :Continuous 1 sided copy/same magnification
[Monochrome] [Color]
B5 , A4 : 27 pages/minute 21 pages/minute
B5, A4 :
22 pages/minute 17 pages/minute
B4 :
19 pages/minute 15 pages/minute
A3 :
19 pages/minute 15 pages/minute
Paper Tray 5* :Continuous double sided copy/same magnification
[Monochrome] [Color]
B5 , A4 : 21 pages/minute 16 pages/minute
B5, A4 :
18 pages/minute 14 pages/minute
B4 :
16 pages/minute 12 pages/minute
A3 :
16 pages/minute 12 pages/minute
Specifications
* When feeding from paper Tray 5 (bypass try) and the paper size
is set to [Auto Size Detect], the printing speed for the first page
will be slower.
<Document Centre C250>
Paper Tray 1 - 4 :Continuous 1 sided copy/same magnification
[Monochrome] [Color]
B5 , A4 : 25 pages/minute 21 pages/minute
B5, A4 :
22 pages/minute 17 pages/minute
B4 :
19 pages/minute 15 pages/minute
A3 :
17 pages/minute 13 pages/minute
Paper Tray 1 - 4 :Continuous double sided copy/same
magnification
[Monochrome] [Color]
B5 , A4 : 21 pages/minute 16 pages/minute
B5, A4 :
18 pages/minute 14 pages/minute
B4 :
16 pages/minute 12 pages/minute
A3 :
15 pages/minute 12 pages/minute
Paper Tray 5* :Continuous 1 sided copy/same magnification
[Monochrome] [Color]
B5 , A4 : 22 pages/minute 17 pages/minute
B5, A4 :
19 pages/minute 15 pages/minute
B4 :
17 pages/minute 13 pages/minute
A3 :
17 pages/minute 13 pages/minute
Paper Tray 5* :Continuous double sided copy/same
magnification
[Monochrome] [Color]
B5 , A4 : 19 pages/minute 15 pages/minute
B5, A4 :
17 pages/minute 13 pages/minute
B4 :
15 pages/minute 12 pages/minute
A3 :
15 pages/minute 12 pages/minute
Feeding method/paper
capacity
[4 Tray model]
560 pages × 4 trays + 100 pages × 1 bypass tray
Maximum paper capacity : 2,340 pages
[Tandem tray model (Document Centre C450 only)]
560 pages × 2 trays (Tray 1 and 2) + 980 pages (Tray 2) +
1,280 pages (Tray 4) + 100 pages (bypass tray)
Maximum paper capacity : 3,480 pages
17
Important • The above figures are for using Xerox P papers.
Continuous copy pages
999 pages
Important • The machine may pause temporarily to perform an image
stabilization process.
Output tray capacity
Center output tray :approximately 400 pages (A4)*
Side output tray: approximately 200 pages (A4) (Options)
* If performing an offset output to the center output tray, 200
pages.
Important • The above figures are for using Xerox P papers.
Power source
Appendix
* When feeding from paper Tray 5 (bypass try) and the paper size
is set to [Auto Size Detect], the printing speed for the first page
will be slower.
220 – 240V, 10A
495
17 Appendix
Maximum power
consumption
2.2KVA,
low power mode: 85W,
sleep mode: 10W
Important • Consumption figures for low power mode and sleep mode
are based on measurements by the International Energy
Star Program
Dimensions
Width 666.0 × depth 780.6 × height 1,067.0 mm
Weight (excluding
papers and options)
Document Centre C450/C360 : 170 kg
Document Centre C250 : 161 kg
Important • The weight is with a new toner cartridge without any papers.
Floor space
Width 967.0 × depth 780.6 mm (when the bypass tray is extended
to the maximum).
„Print Feature Specifications
Type
Built-in type
Continuous printing
speed
The same as the main body.
Important • The speed is reduced due to the image quality adjustment
when [High Precision] or [High Image Quality] is specified for
the [Print Mode] of PostScript driver or when [High Precision
Mode] is specified for the [Print Mode] of PCL driver.
• The performance may be reduced depending on the paper
type.
Appendix
• When printing papers narrower than B5 such as postcards
continuously, the temperature of part of the fuser unit where
the paper is not passing will rise and a message "Please wait
..." may be displayed while the printing is paused. The
printing will resume after 1 - 2 minutes. Also, for the paper
size less than A4, only 1 page output may cause, the
message "Please wait ..." be displayed and printing be
paused more than 30 seconds.
Resolution
Output resolution:
Monochrome: 1200 × 1200 dpi (47.2 × 47.2 dots/mm)
*Color:
600 × 600 dpi (23.6 × 23.6 dots/mm)
Data processing resolution: 1200 × 1200 dpi (47.2 × 47.2 dots/
mm: monochrome)
Page description
language
Standard:
Optional:
Supported protocols
Parallel : Compatible, Nibble, ECP
Ethernet :TCP/IP (SMB, LPD, Port9100, IPP), NetBEUI (SMB),
IPX/SPX (NetWare), Ether Talk (optional)*
17
PCL6
PostScript
Important • Ether Talk is for Mac OS 7.5.3 - Mac OS 9.2.2,
Mac OS X 10.2.x/10.3.3.
Supported OS
496
PCL6 :
Windows 95/98/Me
Windows NT 4.0,
Windows 2000/XP,
Windows Server 2003
PostScript : Windows 95/98/Me,
(Optional)
Windows NT 4.0,
Windows 2000/XP,
Windows Server 2003,
Mac OS 7.5.3 - Mac OS 9.2.2,
Mac OS X 10.2.x/10.3.3
Specifications
Built-in fonts
Standard :
Optional :
PCL6
European 81 type faces, symbol 35 sets
PostScript
Emulation
Standard :
TIFF, PDF, HPGL-2, PCL5, ESCP/K*1, KS/KSSM*2
Memory capacity
256 MB (maximum 768 MB)
Interface
Standard :
Optional :
bi-directional parallel (IEEE1284 compliant)
Ethernet (100Base-TX/10Base-T)
USB 2.0*
Important • USB 2.0 is for Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003,
Mac OS X 10.2.x/10.3.3
*1: Only for Traditional Chinese model
*2: Only for Korean model
„Scan Feature Specifications
Type
Color scanner
Scan Size
The maximum size of 297 × 420 mm (A3) for both sheets and
books.
Scan resolution
600 × 600dpi, 400 × 400dpi, 300 × 300dpi, 200 × 200dpi (23.6 ×
23.6, 15.7 × 15.7, 11.8 × 11,8, 7.9 × 7.9 dots/mm)
Scan color graduation
10 bits input for each RGB colors, 8 bits output
Document scanning
speed
Monochrome : 50 pages/minute (Scanning into mailbox for ITU-T
No.1 chart A4 200dpi)
Color :
35 pages/minute (Scanning into mailbox for ITU-T
Xerox standard document A4 200dpi)
Important • Scanning speed varies by the document.
Ethernet 10Base-T / 100Base-TX
Scan to mailbox
Supported protocols :
TCP/IP (Salutation, HTTP)
Output format :Monochrome (2 colors : TIFF)
Gray scale/full color :
TIFF, JPEG
Driver :
TWAIN (Salutation)
Driver supported OSs:
Windows 95/98/Me,
Windows NT 4.0,
Windows 2000/XP,
Windows Server 2003
Scan to FTP/SMB
Appendix
Interface
17
Supported protocols :
TCP/IP (SMB, FTP)
Driver supported OSs :
Windows 95/98/Me *1,
Windows NT 4.0,
Windows 2000/XP,
Windows Server 2003,
NetWare 5.x *2
*1 SMB protocol only is supported.
*2 FTP protocol only is supported.
Output format :Monochrome 2 colors:
TIFF (compression type:MH and MMR),
DocuWorks documents, PDF
Gray scale/full color :
TIFF (compression type: JPEG), JPEG,
DocuWorks documents, PDF
497
17 Appendix
E-mail transmission
Supported protocols : TCP/IP (SMTP)
Output format: Monochrome 2 colors:
TIFF (compression type: MH and MMR),
DocuWorks documents, PDF
Gray scale/full color :
TIFF (compression type: JPEG), JPEG,
DocuWorks documents, PDF
„Fax Feature Specifications
Appendix
Transmitted original size
Maximum:
A3 (297 mm × 420mm), banner documents
supported (max. 600 mm)
Recording paper size
Maximum: A3, minimum: A5
Transmission time
2-3 seconds*1
Communications mode
ITU-T G3
Scanning density
Standard :
8 x 3.85 lines/mm 200 × 100 dpi
(7.9 × 3.9 dots/mm)
High image quality :
8 × 7.70 lines/mm 200 × 200 dpi
(7.9 × 7.9 dots/mm)
Ultra-high image quality :
16 × 15.4 lines/mm
Ultra-high image quality (400 dpi):
400 × 400 dpi (15.7 × 15.7 dots/mm)
Ultra-high image quality (600 dpi):
600 × 600 dpi (23.6 × 23.6 dots/mm)
Encoding method
MH / MR / MMR / JBIG
Communications speed
G3 : 33.6/31.2/28.8/26.4/24.0/21.6/19.2/16.8/14.4/12.6/9.6/7.2/
4.8/2.4 kbps
Applicable telephone
circuits
Subscribed phone line, PBX, fax communications network (G3),
(G3 maximum 3 lines)
*1 Transmitting A4 size, about 700 character original at standard quality (8 × 3.85 lines/mm), high-speed mode (at
least 28.8 kbps: JBI). This is the transmission time for image information only, and does not include communications
overheads. Note that actual transmission times depend on the original, the other fax machine, and the circuit quality.
17
„Direct Fax Feature Specifications
498
Transmitted original
sizes
A3, B4, A4
Communications speed
Same as fax feature
Transmitted resolution
Standard:
Fine:
Super Fine:
Applicable telephone
circuits
Same as fax feature
Supported operating
systems
Windows 95/98/Me,
Windows NT 4.0,
Windows 2000/XP,
Windows Server 2003.
200 × 100 dpi (7.9 × 3.9 dots/mm)
200 × 200 dpi (7.9 × 7.9 dots/mm)
400 × 400 dpi (15.7 × 15.7 dots/mm)
600 × 600 dpi (23.6 × 23.6 dots/mm)
Specifications
„Internet Fax Feature Specifications
Transmitted original size
A3, B4, A4
Scanning density
Same as fax feature
Output format
Format
: TIFF-FX
Compression : MH, MMR, JBIG
Profiles
TIFF-S, TIFF-F, TIFF-J
Supported protocols
Sending: SMTP, receiving: SMTP, POP3
„Document Feeder Specifications
Original size
A5, A5 , B5 , B5, A4, A4 , B4, A3, 8.5 × 11", 8.5 × 11" ,
11 × 17"
Original types
38 - 128 g/m2 (2 sided: 50 - 128 g/m2)
Number of originals held
75 sheets
Important • When using Xerox P paper
Original changing speed
<Document Centre C450>
Monochrome: 45 sheets/minute (A4
Color:
35 sheets/minute (A4
<Document Centre C360>
Monochrome: 36 sheets/minute (A4
Color :
26 sheets/minute (A4
<Document Centre C250>
Monochrome: 25 sheets/minute (A4
Color :
21 sheets/minute (A4
1 sided)
1 sided)
1 sided)
1 sided)
1 sided)
1 sided)
Supplied from main unit
Dimensions
Width 560 × Depth 510 × Height 120 mm
Weight
12 kg
Appendix
Power supply
„Finisher B Specifications
17
Tray type
Finisher tray x 1: soft (offset available)/stack (offset available)
Paper size/supported
papers
Maximum: A3, minimum: B5
64 - 128 g/m2
Output tray capacity
A4: 1,000 pages, B4 or larger: 500 pages, mix stack*: 300 pages
* When larger size papers are loaded on smaller size papers.
Important • The above figures are for using Xerox P papers.
Staple
Maximum staple pages : maximum A3, minimum: B5
Staple paper size :
50 pages (64 g/m2 or less)
Staple position :
1 place (front, top, at an angle),
2 places (parallel)
Important • The above figures are for using Xerox P papers.
Dimensions/weight
Width 571.0 × depth 585.0 × height 1,042.0 mm, 35 kg
Floor space when
connected to the main
body
Width 1,504.0 × depth 780.6 mm (main body + finisher B)
„Side Output Tray Specifications
Paper size
Same as main unit
499
17 Appendix
Capacity
200 sheets
Note
• When using Xerox P paper
Ejection method
Face-up
Dimensions occupied
Width 1,021 × Depth 780 mm
„Duplex Module Specifications
Appendix
17
500
Paper sizes for auto
2 sided output
A5, A4, A4 , A3, B5, B5 , B4, 8.5 × 11", 8.5 × 11" ,
8.5 × 13", 8.5 × 14", 11 × 17"
* Paper loaded in paper trays 1 - 4 can be used for automatic
2 sided copying.
Paper weight
64 - 105 g/m2
Printable Area
Printable Area
The printable area is as follows.
Standard Printing Area
The standard area that can be printed leaves a margin of 4.1mm on all four edges of
the paper (for SRA3 (320 mm wide), a margin of 11.5 mm left and right). Note that the
actual printing area may vary depending on the printer (plotter) control language.
Extended Printing Area
The extended printing area setting allows printing over a maximum area of 302 × 476.6
mm. Depending on the paper size, however, the unprintable area is different.
Note
• To extend the print area, change the PCL print driver or the [Print Area] setting on the touch
screen.
For information on how to make print driver settings, refer to the online help for the print driver. For
more about the setting on the control panel, refer to "Print Area" (P.293).
„When the paper width
is less than 12 inches
Unprintable area
„When the paper width
is 12 inches
Unprintable area
4mm
Unprintable area 4mm
4mm
2mm
4mm
Printable area
4mm
11.5mm
11.5mm
Appendix
Printable area
Printable area
2mm
„When the paper width
is 12.6 inches
(SRA3 (320 mm width))
17
2mm
2mm
2mm
501
17 Appendix
Using PDF Direct Print
PDF direct print is a feature to print a PDF file by direct use of an lpr command for
example, without using a print driver. In this case, the printing follows the control panel
settings of the following items.
z
Number of copies output
z
Paper size
z
Duplex printing
z
Color mode
z
Printing mode
z
Print processing mode
z
Sorting
z
Password
z
Layout
Note
• When using the lpr command to print, specify the number of copies in the lpr command. The
[Number of Copies] setting on the control panel is disabled. Note that if the number of copies
is not specified in the lpr command, one copy is printed.
• When using the lpr command to print a PDF file, it is necessary to start the LPD protocol on
the machine, using the control panel or CentreWare Internet Services.
Setting Items for the PDF Direct Print Feature
This section describes the setting items for the PDF direct print feature.
These settings are valid when printing a PDF file without using the Fuji Xerox Contents
Bridge utility.
Note
Appendix
17
Setting item
• When using the Contents Bridge Utility to print a PDF file, refer to the manual within the
CentreWare Utilities CD-ROM.
Item
number
Setting values
Number of
copies output
401
Sets the number of copies to be printed.
[1 - 999] (default: 1):
1 - 999 copies
Duplex
402
Selects duplex printing.
[0] (default): No
[1]:
Flip on Long Edge
[2]:
Flip on Short Edge
Flip on Long Edge means duplex printing so that when the paper is bound
along the long edge, the orientation is correct for reading.
Flip on Short Edge means duplex printing so that when the paper is
bound along the short edge, the orientation is correct for reading.
Note
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package
is necessary. For information, contact our Customer Support Center.
Printing mode
403
Selects whether to give priority to printing quality or speed.
[0] (default): Standard
[1]:
High Speed
[2]:
High Quality
The Standard setting prints with a standard speed and quality.
The High Speed setting prints with priority given to speed.
The High Quality setting reduces the printing speed, but gives priority to
quality, resulting in better printing.
Sorting
404
Selects whether to print multiple copies collated (1, 2, 3...1, 2, 3...).
[0] (default): No
[1]:
Yes
502
Using PDF Direct Print
Item
number
Setting item
Layout
405
Setting values
This section describes the layout when printing.
Note
• The setting of this item is only valid when [Print Processing Mode] is
set to [PDF Bridge].
[0] (default):
[1]:
[2]:
[3]:
[4]:
Auto Reduce/Enlarge
Booklet
Two-up
Four-up
100% (actual size)
The Auto Reduce/Enlarge setting automatically prints with the
magnification adjusted to fit the paper size being printed. It automatically
selects A4 or letter size from the original size in the PDF file, and prints
accordingly.
The Booklet setting performs duplex printing with the page imposition
such that, according to the pagination of the PDF file to be printed, the
result is a booklet. Depending on the pagination, however, a booklet print
may not always be possible. In this case, it is printed at setting [0] (Auto
Reduce/Enlarge).
Note
• If there is no duplex feature, the document is printed 1 sided.
• When [Paper Size] is set to [A4], printing is on A4 size paper.
• When [Paper Size] is set to [Auto], printing is on A3 or A4 paper.
The Two-up setting prints two pages on each sheet of paper. When Twoup is selected, the paper size is fixed at A4.
The Four-up setting prints four pages on each sheet of paper. When
Four-up is selected, the paper size is fixed at A4.
406
Sets the paper size for printing.
[0]:
Auto
[1] (default): A4
The Auto setting automatically determines the paper size, according to
the original size of the PDF file to be printed and settings.
Color mode
407
Selects color printing or black and white printing.
[0] (default): Auto
[1]:
Black and white
The Auto setting automatically determines for each page of the original
whether it is color or black and white. If colors other than black and white
are used, then it is printed in color, and if black and white only are used,
black and white printing is used.
Print processing
mode
408
When using the PDF direct print feature, selects the mode for print
processing.
[0] (default): PDF Bridge
[1]:
PS
PDF Bridge processes the PDF using the Fuji Xerox PDF direct print
feature.
PS processes the PDF using the Adobe PostScript feature.
Note
• This setting appears only when the optional PostScript3 kit is
installed.
• The printed results may be different when [PDF Bridge] is selected or
when [PS] is selected.
• When [PS] is selected, the setting in [Layout] is disabled.
Password
-
If a password is set for the PDF file, this password must first be set.
Printing is only carried out when the password in the PDF file to be
printed and the password set here match.
You can set up to 32 alphanumeric characters.
503
Appendix
Paper size
17
17 Appendix
PCL Emulation
The following table shows the emulation parameters and their values for PCL
emulation.
For information on how to change parameter values, refer to "Print Mode" (P.371)
Parameter Item No.
Paper Tray
201
Value
0 (Default): Auto
1: Tray 1
2: Tray 2
3: Tray 3
4: Tray 4
5: Tray 5 (Bypass)
Selects the paper tray. When [Auto] is selected, the machine automatically
selects the tray that contains the paper whose size is specified on the [Paper
Supply] screen.
Auto Size
202
3: A3
4 (Default*): A4
5: A5
14: B4
15: B5
21: 8.5 × 14”
22: 8.5 × 13”
23 (Default*): 8.5 × 11”
24: 11 × 17”
30: 8K
Appendix
Sets the default paper size when the machine is set to select the paper size
automatically. Only available when [Paper Tray] is set to [Auto].
* The default value will be either [4] or [23] depending on the region of use.
Bypass
Size
203
17
3: A3
4 (Default*): A4
5: A5
14: B4
15: B5
21: 8.5 × 14”
22: 8.5 × 13”
23 (Default*): 8.5 × 11”
24: 11 × 17”
Sets the paper size for the bypass tray. Only available when [Paper Tray] is
set to [Tray 5 (Bypass)].
* The default value will be either [4] or [23] depending on the region of use.
Orientation
205
0 (Default): Portrait
1: Landscape
Sets the document orientation.
2 Side Print
206
0 (Default): Off
1: On
Sets whether to enable double-sided printing.
504
PCL Emulation
Parameter Item No.
Default
Font
207
Value
41: Times New Bold
42: Times New Bold Italic
43: Symbol
44: Wingdings
45: Line Printer
46: Times Roman
47: Times Italic
48: Times Bold
49: Times Bold Italic
50: Helvetica
51: Helvetica Oblique
52: Helvetica Bold
53: Helvetica Bold Oblique
54: CourierPS
55: CourierPS Oblique
56: CourierPS Bold
57: CourierPS Bold Oblique
58: SymbolPS
59: Palatino Roman
60: Palatino Italic
61: Palatino Bold
62: Palatino Bold Italic
63: ITC Bookman Light
64: ITC Bookman Light Italic
65: ITC Bookman Demi
66: ITC Bookman Demi Italic
67: Helvetica Narrow
68: Helvetica Narrow Oblique
69: Helvetica Narrow Bold
70: Helvetica Narrow Bold Oblique
71: New Century Schoolbook Roman
72: New Century Schoolbook Italic
73: New Century Schoolbook Bold
74: New Century Schoolbook Bold Italic
75: ITC Avant Garde Book
76: ITC Avant Garde Book Oblique
77: ITC Avant Garde Demi
78: ITC Avant Garde Demi Oblique
79: ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Italic
80: ITC Zapf Dingbats
18: Microsoft Publishing
19: Math 8
20: PS Math
21: Pi Font
22: Legal
23: ISO 4 United Kingdom
24: ISO 6 ASCII
25: ISO 11 Swedish:names
26: ISO 15 Italian
27: ISO 17 Spanish
28: ISO 21 German
29: ISO 60 Norwegian v1
30: ISO 69 French
31: Windows 3.0 Latin 1
32: Windows Baltic
33: Symbol
34: Wingdings
Symbol Set
208
0 (Default): Roman 8
1: ISO 8859-1 Latin 1
2: ISO 8859-2 Latin 2
3: ISO 8859-9 Latin 5
4: ISO 8859-10 Latin 6
5: PC-8
6: PC-8 DN
7: PC-775
8: PC-850
9: PC-852
10: PC-1004 (OS/2)
11: PC Turkish
12: Windows 3.1 Latin 1
13: Windows 3.1 Latin 2
14: Windows 3.1 Latin 5
15: DeskTop
16: PS Text
17: MC Text
Font Size
209
400–5000 (Default: 1200): Specifies the point size of a font in increments of
25. The value of 100 represents 1 point.
505
Appendix
0: CG Times
1: CG Times Italic
2: CG Times Bold
3: CG Times Bold Italic
4: Univers Medium
5: Univers Medium Italic
6: Univers Bold
7: Univers Bold Italic
8: Univers Medium Condensed
9: Univers Medium Condensed Italic
10: Univers Bold Condensed
11: Univers Bold Condensed Italic
12: Antique Olive
13: Antique Olive Italic
14: Antique Olive Bold
15: CG Omega
16: CG Omega Italic
17: CG Omega Bold
18: CG Omega Bold Italic
19: Garamond Antiqua
20: Garamond Kursiv
21: Garamond Halbfett
22: Garamond Kursiv Halbfett
23 (Default): Courier
24: Courier Italic
25: Courier Bold
26: Courier Bold Italic
27: Letter Gothic
28: Letter Gothic Italic
29: Letter Gothic Bold
30: Albertus Medium
31: Albertus Extra Bold
32: Clarendon Condensed
33: Coronet
34: Marigold
35: Arial
36: Arial Italic
37: Arial Bold
38: Arial Bold Italic
39: Times New
40: Times New Italic
17
17 Appendix
Parameter Item No.
Value
Font Pitch
210
600–2400 (Default: 1000): Specifies the pitch size of a font. The value of 100
represents the pitch size of 1.
Form Line
211
5–128 (Default: 64 or 60*): Specify the number of lines on a page.
* The default value will be [64] if the default value of the item 202/203 is [4];
[60] if the value for 202/203 is [23].
Print Sets
212
1–999 (Default: 1): Specify the number of print sets.
Image
Enhance
213
0: Off
1 (Default): On
Sets whether to enable the enhanced image mode.
Hex Dump
214
0 (Default): Off
1: On
Sets whether to enable a hex dump.
Draft Mode
215
0 (Default): Off
1: On
Sets whether to enable the draft mode.
Color Mode
216
0 (Default): Color
1: Monochrome
Sets the color mode.
Binding
217
0 (Default): LEF
1: SEF
Specifies which edge of paper is to be bound.
Appendix
Line
Termination
17
506
218
0 (Default): Off
1: Add-LF (Appends an LF to CR)
2: Add-CR (Appends a CR to LF and FF)
3: CR-XX (Appends a CR to LF and FF, and LF to CR)
HP-GL2 Emulation
HP-GL2 Emulation
This explains how to operate the HP-GL Mode Menu and the settings that can be made
with it.
HP-GL Settings List
Items that can be set using the HP-GL mode menu are explained in two groups: basic
settings and advanced settings.
„Basic Settings
Document Size
101
99 (Default): Auto
100: Paper
0: A0
1: A1
2: A2
3: A3
4: A4
5: A5
10: B0
11: B1
12: B2
13: B3
14: B4
15: B5
Paper Size
102
99: Auto
101 (Default): A Size
3: A3
4: A4
5: A5
14: B4
15: B5
17
Sets the paper size to be printed. This can be set if the
paper tray setting is either “Auto” or “Tray 5 (Manual
Feed)”. In addition, settings can only be made for cut
paper. When Auto (99) is specified, the paper size is
determined based on the Scaling Mode setting (the item
number 160).
Paper Tray
103
Appendix
Sets the document size created by a PC client. When
Auto (99) is specified, the document size is determined
based on the Scaling Mode setting (the item number
160).
0 (Default): Auto
1: Tray 1
2: Tray 2
3: Tray 3
4: Tray 4
5: Manual Feed
Sets the paper tray to be used for printing.
507
17 Appendix
Coordinate Rotation
104
0 (Default): 0 degree
1: 90 degree
Sets the paper orientation for printing.
Color Mode
105
0 (Default): Color
1: Monochrome
Sets the color mode.
„Advanced Settings
Auto Layout
106
0 (Default): ON
1: OFF
Selects whether aligning the position of the document
and the paper is to be done automatically or not.
Active Palette
107
0 (Default): Command
1: Panel
Selects whether to use a pen specified by command or
set on the panel.
No. of Prints
108
1 - 250 (Default): 1): 1 - 250
Sets the number of prints to be made.
Output Tray
109
0 (Default): Center Output Tray
1: Side Output Tray
80: Finisher Tray
Appendix
Sets the output tray.
Two-Sided Printing
110
17
0 (Default): None
1: Head to head
2: Head to toe
Sets the two-sided printing.
[None]...Prints one side.
[Head to Head]...Place the paper as in the [Paper
Orientation], and it prints both sides so that the
orientation of the up-sides are aligned for each page
when the left side is closed.
[Head to Toe]...Place the paper as in the [Paper
Orientation], and it prints both sides so that the
orientation of the up-sides are aligned for each page
when the top side is closed.
Chinese Fonts
111
0: Stroke
Specifies 2-byte character fonts, including Chinese
characters. The setting cannot be changed for this model.
Alphanumeric Fonts
112
0: Stroke
Specifies 1 byte character fonts. The setting cannot be
changed for this model.
508
HP-GL2 Emulation
Vertical Position
Adjustment
113
0 (Default): Do not
1 - 500: -250 ~ +250mm
Moves the hard clip area vertically.
-1 ~ -250mm for setting numbers 1 - 250
+1 ~ +250mm for setting numbers 251 - 500
Horizontal Position
Adjustment
114
0 (Default): Do not
1-500: -250 ~ +250mm
Moves the hard clip area horizontally.
-1 ~ -250mm for setting numbers 1 - 250
+1 ~ +250mm for setting numbers 251 - 500
Print Quantity Setup
115
0 (Default): Protocol
1: Panel
2: Command
Sets the method for specifying the print quantity.
HP-GL Mode
150
0 (Default): HP-GL
1: HP-GL/2
A graphics language can be selected.
Hard Clip
151
0: Standard
2 (Default): Paper
Eject Command
Scaling
152
(SP)
153
(SPO)
154
(NR)
155
(FR)
156
(PG)
157
(AF)
158
(AH)
0 (Default): OFF
1: ON
159
0: OFF
1 (Default): ON
Sets the command that indicates a drawing is finished.
When the command specified here is received, drawing
is terminated and the paper is ejected.
[Off]...Does not process as an eject command.
[On]...Processes as an eject command.
ON is set as the default for SPO only.
Determines the setting to either enlarge or reduce the
document size so that the document size fits the paper
size.
[OFF]...Prints in the same size without enlargement/
reduction, even if the document size and paper size are
different.
[ON]...Prints while enlarging/reducing the data on
document size so that it fits the paper size.
509
Appendix
Sets the size for the area where drawings can be made
(hard clip area).
[Standard]...Hard clip area for A4, A3, letter, and ledger
are the same as for the Hewlett Packard HP7550A. Hard
clip area for other paper sizes is the same as this M/C
printable area.
[Paper]...Make the hard clip area the same area as the
paper.
17
17 Appendix
Scaling Mode
160
0 (Default): Paper Size
1: Active Coordinate Area
Determines how the document size and the paper size
are determined when Document Size (the item number
101) and/or Paper Size (102) is set to Auto (99).
[Paper Size]...Make the document size the minimum size
that combines the active coordinate area from the active
coordinate determining method and the active coordinate
obtained by the settings of Origin Position and Paper
Margin.
[Active Coordinate Area]...Make the document size the
area from which the paper margin is subtracted from the
active coordinate area obtained by the active coordinate
determining method.
Active Area
Determining Command
161
0 (Default): Auto
1: PS
2: IW
3: IP
4: Adapted
Appendix
When auto-scaling is in use, this sets the method for
obtaining the active coordinate area.
[Auto]...Determines any of the methods listed below: PS,
IW, IP, or Adapted.
[PS]…Area specified by the first PS command is to be a
rectangular area.
[IW]...Area specified by the very last IW command is to
be a rectangular area.
[IP]...Area which combines all the IP Commands is to be
a rectangular area.
[Adapted]...The maximum/minimum coordinates within
the areas and coordinates plotted using the drawing
command, and the maximum size of characters and line
width specified in the page, are used to calculate the
rectangular area.
17
Paper Margin
162
0 - 99 (Default): 0): 0 - 99mm
Sets the paper margin when auto scaling is being used.
Image Enhancement
163
0: OFF
1 (Default): ON
Sets whether to artificially increase the resolution of an
image and smooth its edges.
Stapling
164
0 (Default): None
1: Top Left
2: Top Double
3: Top Right
4: Left Double
5: Right Double
6: Bottom Left
7: Bottom Double
8: Bottom Right
9: Center
Sets the stapling position.
510
HP-GL2 Emulation
Manual Feed Tray
Check Indicator
165
0: None
1 (Default): Yes
Pen Width
(No. 0 - No.15)
800 815
0 - 255 (Default): 3): 0 - 25.5 mm
Sets the width of the pen (thickness of the line).
Width units are 0.1mm. Can be set in steps of 0.1mm.
Line End Shape
(No. 0 - No.15)
850 865
0 (Default): Cut
1: Round
2: Rectangular
Sets the line end shape.
Pen Intersects
(No. 0 - No.15)
900 915
0 (Default): None
1: Intersect
2: Round
3: Cut
Sets the process for when pens’ lines intersect.
Pen Color
(No. 0 - No.15)
950 965
***0 - 255 (Gray Scale)
0 - 100 (Black and White)
Sets the color density. The smaller the number, the lighter
the color.
Hard Clip Area
„Standard
Appendix
In the HP-GL mode, the printable area is determined in line with the paper size, apart
from the printable area. This area is called a Hard Clip Area, and determines the
maximum range of pen movement. Accordingly, images cannot be drawn outside the
boundary of the hard clip area. This machine allows you to select a hard clip area from
the following.
17
Defines the printable area of this machine as the hard clip area.
„Paper
Defines a size that is the same as the paper as the hard clip area. However, the area
that allows actual printing is within the printable area.
The Hard Clip Area can be set either via HP-GL Emulation Mode settings or by the
specified hard clip command “& 1”.
The following coordinate values present an example of when the origin is set at the
lower left (Auto Layout in HP-GL/2) of A3 sheet.
511
17 Appendix
+Y
(16798, 11876)
(16442, 11520)
Standard Hard Clip Area
Paper Hard Clip Ares
Paper Size
(0, 0) Standard origin
+X
(0, 0) Paper origin
Printable Area
The printable area in the HP-GL mode is as follows.
„Paper Size and Printable Area
Appendix
Paper Length
(1/7200 inch)
Paper
size
17
Y Axis
Width
Height
Margin
Printable Area
Bottom
-left X
Bottom
Left Y
Long
Side
Short
Side
Top-right Edge
Topright X
Topright Y
Margin
XR
YU
A3
119052
84168
1260
1260
116532
81648
117792
82908
1260
1260
A4
84168
59508
1260
1260
81648
56988
82908
58248
1260
1260
A5
59508
41940
1260
1260
56988
39420
58248
40680
1260
1260
B4
103176
72828
1260
1260
100656
70308
101916
71568
1260
1260
B5
72828
51588
1260
1260
70308
49068
71568
71568
1260
1260
Note
512
X Axis
Coordinate Value (1/7200 inch)
• HP-GL Emulation supports 5 paper sizes, A3,A5,A4, B4 and B5.
HP-GL2 Emulation
Width
YU
Top-right X, Top-right Y
Short-side
Height
Long-side
Actual Paper
XR
Printable Area
Bottom-left X, Bottom-left Y
(0, 0)
Paper Length
(1/7200 inch)
Paper
size
X Axis
Y Axis
Width
Height
Coordinate Value (1/7200 inch)
Margin
Printable Area
Bottom
-left X
Bottom
Left Y
Long
Side
Short
Side
Top-right Edge
Topright X
Topright Y
Margin
XR
YU
84168
119052
1260
1260
81648
116532
82908
117792
1260
1260
A4
59508
84168
1260
1260
56988
81648
58248
82908
1260
1260
A5
41940
59508
1260
1260
39420
56988
40680
58248
1260
1260
B4
72828
103176
1260
1260
70308
100656
71568
101916
1260
1260
B5
51588
72828
1260
1260
49068
70308
50328
71568
1260
1260
Note
• HP-GL Emulation supports 5 paper sizes, A3,A5,A4, B4 and B5.
Appendix
A3
Width
YU
17
Top-right X, Top-right Y
Long-side
Short-side
Height
XR
Actual Paper
Printable Area
Bottom-left X, Bottom-left Y
(0, 0)
513
17 Appendix
Auto Layout
This section explains Auto Layout.
1. What is Auto Layout?
Auto Layout is a function that evaluates document size based on the HP-GL data
entered from the host system and enlarges/reduces it in line with the paper size to be
plotted so that the plotted data is laid out in the center of the paper. Using the Auto
Scale and Auto Layout functions enables you to print a document in the HP-GL mode
without regard for the document size and origin position.
All specification in Auto Layout can be made via the operation panel. The settings
cannot be made with advanced commands.
2. Activating the Auto Layout Function
Set the following items with the operation panel to activate the Auto Layout function.
z
Set the document size to AUTO. The default value is AUTO.
z
Set the Auto Layout to ON for setting the origin position. The default value is ON.
z
Set Scaling to ON. The default value is ON.
z
Select a method for obtaining the active coordinate area using the area determining
mode. The default value is AUTO.
z
Set the paper margin using Paper Margin. The default value is 0 mm.
z
Set the Scaling Mode. The default value is Paper Size.
3. Details on Setting Items
Details on each item are as follows.
Appendix
„Document Size
Press the mode button and select AUTO under document size and it will be possible to
set Auto Layout to ON.
17
„Auto Layout
After pressing the mode button, press the menu button and set Auto Layout to ON.
Once you set it to ON, the settings for scaling, area determination mode, paper margins
and scaling mode all become active.
„Scaling
Determines the setting to either enlarge or reduce (scaling) the document size so that
the document size fits the paper size.
„Area Determination Mode
Based on HP-GL data, the methods for obtaining the active coordinates area are as
follows:
Auto
The method for determining the active coordinate area is automatically selected from
among PS, IW, IP and Adapted.
In this mode the order of priority is PS, IW, IP, Adapted.
514
HP-GL2 Emulation
IW
The area specified by the very last IW command in the data becomes the active
coordinate area.
If there are no IW commands in the data, the active coordinate area is determined by
Adapted.
IP
The area that encompasses all the areas specified by IP commands in the data
becomes the active coordinate area.
If there are no IP commands in the data, the active coordinate area is determined by
Adapted.
Adapted
The ACA is determined by the following conditions.
Min/Max position coordinates plotted by drawing commands
Max font size specified within the page
Max line width
PS
The area that encompasses all the areas specified by PS commands in the data
becomes the active coordinate area.
If there are no PS commands in the data, the active coordinate area is determined by
Adapted.
„Paper Margin
Appendix
Set the range from 0 to 99mm. The default value is 0mm. To get the active coordinate
area, subtract the area set in paper margins from the ACA obtained in the area
determination mode.
17
Paper Margins
Area obtained by area determination mode
Cannot plot as hard clip is
exceeded
Area left when paper margin subtracted from
area obtained by area determination mode
„Scaling Mode
Select the mode for determining the document size from the obtained ACA. Also, judge
whether it will be portrait or landscape according to the ACA.
If it is an ACA
To get the document size, subtract the area set in paper margins from the area
obtained in the area determination mode.
515
17 Appendix
If it is a Paper Size
Set the document size from the obtained ACA and the origin point setting. The
document size can be selected from A-size papers (6 sizes--A0, A1, A2, A3, A4 or A5).
4. How to Determine Document Size
The document size is determined by comparing the hard clip area for each paper size,
based on the ACA obtained in the scaling mode, paper margins, and area
determination mode.
„If the Scaling Mode is a Paper Size
1) Obtain the coordinate area to be active from the HP-GL data entered, in accord
with the area determination mode.
2) As a margin, add the larger value of either the font size specified in the page, the
default size or one half the specified pen width, to the ACA obtained in 1.
3) Subtract the value set in paper margins from the ACA obtained in 2.
4) The minimum size that includes the ACA obtained in 3 will be the document size.
„If the Scaling Mode is the ACA
1) Obtain the coordinate area to be active from the HP-GL data entered, in accord
with the area determination mode.
2) As a margin, add the larger value of either the font size specified in the page, the
default size or one half the specified pen width, to the ACA obtained in 1.
3) Subtract the value set in paper margins from the ACA obtained in 2.
4) The ACA obtained in the process up to 3 will be the document size.
„Ex.
Appendix
If the following data is entered when the scaling mode = paper size, origin position =
Auto, paper margin is 10mm, area determination mode = IP:
All pen width settings are 0.1mm
The following data does not contain a character size specification command and the
physical size of the area specified by IP/IW is A3.
17
IN;
IP-8399,-5938, 8399, 5938;
IW-8399,-5938, 8399, 5938;
PU;
SP1;
:
:
SP0;
1) As the area determination mode is IP, the ACA is specified as the area -8399,5938,8399,5938 by an IP command.
YYY
2) In the example above, as there are no font size specification commands and all the
pen widths are 0.1mm, add the height/2 of the default font size for A3 size paper
(75 plotter units) to the ACA obtained in 1.
The ACA obtained in 2 is -8474,-6013,8474,6013.
516
HP-GL2 Emulation
3) The value set in paper margins (10mm = 400 plotter units) is subtracted from the
ACA obtained in 2.
The ACA obtained in 3 is -8074,-5613,80740,5613.
4) As the ACA obtained in 3 exceeds the A4 size and is A3 size, the document size is
determined to be A3.
In addition, as the ACA area when the paper margin setting is 0mm is 8474,-6013,
8474, 6013, and this exceeds A3, but is A2 or smaller, the document size is
determined to be A2.
5. How to Determine Paper Size
If the operation panel settings are as follows, the paper size is determined as below.
Document size: Auto
Paper Tray: Auto
The method for determining the paper size differs according to the paper size and
scaling mode settings on the operation panel.
„If the Paper Size Setting is A Sizes
The possibilities for paper size are those that are actually loaded in the trays, from
among the three sizes, A3, A4 and A5.
If A-sized papers (A3, A4, A5) are not loaded in the trays, all of the sizes, A3, A4 and
A5 become possible sizes; a message is displayed on the operation panel prompting
the user to load A-sized paper.
„If the Paper Size Setting is Auto
The possibilities for paper size are those that are actually loaded in the trays, from
among the 5 sizes, A3, B4, A4, B5 and A5.
„If the Scaling Mode Setting is Paper Size
If the paper size and the document size are the same, select paper that is the same
size as the document.
If the document size is larger than any possible paper sizes, select the largest paper.
If the document size is smaller than any possible paper sizes, select the closest paper.
„If the Scaling Mode Setting is ACA
Select the smallest paper size that can contain the ACA.
If the ACA is larger than any possible paper sizes, select the largest paper.
If the ACA is smaller than any possible paper sizes, select the closest paper.
Supplementary Notes
If the document size is set to anything other than Auto, the paper size is the size set on
the operation panel.
If the paper tray is set to Auto, the paper size is the size loaded in each tray. However,
If paper whose size is not supported is loaded, an error message will be displayed
prompting the user to load a supported paper.
517
Appendix
If A3, B4, A4, B5 or A5 paper is not loaded in the trays, all of the sizes become possible
sizes; a message is displayed on the operation panel prompting the user to load paper.
17
17 Appendix
6. How to Determine the Scaling Factor
When auto-scaling is being used, although the scaling factor is determined by
document size and paper size, it differs according to the scale mode setting.
Supplementary Notes
To activate scaling, turn the scaling setting to ON on the operation panel. If it is OFF, it
is plotted at the same scale (100%).
„If the Document Size is Auto and the Scaling Mode is Paper Size
The hard clip setting is inactive. The hard clip area is always the paper’s hard clip area.
If the document size = paper size, it plots at the same scale (100%).
If the document size > paper size, it plots at a reduced scale.
If the document size < paper size, it plots at the same scale (100%).
A3
A4
A5
B4
B5
A0
35
25
100
31
100
A1
50
35
25
43
31
A2
71
50
35
61
43
A3
100
71
50
87
61
A4
100
100
71
100
87
A5
100
100
100
100
100
Appendix
If the origin position for the plotting position is Layout, the document is laid out and
drawn in the center. If the origin position is bottom left or center, the origin of the
document and the paper are aligned and drawn.
„If the Document Size is Auto and the Scaling Mode is ACA
The hard clip setting is inactive. The hard clip area is always the advanced hard clip
area.
17
The scaling factor is determined according to the ACA and the paper size. The range
for the ACA for each paper size is as follows:
0 Degrees
Paper
Size
Min Value
90 Degrees
Max Value
Min Value
Max Value
P2x - P1x
P2y - P1y
P2x - P1x
P2y - P1y
P2x - P1x
P2y - P1y
P2x - P1x
P2y - P1y
A3
7829
5485
73075
51200
5485
7829
51200
73075
A4
5485
3828
51200
35733
3828
5485
35733
51200
A5
3828
2648
35733
24720
2648
3828
44088
35733
B4
6762
4723
63120
44088
4723
6762
44088
63120
B5
4723
3297
44088
30773
3297
4723
30773
44088
Unit: Plotter Unit
The maximum scaling factor is 210% of the advanced hard clip area for each paper size
and the minimum scaling factor is 22.5%.
518
HP-GL2 Emulation
7. Restrictions When Plotting under Auto Layout
„If the Printer is Equipped with Hard Disk(s)
When Auto Layout is used, print data is stored on the hard disk.
„If the Printer is Not Equipped with hard disk(s)
When Auto Layout is used, print data is stored in layout memory.
The default layout memory is set at 100kbyte. Consequently, when print data
exceeding 100kbyte is received, a printer error occurs.
If this happens, change the Auto Layout memory capacity on the operation panel.
However, the Auto Layout memory capacity max is 5120kbyte. So, print data larger
than 5120kbyte cannot be received.
When using the Auto Layout function, we recommend the printer be equipped with a
hard disk.
8. Examples of Combinations of Each Function
Below are examples showing the print results that can be achieved by combining
various functions.
„Document: Auto, Coordinate Origin: 0 Degrees, Scaling Mode: Paper Size,
Scaling: ON
Print Area
Appendix
Document Size
17
Paper Size
„Document: Auto, Coordinate Origin: 0 Degrees, Scaling Mode: Paper Size,
Scaling: OFF
Print Area
Document Size
Paper Size
519
17 Appendix
„Document: Auto, Coordinate Origin: 0 Degrees, Scaling Mode: Active Coordinate
Area, Scaling: ON
Print Area
Active Coordinate Area determined by
entered data
Paper Size
„Document: Auto, Coordinate Origin: 0 Degrees, Scaling Mode: Active Coordinate
Area, Scaling: OFF
Print Area
Active Coordinate Area determined by
entered data
Appendix
17
520
Paper Size
List of Options
List of Options
The following are the principal options available. To purchase these, contact our
Customer Support Center.
Product name
Description
Automatic document feeder
This automatically feeds 2 sided originals from a stack.
Duplex module
This unit provides 2 sided (duplex) printing.
Offset stacking module
This unit ejects paper with an offset.
Side output tray
This tray allows paper to be output face up from a 1 sided
printing machine.
Note
• This cannot be used when with the duplex output unit
(with inverter) is installed.
This allows printed output or copies to be stapled for output.
HDD kit
This kit provides extended copy features, the printer spooling
feature, and scanner features.
128 MB Memory
This extends the page memory by 128 MB.
512 MB Memory
This extends the system memory by 512 MB.
USB 2.0 port kit
This allows USB 2.0 to be used.
Annotation copy kit
This allows copies to be made with stamps and page numbers
added.
Electronic pre-collation kit
This kit allows copies to be output already collated in page
order.
Copy management
extension kit
By printing a date or number over the whole page, this kit
allows the copying of confidential documents to be prevented.
HDD Data security
kit
This kit increases the security of data written to the hard disk.
Network Scanning kit
This kit allows the scanner feature to be used.
Fax kit
This kit allows the fax feature to be used.
iFax kit
This kit allows the iFax (Internet fax) feature to be used.
Additional Fax port
When using the fax feature, this adds a G3 circuit.
Address book extension kit
This increases the number of items allowed in the address
book to 999.
Network Accounting kit
Allows you to keep track of the user accounts via an external
authentication server.
Note
Appendix
Finisher B
17
• The products are liable to change.
• For the latest information, contact our Customer Support Center.
„PostScript3 Kit
When the PostScript3 kit is installed, the machine can not only be used as a PostScript
supporting printer. It is also possible to print from a Macintosh.
521
17 Appendix
Cautions and Limitations
This section describes notes and restrictions on the use of the machine.
Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the Machine
„HDD Kit (Optional)
z
When the function extension kit is installed, you can specify the hard disk for storing
print data from lpd, SMB, and IPP. The storage for HP-GL/2 forms is also fixed at the
hard disk. Changes to other areas are not possible.
z
The data erased by formatting the hard disk consists of additional fonts, HP-GL/2
forms, and SMB folders. Secure print documents and logs are not erased.
„When the Print Results Differ from the Settings
Insufficient memory for the print page buffer may cause the following effects to occur,
giving results not expected from the settings. In this case, more memory is
recommended.
z
Single-sided printing when duplex was specified
z
Jobs are canceled (if a page cannot be rendered in the print page buffer, the job
including that page is canceled)
„Options
Appendix
z
To use the sorting (electronic collation feature), secure print, and print guarantee
features requires the optional HDD kit.
z
To use the machine as a PostScript printer requires the optional PostScript3 kit to be
installed.
„Installing and Moving the Machine
17
z
When moving the machine from its rack, contact our Customer Support Center.
z
When moving the machine, do not subject the unit to shocks.
z
When closing the document cover, be careful not to trap your fingers.
z
Do not place things close to the ventilation opening of the extractor fan of the
machine.
„Meter Counts for Duplex Printing
z
522
For duplex printing, depending on the application being used and the way in which
the number of copies is specified, blank pages may be inserted automatically. In this
case, the blank page inserted by the application is counted for metering purposes.
Cautions and Limitations
Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the iFax Feature
„Notes on Mail Transmission
When the message "Doc. Sent" appears in the communications confirmation screen,
or an activity report or transmission report shown on the machine, this indicates that the
message has been delivered to the SMTP server registered in the machine for sending
mail. It is possible for e-mails to be lost in transit through the Internet, and not reach the
addressee. In this case, there may be no notification to the machine. When sending
important messages, it is recommended to make an independent check, for example
by telephone.
„Function Combinations when Sending an iFax
z
[Resolution] in the [Basic Features] screen
In the [Send Options] screen, when [iFax Profile] is set to [TIFF-S], it is not possible
to select [Superfine (400 dpi)] or [Superfine (600 dpi)].
For information about iFax profiles, refer to "iFax Profile (Specifying iFax Profiles)" (P.134).
z
[Communication Mode] in the [Send Options] screen
When sending with the fax gateway feature, it is possible to specify the
communications mode. In other cases, it is automatically sent by G3.
For information about the fax gateway feature, refer to "Differences between iFax and Regular Fax
Features" (P.107).
z
[Scan Size] in the [Scan Options] screen
In the [Send Options] screen, when [iFax Profile] is set to [TIFF-S], even if you
specify a size large than A4, the original is reduced to A4 size for transmission.
For information about iFax profiles, refer to "iFax Profile (Specifying iFax Profiles)" (P.134).
z
When specifying iFax profiles
The iFax profiles that can be handled vary depending on the recipient. When
specifying an iFax profile, check that the iFax profile can be handled by the recipient.
z
When an unsupported iFax profile is specified
If the iFax profile specification is different, at the receiving end it is not possible to
display or print the received image. Check with both sender and receiver that the
iFax profile used can be handled.
z
TIFF files and iFax profiles that can be handled when receiving
- TIFF file format: TIFF-FX (RFC2301)
- iFax profile: TIFF-S, TIFF-F, TIFF-J, TIFF-C
If an unsupported iFax profile is received, it may not be possible to print the file. If
received with TIFF-C, it is printed in black and white.
z
Transmission conditions for broadcast transmission
- For a broadcast transmission, it is possible to combine iFax transmission
recipients and normal fax transmission recipients. In this case, an e-mail is sent to
iFax transmission recipients, and a fax is sent to normal fax transmission
recipients.
- When the transmission conditions are different for recipients of a broadcast
transmission, all recipients receive the transmission with the following settings.
• Transmission mode :G3 auto
• iFax profile
: TIFF-S
• Read/send status: None
523
Appendix
„iFax Profiles
17
17 Appendix
„Mail Forwarding
When an image received by fax is in JBIG compressed format, when the forwarding
destination has its iFax profile set to TIFF-F, the image is converted to MH compression
for forwarding. If the iFax profile is TIFF-S, it is forwarded with the size and resolution
unchanged.
„Fax Gateway Feature
This feature can only be used when the mail receiving protocol is SMTP on the iFax
supporting machine for fax transmission.
When converting an e-mail to a fax document for transmission, if it is not possible to
send the transmission correctly to the recipient, the original received mail is deleted.
For information about the fax gateway feature, refer to "Differences between iFax and Regular Fax
Features" (P.107).
„Restrictions for the Paper Selection during iFax Reception
The machine determines whether the attached TIFF file is displayed with content-type
as described by the RFC2301 and RFC3250 Internet Protocol Standards. If the file is
recognized, the machine will select which paper to use to reproduce the image as a fax.
Even when receiving an iFax, if the machine does not recognize the file, it may select
the wrong paper. For example, if a sent fax is on A4 paper, the received fax may be
printed on B4 paper.
Some adjustments may be available depending on usage conditions. For more information, contact our
Customer Support Center.
„Mail Server Restrictions
Appendix
Depending on the system environment (mail server restrictions and so on), it may not
be possible to send or receive large volume e-mails. When setting the number of pages
for splitting mails to send, check the system environment at both sending and receiving
ends.
If even splitting a mail to be sent into single pages results in excessive volume for the
transmission, reduce the transmission quality or change the resolution of the original,
to reduce the size.
„Network Confidentiality
17
Network confidentiality cannot be guaranteed.
„Mail System Environment Requirements
To send or receive mail, a mail system environment must be provided. Provide the mail
system environment, including SMTP, POP3, and DNS servers and so on, as required.
„Notes on Security
iFax uses the Internet, linking computers worldwide, as its transmission path. Attention
must be paid to security, in order to avoid eavesdropping by third parties, or tampering
as can in general occur with electronic mail and other transmissions over the Internet.
Therefore, for important information, it is recommended to employ other methods to
guarantee security. In addition, to avoid the receipt of unwanted e-mail, it is
recommended not to divulge the iFax e-mail address to unrelated third parties.
„Preventing Receipt of Unwanted E-mail
iFax provides a feature to block malicious mail sent to a user's address by an external
third party of a known mail address.
This feature restricts the sender's address, by specifying the domains from which mail
may be received.
For information about restricting domains from which mail is received, refer to "Domain Settings"
(P.287).
524
Cautions and Limitations
„Notes on Receiving Mail
Depending on the data in a received iFax document, it is possible for there to be
insufficient memory, or for printing not to be possible. In this case, either add more
memory, or ask the sender to resend with a lower resolution.
Appendix
17
525
17 Appendix
Using the Telephone
When the fax feature is being used, this section describes how to use the telephone to
place or accept calls.
Placing a Call
This section describes how to place a call, using an external telephone.
To place a call, there are two methods, as follows.
z
Lift the telephone, and dial (off-hook dialing)
z
Leave the telephone in place, and dial (on-hook dialing)
Off-hook Dialing
This section describes how to use off-hook dialing, that is, to lift the telephone, and dial.
1
Pick up the telephone.
Important • In power saver mode it is not
possible to place a call using
the telephone. To place a call,
press the <Power Saver>
button, to switch out of power
saver mode.
Appendix
17
2
Select [On-hook (Manual Send/
Receive)] in the [On-hook/Others]
screen.
3
Select [Manual Receive].
4
Select [Alphanumeric] or [Symbol].
For information about the manual send
feature, refer to "On-hook (Confirming
Remote Machine Response Prior to
Transmission)" (P.139).
5
Dial the number.
Important • You can use the numeric
keypad, Address Numbers,
One Touch buttons, and so
on. It is not possible to use the
Address Book.
Note
• If the telephone circuit type is set to be tone-dialing, then the [Tone (:)] indication does not
appear.
• When using a pulse-dialing circuit, to send a tone (to use a service for tone-dialing circuits),
select [Tone (:)].
• Depending on the service, even with the tone transmission operation, it may not be possible
to obtain the service.
526
Using the Telephone
6
Once the connection is made, you
can carry out the telephone call.
Hello
7
At the end of the telephone call, replace the telephone.
Important • Be sure to replace the telephone properly. Otherwise, the line remain in the busy state.
8
Select [Close].
On-hook Dialing
This section describes how to on-hook dialing, that is, with the telephone in place. In
this case, it is recommended to have the line monitor volume set to "High."
Note
• When using an internal line, and selecting an external line or internal line for the call, do so
before the dialing operation. For information about selecting the line, refer to "iFax/Fax
(Selecting iFax/Fax)" (P.113).
You can change the line monitor volume in system administration mode. For information about how to
change it, refer to "Line Monitor Volume" (P.257). The factory default setting is [Medium].
In the [Menu] screen, select [Fax/
Internet FAX].
2
Select [On-hook (Manual Send/
Receive)] in the [On-hook/Others]
screen.
Appendix
1
17
3
Select [Manual Send].
Note
• For information about the
manual send feature, refer to
"On-hook (Confirming Remote
Machine Response Prior to
Transmission)" (P.139).
4
Select [Alphanumeric] or [Symbol].
5
Dial the number.
Note
• To end the connection, select
[Exit (Line Cut)].
• You can use the numeric
keypad, Address Numbers,
One Touch buttons, and so
on. It is not possible to use the
Address Book.
• If the telephone circuit type is set to be tone-dialing, then the [Tone (:)] indication does not
appear.
• When using a pulse-dialing circuit, to send a tone (to use a service for tone-dialing circuits),
select [Tone (:)].
• Depending on the service, even with the tone transmission operation, it may not be possible
to obtain the service.
527
17 Appendix
6
Once the connection is made, you
can carry out the telephone call.
7
At the end of the telephone call,
replace the telephone.
Important • Be sure to replace the telephone properly. Otherwise, the line remain in the busy state.
Appendix
17
528
Simple Procedures
Simple Procedures
This section lists procedures the subject of frequently asked questions, particularly in
relation to the system settings.
Press the buttons in the sequence indicated by arrows.
Note
• The default UserID setting is "11111."
Fax Settings
„Changing the Name (Company Name, etc.) Shown to the Fax Recipient
<Log In/Out> J UserID input J[System Settings]J[System Settings]J
J[Fax Mode Settings]J[Local Terminal Information]J[Local Name]
For more information, refer to "Local Name" (P.310).
„Changing the Name (the Company Name etc.) Which is Printed at the
Transmission
<Log In/Out> J UserID input J[System Settings]J[System Settings]J
J[Fax Mode Settings]J[Local Terminal Information]J[Company Logo]
For more information, refer to "Send Header" (P.303).
„Not Showing the Name (the Company Name etc.) at the Transmission
<Log In/Out> J UserID input J[System Settings]J[System Settings]J
J[Fax Mode Settings]J[Fax Defaults]J[Send Header]J[Off]
For more information, refer to "Send Header" (P.303).
Appendix
„Changing the Dialing Method (Tone-Dialing Circuit/Pulse-Dialing Circuit)
<Log In/Out> J UserID input J[System Settings]J[System Settings]J
J[Fax Mode Settings]J[Local Terminal Information]J[G3 Dial Type]
For more information, refer to "G3 Dial Type" (P.310).
17
„Changing the Circuit Type (External/Internal Line)
<Log In/Out>>J UserID input J[System Settings]J[System Settings]J
J[Fax Mode Settings]J[Local Terminal Information]J[G3 Line Type]
For more information, refer to "G3 Line Type" (P.310).
„Storing Address Numbers
<Log In/Out>J UserID input J[System Settings]J[Setup Menu]J[Address Book]
* If [Setup Menu] appears in the menu screen: [Setup Menu]J[Address Book]
For more information, refer to "Address Book" (P.334).
„Printing an Activity Report to Check the Transmission Results
<Machine Status>J[Billing Meter/Print Report]J[Print Report/List]J
J[Job Status/Activity Report]J[Activity Report]
* If [Activity Report] appears in the menu screen: [Activity Report]J[Activity Report]
For more information, refer to "Activity Report" (P.376).
529
17 Appendix
„Not Automatically Printing an Activity Report
<Log In/Out>J UserID input J[System Settings]J[System Settings]J
J[Common Settings]J[Reports]J[Activity Report]J[Auto Print Off]
For more information, refer to "Activity Report" (P.267).
„Changing the Output Destination for Received Documents
<Log In/Out>J UserID input J[System Settings]J[System Settings]J
J[Fax Mode Settings]J[File Destination / Output Destination]J
J[Output Destination - Line Setup]
For more information, refer to "Output Destination - Line Setup" (P.308).
„Changing the Output Paper for Received Documents
<Log In/Out>J UserID input J[System Settings]J[System Settings]J
J[Fax Mode Settings]J[Fax Control]J[Receiving Paper Size]
For more information, refer to "Receiving Paper Size" (P.306).
„Changing the Volume When Receiving
<Log In/Out>J UserID input J[System Settings]J[System Settings]J
J[Common Settings]J[Audio Tones]J[Ringing Volume]
For more information, refer to "Ringing Volume" (P.257).
„Changing the Number of Phone Rings
<Log In/Out>J UserID input J[System Settings]J[System Settings]J
J[Fax Mode Settings]J[Fax Control]J[Auto Switch Attempts]
For more information, refer to "Auto Switch Attempts" (P.305).
„Allowing Different Sizes of Original to be Loaded by Default
Appendix
<Log In/Out>J UserID input J[System Settings]J[System Settings]J
J[Fax Mode Settings]J[Fax Defaults]J[Mixed Size Originals]J[Yes]
For more information, refer to "Mixed Size Originals" (P.303).
17
530
Simple Procedures
Scan Settings
„Storing Address Numbers for Mail
<Log In/Out>J UserID input J[System Settings]J[Setup Menu]J[Address Book]
* If [Setup Menu] appears in the menu screen: [Setup Menu]J[Address Book]
For more information, refer to "Address Book" (P.334).
„Allowing Different Sizes of Original to be Loaded by Default
<Log In/Out>J UserID input J[System Settings]J[System Settings]J
J[Scan Mode Settings]J[Scan Defaults]J[Mixed Size Originals]J[Yes]
For more information, refer to "Mixed Size Originals" (P.297).
Copy Settings
„Allowing Different Sizes of Original to be Loaded by Default
<Log In/Out>J UserID input J[System Settings]J[System Settings]J
J[Copy Mode Settings]J[Copy Defaults]J[Mixed Size Originals]J[Yes]
For more information, refer to "Mixed Size Originals" (P.279).
Common Function Settings
„Changing the UserID for System Administrator
<Log In/Out>J UserID input J[System Settings]J
Appendix
J[System Administrator Settings]J[System Administrator Login ID]
*The default setting is "11111."
For more information, refer to "UserID" (P.345).
„Changing the time for Switching to Power Saving Mode
17
<Log In/Out>J UserID input J[System Settings]J[System Settings]J
J[Common Settings]J[Machine Clock/Times]J[Auto Power Saver]
For more information, refer to "Auto Power Saver" (P.255).
„Changing the Machine Volume
<Log In/Out>J UserID input J[System Settings]J[System Settings]J
J[Common Settings]J[Audio Tones]J Select sound level
For more information, refer to "Audio Tones" (P.256).
„Checking the Network Settings (IP Address etc.)
<Machine Status>J[Billing Meter/Print Report]J[Print Report/List]J
J[Copy Mode Settings*]J[Settings List - Common Items]
* Or [Print Mode Settings], [Fax Mode Settings], or [Scan Mode Settings]
For more information, refer to "Settings List - Common Items" (P.378).
„Printing a Report/List to Check Machine Information
<Machine Status>J[Billing Meter/Print Report]J[Print Report/List]J Select report
For more information, refer to "Printing a Report" (P.427).
531
17 Appendix
„Setting a Report/list to Automatically Print (or Not)
<Log In/Out>J UserID input J[System Settings]J[System Settings]J
J[Common Settings]J[Reports]J Select report
For more information, refer to "Reports" (P.266).
„Changing the Buttons Shown on the Menu Screen
<Log In/Out>J UserID input J[System Settings]J[System Settings]J
J[Common Settings]J[Screen Defaults]J[All Services]
For more information, refer to "All Services" (P.258).
„Changing the Functions Assigned to the Custom Buttons
<Log In/Out>J UserID input J[System Settings]J[System Settings]J
J[Common Settings]J[Screen Defaults]J[Custom Button 1] - [Custom Button 3]
For more information, refer to "Custom Buttons 1 to 3" (P.259).
„Checking That a Job Has Completed
<Job status>J[Completed Jobs]
For more information, refer to "Checking Completed Jobs" (P.358).
„Displaying Only Particular Jobs in the Job Status Screen (Completed Jobs)
<Log In/Out>J UserID input J[System Settings]J[System Settings]J
J[Common Settings]J[Screen Defaults]J[Job Type on Job Status Screen]
For more information, refer to "Job Type on Job Status screen" (P.259).
Appendix
17
532
18 Glossary
This chapter describes the glossary provided by the machine.
z
Glossary....................................................................................................534
18 Glossary
Glossary
Glossary
420×297 This is mm paper.
A4
297×210 This is mm paper.
A5
210×148 This is mm paper.
Alias
Another name for a mail address.
For example, when the e-mail address for the machine is
[email protected], you can use [email protected]
(alias) to reach the same location.
All on 1 Sheet
Copies 2 or 4 documents onto 1 sheet of paper.
Auto Center
Automatically moves the document’s center to match the
paper’s center when copying.
Auto Clear
This feature automatically returns the touch screen to its
default screen when the machine is inactive for a period of
time.
Auto Paper Select
Based on the set document and selected magnification, the
device automatically selects the appropriate paper.
Auto Tray Switching
When paper runs out during copying, another tray of identical
paper size and orientation automatically begins supplying
paper.
B4
364×257 This is mm paper.
B5
257×182 This is mm paper.
Border Erase
Erases the top/bottom, left/right or center of the document
image before copying.
Border Limit
(Page split threshold value)
One more sheet is used when the length of the transmitted
document exceeds the length of paper installed on the
receiving terminal. A margin at the bottom of a received
document can be eliminated so that the data can be printed on
one page.
The amount of space that can be removed from the bottom of
a document is the border limit. When the border limit value is
small, the data is printed on the next page. But when it is large,
a larger space can be cut so that data can be printed on one
page.
Bound originals
Copies the left and right pages of an unfolded document onto
two separate sheets of paper.
CMS
Abbreviation for Color Management System. Corrects devicedependent color differences to match the colors on screen with
the printed result.
CMYK
A color expression method for color printing, etc.
The image is separated into 4 colors: C (cyan), M (magenta),
Y (yellow), and K (black) and printed using a combination of
the 4.
Collate
Organizes and outputs copies into groups with appropriate
pages.
Glossary
A3
18
534
Description
Glossary
Glossary
Description
Describes the degree of smoothness from one color to
another. Degrees are described by the number of graduated
steps. The higher the number, the more smooth the color
transition.
Communication(s)
Communications using a network that can offer voice data
(telephone), image data (fax), video data (videotex) and PC
data (PC communication service) over the same channel.
In this document, sending/receiving of image data as well as
voice communications are referred to as "communications".
Cut Paper
Standard paper sizes, such as A4, B5, etc.
Default value
The default shipped value, or the value set in System
Administration mode.
Dial
Refers to entering the fax number of the recipient.
Entry of all digits using the numeric keypad, Speed Dialing,
One Touch buttons, and using the Address Book, etc.
Dial Tone
A tone generated by the telephone line. It indicates that you
are connected to the line.
Dial type
Dial type for the connected line. For the machine, 3 types can
be selected: PB (push button), 10PPS (pulse line/10PPS).
Document Image
The image of the document scanned by the machine.
DPI
Dots per inch. A unit used to describe printing resolution in
terms of the number of dots printed in one inch. Primary unit
used to describe resolution.
ECM
Error Correction Mode.
A type of G3 transmission, ECM transmission sends the
document image data in segments and retransmits segments
that the remote machine receives incorrectly.
"ECM" described on the [Activity Report] shows that the
communication was processed using ECM.
Emulation
This refers to operating the printer to achieve the same print
results and when printing with another manufacturer’s printer.
This mode is called Emulation Mode.
Error Code
A code is displayed on the control panel or a report when a
problem occurs.
F Code
A transmission method defined by the CIAJ for using T.30*
sub-addresses standardized by ITU-T. Various functions can
be used with other companies that use F Code through
transmission between equipment with the F Code function.
(*transmission specification)
With the Internet Fax (iFax) feature on the machine, you can
use F Code to forward e-mail of fax documents received to the
mailbox.
F4800
Communication with a remote terminal abroad.
Also a displayed choice when setting the transmission mode.
A Communication Mode selection that reduces transmission
speed to enable reliable communications even under poor line
conditions.
Fax gateway
Connects the Internet network to regular telephone lines,
enabling e-mail documents to be sent as fax documents to
regular fax machines.
535
Glossary
Color Graduation
18
18 Glossary
Glossary
Glossary
18
536
Description
G3
A facsimile communication system standardized by the
advisory committee for International Telecommunications
(CCITT, now the ITU-T).
Gutter
For booklet creation, this feature adds space in the center of
the page.
Header
The sender record. Printed at the beginning of a received
document.
ICM
Image Color Matching. Color management software used in
Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and
Windows Server 2003. Corrects device-dependent color
differences to match the colors on screen with the printed
result.
Image Enhancement
A feature that smoothes out rough lines where white and black
meet, simulating higher resolutions.
Image Rotation
This feature rotates the document image 90º before copying in
cases where the document orientation is not the same as the
paper orientation.
Independent X-Y%
Copy feature that transforms the document image either
horizontally or vertically.
Initial Screen
A touch panel screen displayed immediately after switching on
the power or pressing the <Clear All> button or when the Auto
Clear function is used.
Insert
This refers to white, colored, or copy paper inserted between
each copy as it is output.
Internet
A worldwide communications network that combine
miscellaneous networks.
Internet fax (iFax)
Unlike a regular fax machine, Internet Fax uses corporate
networks or the Internet to send or receive mail (TIFF
attachments).
Job Offset
This feature outputs the pages in alternating offsets to make
page groupings easier to recognize.
Line monitor
Allows you to audibly monitor a transmission through the
speaker after dialing and until you are connected.
Local Device
The machine you use. This is a general term for terminals
such as telephones, facsimile machines, personal computers,
etc.
Low Toner Alert Tone
A tone the device sounds when the drum/toner cartridge
needs to be replaced.
Machine Ready Tone
A tone sounded when the device status changes from standby
to ready, such as when power is turned on.
MIME Type
Multipurpose Internet Mail Extension.
Method for determined what kind of data was received by email. A MIME type describes the type of data.
NV Memory
The non-volatile memory stores configuration data, even when
the printer is off.
Off-hook Dialing
Dialing with the telephone off hook
On-hook Dialing
Dialing with the telephone on the cradle
Glossary
Glossary
Description
This refers to a product sold separately. Besides a model’s
basic configuration, options are offered separately as
additional features. (For more information about options,
contact our Customer Support Center.)
Polling
Sending via an operation on the machine.
POP3
Post Office Protocol Version 3.
One type of generally used communications protocol. It is
used for receiving e-mail.
Sets up a private mailbox on a provider mail server and
downloads messages when connecting. POP3 is for receiving
only. SMTP is used for sending e-mail.
Power saver feature
Switches the device status to standby after a period of
inactivity.
The following power save features can be set for the machine.
Low Power Mode:
After a fixed period (seconds) of inactivity,
the fuser and motor or switched to standby
mode. In this mode, the touch screen turns
off, and only the <Power Saver> button is lit.
Sleep Mode : Almost all of the device is in standby mode,
power consumption.
(Off Mode)
uses the least power.
Print Page Buffer
The space used to plot the print image.
Printable Area
The area of a sheet of paper that can actually be printed on.
Profile
A profile is determined to restrict the attribute information for
transmissions via Internet fax (iFax), such as image resolution
and paper size. Depending on the iFax features of the
recipient, the profiles that can be processed vary. Confirm the
profile that can be processed by the recipient's iFax -installed
machine before specifying the profile.
RAM
Random Access Memory. RAM is a storage device (memory)
to which data can be written and read.
Receiving Buffer
Space reserved for temporarily storing data received from a
computer.
Receiving paper size
Use this feature to specify the use of fixed paper sizes for fax
receptions. The selected size is sent from the receiving side to
the sending side.
Recipient
The person or terminal you send a document to. "Dialing"
indicates the operation of entering a recipient's telephone
number.
For Internet Fax (iFax), this refers to the recipient’s e-mail
address.
Remote Terminal
A terminal with which you want to communicate. This is a
general term for terminals such as telephones, facsimile
machines and personal computers, etc.
Resolution
Represents an image’s resolution. Usually described in terms
of the number of dots per square inch (dpi), a higher value
indicates a higher resolution (finely represented).
ROM
Read Only Memory. ROM is a storage device (memory) from
which data can only be read.
537
Glossary
Optional
18
18 Glossary
Glossary
Glossary
18
538
Description
ROS
Raster Output Scanner. A device for writing image signals to a
drum (light sensitive). A ROS is often referred to as a laser
beam scanner, etc.
Scan
Documents are optically scanned to convert them to image
data.
The machine’s scan apparatus consists of the document
scanning glass and document feeder.
screen
The screen of the touch screen. It provides user information
and instructions.
Select
In this document, "Select" refers to touching a button on the
touch screen with your finger, or toggling a field.
Send Password
Enter [S] and the ID of a remote terminal after the fax number
to specify a remote machine. This feature prevents
transmission errors.
Sender
Originator of a communication. Is used in conjunction with
[Recipient].
Side Tray
Feature that outputs copies to the side tray with the top facing
up.
SMTP
SMTP stands for Simple Mail Transfer Protocol.
A communications protocol (an agreement governing the way
data is transmitted) commonly used for sending and receiving
mail.
Start Reservation
Refers to setting a document, configuring a feature and
pressing the <Start> button immediately after power is turned
on. Once the device status is ready, copy begins
automatically.
Status Display Code
Code indicating the device status. When an error occurs in the
machine, a status code is shown on the touch screen.
Store
In this guide, used for storing a scanned document image in
memory.
Stored Programming
By registering a series of operations, you can repeat the same
copy procedure with one press of the <Job in Memory> button.
Super G3 (SG3)
A G3 communication system conforming to ITU V.34.
This system offers higher transmission speed (33.6 kbps) than
the normal G3 mode.
Transmission Interval
Interval between the end of a transmission and the start of the
next send.
Transparency Copy
Copy to transparencies, and insert a white sheet of paper
between each transparency copy.
Index
Index
Numerics
Annotation.................................................................... 83
Annotation - Date Position (system settings) ....... 280
10Base-T/100Base-TX connector ........................... 31
Annotation - Page Number - Position
2 Sided ......................................................................... 66
(system settings)....................................................... 281
2 Sided (system settings)........................................ 279
Annotation - Page Number - Style
2 Sided Book Copy..................................................... 68
(system settings)....................................................... 280
2 Sided Originals ...................................................... 117
Annotation - Stamp Color (system settings)......... 280
2 sided originals........................................................ 177
Annotation - Stamp Density (system settings)..... 283
2 Sided Printing (system settings) ......................... 306
Annotation - Stamp Position (system settings).... 280
2 Side Report (system settings) ............................. 267
Annotation - Stamp Size (system settings) .......... 283
2 Up On Receipt (system settings)........................ 306
Applicable telephone circuits .................................. 498
attaching a cover to copies ....................................... 79
A
Account ID Characters (system settings) ............. 349
Account Limit (system settings) ............................. 346
Activity Report ........................................................... 376
Activity Report (system settings)............................ 267
adding originals........................................................... 93
adding stamp/date/page number to copies ............ 83
adding your name and phone number to faxes ... 127
Address Book........................... 114, 161, 167, 378, 379
Address Book (system settings)............................. 334
Address Book Default (system settings)............... 303
Address Search (Directory Service)
(system settings)....................................................... 315
Address Type (system settings)............................. 335
Add Sender................................................................ 163
adjusting color balance.............................................. 65
adjusting color tone .................................................... 65
adjusting density level.............................................. 120
adjusting scan density and contrast ...................... 175
adjusting the copy color (see "Image Quality")...... 61
adjusting the copy density......................................... 60
adjusting the copy density and contrast.................. 63
adjusting the sharpness and color saturation of
images.......................................................................... 64
Alert Tone (system settings) ................................... 257
Allocate Memory (system settings)........................ 290
allowing remote machines to retrieve
documents from your machine ............................... 137
All Services (system settings)................................. 258
<All Services> button ................................................. 43
(system settings)....................................................... 317
Attribute Type of Custom Items 1 to 3
(system settings)....................................................... 317
Attribute Type of E-mail Address
(system settings)....................................................... 317
Attribute Type of First Name (system settings) ... 317
Attribute Type of Last Name (system settings).... 317
Attribute Type of Recipient Name
(system settings)....................................................... 317
Audio Tones (system settings) ............................... 256
Auditron Administration ........................................... 381
Auditron Mode (system settings) ........................... 352
Auditron Report (Copy)............................................ 381
Auditron Report (Fax) .............................................. 381
Auditron Report (Print)............................................. 381
Auditron Report (Scan)............................................ 381
authenticated users.................................................. 388
Authentication and Auditron Administration ......... 400
Authentication and Auditron Administration
feature ........................................................................ 387
Authentication System (system settings).............. 288
Auto Clear (system settings)................................... 255
Auto Clear Alert Tone (system settings) ............... 257
Auto Exposure.....................................................64, 175
Auto Exposure (system settings) ...................279, 297
Auto Exposure (Text & Photo)
(system settings)....................................................... 282
Auto Exposure (Text) (system settings)................ 282
Auto Exposure Level (system settings)................. 300
Auto Gradation Adjustment..................................... 424
539
Index
adjusting document sharpness............................... 175
Attribute Name of Custom Items 1 to 3
Auto Gradation Adjustment (system settings) ..... 266
bottom left cover ......................................................... 31
Auto Job Promotion (system settings) .................. 270
Bound Originals ..........................................67, 121, 178
Auto Job Release (system settings)...................... 255
Box Selector List....................................................... 379
automatically printed reports/lists .......................... 382
brightness dial............................................................. 42
Automatic Deletion of Polling Documents
Broadcast................................................................... 140
(system settings) ...................................................... 304
Broadcast/Multi-Poll Report (system settings)..... 267
Auto Paper Off (system settings)........................... 281
Broadcast Communication Mode
Auto Power Saver (system settings) ..................... 255
(system settings) ...................................................... 311
Auto Print (system settings).................................... 255
Broadcast iFax Profile (system settings) .............. 311
Auto Print Delivery Confirmation Mail
Broadcast Report ..................................................... 382
(system settings) ...................................................... 319
Broadcast Send ........................101, 106, 113, 140, 143
Auto Print Error Mail (system settings) ................. 318
Build Job ...................................................................... 91
Auto Reduce on Receipt (system settings).......... 305
Auto Size Detect............................................... 122, 179
C
Auto Switch Attempts (system settings) ............... 305
Auto Tray Switching (system settings).................. 263
Calculator %................................................................ 54
Cancel ........................................................................ 357
B
canceling Activity Report output (see "not
automatically printing an Activity Report")............ 530
Index
Background Suppression........................................ 176
canceling fax (see "stopping the fax")................... 104
Background Suppression (system settings) ........ 297
canceling Job Status/Activity Report output
Background Suppression Level
(see "not automatically printing an Activity
(system settings) ...................................................... 301
Report")...................................................................... 530
Banner Sheet (system settings)............................. 294
Capacity ..................................................................... 500
Banner Sheet Tray (system settings).................... 294
<C> (Clear) button ..................................................... 43
Base Tone (system settings).................................. 258
Center Erase ..................................................... 178, 180
Basic Copying ............................................................. 52
Center Erase (default setting) ................................ 298
Basic Copying Tab (system settings).................... 275
Center Erase (system settings).............................. 280
Basic Features.......................................................... 113
center output tray ....................................................... 30
Basic Scanning ......................................................... 170
center tray exit cover ................................................. 35
Basic Scanning Tab (system settings).................. 295
CentreWare Internet Services ........................ 212, 221
Batch Send (system settings)................................. 305
Change Settings ....................................................... 163
Billing Data List ......................................................... 380
changing the destination of a received
Billing - Day Time (system settings)...................... 338
document (see "Output Destination - Line Setup
Billing - Late Night Time (system settings)........... 338
(system settings)").................................................... 308
Billing Meter/Print Report ........................................ 374
changing the name (company name, etc.)
Billing - Night Time (system settings).................... 338
shown to the fax recipient ....................................... 529
Booklet Creation ......................................................... 77
changing the name (company name, etc.)
Border Erase ....................................................... 71, 180
which is printed at the transmission ...................... 529
Border Erase (system settings).............................. 297
changing the paper size in trays ............................ 235
Chapter Division/Separators..................................... 92
Border Erase - Left & Right
Charge Print Settings (system settings) ............... 350
(system settings) ......................................280, 298, 306
checking completed jobs......................................... 358
Border Erase - Top & Bottom
checking executing/pending jobs........................... 357
(system settings) ......................................279, 297, 306
checking mailboxes.................................................. 186
Border Limit (system settings)................................ 305
checking the finished output of the copy ................ 93
540
Index
Check Password (system settings) ....................... 324
copying to non-standard size paper
circuit breaker.............................................................. 38
(see "Paper Supply").................................................. 55
cleaning...................................................................... 419
Copy Job Complete Tone (system settings) ........ 256
<Clear All> button....................................................... 43
Copy Mode Settings................................................. 377
Color Access (system settings).............................. 346
Copy Mode Settings (system settings) ................. 275
Color Balance.............................................................. 65
Copy Output (system settings) ............................... 280
Color Balance - Black (system settings) ............... 279
Copy Output/Stapling................................................. 76
Color Balance - Cyan (system settings) ............... 279
Copy Position/Margin Shift........................................ 71
Color Balance - Magenta (system settings) ......... 279
Cover Note................................................................. 127
Color Balance - Yellow (system settings) ............. 279
Cover Note (system settings) ................................. 336
Color Saturation.......................................................... 64
Covers .......................................................................... 79
Color Saturation (system settings).................279, 300
Create/Check User Accounts
Color Selection............................................................ 59
(system settings)....................................................... 344
Color Shift .................................................................... 65
creating a booklet ....................................................... 77
Color Shift (system settings)................................... 279
<Custom> button ........................................................ 43
Color Space............................................................... 176
Custom Buttons 1 to 3 (system settings).............. 259
Color Space (system settings) .......................297, 301
Custom Colors (system settings) ........................... 285
Comments (system settings) .................................. 341
Custom Item 1 (system settings) ........................... 339
Comments List .......................................................... 380
Custom Item 2 (system settings) ........................... 339
Common Settings (system settings)...................... 253
Custom Item 3 (system settings) ........................... 339
Communication Mode.............................................. 124
Custom Paper Name (system settings) ................ 260
Communication mode.............................................. 498
Communication Mode (system settings).......303, 336
D
Communications speed ........................................... 498
Company Logo (system settings) .......................... 310
<Confirmation> indicator ........................................... 33
confirming/printing/deleting documents stored
for polling ................................................................... 138
confirming job status ................................................ 103
confirming remote machine response prior to
transmission .............................................................. 139
Connection Interval (system settings) ................... 254
Connection to Time Server (system settings)...... 254
Consumables status................................................. 384
Contrast................................................................63, 175
Contrast (system settings) ..............................278, 297
control panel................................................................ 30
Control Panel Alert Tone (system settings).......... 256
Control Panel Select Tone (system settings)....... 256
copies ........................................................................... 67
Copy Control (system settings) .............................. 281
Copy Defaults (system settings) ............................ 277
Copy Density ............................................................... 60
copying facing pages onto separate sheets........... 67
copying multiple documents onto one sheet.......... 81
Date (system settings) ............................................. 254
Date Format (system settings) ............................... 263
Date Position on Side 2 (system settings)............ 283
Default Language (system settings)...................... 259
Default Print Paper Size (system settings)........... 270
Delayed Start............................................................. 126
Delayed Start (system settings) ............................. 337
Delete ......................................................................... 163
Delete All Data (system settings)........................... 268
Delete Documents After Retrieval
(system settings)....................................................... 324
Delete Documents with Expiry Date
(system settings)....................................................... 325
Delete Outside / Delete Inside.................................. 94
deleting authentication print documents ............... 360
deleting delayed print documents .......................... 363
deleting forwarding destinations............................. 168
deleting public mailbox documents........................ 364
deleting sample print documents ........................... 362
deleting security print documents .......................... 361
deleting stored documents...................................... 359
541
Index
consumables ............................................................. 408
Data Encryption (system settings) ......................... 274
deleting Stored Programming................................. 206
E-mail Address (system settings) .......................... 335
Delivery Confirmation Method
E-mail Defaults (system settings) .......................... 314
(system settings) ...................................................... 311
E-mail print ................................................................ 216
destination tray (by function) (see "Output
E-mail Receive Protocol (system settings)........... 289
Destination (system settings))................................ 280
Encoding method ..................................................... 498
Detailed Settings .............................................. 163, 168
Energy Saver (see "Power Saver Mode") .............. 39
<Dial Pause> button .................................................. 43
enlarged copies .......................................................... 52
Dimensions................................................................ 499
entering numbers using Address Number............ 115
Dimensions occupied............................................... 500
entering specific symbols........................................ 116
Direct Authentication................................................ 388
entering text............................................................... 252
Direct Fax .................................................................. 223
erasing edges and margin shadows in the
Directory Service (LDAP) (system settings)......... 315
document ............................................................. 71, 180
Display Consumables Screen
erasing the background color of documents.. 64, 175
(system settings) ...................................................... 273
error code .................................................................. 460
Doc for Polling - Auto Delete (system settings)... 304
Error History Report ......................................... 376, 385
Document> 50 sheets................................................ 93
Extended Features Settings List.................... 378, 379
document cover .......................................................... 30
extension flap............................................................ 233
Document Expiry Time (system settings)............. 321
document feeder....................................................... 154
F
document feeder glass .............................................. 33
document feeder tray................................................. 33
document glass.......................................30, 47, 99, 155
document guides ........................................................ 33
document jams ......................................................... 486
Document List ........................................................... 165
Document Name....................................................... 183
document output tray ................................................. 33
Documents Retrieved By Client
(system settings) ...................................................... 321
DocuWorks................................................................ 173
Domain List ....................................................... 378, 379
Domain Settings (system settings)........................ 287
drum cartridges...........................................32, 408, 413
Index
DSN ............................................................................ 129
Dual Color - Source Color (system settings) ....... 278
Dual - Target Color (Non-target Area)
(system settings) ...................................................... 278
Dual - Target Color (Target Area)
(system settings) ...................................................... 278
duplex module cover.................................................. 31
F4800 ......................................................................... 125
Failed Access Log (system settings)..................... 349
Faults.......................................................................... 385
Fault Tone (system settings) .................................. 257
Fax Billing Data (system settings) ......................... 351
Fax Control (system settings)................................. 304
faxing a book, catalog, or other documents
(see "if you have more documents") ..................... 102
Fax interface connector............................................. 31
Fax Mode Settings ................................................... 379
Fax Mode Settings (system settings).................... 302
Fax Number (system settings) ............................... 335
Fax Receiving Mode ................................................ 373
Fax Receiving Mode (system settings)................. 305
Fax Screen Default (system settings) ................... 303
Fax Transfer - Add Sender Header
(system settings) ...................................................... 312
Fax Transfer from Address Book
(system settings) ...................................................... 312
Fax Transfer Maximum Data Size
(system settings) ...................................................... 312
E
F Code (system settings) ........................................ 337
F Code Transmission............................................... 132
Ejection method........................................................ 500
Feature in 2nd Column............................................ 296
E-mail ......................................................................... 161
Features Allocation (system settings) ................... 276
E-mail/iFax Settings (system settings).................. 314
542
Index
features managed with the Auditron
HP-GL/2 Stored Programming List........................ 378
Administration feature.............................................. 400
HTTP - SSL/TLS communications
features that can be managed with
(system settings)....................................................... 289
authentication by User ID........................................ 400
HTTP - SSL/TLS communications port number
File Destination / Output Destination
(system settings)....................................................... 289
(system settings)....................................................... 307
File Destination - Line Setup (system settings) ... 307
I
File Format................................................................. 172
File Format (system settings) ................................. 297
File Name Conflict screen ....................................... 168
finisher interface top cover........................................ 35
<Finisher top cover> button ...................................... 35
finisher tray .................................................................. 35
First Name (system settings).................................. 339
Fonts List ................................................................... 377
forwarding documents stored in the mailbox ....... 111
forwarding iFax ......................................................... 111
Free size .................................................................... 179
front cover..............................................................30, 35
fuser.............................................................................. 32
iFax/Fax ..................................................................... 113
iFax Comment........................................................... 128
iFax Control (system settings)................................ 311
iFax Profile (system settings) .........................304, 339
iFax profiles ............................................................... 134
iFax to E-mail (system settings) ............................. 321
iFax to iFax (system settings)................................. 321
if you have more documents................................... 102
Image Compression ................................................. 182
Image Compression (system settings).................. 298
Image Enhancement (system settings)................. 266
Image Quality ..............................................61, 120, 174
Image Quality (system settings).....................262, 265
G
Image Quality Adjustment (system settings)........ 264
Image Quality Presets ............................................... 61
G3 ............................................................................... 125
Image Quality Problems .......................................... 437
G3 dial Type (system settings)............................... 310
Image Repeat.............................................................. 83
G3 Fax ID (system settings) ................................... 310
Image Rotation............................................................ 73
G3 Line Type (system settings) ............................. 310
Image Rotation (system settings) .......................... 280
generally shared job flow sheet.............................. 391
Image Rotation Direction (system settings) ......... 280
generally shared mailboxes .................................... 394
Image Transfer Screen (system settings)............. 301
gradation adjustment ............................................... 424
Incoming iFax Output Destination
Group Send (system settings)................................ 340
(system settings)....................................................... 312
Incoming iFax Print Options (system settings) .... 312
H
Index (system settings)............................................ 335
handling error terminations ..................................... 366
Head to Left ............................................................... 172
Head to Top............................................................... 172
inner cover ................................................................... 33
inserting blank sheets between transparencies .... 80
inserting comments in body text............................. 128
<Interrupt> button/indicator....................................... 43
heavy paper settings
(see "Paper Tray Attributes").................................. 259
J
Hide Account ID (system settings)......................... 349
Hide User ID (system settings)............................... 349
Job Assembly.............................................................. 91
Job Counter Report.................................................. 380
HP-GL/2 Auto Layout Memory
Job Flow..................................................................... 198
(system settings)....................................................... 291
job flow sheet created in the job flow sheet
HP-GL/2 Palette List ................................................ 378
registration screen.................................................... 392
HP-GL/2 Settings List .............................................. 378
543
Index
Initialize Hard Disk (system settings) .................... 268
handle........................................................................... 32
job flow sheet created in the mailbox
Login Setup/Auditron Administration
registration screen.................................................... 392
(system settings) .............................................. 344, 351
Job Flow Sheets (system settings)........................ 326
Low Power mode........................................................ 39
job flow sheet types ................................................. 391
Low Toner Alert Tone (system settings)............... 257
Job History Report ................................................... 376
Job History Report (system settings) .................... 267
M
<Job in Memory> indicator .......................376, 427, 42
jobs managed by auditron....................................... 402
Job Status.................................................................. 356
Job Status/Activity Report....................................... 376
<Job status> button ................................................... 42
Job Template ............................................................ 166
Job Template List ..................................................... 378
Job Type on Job Status screen
(system settings) ...................................................... 259
JPEG .......................................................................... 173
Machine Clock/Timers (system settings).............. 253
Machine Configuration............................................. 369
Machine E-mail Address/Host Name
(system settings) ...................................................... 287
Machine Information ................................................ 369
Machine Password (system settings) ................... 310
Machine Ready Tone (system settings) ............... 256
Machine Status ......................................................... 369
<Machine Status> button .......................................... 42
machine trouble ........................................................ 432
K
mailbox....................................................................... 186
Mailbox (system settings) ....................................... 323
Keyboard ........................................................... 162, 169
Mailbox Access (system settings) ......................... 353
Keyboard Input Restriction (system settings) ...... 273
Mailbox Documents Report .................................... 382
Mailbox Documents Report (system settings) ..... 267
L
mailbox job flow sheet ............................................. 391
Mailbox List ............................................................... 380
Last Name (system settings).................................. 339
left center cover .......................................................... 31
left cover ...................................................................... 33
Left Page then Right ................................................ 178
Lighten/Darken ...........................................63, 120, 175
Lighten/Darken (system settings) ..........278, 297, 303
LINE 1 .......................................................................... 34
LINE 2 .......................................................................... 34
LINE 4 .......................................................................... 34
Line Monitor Volume (system settings)................. 257
Index
linking job flow sheet and mailbox ......................... 397
Link Job Flow Sheet to Mailbox
(system settings) ...................................................... 325
loading documents ................................................... 154
loading paper ............................................................ 232
loading paper in Tray 5 (bypass) ........................... 233
Local Access ............................................................. 389
Local Name (system settings)................................ 310
Local Terminal Information (system settings)...... 309
locking casters ............................................................ 30
<Log In/Out> button ................................................... 42
Login Name ............................................................... 169
Login Name (system settings)........................ 316, 340
544
Mailbox Name (system settings)............................ 324
Mailbox Receive Display Priority 1 to 5
(system settings) ...................................................... 307
Mailbox Viewer 2 .............................................. 159, 212
main components and functions .............................. 30
Maintenance (system settings) .............................. 268
making 2-sided copies............................................... 66
making 2-sided copies of facing pages .................. 68
making clear copies of newspapers
(see "Auto Exposure") ............................................... 64
making copies of documents with different
settings in a single operation .................................... 91
making copies with the image rotated vertically
or horizontally.............................................................. 73
making enlarged copies spread over multiple
sheets (see "Poster") ................................................. 82
making multiple copies on one sheet...................... 83
making reversed copies of images.......................... 74
manual fax receiving ................................................ 373
Manual Send ............................................................. 139
Manual Send/Receive Default
(system settings) ...................................................... 305
Index
Margin Shift ................................................................. 71
O
Margin Shift - Side 1 (system settings) ................. 280
Margin Shift - Side 2 (system settings) ................. 280
Object Class of Search Target
Maximum Address Entries (system settings)....... 318
(system settings)....................................................... 317
Maximum E-mail Size (system settings)............... 318
Odd Page 2 Sided (system settings)..................... 270
maximum fill line ....................................................... 232
off-hook dialing.......................................................... 526
Maximum Image Size (system settings) ............... 336
Offset Stacking (system settings) .......................... 269
Maximum Login Attempts (system settings) ........ 343
one touch button panels ............................................ 43
Maximum Search Results (system settings)........ 317
one touch buttons ............................................... 43, 115
Maximum Stored Pages
On-hook ..................................................................... 139
(system settings).......................................281, 300, 307
on-hook dialing.......................................................... 527
MDN....................................................................129, 183
<Online> indicator ...................................................... 42
Memory Full Procedure
OP.TEL......................................................................... 34
(system settings).......................................281, 300, 307
operation of Up/Down Buttons
memory recall............................................................ 371
(system settings)....................................................... 273
messages...........................................................460, 475
Original changing speed.......................................... 499
Millimetres/Inches (system settings) ..................... 273
Original Orientation ..........................................171, 181
Mirror Image/Negative Image ................................... 74
Original Orientation (system settings) ...........280, 297
Mixed Size Originals ..................................70, 122, 179
Original Size ................................................................ 69
Mixed Size Originals
Original size............................................................... 499
(system settings).......................................279, 297, 303
Original Size Defaults (system settings) ............... 284
moving the position of the paper guide ................. 234
Original Type ...............................................62, 118, 172
Multi-page TIFF......................................................... 173
Original Type (system settings)..............278, 297, 303
Multiple Up................................................................... 81
Original Type - Auto (Black) (system settings) .... 278
Multi-poll Report........................................................ 383
Original Type - Auto (Non-Black)
(system settings)....................................................... 278
N
Original Type - Lightweight Originals
(system settings)....................................................... 282
Original types ............................................................ 499
Negative Image........................................................... 75
Out of Paper Warning Tone (system settings)..... 257
Network Authentication............................................ 389
Output/Color Recognition (system settings)......... 265
Network scan driver .........................................212, 218
Output Color .............................................................. 170
Network Scanner Utility 2........................................ 211
Output Color (system settings).......................278, 296
Network Settings (system settings) ....................... 286
Output Destination (system settings) .................... 280
Non-Copy Job Complete Tone
Output Destination - Line Setup
(system settings)....................................................... 257
(system settings)....................................................... 308
non-standard size document .................................... 69
Output Format .....................................................76, 182
not automatically printing an Activity Report ........ 530
Output format ............................................................ 499
notes and restrictions............................................... 522
Output Size Defaults (system settings)................. 299
not showing the name (company name, etc.)
outputting Activity Reports (see "printing an
at the transmission ................................................... 529
Activity Report to check the transmission
NTP Time Synchronization (system settings)...... 254
results") ...................................................................... 529
Number of originals held ......................................... 499
outputting Job Status/Activity Reports
numeric keypad........................................................... 43
(see "printing an Activity Report to check
the transmission results") ........................................ 529
output tray.................................................................... 30
545
Index
naming/renaming Stored Programming................ 206
overview of Auditron Administration...................... 400
PJL Receive Command Control
overview of Authentication...................................... 388
(system settings) ...................................................... 350
Overwrite Hard Disk................................................. 371
PKI (Public Key) Settings (system settings)......... 289
Overwrite Hard Disk (system settings) ................. 273
Polling......................................................................... 136
poor image quality
P
(see "Image Quality").................................61, 120, 437
POP3 Server Settings (system settings) .............. 287
Page Number Position on Side 2
(system settings) ...................................................... 283
Page Size for Split Send (system settings).......... 319
Paper Attributes Mismatch (system settings) ...... 293
paper guides ............................................................. 233
paper jams................................................................. 475
Paper size.................................................................. 499
Paper Size (system settings).................................. 260
paper size alignment guide..................................... 234
Paper Size Settings (system settings) .................. 271
Paper sizes for auto 2 sided output....................... 500
paper stopper.............................................................. 30
Paper Supply............................................................... 55
Paper Supply (system settings) ............................. 277
Paper Supply - 2nd to 4th Button
(system settings) ...................................................... 276
Paper Tray Attributes (system settings) ............... 259
Paper Tray Priority (system settings).................... 261
Paper Type (system settings)......................... 260, 341
Paper Type Priority (system settings) ................... 261
Paper weight ............................................................. 500
parallel interface connector....................................... 31
Password ................................................................... 169
password (panel) (see "System Administrator
Password (system settings)")................................. 343
Password (system settings)............316, 324, 340, 345
Index
Password Entry from Control Panel
(system settings) ...................................................... 351
PCL Emulation.......................................................... 504
PDF............................................................................. 172
PDF Settings List...................................................... 377
periodical replacement parts .................................. 408
personal job flow sheet............................................ 391
Photo .......................................................................... 172
Photo & Text Recognition (system settings)........ 265
Photograph Scanning .............................................. 174
Photo Image Quality (system settings) ................. 265
Photo Reproduction Level (system settings) ....... 265
Port Number (system settings)............................... 340
Port Settings (system settings) .............................. 286
Poster ........................................................................... 82
PostScript Default Color (system settings)........... 294
PostScript Font Absence (system settings) ......... 294
PostScript Fonts List................................................ 378
PostScript Font Substitution (system settings).... 294
PostScript Memory (system settings) ................... 291
PostScript Paper Supply (system settings).......... 294
<Power Saver> button............................................... 42
Power Saver mode..................................................... 39
Power supply............................................................. 499
power switch ............................................................... 30
preferentially printing pending print jobs............... 365
Preset % .............................................................. 53, 181
primary relay station................................................. 146
Primary Server (system settings)........................... 315
Primary Server Port Number (system settings)... 315
Print Area (system settings) ................................... 293
print driver.................................................................. 210
Printer Mode.............................................................. 371
Print ID (system settings) ........................................ 293
printing ....................................................................... 215
printing after checking print results
(see "printing sample print documents")............... 362
printing an Activity Report to check
the transmission results........................................... 529
printing authentication print documents................ 360
printing confidential documents (see "printing
security print documents") ...................................... 361
printing control number on the background ........... 87
printing delayed print documents........................... 363
printing iFax............................................................... 108
printing multiple copies at the remote machine ... 130
Printing Paper Size Defaults (system settings) ... 270
printing public mailbox documents ........................ 364
printing sample print documents............................ 362
printing security print documents ........................... 361
printing stored documents....................................... 359
546
Index
printing Transmission Report.................................. 129
Reduce/Enlarge Presets
Print Mode Settings.................................................. 377
(system settings).......................................284, 299, 308
Print Mode Settings (system settings)................... 290
reduced copies............................................................ 52
Print Report/List ................................................376, 427
Reducing 8.5x11" Originals to A4
print type problems
(system settings)....................................................... 306
(see "Image Quality Problems") ............................. 437
Relay Broadcast (system settings) ........................ 337
Priority Send.............................................................. 126
Relay Broadcast Report .......................................... 383
Product ......................................................................... 29
Relay Broadcast Report (system settings) ........... 267
Profiles ....................................................................... 499
Remote Access......................................................... 390
Promote Job .............................................................. 357
Remote Access (system settings) ......................... 352
Protocol Settings (system settings) ....................... 287
Remote Authentication Server 1 through 5
Pseudo-Photo Gradation Mode
(system settings)....................................................... 288
(system settings)....................................................... 306
Remote Authentication Server Settings
PS Logical Printers List ........................................... 377
(system settings)....................................................... 288
Remote Mailbox........................................................ 131
R
Remote Mailbox (system settings)......................... 337
Reports (system settings) ....................................... 266
ratio selection .............................................................. 52
Read Status.......................................................129, 183
Read Status (MDN) (system settings)................... 318
recalling Stored Programming................................ 207
Receive Control (system settings) ......................... 350
Receiving Buffer - EtherTalk (system settings) ... 292
Receiving Buffer - IPP Spool (system settings)... 292
Receiving Buffer - LPD Spool
(system settings)....................................................... 291
Receiving Buffer - NetWare (system settings)..... 291
Receiving Buffer - Parallel (system settings) ....... 291
Receiving Buffer - Port 9100 (system settings) ... 292
Receiving Buffer - SMB Spool
Reset Account (system settings) ........................... 347
RESET button ............................................................. 31
Reset Total Impressions (system settings) .......... 346
Reset User Accounts (system settings)................ 347
Resolution.................................................................. 118
Resolution (system settings)...........................303, 336
Response to Read Status (MDN)
(system settings)....................................................... 318
retrieving documents from remote machines....... 136
<Review> button......................................................... 42
Right Page then Left ................................................ 178
Ringing Volume (system settings) ......................... 257
Rotate 90 degrees (system settings)..................... 304
(system settings)....................................................... 292
Receiving Buffer - USB (system settings) ............ 291
S
receiving Fax Transmission Result Mail ............... 129
Sample Set .................................................................. 93
Receiving Paper Size (system settings) ............... 306
Save in (system settings) ........................................ 340
Recipient Name (system settings) ......................... 335
Scan Defaults (system settings)............................. 296
Recipient on Activity Report (system settings) .... 267
Scan Mode Settings ................................................. 378
Recipient Print Sets.................................................. 130
Scan Mode Settings (system settings).................. 295
Recording paper size ............................................... 498
scanning..................................................................... 217
Redial Attempt (system settings) ........................... 304
scanning a book in page order
Redial Interval (system settings)............................ 305
(see "Bound Originals") .............................67, 121, 178
Reduce/Enlarge ........................................................ 181
scanning a color photograph .................................. 174
Reduce/Enlarge (system settings)......................... 277
scanning both sides of the document.................... 177
Reduce/Enlarge - 2nd Button (system settings).. 296
Scanning density ..............................................498, 499
Reduce/Enlarge - 3rd and 4th Buttons
scanning different size documents
(system settings)....................................................... 277
simultaneously ............................................70, 122, 179
547
Index
Receiving Paper Notification (system settings) ... 306
Index
scanning facing pages onto separate sheets ...... 178
sending in sections................................................... 183
Scan Options............................................................... 66
Send Options ............................................................ 124
Scan Resolution ....................................................... 177
Send overseas fax (see "F4800") .......................... 125
Scan Resolution (system settings) ........................ 297
serial number ............................................................ 369
Scan Service (system settings).............................. 300
Server......................................................................... 169
Scan Size........................................................... 122, 179
Server Application (system settings)..................... 317
Scan Size Defaults (system settings) ........... 298, 309
Server - IP Address (system settings) .................. 288
Scan to FTP/SMB..................................................... 167
Server Name/IP address (system settings) ......... 340
Scan-to-FTP/SMB Defaults (system settings) ..... 298
Server - Port Number (system settings) ............... 288
Scan to Mailbox ........................................................ 165
Server - Realm name (system settings) ............... 288
Scope of Search from Root Entry
Server - Server Name (system settings) .............. 288
(system settings) ...................................................... 316
Server Setup (system settings).............................. 288
Screen Defaults (system settings)................. 258, 302
Set Numbering............................................................ 87
screens....................................................................... 424
Set Numbering - Background Pattern
Search Root Entry (DN) (system settings) ........... 316
(system settings) ...................................................... 264
Search Time-Out (system settings)....................... 317
Set Numbering - Client Print (system settings) ... 264
secondary relay station ........................................... 146
Set Numbering - Color (system settings) ............. 264
Secondary Server (system settings) ..................... 316
Set Numbering - Copy Job (system settings) ...... 264
Secondary Server Port Number
Set Numbering - Printing Density
(system settings) ...................................................... 316
(system settings) ...................................................... 264
selecting a communication mode .......................... 124
Set Numbering - Text/Background Contrast
selecting iFax/Fax .................................................... 113
(system settings) ...................................................... 264
selecting the color to copy ........................................ 57
Set Numbering - Text Effect (system settings).... 263
selecting the document type................................... 172
Set Numbering - Text Size (system settings) ...... 264
selecting the image quality ....................................... 61
Settings at Startup.................................................... 373
selecting the image quality type for
setting send priority.................................................. 126
the document ...................................................... 62, 118
Settings List (common items) ................................. 377
selecting the language............................................. 259
setting the name or number shown on a fax
selecting the paper to use for copying .................... 55
transmission (see "changing the name
selecting the ratio with which to enlarge/reduce
(company name, etc.) shown to the fax
copies ........................................................................... 52
recipient")................................................................... 529
selecting the scanned data type ............................ 172
Setup .......................................................................... 372
selecting the scanning color ................................... 170
Setup Menu (system settings)................................ 323
Send/Read Status (system settings)..................... 304
Shared name............................................................. 169
Sender ID (system settings) ................................... 304
Shared Name (SMB Only) (system settings)....... 340
Send Header ............................................................. 127
Sharpness ........................................................... 64, 175
Send Header (system settings).............................. 303
Sharpness (system settings) .......................... 278, 297
Send Header - Polling (system settings) .............. 304
shifting the image copy position............................... 71
sending a fax with/without a name or number
side output tray ........................................................... 32
(see "not showing the name (company name, etc.)
Single Color (system settings) ............................... 278
at the transmission") ................................................ 529
Sleep mode ................................................................. 39
sending faxes to multiple recipients ...................... 113
SMTP Server Settings (system settings).............. 287
Software Download (system settings)................... 274
sending fax from your computer
Software Options (system settings)....................... 269
(see "Direct Fax") ..................................................... 223
Software Version ...................................................... 370
sending iFax.............................................................. 108
Source Color ............................................................... 58
548
Index
specifying a filename to save to ............................. 183
System Administrator Login ID
specifying an image compression ratio when
(system settings)....................................................... 342
scanning..................................................................... 182
System Administrator Password
specifying a scanning ratio...................................... 181
(system settings)....................................................... 343
specifying a scanning resolution ............................ 177
System Administrator Settings
specifying color space ............................................. 176
(system settings)....................................................... 342
specifying Copy Output/Stapling for output............ 76
System Administrator shared job flow sheet........ 391
specifying destinations using the Keyboard
System Administrator shared mailbox................... 394
screen......................................................................... 116
system settings menu list ........................................ 243
specifying destination using one touch buttons ... 115
specifying destination using the Address Book ... 114
T
specifying forwarding destinations......................... 169
specifying iFax profiles ............................................ 134
specifying send time................................................. 126
specifying the destination........................................ 101
specifying the orientation of loaded documents .... 75
specifying the scanning resolution......................... 118
specifying the scan ratio for the original ............... 123
specifying the scan size for the document ............. 69
specifying the scan size for the original ................ 122
Speed Dial ................................................................. 115
Split Send................................................................... 183
Stamp Position on Side 2 (system settings)......... 283
stand ............................................................................. 35
Standard Size....................................................122, 179
staple cartridge ...........................................35, 408, 416
stapler faults .............................................................. 488
Stapling ........................................................................ 77
<Start> button ............................................................. 43
<Stop> button.............................................................. 43
stopper ......................................................................... 32
stopping the Fax ....................................................... 104
Store/Delete............................................................... 372
Stored Programming - Retrieve ............................. 371
Stored Programming Tone (system settings) ...... 257
Store User Details (system settings) ..................... 349
storing for Polling...................................................... 137
Substitute Tray (system settings)........................... 293
Supported operating systems................................. 498
Supported protocols ................................................. 499
suppressing the document background................ 176
System Administration mode.................................. 240
System Administrator Copy Meter
(system settings)....................................................... 348
Target Color (Target Area)........................................ 58
TEL ............................................................................... 34
Text ............................................................................. 172
Text & Photo.............................................................. 172
Text & Photo (Halftone) Originals
(system settings)....................................................... 282
Text Effect Sample List............................................ 382
TIFF ............................................................................ 173
TIFF-F......................................................................... 135
TIFF Format (system settings) ............................... 301
TIFF-J ......................................................................... 135
TIFF Logical Printers List ........................................ 377
TIFF-S ........................................................................ 134
TIFF Settings List ..................................................... 377
Time (system settings)............................................. 254
Time Server IP Address (system settings) ........... 254
tone dialing line (see G3 Dial Type
(system settings)) ..................................................... 310
toner cartridges ...........................................32, 408, 409
toner collection bottle cover ...................................... 32
top left cover................................................................ 31
Top Page then Bottom............................................. 178
touch screen................................................................ 42
Transfer Protocol ...................................................... 167
Transfer Protocol (system settings)....................... 339
Transmission Interval (system settings) ............... 305
Transmission Report........................................129, 382
Transmission Report (system settings)................. 304
Transmission Report - Cancelled
(system settings)....................................................... 267
Transmission Report - Undelivered ....................... 382
Transmission Report - Undelivered
(system settings)....................................................... 267
549
Index
Stored Documents List ............................................ 376
Target Color (Non-target Area) ................................ 59
Transmission Screen (system settings)................ 303
troubles with transmission....................................... 451
Transmission time .................................................... 498
Type............................................................................ 492
Transmitted original size ................................. 498, 499
types of authentication............................................. 388
Transmitted resolution ............................................. 498
types of job allowing auditron to be collected ...... 402
transmitting 2 sided documents ..................... 117, 171
types of mailboxes ................................................... 394
transmitting documents with a cover page........... 127
Transmitting Facing Pages on Separate
U
Sheets ........................................................................ 121
transmitting to multiple recipients
simultaneously (see "Broadcast").......................... 140
Transparency Separators ......................................... 80
Tray 1 ........................................................................... 30
Tray 2 ........................................................................... 30
Tray 3 ........................................................................... 30
Tray 4 ........................................................................... 30
Tray 5 ........................................................................... 30
Tray 5 (Bypass) Paper Size Defaults
(system settings) ...................................................... 262
Tray type.................................................................... 499
troubles ...................................................................... 430
troubles during copying ........................................... 443
troubles during fax.................................................... 451
unable to print ........................................................... 448
unauthenticated users ............................................. 388
unlock lever ................................................................. 31
Unregistered Forms (system settings).................. 293
USB2.0 interface connector...................................... 32
user account billing meter ....................................... 375
User Details Setup (system settings).................... 348
User ID (system settings)........................................ 345
User ID Characters (system settings) ................... 348
User Name (system settings) ................................. 345
using F Code transmission ..................................... 132
using Remote Mailbox ............................................. 131
W
troubles during printing............................................ 448
waste toner container ...................................... 408, 411
troubles during scanning ......................................... 455
Weight ........................................................................ 499
troubleshooting ......................................................... 429
wheel ............................................................................ 33
troubles with receiving ............................................. 453
Index
550
Customer Response Sheet
Document Centre C450/C360/C250 User Guide (DE3253E2-1)
To improve our publications, we would appreciate your feedback regarding this guide. Please take a
few moments to complete and return this form to us.
● About Yourself
1. How often do you use this guide?
[ ] Daily [ ] Weekly [ ] Monthly
[
] Infrequently
2. When do you usually refer to the guide?
[ ] Doing a usual operation [ ] Using unfamiliar features
[ ] Solving a problem
3. Which part of the guide do you read frequently?
Chapter/Section/Page:
4. Where do you keep this guide?
5. (Optional)
Your Name:
Company or organization:
Address:
Occupation:
● About the Guide
Strongly
agree
1. It is handy.
1
2. It is easy to read.
1
3. Titles of chapters and sections make sense.
1
4. Information is logically placed.
1
5. Referencing is easy.
1
6. Content is easy to understand.
1
7. The step-by-step instructions are easy to follow.
1
8. All necessary information is included.
1
9. Illustrations aid in the understanding of content.
1
10. The use of color is effective.
1
Neutral
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
Strongly
disagree
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
Other comments:
After completing this form, detach and send it to the address below.
(Please use your own envelope and postage stamp.)
Thank you for your cooperation.
Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd.
KSP R&D 2D7
3-2-1, Sakado, Takatsu-ku
Kawasaki-shi, Kanagawa-ken
JAPAN 213-0012.
Document Centre C450/C360/C250 User Guide
Human Interface Design Development
Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd.
DE3253E2-1 (Edition 1)
July 2004
© 2004 by Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd.
Copyright
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement